L - AcuLaser C4100-C4000 - SM - 1003 PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
Color Laser Page Printer
EPSON AcuLaser C4000

AcuLaser C4100
SEPG01012
Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would
greatly appreciate being informed of them.
The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences
thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright 2003 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

Imaging & Information Product Division
TPCS Quality Assurance Department
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in
performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR
PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS
TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO
SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS.
4. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, BE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURIES FROM METAL PARTS WITH SHARP EDGES.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING PLATE. IF THE
EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST
STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. DO NOT REPLACE IMPERFECTLY FUNCTIONING COMPONENTS WITH COMPONENTS WHICH ARE NOT MANUFACTURED BY EPSON. IF SECOND
SOURCE ICS OR OTHER COMPONENTS WHICH HAVE NOT BEEN APPROVED ARE USED, THEY COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE EPSON PRODUCT,
OR COULD VOID THE WARRANTY OFFERED BY EPSON.
About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the EPSON AcuLaser
C4000. The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the
precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide
CHAPTER 1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger
Provides a general overview and specifications of the present during a procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when
product. they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING
CHAPTER 2. OPERATING PRINCIPLES messages.
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical
A D J U S T M E N T Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice
operations of the product. R E Q U IR E D
or condition that is necessary to keep the products quality.
CHAPTER 3. TROUBLESHOOTING
Provides the step-by-step procedures for
troubleshooting. C A U T IO N Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice,
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in
Describes the step-by-step procedures for damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
disassembling/assembling and adjusting the product.
CHAPTER 5 ADJUSTMENT C H E C K May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure,
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment. P O IN T practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task
CHAPTER 6. MAINTENANCE efficiently. It may also provide additional information that is
related to a specific subject, or comment on the results
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the
achieved through a previous action.
lists of Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives
required for servicing the product. W A R N IN G Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice
APPENDIX. Provides the following additional information for or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in
reference: injury or loss of life.
Connector pin assignments
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out
Electric circuit boards components layout
according to a certain standard after disassembly and
Exploded diagram before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the
Electrical circuit boards schematics components in question may be adversely affected.
Abbreviation
This manual uses unique abbreviations and acronyms which may differ from those in common use. Please note that they are used in the manual
descriptions without explanation. The main abbreviations and acronyms are listed below. Because the following list was formed as a general
reference, some items on the list may not appear in this manual.
In principle most acronyms were formed from the capitalized first letters of the English term for the items (there are exceptions) and most single
word abbreviations were formed either will all capitals or with only the first letter as a capital.
[A] CR Charge Roll FG Frame Ground

ADC Auto Density Control CRU Customer Replaceable Unit FIP Fault Isolation Procedure
ALM Alarm CRUM CRU Memory FRU Field Replaceable Unit
Assy Assembly CST Cassette FX Fuji Xerox
Aux. Auxiliary CVR Cover
CW Clockwise [G]
[B] GG Guide Gauge
B/W Black and White [D] GND Ground
BCR Bias Charge Roll DB Developing Bias
Bk Black Deve Developer [H]
BCR Bias Charge Roll Diag Diagnostic H High
BRKT Bracket dpi dots per inch H/R Heat Roll
BTR Bias Transfer Roll DTS Detack Saw HCF High Capacity Feeder
BUR Back Up Roll Dup Duplex HCS High Capacity Stacker
Hex Hexadecimal
[C] [E] HVPS High Voltage Power Supply
C Cyan Elec Electric
CCW Counter Clockwise EP Electro Photography [I]
Cl. Clutch ESS Electric Sub System I/F Interface
Clk Clock I/L Interlock
CHK Check [F] ID Image Density
CK Check F Front
Conpane Control Panel FDR Feeder [J]
Cont Controller Jxx Jack xx
[L] [O] [S]
L Left OHP Overhead Projector SEF Short Edge Feed
L Low OPC Organic Photo Conductor SG Signal Ground
L/H Left Hand OPT Option SNR Sensor
L/P Low Paper SNS Sensor
LD Laser Diode [P] Sol Solenoid
LEF Long Edge Feed Pyy Plug yy SOS Start Of Scan
LVPS Low Voltage Power P/J Plug and Jack SPI Scan Per Inch
Supply P/H Paper Handling STD Stamdard
P/R Pressure Roll STK Stacker
[M] PL Plate STND Standard
M Magenta PLT Plate SW Switch
M/N Multi National PPM Print Per Minute Sync Synchronous
Mag Magnetic PV Print Volume
MCU Machine Control Unit PWB Printed Wiring Board [T]
Mech Mechanical PWBA PWB Assembly T Tooth (number of Gear)
MOT Motor Temp Temperature
MSI Multi Sheet Inserter [R] TR Transfer
R Right TTL Trangistor-Transistor Logic
[N] R Rear
N/F Normal Force R/H Right Hand [X]
N/P No Paper RDY Ready Xero Xerographic
NPS No Paper Sensor Regi Registration
NV Non Volatile ROS Raster Output Scanner [Y]
NVM Non Volatile Memory RRP Removal and Replacement Y Yellow
Procedure YMCBk Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/
RTN Return Black
YMCK Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/
Black
Safety Information
To prevent accidents during a maintenance procedure, strictly observe
the Warnings and Cautions. Do not do anything that is dangerous or not
Power Supply
within the scope of this document.
Do not do anything that is dangerous even if not specifically described Before starting any service procedure, switch off the printer power and
in this manual. In addition to the descriptions below and those given in unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If you must service the
this manual, there are many situations and circumstances that are printer when the power is applied, be aware of the potential for electrical
dangerous. Be aware of these when you are working with the printer. shock and do all tasks by following the procedures in this manual.
W A R N IN G
Do not touch any live part unless you are instructed
to do so by a service procedure.
The LVPS power supply switch/inlet part is live even
when the power switch has been turned off. Do not
touch any live part.
Do not touch electrified components except when
instructions indicate it is permissible to do so.
Figure 0-1. Power Supply

Mechanical Components High Temperature Assembly
If you service a driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn off the power To prevent you from becoming injured or burned, do the following:
and unplug the power cord. Then manually rotate the assembly. Before working with a high temperature Assembly (e.g., Fuser
.
Assembly), turn off the power, unplug the power cord and wait until it
cools down.
W A R N IN G Do not touch the driving part (e.g., gears) while the
assembly (printer) is being driven.
W A R N IN G The high temperature Assembly is very hot immediately
after any printer operations. Wait at least 40 minutes
before you start working on the printer.
Laser Beam
W A R N IN G
Do not expose yourself to the laser beam to prevent
injury (blindness).
Do not open the cover that has the laser beam
warning label.
If you disassemble or assemble the printer, turn off
the power.
If you need to work on the printer with power applied,
strictly follow the instructions in this manual.
Understand how the laser beam functions and take
maximum precautions not to injure yourself or
anyone around you.
NOTE: The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more
Figure 0-2. Laser Beam
coherent phases than any other light (sunlight, electric light).
It has excellent monochromaticity and convergence. A thin
laser beam reaches long distances. Because of its
convergence characteristic, the laser beam converges into
one point, causing high density and high temperature. A
laser beam is harmful to the human body.
NOTE: The laser beam in this printer is invisible.

Warning and Caution Labels
Warning labels and Caution labels are placed on the printer to help
prevent accidents.
When maintaining the printer, confirm that these labels are not dirty or
peeling off.
Caution label for high temperature components
Figure 0-3. Warning and Caution Labels

Safety System Schematic
The schematic below outlines the features of the printer's safety system.
For details about signal wires, see "Appendix - Wiring Diagram".
Manual Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Chapter 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT
Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE
Chapter 7 AcuLaser C4100
Appendix
Revision Status
Revision Issued Date Description
A March 18, 2002 First Release
B April 19, 2002 Chapter 1
1.14.5 Panel Setting Item List PRINTER ADJUST MENU
Cleaning Cycle and comment is added.
Chapter 3
Reference page number in FIP is added.
3.3 Level 2 FIP
3.3.2 Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message is added.
3.3.2.1 List of Printer Messages is added.
3.3.2.2 Details of Status Message and Treatment is added.
3.3.2.3 Details of Error Message and Treatment is added.
3.3.2.4 Details of Warning Message and Treatment is added.
3.3.3 Service Call Error Messages is added.
FIP-16 NV-RAM Error is added.
FIP-28 Fuser Life Over is added.
FIP-48 Engine Communication Error is added.
FIP-49 Verify (DIMM Slot Related) Error is added.
FIP-50 Error in Standard RAM (Slot 0, 1) is added.
FIP-51 ROM Checksum Error (MASK ROM for Font) is added.
FIP-52 ROM Checksum Error (CODE, IPL) is added.
FIP-53 ROM Module (DIMM Slot A Related) Error is added.
FIP-54 EEPROM Writing Error is added.
FIP-55 CCNV Hardware Error is added.
FIP-56 Engine Initialization Error is added.
FIP-57 SRAM (for Compression) Initialization Hardware Error is added.
FIP-58 Video System Hardware Error (including PWM Calibration Error IC) is added.
FIP-59 Built-in Network Hardware Error is added.
FIP-60 DIMM SPD Error is added.
Chapter 6
6.2 Maintenance Menu Table 6-2. List of control information and control method
The range of count is changed.
A comment is added.
Revision Issued Date Description
C November 15, 2002 Preface
A misdescription deleted.
Chapter3
3-1-4 Test print by engine itself added.
D August 4, 2003 Chapter 1
1.5.1 Reliability
The value of MPBF is fixed
1.10 Consumable Components
The value of Transfer Unit Lifetime is revised
1.14.5 Panel Setting Item List
PRINTER ADJUST MENU is revised
1.14.6.7 Printer Adjust Menu
Part of text is revised
Chapter 6
6.1.2 Consumable components and components that require regular replacement
The value of Transfer Unit Lifetime is revised
The parts code of Roll Assy is fixed
Chapter 7
Additional information added for AcuLaser C4100
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Product Descriptions 1.14.2 Display Elements Description ..................................................... 49
1.14.3 Button Functions Description ...................................................... 50
1.1 Features ................................................................................................ 20 1.14.4 Special Operations ...................................................................... 51
1.2 Specifications ...................................................................................... 22 1.14.5 Panel Setting Item List ................................................................ 52
1.2.1 Basic Specifications ...................................................................... 22 1.14.6 Explanation of Each Setting Menu and Setting Items ................. 62
1.3 Various Sensors .................................................................................. 29 1.15 About RAM Expansion ...................................................................... 69
1.4 Paper Specifications ........................................................................... 31 1.16 Dimensions ........................................................................................ 69
1.4.1 Paper Types .................................................................................. 31
1.4.2 The paper that should not be used with this printer ...................... 31 Chapter 2 Operating Principles
1.4.3 Paper Source Classification .......................................................... 32
1.4.4 Printing Area .................................................................................. 32 2.1 Print Process ....................................................................................... 71
1.5 Reliability and Durability ..................................................................... 33 2.1.1 Print Process Overview ................................................................. 71
1.5.1 Reliability ....................................................................................... 33 2.1.2 Print Process Diagram .................................................................. 72
1.5.2 Durability ....................................................................................... 34 2.1.3 Print Process Technical Explanation ............................................. 73
1.5.3 Maintenance .................................................................................. 34 2.2 Flow of Print Data ................................................................................ 77
1.6 Operating Conditions 2.2.1 Data Flow ...................................................................................... 77
(Including Comsumables) ......................................................................... 35 2.3 Drive Transmission Path .................................................................... 78
1.7 Storage and Transport of the Printer Main Unit (Consumables 2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) ..................................................... 78
Packaged), and Optional Products .......................................................... 36 2.3.2 DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) .................................................... 79
2.3.3 HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5 ~ 8) (Y, M, C, K) ................................. 79
1.8 Electrical Feature ................................................................................. 37
2.3.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) .................................................. 80
1.9 Compliance with Standards and Regulations .................................. 38 2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) ...................................................... 81
1.10 Consumable Components ................................................................ 38 2.4 Paper Feed ........................................................................................... 82
1.11 Maintenance ....................................................................................... 39 2.4.1 Paper Feed Path (without options in use) ..................................... 82
1.12 Exterior View and Unit Names .......................................................... 40 2.4.2 Paper Feed Path Diagram ............................................................ 82
1.13 Controller Unit Specifications .......................................................... 42 2.5 Functions of Main Components ......................................................... 84
1.13.1 Controller Basic Specifications .................................................... 42 2.5.1 Paper Cassette (PL3.1 ~ 2) ........................................................... 84
1.13.2 Controller Configuration .............................................................. 43 2.5.2 Paper Feeder (PL4.1 ~ 3) ............................................................. 85
1.13.3 External Interface Specifications ................................................. 43 2.5.3 Housing Assy Retard (PL5.1) ........................................................ 86
2.5.4 Chute Assy In (PL6.1) ................................................................... 86
1.14 Control Panel ..................................................................................... 48
2.5.5 Chute Assy Out (PL7.1) ................................................................ 87
1.14.1 Exterior View and Names ............................................................ 48
2.5.6 Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1) ................................................................ 88
2.5.7 Fuser Assy & BTR Assy (PL9.1) ................................................... 89 3.1.3 Precautions When Performing Work ........................................... 119
2.5.8 Xerographics (PL11.1) .................................................................. 92 3.1.4 Test print by engine itself ............................................................ 120
2.5.9 TCRU Assy (PL12.1 ~ 3) ............................................................... 93 3.1.5 Precautions When Using FIP ...................................................... 121
2.5.10 Frame (PL13.1) & Drive (PL14.1) ................................................ 94 3.2 Level 1 FIP .......................................................................................... 122
2.5.11 Electrical (PL15.1 ~ 2) & CONTROLLER BOARD (ESS) (PL16.1) .. 3.2.1 Level 1 FIP Flowchart ................................................................. 122
94
3.3 Level 2 FIP .......................................................................................... 123
2.6 Switches and Sensors ........................................................................ 96 3.3.1 Level 2 FIP .................................................................................. 123
2.7 Mode ..................................................................................................... 97 3.3.2 Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message ................................. 123
2.7.1 Print Mode ..................................................................................... 97 3.3.3 Service Call Error Messages ....................................................... 133
2.7.2 Operation Mode ............................................................................. 97 3.3.4 Image Quality Troubleshooting FIP ............................................. 261
2.8 Control .................................................................................................. 98 3.3.5 Printer Operation Troubleshooting FIP ....................................... 282
2.8.1 Paper Size Control ........................................................................ 98 3.3.6 Other FIP ..................................................................................... 294
2.8.2 Paper Supply Selection Control .................................................... 98 3.4 Level 2 FIP Large Capacity Paper Unit ........................................ 299
2.8.3 ROS Light Control ......................................................................... 98 3.4.1 Level 2 FIP .................................................................................. 299
2.8.4 PROCESS CONTROL .................................................................. 99
2.8.5 Color Registration Control ........................................................... 102 Chapter 4 Disassembly and Assembly
2.8.6 BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Control ...................................................... 103
2.8.7 Toner Control .............................................................................. 104 4.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 318
2.8.8 Fuser Control ............................................................................... 105 4.1.1 Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly ............................... 318
2.9 Operating Principles for the Large Capacity Paper Unit (Option Feeder) 4.1.2 Tools ........................................................................................... 318
106 4.1.3 Items to Check after Assembly ................................................... 318
2.10 Drive Transmission Path ................................................................ 106 4.2 Disassembly Assembly Procedures ................................................ 319
2.10.1 DRIVE ASSY FEEDER ............................................................. 106 4.2.1 Large capacity paper unit removal .............................................. 320
2.10.2 Gear Layout ............................................................................... 107 4.2.2 Removing/Replacing the Consumables ...................................... 321
4.2.3 Updating the Main Controller Program ROM .............................. 321
2.11 Paper Feed ....................................................................................... 108
4.2.4 COVER ....................................................................................... 324
2.11.1 Paper Feed Path ....................................................................... 108
4.2.5 CHASIS & FEEDER/CASSETTE ................................................ 334
2.11.2 Paper Feed Path Diagram ......................................................... 108
4.2.6 PAPER CASSETTE .................................................................... 336
2.12 Functions of Main Components ..................................................... 109 4.2.7 PAPER FEEDER ........................................................................ 338
2.12.1 Two Tray Module II/III (PL17.2 ~ 3) .......................................... 109 4.2.8 HOUSING ASSY RETARD ......................................................... 371
2.12.2 Two Tray Module IV (PL17.4) ................................................... 111 4.2.9 CHUTE ASSY IN ......................................................................... 375
2.13 Switches and Sensors .................................................................... 112 4.2.10 CHUTE ASSY OUT ................................................................... 380
2.14 Controller Operating Principles ..................................................... 113 4.2.11 CHUTE ASSY EXIT .................................................................. 392
4.2.12 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY ..................................................... 396
4.2.13 REGISTRATION ....................................................................... 398
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting 4.2.14 XEROGRAPHICS ..................................................................... 402
3.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 118 4.2.15 TCRU ASSSY ........................................................................... 404
3.1.1 Troubleshooting Procedure ......................................................... 118 4.2.16 FRAME ...................................................................................... 412
3.1.2 Preliminary Checks ..................................................................... 118 4.2.17 DRIVE ....................................................................................... 418
4.2.18 ELECTRICAL ............................................................................ 419 7.1.6 Control Panel .............................................................................. 498
4.2.19 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................ 428 7.1.7 Status Sheet ................................................................................ 509
4.2.20 Large Capacity Paper Unit 7.2 Panel Message For Troubleshooting .............................................. 510
(Option FEEDER UNIT) ....................................................................... 430 7.2.1 List of Printer Messages .............................................................. 510
7.2.2 Details of Error Message and Treatment .................................... 511
Chapter 5 Adjustment 7.2.3 Details of Warning Message and Treatment ............................... 512
7.3 Maintenance ....................................................................................... 513
5.1 USB ID Input ....................................................................................... 473
7.3.1 Consumable components and regularly replaced parts .............. 513
5.1.1 Installation Procedure for Program .............................................. 473
7.3.2 Engine Status Sheet ................................................................... 516
5.1.2 Procedure for program operation ................................................ 473
7.3.3 List of control information and control methods .......................... 517
5.1.3 USB ID Confirmation ................................................................... 475
7.4 Parts List for AL-C4100 ..................................................................... 518
Chapter 6 Maintenance 7.5 Exploded Diagram ............................................................................. 522
7.6 Circuit Schematic .............................................................................. 546
6.1 Maintenance ....................................................................................... 478
6.1.1 Preparatory Maintenance ............................................................ 478
6.1.2 Consumable components and components that require regular Chapter 8 Appendix
replacement .......................................................................................... 478 8.1 Parts List and Explodede Diagram for Main Unit of The AcuLaser
6.1.3 Cleaning ...................................................................................... 480 C4000 ........................................................................................................ 555
6.2 Maintenance Menu ............................................................................ 481 8.1.1 Attention on handling the parts list .............................................. 555
6.2.1 Entry to the Maintenance Menu .................................................. 481 8.1.2 Parts List Tables ......................................................................... 556
6.2.2 Engine Status Sheet .................................................................... 481 8.1.3 Exploded Diagrams ..................................................................... 560
6.2.3 Clear Error Log ............................................................................ 482 8.2 Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................ 584
6.3 Consumable components replacement .......................................... 484 8.2.1 P/J Locations ............................................................................... 584
6.3.1 Toner Cartridge replacement ...................................................... 484 8.2.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Tables ........................................... 588
6.3.2 Photoconductor Unit replacement ............................................... 486 8.2.3 High-pressure electrode Location Tables ................................... 592
6.3.3 Fuser Unit replacement ............................................................... 488 8.3 Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information ........................................ 594
6.3.4 Transfer Unit replacement ........................................................... 489 8.3.1 Overall Wiring Connection Diagram ............................................ 594
6.4 Components that require regular replacement .............................. 489 8.3.2 Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components ............... 596
6.5 Color Registration Adjustment ........................................................ 490 8.3.3 Notation on the Diagrams for the Wiring and Signal Descriptions
between Components .......................................................................... 598
Chapter 7 AcuLaser C4100 8.4 Parts List and Exploded Diagram for Large Capacity Paper Unit of The
AcuLaser C4000 ...................................................................................... 622
7.1 Product Descriptions ........................................................................ 493 8.4.1 Attention on handling the part list ................................................ 622
7.1.1 Features ...................................................................................... 493 8.4.2 Parts List Tables ......................................................................... 623
7.1.2 Printer Basic Specification ........................................................... 494 8.4.3 Exploded Diagrams ..................................................................... 624
7.1.3 Various Sensors .......................................................................... 497 8.5 Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................ 629
7.1.4 Paper Specifications .................................................................... 497 8.5.1 P/J Locations ............................................................................... 629
7.1.5 Consumable Components ........................................................... 497 8.5.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Tables ........................................... 630
8.6 Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information ........................................ 631
8.6.1 Overall Wiring Connection Diagram ............................................ 631
8.6.2 Wiring and Signal Descriptions between Components ............... 633
8.6.3 Notation on the Diagrams for the Wiring and Signal Descriptions
between Components .......................................................................... 634
8.7 Component Layout ............................................................................ 641
8.8 Circuit Diagrams ................................................................................ 643
1
CHAPTER
PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
EPSON AcuLaser C4000/AcuLaser C4100 Revision D
1.1 Features CONTROLLER FEATURES
This printer is a non-impact color page printer that takes advantage of a laser 1. High-speed controller with a new CPU adopted
and electrophotographic technologies. It provides 1200/600/300 dpi of 64-bit RISC CPU ---- PowerPC 750CX 400 MHz
resolution and 16 ppm (A4/LT) of printing speed for both color and
monochrome printing. The main features of the printer are as follows: 64-bit high-speed memory ---- PC100 SDRAM DIMM
64 MB of standard RAM
ENGINE FEATURES By installing additional RAM, the memory can be expanded up to 576
MB (64 MB + 512 MB)
1. A4 tandem engine, a high-speed engine which printing speed is 16 PPM (Furthermore, by replacing the standard RAM with a 512 MB RAM, the
for both color and monochrome printing (when printing A4/LT). memory can be expanded up to 1024 MB)
Engine for True 1200 dpi of high resolution and full-color printing (however
2. Enhanced ASIC is equipped (VIP2, CDMC)
printing speed is reduced by half).
The color management technologies shown below have been incorporated
2. The Duplex Print Unit is equipped as standard. Special types of paper such into the hardware to achieve high-speed processing.
as thick paper, OHP sheets (transparency), label sealing sheets, and
CCNV3 (color conversion of RGB into CMYK)
envelopes cannot be printed in duplex.
3. By using high quality plain paper, higher quality printing is possible. CCMP (color compression for RGBX or CMYKX and expansion)
4. Capable of printing on thick paper and OHP sheets for laser printers. CLRCTL (color adjustment)
5. Provides easy maintenance of a color laser printer. The users can replace 3. Three types of standard interface are available
all consumables. IEEE 1284 compatible and ECP compatible parallel Interface
Toner cartridges (C, M, Y, K) Ethernet interface (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)
Photoconductor Unit Universal Serial Bus (USB) 1.1
Transfer Unit 4. By expanding memory with RAM DIMMs, the following functions can be
Fuser Unit enhanced and speeded up
6. Standard paper feed devices are the following 2-bin; the MP Tray CPGI drawing area
(up to 100 sheets) and the Lower Cassette (up to 500 sheets, A4/LT). Image creating speed
By adding the two optional Lower Cassette (up to 500 sheets * 2 cassettes,
A4/LT), a maximum of 1600 sheets can be fed from the 4-bin in total. Resolution
7. Standard paper eject is up to 250 sheets into the Face-down tray. 5. Firmware update function is possible (RCC compatible) when a Flash
DIMM is installed
6. HDD can be installed
Product Descriptions Features 1-20

7. Installed emulation
SOFTWARE FEATURES
Standard ESC/Page-Color, PCL5e (B/W), GL-Like (B/W),
1. Color technologies FX (B/W), ESCP2(B/W), I239X (B/W), ESC/Page
Smooth expanding of color images by ESC/ Page-Color (B/W)
2. Reserve job function Options Adobe Postscript3
When the printer is equipped with Option HDD, the following "Reserve Job"
Others EJL, PJL mode
can be used.
RCC mode (firmware update)
Re-print Job DIAG mode (engine adjustment)
Verify Job Auxiliary software Status Sheet (description of remaining levels of
Stored Job current consumables, warning occurrences, Part
Numbers)
Confidential Job Reserve Job List
Registration of job information is performed by the ESC/Page-Color driver. Form Overlay List
Network Status Sheet
NOTE: Password protection is only available for "Confidential Jobs." AUX Status Sheet (only when Type-B Level 3 is
installed)
3. Monitoring of the printer status and printer environment by bi-directional PS3 Status Sheet (only when PostScript 3 module
EJL and MIB is installed)
4. Remote panel function through a Web browser (compatible with Java Font Sample (for each mode)
JDK1.1) Hex dump
Support Mode
5. HDD (option) Standby Mode setting
Electronic sorting Printer Adjust Menu
Maintenance Mode (Engine Status Sheet)
I/F receive buffer expansion (only for Ethernet I/F)
Font registration in the PostScript3 mode
Registration of Reserve Job and Confidential Job
Registering Form Overlay (only available for Windows environment)
6. Changing the Manual Feed specification.
Same as EPL5900
Figure 1-1. Exterior View of the EPSON AcuLaser C4000
Product Descriptions Features 1-21

1.2 Specifications 1.2.1.2 Printer Basic Specification
This section describes specifications for EPSON AcuLaser C4000. METHOD
1.2.1 Basic Specifications Electrophotographic method using scanning semiconductor laser beam and
dry two-component toner.
1.2.1.1 Process Specifications
Printer Type Semi-conductive laser beam+Electrophotographic RESOLUTION
with dry 2 ingredients nonmagnetic toner
600dpi and 1,200dpi
Light Source 4 beam semi-conductor laser
Photoconductor Unit OPC (Organic Photoconductor) drum WARMING UP TIME
Charging Roller charger
30 or less seconds : when printer is powered on,
Development Exposed area development or standby mode
Toner Chemical spherical toner and carrier (22C 55% RH environment, at rated voltage)
(in development unit)
Transfer Roller transfer method PRINT MODE
Fixing Heated roller method and flexible belt nip method 600dpi Mode (Normal paper): Full speed
600dpi Mode (Special paper): Low speed
1200dpi Mode: Low speed
High gross Mode: Low speed
PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE
Table 1-1. Printing mode by paper type

Mode <video I/F name> Paper type, thickness
Normal (low temp) <Plain paper-L mode> Plain paper: 60~75g/m2
Normal (high temp) <Plain paper-H mode> Plain paer: 65~85g/m2
Normal High quality High quality paper: 76~99g/
paper <Thicker paper-L mode>
(low temp) m2
High qality High quality paper:
<Thicker paper-H mode)
(high temp) 85~105g/m2
Product Descriptions Specifications 1-22

Table 1-1. Printing mode by paper type PAPER FEED REFERENCE

Mode <video I/F name> Paper type, thickness
Thick1 <Heavier paper-L mode> Thick paper: 100~159g/m2 Centerline reference for each paper size and each paper feeder.
Thick2 <Heavier paper-H mode> Thick paper: 160g/216m2
Special Label (low temp) <Label-L mode> Label

paper Label (high temp) <Label-H mode> Label
OHP <OHP mode> OHP films
Envelope <Envelope mode> Envelope
PRINTING SPEED
Table 1-2. First Printing Time

Optional Feeder 500 Sheets
Standard
Unit
MP Tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3
Simplex 15.0 15.5 17.0 18.5
Printing 24.0 24.5 27.5 30.5
A4
(SEF) 23.0 23.5 25.0 26.5
Duplex
Printing 39.0 39.5 42.5 35.5
NOTE: Printing Speed values at full speed mode are stated upper rows of
the each column, and values at low speed mode are in lower rows
of each column.
Table 1-3. Continuous printing speed

Paper size Print mode Sinplex printing Duplex printing
Full speed mode 16 10
A4/Letter
Low speed mode 8 5
NOTE 1: Speeds shown are for plain paper L and H modes.

NOTE 2: Cleaning cycles occur during printing.

PAPER FEED Table 1-5. Optional Paper Source Combination

Combination (1) (2)
Table 1-4. Paper Feed MP Tray

Standard (100 sheets*1)
Sheets
Paper Applicable
Containing Paper Size First Cassette Cassette 1 (500 Sheets)
Source Paper Type *4
Capacity *1
Second and
A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, LGL, Optional 500 Sheets x 2 Cassette Unit
Third Cassette
100 Sheets *3 GLT*5, HLT, F4*5
Standard Paper Total Sheets 600 1,600
TBD Sheets *2 Unspecified sizes
Normal Paper
(10mm) Min size : 88.9 x 139.7 mm
Max size : 215.9 x 355.6 mm *1: RX-80 (80g/m2)
Standard Paper
1 Sheet 900mm in length
Normal Paper
Special
Applications
TBD Sheets A4, LT
(Labels,
MP Tray
Standard
Transparencies)
TBD Sheets Official Postcard 190 g/m2
Envelopes
(Monarch, C10, DL, C5, C6*5,
ISO-B5*5)
TBD Sheets (Yokei #2, 3, 4, Youchoukei #3)*5
---
(10mm) Unspecified size
Min size :
90mm (width) 143mm (length)
(with flap opened)
500 sheets *2*3 Standard Paper
Cassette A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, LGL
(58mm) Normal Paper
500
Optional
500 sheets *2*3 Standard Paper

Sheets A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, LGL
(58mm) Normal Paper
Unit
*1: The values in ( ) is capable containing height

*2: Standard Paper : at FX P Paper (64g/ m2)
*3: Standard Paper : at Fuji XEROX 4024 DP 20lb (75 g/ m2)
*4: Refer to 1.4 "Paper Specifications"
*5: Paper size supported by the firmware (unsupported by the video I/F)

APPLICABLE PAPER SIZES, PAPER TYPES, AND PAPER ORIENTATION
Table 1-6. Applicable Paper Sizes, Paper Types, and Paper Orientation 1
Standard Optional
Dimensions in mm Duplex Printing Paper
Paper Size cassette 500 Sheets
(inches) MP Tray *3 Orientation
(500 Sheets) Unit *2
A4 210.00 x 297.00 SEF
A5*6 148.00 x 210.00 SEF
B5 182.00 x 257.00 SEF
LT 215.90 x 279.40 (8.50 x 11.00) SEF
HLT 139.70 x 215.90 (5.50 x 8.50) SEF
Normal Paper
GLG 215.90 x 330.00 (8.50 x 13.00) SEF

LGL 215.90 x 335.60 (8.50 x 14.00) SEF
EXE 184.15 x 266.70 (7.25 x 10.50) SEF
GLT*5 203.20 x 266.70 (8.00 x 10.50) SEF
F4*5 210.00 x 330.00 SEF
Width: 88.90 ~ 215.90
Uncut Paper *1 SEF
Length: 139.70 ~ 900.00
*1: Paper of more than 355.60mm (14 inches) in length must be fed manually.
*2: Supported envelope sizes differ by destinations.
*3: Refer to "Envelope Orientation" for details on feeding direction of envelopes.
*4: Flatten the curling paper.
*6: When installing the A5 paper to cassette, set exclusive adapter in cassette.
LEF (Long Edge Feed) : the long edge of the paper is fed to the printer.
SEF (Short Edge Feed) : the short edge of the paper is fed to the printer.
---: Unsupported

Special Applications : See Table 1-7
Table 1-7. Applicable Paper Sizes, Paper Types, and Paper Orientation 2
Standard Optional
Dimensions in mm Duplex Printing Paper
Paper Size Paper cassette 500 Sheets
(inches) *3 Orientation
Tray (500 Sheets) Unit *2
Official Postcard *4 100.00 x 148.00 SEF
A4:210 x 297,
Transparency SEF
LT:215.9 x 279.4
Special Applications
A4:210 x 297,
Labels SEF
LT:215.9 x 279.4
Monarch 98.43 x 190.50 (3 7/8 x 7 1/2) SEF*3
Envelopes *2*3*4
Com-10 104.78 x 241.30 (4 1/8 x 9 1/2) SEF*3

DL 110.00 x 220.00 SEF*3
C5 162.00 x 229.00 SEF*3
C6*5 114.00 x 162.00 SEF*3
ISO-B5*5 176.00 x 250.00 SEF*3
*1: Paper of more than 355.60mm (14 inches) in length must be fed manually.
*2: Supported envelope sizes differ by destinations.
*3: Refer to Section "Envelope Orientation" for details on feeding direction of envelopes.
*4: Flatten the curling paper.
*6: When installing the A5 paper to cassette, set exclusive adapter in cassette.
LEF (Long Edge Feed) : the long edge of the paper is fed to the printer.
SEF (Short Edge Feed) : the short edge of the paper is fed to the printer.
---: Unsupported

Duplex Unit
ENVELOPE ORIENTATION
Paper size: The regular size and unspecified size described in the
Table 1-6 and 1-7 can be fed.
Paper thikneess: 64 ~ 105g/m2
500 sheets x 2 unit (Large capacity paper unit)
Feeding Direction
Same specification as cassette of the main unit
OUTPUT PAPER CAPACITY

Com-10, DL, C6 Maximum of 250 sheets to face-down tray (at 22C, 55%RH, standard paper).
Envelope Type C5, ISO-B5
Monarch
NOTE 1: Only envelopes without adhesive or adhesive tapes can be used. DIMENSIONS
NOTE 2: Envelopes have to be set with flap opened, and should be fed by LEF Stand Alone Outline Dimensions and Weights
if width dimension is longer than length dimension.
Table 1-8. Stand Alone Outline Dimensions and Weights
NOTE 3: A printing side is set to the bottom.
Width Depth Height Weight
Standard Main Unit only 439 638 445 29.8
PAPER FEED SIZES
Optional 500 Sheets Unit 439 563 336 19.0
Main Unit
Unit: mm, kg
MP Tray NOTE 1: Unpacked dimensions are stated.
Paper size: Regular paper sizes or unspecified paper sizes within NOTE 2: Dimensions has 1%mm difference, weights are 1%kg difference.
following useable paper size.
NOTE 3: Main unit weights do not including consumable items
Minimum Width 88.9mm x to Length 139.7mm Outline Dimensions and Weights with Options Installed
Maximum Width 215.9mm x to Length 355.6mm to 900.0mm
Table 1-9. Outline Dimensions and Weights with Options Installed
Paper thikneess: 60 ~ 216g/m2 (Uncut paper for length 355.6mm to
Width Depth Height Weight
900.0mm are 64 ~ 105g/m2)
Main Unit and 500 Sheets Unit 439 638 781 48.8
Cassette
Unit: mm, kg
Paper size: Only the regular size described in the Table 1-6 and 1-7 NOTE 1: Unpacked dimensions are stated.
can be fed.
NOTE 2: Dimensions has 1%mm difference, weights are 1%kg difference.
Paper thikneess: 60 ~ 105g/m2
NOTE 3: Main unit weights do not including consumable items.

CONSUMABLE COMPONENTS PRODUCT LIFETIME

Toner Cartridge: Black (K), Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y) Main unit
Photoconductor Unit 300K printed pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
Transfer Unit (with periodic part replacement. See Components that require regular
Fuser Unit replacement on Page 28)
* Refer to Consumable Components on Page 38. NOISE

NOTE: Refer to Ch6 about handling the consumable components.
Table 1-10. Noise
COMPONENTS THAT REQUIRE REGULAR REPLACEMENT Main Unit With Options Installed
MP Tray Cassette MP Tray Cassette
The life of regular replacement parts which are not replaced by the user. During printing Full
54.0 dB (A) 52.0dB (A) 54.0dB (A) 54.0dB (A)
Pickup Roller 100K pages Speed Mode
During Printing Low
NOTE: Refer to Ch6 about handling the components require regular 54.0 dB (A) 55.0 dB (A) 55.0 dB (A) 55.0 dB (A)
Speed Mode
replacement.
During standby 35 dB (A)
POWER SUPPLY Saving Electricity Mode Back Ground Noise
115V / 120V 10% 50 to 60Hz 3Hz NOTE 1: Values measured by ISO7779 9-point method.
220V / 240V 10% 50 to 60Hz 3Hz NOTE 2: Measured with MP tray closed.
Supply to controller: 3.3V/5.0A NOTE 3: Simplex and duplex printing are the same values.
5.0V/1.0A
EMISSION
POWER CONSUMPTION
Ozone Concentration: 0.01ppm or less (New Blue Angel standard compliance).
120V 240V
Maximum current rated TBD TBD Dust Concentration: 0.1mg/m3
Maximum at continuous printing 850W 850W

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
consumption
Average at continuous printing 450Wh 450Wh

Power
Average during standby with heating on 850Wh 850Wh None of the OPC, toner or plastic contains hazardous materials.
Average during power save mode with
45Wh or less 45Wh or less
heating off

1.3 Various Sensors
Table 1-11. Various Sensors

Unit Detectable Matter Detectable Device Remarks
Cartridge mounted/unmounted Automatic detection (switch method)
New cartridge Automatic detection*1
Toner Cartridge
Cartridge type --- Refer to *9
(Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
Near life end Sensor detection
Work life end Softcounter
Cartridge mounted/unmounted Automatic detection (By IC chip)
Photoconductor Unit Near life end Softcounter Refer to *2
Work life end Softcounter Refer to *2
Cartridge mounted/unmounted Automatic detection
Transfer Unit Near life end Sensor detection Refer to *2
Cartridge mounted/unmounted Automatic detection
Fuser Unit Near life end Softcounter Refer to *2
Paper size Automatic detection
Standard Paper Feeder
MP Tray
Out of Paper Automatic detection by Photo Sensor and Mechanical Lever
Cassette mounted/unmounted Automatic detection by Mycro Switch
Paper size Automatic detection by Paper Regulation Board
Cassette Detects 50 20sheets
Paper near end*2 Automatic detection by Photo Sensor and Mechanical Lever
(FX-P paper 64g/m2)
Out of paper Automatic detection by Photo Sensor and Mechanical Lever
Cassette mounted/unmounted
Paper Feeder
Optional
Paper size
500 Sheets x 2 cassette unit Identical to standard cassette
Paper near end
Out of Paper
Product Descriptions Various Sensors 1-29

*1: A used cartridge (with toner remaining) will be detected as a new cartridge if installed after Near End has been detected. Replacement of a toner cartridge before
Near End has been detected will result in erroneous detection of Near End and End.
*2: The following table describes detection consumables life end.
Name Detection Near end End Engine stop*3
Sensor detection + Dispense Time ON Sensor ON + 75 Sensor ON + 86
Black (3,350) (3,425) (3,436)
Toner Cartridge*4 (Near End, End and Engine Yellow (2,975) (3,050) (3,061)
Stop sensor Dispense Time
for reference only) *5 Magenta (2,975) (3,050) (3,061)
Cyan (2,975) (3,050) (3,061)
Printing page count 24k 30k 45k
Black 39,040 48,800 73,200
Photoconductor Unit*5 Yellow 32,800 41,000 61,500
Dispense Time
Magenta 32,800 41,000 61,500
Cyan 32,800 41,000 61,500
Printing page count Sensor ON + 500 Sensor ON + 600
Detection sensor ON
Transfer Unit*6 Dispense Time Sensor ON + 1,875 Sensor ON + 2,250
(Printing page count: reference only) (17.5k) (18.0k) (18.1k)
Fuser Unit*8 Printing page count 80k 100k ---
*3: If the Engine Stop function activates, be sure to allow the engine to stop. Continued operation could damage the printer.
*4: Near End and End activation times can be adjusted by the Controller.
*5: Differs according to usage conditions.
*6: Near End, End and Engine Stop will activate when either the page count or the Dispense Time for any color is reached. Near End and End activation times can
be adjusted by the Controller.
*7: End and Engine Stop will activate when either the page count or the Dispense Time for any color is reached.
*8: After replacement, resetting the item in the control panel will detect the new part.
*9: The shape of cartridge housing is unique to each color, and this prevents it from installing on the wrong cartridge holder.
NOTE: Dispense Time is a controller count value. Units are seconds.
Product Descriptions Various Sensors 1-30

1.4 Paper Specifications Paper with punch holes or perforations.

Creased, curled or torn paper.
1.4.1 Paper Types Irregularly shaped paper or paper with non-perpendicular corners.
Standard Paper Labels that peel off easily.
FX P Paper (64g/m2) : A4 Paper with glue, staples or paper clips attached to it.
XEROX 4024 DP 20lb (75g/m2) : LT Ink jet paper for special applications (super-fine, glossy, glossy
film, etc.).
Normal Paper
Sheets already printed on other color/monochrome laser printers
60g/m2 to 105g/m2 (16 lb to 28lb) or photocopiers.
generally applied copy paper, recycled paper OHP transparency sheets for color copiers or color laser printers.
Special Applications Iron applied cloth transfer materials (for ink jets, laser printers).
Labels Postcards of any type for ink jets.
Transparencies Sheets of paper stuck together.
Thick paper (105 to 216g/m2) Sheets deteriorate or discolor by heat of the Fuser Unit (about
TBD C or less).
NOTE 1: lb : Ream weight = lb / 500 sheets / 1722 (431.8X558.8mm)
g/m2 : 1 g/m2= 0.2659763 lb When non-official postcards with illustrations are used, paper feed
roller may be soiled with paper dust, and these postcards are not
1.4.2 The paper that should not be used with this printer fed properly. In this case cleaning is required following the 1.11
"Maintenance"
The following types of paper should not be used with this printer.
They could cause printing defects, paper jams or printer malfunctions.
Copy paper (Carbon paper, non-carbon paper), thermal paper,
impact paper, acid-based paper.
Paper that was previously used in a thermal or ink jet printer.
Paper that is too thin or too thick.
Paper that is wet or damp.
Paper with special coatings or colored printer paper with
processed surfaces.
Glossy (too slick on its surface) paper, or paper with too smooth /
rough surfaces.
Paper with significantly different roughness on each surface.
Product Descriptions Paper Specifications 1-31

1.4.3 Paper Source Classification 1.4.4 Printing Area

Table 1-12. Paper Usability for Each Paper Source PRINTABLE AREA
Special Applications
210.9 x 351.6
Transparencies
Thick paper
210.9 x 896.0 (at the time of setting uncut paper)
Envelope
Postcard
Standard Normal
Official
Labels
Paper paper
GUARANTEED PRINTING AREA
Area with a margin of 4 mm from each side. Refer to the following
MP tray A B C C C C C figure. (Uncut paper is not applicable.)
Standard Cassette A B D D D D D
Duplex A B D D D D D
500 Sheet
Optional A B D D D D D 4 mm
Unit 4 mm
A: Paper feed reliability and image quality assured. 4 mm
B: Paper feed reliability and image quality assured, but only for the use
of generally applied types of paper.
C: Paper feed and Printing are possible for only generally applied types Guaranteed
of paper. Printing
Area
D: Sheets cannot be fed.
4 mm
Figure 1-2. Guaranteed Print Area
Product Descriptions Paper Specifications 1-32

1.5 Reliability and Durability Multiple-Sheet Feed Rate
Table 1-14. Multiple-Sheet Feed Rate

1.5.1 Reliability Paper Type Standard MP Tray
Standard Cassette and
Optional 500 Sheets Unit
MPBF Standard Paper 1/1,500 1/2,500
Normal Paper 1/1,000 1/1,500
100K pages
Special Applications 1/50 1/50
NOTE: Average number of pages printed until the occurrence of a
malfunction which either cannot be solved by the user or requires NOTE 1: Based on the use of paper taken from a newly opened package.
the replacement of a part. NOTE 2: Does not include multiple-sheet feed at the boundary.
* Boundary means sheets boundary between original paper and
PAPER FEED RELIABILITY replenished paper, occurring after paper is replenished.
Paper Jam Rate
PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY

Table 1-13. Paper Jam Rate
(With standard paper fed from MP tray or paper cassette)
Standard Cassette and
Standard MP Tray
Optional 500 Sheets Unit Reference point of main scanning direction (c) 2.5mm
Paper Type
Simplex Duplex Simplex Duplex Reference point of sub-scanning direction (a) 2.0mm
Printing Printing Printing Printing .
Standard Paper 1/1,300 1/1,800 1/5,000 1/3,000 a b

c
Normal Paper 1/2,000 1/1,200 1/3,000 1/1,800
Labels 1/100
Official
Special 1/100
Postcards Printing Area f Paper Feed
Applications Direction
Transparencies 1/100
Thick Paper 1/100 1/100
NOTE 1: Based on the use of paper taken from a newly opened package. d
NOTE 2: Includes miss feeds, multiple-sheet feed, and other kind of jams.
Does not include multiple-sheet feed at the boundary. e
Figure 1-3. Print Position Accuracy
Product Descriptions Reliability and Durability 1-33

SKEW 1.5.2 Durability

(With standard paper fed from MP tray or Paper cassette) PRINTING VOLUME
Maximum 30K sheets / per month
Table 1-15. Paper Skew
Average 5K sheets / per month
Printing Page Scanning Direction A4
Main Scanning Direction |a - b| 1.23
Simplex 1.5.3 Maintenance
Sub Scanning Direction |c - d| 1.78
Main Scanning Direction |a - b| MTTR
Duplex
Sub Scanning Direction |c - d|
Averages within 30 minutes. 95% is complete within 50 minutes. Time for
examining malfunction is not included.
Table 1-16. Measured by Dot 2 pattern (time required for service personnel to determine and correct the cause of the
A4 malfunction)
Between a to b 195.58mm
Between c to d 282.61mm
HEIGHT OF CURL OF PRINTED PAGES
15mm or less (at the standard paper)
Product Descriptions Reliability and Durability 1-34

1.6 Operating Conditions SPACE REQUIREMENTS

(Including Comsumables) In order to ensure that the printer operates properly, provide at least as
much space as shown in the diagram below.
AIR TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY To open the cover and be able to replace the consumables easily, provide
at least 350 mm of space above the top of the printer.
Table 1-17. Air Temperature and Humidity
Temperature (C) Humidity (%RH) Others
Printer is under operation 5 to 32 15 to 85 With no
Printer is stopped - 20 to 40 5 to 85 condensation
AIR PRESSURE
Altitudes : 0 to 3,100m
LEVEL
Front and Back : 5 degrees
Left and Right : 5 degrees
LIGHTING
3,000 lx or less (no exposure to direct sunlight)
Figure 1-4. Space Requirement
Product Descriptions Operating Conditions (Including Comsumables) 1-35

1.7 Storage and Transport of the Printer Main Unit TRANSPORT BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
(Consumables Packaged), and Optional
70.9275 kPa Minimum (15,000m) *
Products
*: In pressurized luggage compartment
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY CONDITIONS

DROPPING
Main unit (Consumables packaged)
Table 1-20. Dropping
Table 1-18. Temperature and Humidity Dropping Height (cm) Dropping Direction
Temperature Humidity Warranty Main Unit 46
Altitude (m) Others 1 corner, 3 edges,
(C) (%RH) Period
Optional 500 Sheets Unit 76 6 sides, one time each
Normal
0 to 35 15 to 80 12 months
Conditions
High High
VIBRATION
No
temperature : humidity : 0 to 3,100 condensation Frequency : 5 to 100Hz, 100 to 5Hz
Severe 35 to 40 80 to 95 Maximum allowed
Conditions Low Low of 48 hours Acceleration : 6.86m/s2 (0.7 G)
temperature : humidity :
-20 to 0 5 to 15
Direction of application : 3 dimensional
Time of application : 50 minutes along each X, Y, Z axis, total of 150
500 sheets x 2 cassette unit (Oprion) minutes
Table 1-19. Temperature and Humidity

Temperature Humidity Warranty
Altitude (m) Others
(C) (%RH) Period
Normal
-20 to 50 5 to 85 12 months
Conditions No
High High 0 to 3,100 condensation
Severe Maximum allowed
temperature : humidity :
Conditions of 48 hours
50 to 60 85 to 95
Product Descriptions Storage and Transport of the Printer Main Unit (Consumables Packaged), and Optional Products 1-36
1.8 Electrical Feature DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
Specifications here are not applicable to any optional units. No break down during application of the voltages shown below for a one
minute period.
FAST TRANSIENT / BURST (AC LINE NOISE)
Table 1-21. Dielectric Strength
EN61000-4 (IEC1000-4-4 ; 1995) compliance Across primary and chassis (Across primary
Voltage 1kv : no malfunction occurs such as defective image quality. of power supply transformer and chassisi)
For 200V system models AC 3,000V AC 1,500V
2kv : no damage allowed.
LEAK CURRENT
INSTANTANEOUS OUTAGES
DIP 95% (at -10% of rated current) 0.5 cycle Table 1-22. Leak Current
No effect on printing quality Destination Leak Current
Taiwan (110 V) 3.5 mA or less
RESISTANCE TO STATIC ELECTRICITY China (230 V) 3.5 mA or less
EN61000-2 (IEC1000-4-2 ; 1995) compliance
No malfunction such as defective image quality or no errors allowed even

if 4kv of static electricity noise is in contact discharge.
INRUSH CURRENT
0.5 cycle 100 A or less (The time of heater inrush is included.)
INSULATION RESISTANCE
10M or more
Product Descriptions Electrical Feature 1-37

1.9 Compliance with Standards and Regulations 1.10 Consumable Components
SAFETY STANDARDS SPECIFICATIONS

For 200V system models:
IEC 60950 2nd Edition / EN60950 / A1 - A4 / CE Mark Table 1-23. Specifications
Name Lifetime Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
SAFETY STANDARDS (LASER TRANSMISSION) W :340
Toner Cartridge Average of 8,500
D : 51 0.32
(Black) printed sheets*1
IEC825 H : 55
Toner Cartridge
FDA
(Cyan)
W :329 0.295
Toner Cartridge Average of 6,000
EMI (Magenta) printed sheets*1
D : 51
H : 53
For 120V system models (US models) : FCC class B Toner Cartridge
0.285
(Yellow)
For 200V system models : EN55022
Photoconductor
30 to 50K sheets*2 W:339, D : 146, H : 179 4.5
Unit
ELECTRICAL POWER HIGH FREQUENCY
Transfer Unit 25K sheets W:309, D : 85, H : 60 0.5
None
*1: The number of sheets is the approximate number of printable images using
A4 landscape continuous printing at 5% image occupation rate.
ELECTRICAL POWER CONSUMPTION The first cartridge will Near End for TBD page count. (In order to fill the
developer with toner.)
Conforms to International Energy Star Program standard
60 minutes / 45W or less *2: Work life will differ with usage conditions.
OTHERS
Toner : No materials hazardous to human health
(conform to OSHA, TSCA, EINECS)
OPC : No materials hazardous to human health
(OSHA compliance)
Ozone generation : Conform to UL 478, 5th printing
Materials : Swiss Environmental Protection Standards
compliance (contains no Cds)
Product Descriptions Compliance with Standards and Regulations 1-38

PACKING STORAGE AND TRANSPORT ENVIRONMENTS 1.11 Maintenance

Temperature and Humidity Conditions
Table 1-26. Maintenance
Table 1-24. Temperature/Humidity Maintenance Item Period Maintenance Method
Conditions Temperature Humidity Warranty Period Pickup roller At the time of paper feed
Wipe with a dry cloth.
(Roll Assy) performance degradation
Normal 0 to 35 C 15 to 80% 24 months
High temp. 35 to 45 C 80 to 95% Maximum of one
Severe
Low temp. -20 to 0 C 5 to 15% month
TRANSPORT BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
70.9275 kPa Minimum (15,000m) *

*: In pressurized luggage compartment
DROPPING
Table 1-25. Dropping

Dropping Height (cm) Dropping Direction
Consumables 91.0 1 corner, 3 edges, 6 sides
VIBRATION
Frequency : 5 to 100Hz, 100 to 5Hz
Acceleration : 6.86m/s2 (0.7 G)
Direction of application : 3 dimensional
Time of application : 50 minutes along each X, Y, Z axis, total of 150
minutes
Product Descriptions Maintenance 1-39

1.12 Exterior View and Unit Names

The table below lists the major exterior parts names. For the corresponding
location, see the following figures. Note if any part names differ from the
descriptions in the Users Guide, they are shown in the brackets.
Table 1-27. Exterior View and Unit Parts

No. Part name
1 Control panel
2 Top cover
3 Output tray
4 Power switch
5 Latch on cover A
6 Latch on cover B
7 Standard lower cassette
8 MP tray (Multi-Purpose tray)
9 Expansion tray
10 Large capacity paper unit (option) Figure 1-5. Exterior view and Unit parts 1
11 AC inlet
12 Stopper
13 Interface card slot cover
14 Ethernet interface connector
15 Parallel interface connector
16 USB interface connector
17 Transfer unit
18 Fuser unit
19 Photoconductor unit
20 Toner cartridge
21 Cover D (cover assy top PHD)
Product Descriptions Exterior View and Unit Names 1-40

Figure 1-6. Exterior view and Unit parts 2
Figure 1-7. Exterior view and Unit parts 3
Product Descriptions Exterior View and Unit Names 1-41

1.13 Controller Unit Specifications HOST INTERFACE

Standard Parallel 1ch Bi-directional compatible with IEEE 1284
1.13.1 Controller Basic Specifications standard, B-type connector
Compatibility, Nibble, ECP
CPU Ethernet 100 Base-TX/10 Base-T
CPU : 64-bit RISC PowerPC 750CX 400 MHz
USB 1.1
ASIC : VIP2
Option : Type-B1 slot (Level 3 compatible)
CDMC (color conversion, color compression,
color adjustment)
PRINTER SETTINGS
RAM Printer Settings : Panel settings, EJL, PJL, HTTP, SNMP and
ENPC
SDRAM : 64-bit width DIMM (168 pins, 3.3V, PC100)
2 slots (the standard RAM must be installed to Storage cell : EEPROM 32 Kbytes
slot-1 and SDRAM DIMM must be installed to
slot-0) CONTROL PANEL
Standard : 64 MB
20-digit LCD, 3 LEDs, 6 buttons
Optional RAM : 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB
A maximum of 1024 MB for both two slots by
installing 512MB HDD
1 (optional) IDE type
NOTE: The standard 64 MB RAM must be removed
INSTALLATION METHOD
ROM
The slide drip method that inserts from the back of the main unit
32 - bit width
Program : 4 MB (Flash ROM DIMM)
Fonts : 4 MB
Expansion ROM : 1 slot (ROM DIMM slot) (can be installed and
removed only when turning off the printer)
A slot : PS3, font ROM module
Product Descriptions Controller Unit Specifications 1-42

1.13.2 Controller Configuration 1.13.3 External Interface Specifications

This printer can set the following configurations for each destination. Since This printer is equipped with the following host interfaces.
jumper resistors are used for the settings, these settings are determined when
the printers are shipped from the factory. 1. Parallel Interface -- Standard
2. Ethernet Interface -- Standard
NOTE: Destination settings as controller configurations of the 120 V
model (LT) for North/South America are not provided. 3. USB 1.1 Interface -- Standard
4. Optional Interface (Type-B) 1 slot
Destination Setting A4/LT switching
The positions of the respective interfaces are shown in the Figure 1-8
120 V model for North/South America LT is set
.
Other destinations A4 is set

USB Interface Optinal Parallel Interface
Type-B Conector Optinal Interface
Interface IEEEE 1284 B-Type
1)
2)
Ethernet Interface
(100 Base-TX/10 Base-
T)
Figure 1-8. Positions of Host Interface
Explanation of LEDs
1) Link/receive light (color: green)

2) 100 Base/10 Base light (color: orange)
The host interfaces can be enabled or disabled respectively.

1.13.3.1 Parallel Interface Specifications DEVICE ID
INTERFACE TYPE The initial value of this printers Device ID is as shown below. In the following
description, carriage returns have been added considering legibility, however
IEEE 1284 bi-directional high-speed parallel interface in practice, the character string is continuous without carriage return codes
being included. The CMD items are in random order. MODE and STATUS
items are excluded. The contents of DES items consist of MFG and MDL
OPERATING MODES
connected by a space.
Compatibility, Nibble, ECP MFG : EPSON ;
CMD : PJL, EJL, ESCPL2, ESCP9, PRPXL24-01, PCL, HPGL2-01,
CONNECTOR TYPE NAME ESCPAGE-04, ESCPAGECOLOR-01**1 ;
MDL :**2 ;
57RE-40360-830B (D7A) DDK or the same class of product. CLS : PRINTER;
DES : EPSON **2 ;
COMPATIBLE PLUG **1 : POSTSCRIPT is added only when the PostScript 3 module is installed.
**2 : AL-C4000
AMPHENOLE or comparable products.
Furthermore, the user can redefine the Device ID MFG, MDL, DES and CID.
Also, the CID Field does not respond with the default value, but does respond
with the defined character string only when it has been redefined. If DES is not
redefined, it responses MFG and MDL with a space between them. The Device
ID when redefined is as follows. The asterisks "*****" are the user defined
character strings.
MFG :*****;
CMD :PJL,EJL,ESCPL2,ESCP9,PRPXL24-01,PCL,HPGL2-01,ESCPAGE-
04,ESCPAGECOLOR-01**1 ;
MDL :*****;
CLS :PRINTER;
DES :*****;
CID :*****;

PIN ASSIGNMENT 1.13.3.2 Ethernet Interface Specifications
INTERFACE TYPES
Table 1-28. Centronics Parallel Interface Pin Assignment
Pin # I/O Signal Names Pin # I/O Signal Names 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX, Half Duplex, Full Duplex:
1 I STRBX 19 GND Auto switching when the power is turned on
2 I/O D1 20 GND
PRINTING PROTOCOLS
3 I/O D2 21 GND
4 I/O D3 22 GND 1. TCP/IP
LPR, FTP, IPP, PORT2501, PORT9100
5 I/O D4 23 GND
2. Microsoft Network
6 I/O D5 24 GND
SMB
7 I/O D6 25 GND
3. NetWare Operating mode
8 I/O D7 26 GND Standby (factory default), NDS Print Server, Bindery Print Server,
9 I/O D8 27 GND Remote Printer
10 O ACKNLGX 28 GND 4. AppleTalk
11 O BUSY 29 GND IPP : Internet Printing Protocol

12 O PE 30 GND
13 O SELOT 31 I INITX MANAGEMENT PROTOCOLS
14 I AUTOX 32 O ERRX 1. TCP/IP
15 33 GND SNMP, ENPC, HTTP, TELNET, DHCP, BOOTP, PING
16 GND 34 NC 2. Microsoft Network

Auto-IP, SSDP
17 CHASSIS GND 35 +5V
3. NetBEUI
18 O P.L.High (+5V) 36 I SELINX
SNMP, ENPC
4. NetWare
SNMP, ENPC
5. AppleTalk
SNMP, ENPC
ENPC : EPSON Network Peripheral Control Protocol

CONNECTOR NAME 1.13.3.3 USB Interface Specifications
RJ45 STANDARD
The USB interface specifications are compatible with the Universal Serial Bus
COMPATIBLE CABLE
Specification Rev. 1.1.
2-pair STP (10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX)
In order to conform to FCC Class B, EN55022 Class B and VCCI Class B, DEVICE ID
a shielded type cable must be used
This printer has an 18-digit of serial ID for USB1.1. The value for this ID is
printed on the bottom of the Status Sheet.
PIN ASSIGNMENT Each digit denotes information as shown below.
**P++YYMMDDhhmmssR
Table 1-29. Pin Assignment for the Ethernet I/F
Pin # I/O Signal Names ** : Model-unique number from 00 to 99. "11" for this printer.
P : Identifier indicating page printer. Always P for page printers.
1 Tx+ O ++ : PC number of the assembly belt (00 to 99)
2 Tx- O YY : Year of assembly (lower 2-digit. 00 to 99)
MM : Month of assembly (1 to 12)
3 Rx+ I DD : Day of assembly (0 to 31)
4 N.C. - HH : Hour of assembly (0 to 23)
mm : Minute of assembly (0 to 59)
5 N.C. - ss : Second of assembly (0 to 59)
R : Reserved (normally 0)
6 Rx- I
7 N.C. -
ADAPTABLE CONNECTOR
8 N.C. -
USB series B
ENTITY TYPE
PIN ASSIGNMENT
See Section 1.13.3.4 "Optional Interface Specifications".
Table 1-30. Pin Assignment for the USB

Pin # I/O Signal Names
1 - POWER
2 I/O D-
3 I/O D+
4 - GND

1.13.3.4 Optional Interface Specifications EMULATION TYPE/ENTITY TYPE

This printer includes one slot of Type-B optional interface slot as standard
equipment. Table 1-31. Emulation Type/Entity Type
Emulation Emulation Type Entity Type
MAIN SYSTEM TYPE PS*1 POSTSCRIPT-00*1 LaserWriter*1
MTP1200dpi, PW102000dt1200dpi, PRG (*****) rev,AP800ma, SPD0fast, D4 ESC/Page Color ESCPAGECOLOR-01 EPSONPAGECOLOR1
The asterrisks ***** are the ROM version ESC/Page ESCPAGE-04
LJ4 PCL5E-00 EPSONPCL5
PRINTER NAME
1239X PRPXL24-01 EPSONPRPXL24
Same as the Product Name of the factory default GL2 HPGL2-01 EPSONHPGL2
FX ESCP9 EPSONFX
PRODUCT NAME
ESCP2 ESCPL2 EPSONLQ2
Product name is AL-C4000 *1: Added when the PostScript3 module is installed.
Emulation type
When Emulation is set to AUTO ;
If PS is not started : AUTO (Emulation Types 1, 2, 3 . . .)
If PS is started : EJL (POSTSCRIPT-00, other Emulation Types
1, 2, 3 . . .)
When Emulation is fixed ;
: EJL (Default Emulation Type, other Emulation
Types 1, 2, 3, . . .)
Entity Type
When Emulation is set to AUTO ;
: Refer to the above list.
When Emulation is fixed ;
: The default Emulation Type and
EPSONPAGECOLOR1 are returned.

1.14 Control Panel Table 1-32. LEDs and switches on the Control Panel
Location Name Remarks
This section describes the control panel of this printer and its functions.
(1) LCD Panel 1 line x 20-digit (5 x 7 dot matrix)
(2) Back button 1 for password input *1
1.14.1 Exterior View and Names
(3) Up button 2 for password input *1
(4) Enter button 3 for password input *1
(5) Down button 4 for password input *1
(6) Job Cancel button
(7) Data light Color : yellow
(8) Ready light Color : green
(9) Error light Color : red
(10) Start/Stop button
NOTE: *1 : The key assignment of password is shown on the label for

each bundling.
Figure 1-9. Control Panel Appearance
Product Descriptions Control Panel 1-48

1.14.2 Display Elements Description FLASH 2

An error where an operator must release the error and press the Start/Stop
LCD (LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY) (1) button has occured.
ON
A liquid crystal display that indicates up to 1-line x 20-digit (5x7 dot matrix). It
displays printer statuses in normal operation. In the panel setting mode, it An error that cannot recover unless an operator clears the printer error has
shows menu, items, and values. occured. Releasing the error allows the printer to recover automatically.
NOTE: FLASH 1:
DATA LIGHT (7) The light is on and off alternately for 0.3 seconds each.
FLASH 2:
ON The light is on and off alternately for 0.6 seconds each.
Indicates that received data remain in the printer without being printed.
OFF
Indicates that valid printing data do not exist in the printer.
FLASH
Indicates that the printer is receiving or processing data.
READY LIGHT (8)

ON
Indicates that the printer is ready to print.
OFF
Indicates that the printer cannot print.
Error condition
In an error occurrence, printing is disabled switching off the On Line light.
ERROR LIGHT (9)

FLASH 1
An error where printing continues if the Start/Stop button is pressed has
occured.

1.14.3 Button Functions Description JOB CANCEL BUTTON (6)

Normal pressing
BACK BUTTON (2)
Deletes currently printed data.
In normal operations Every time pressing this button deletes the job.
Shifts to the panel setting mode. Long pressing (two seconds or longer)
In the panel setting mode Deletes all data such as data in the print queue, jobs and data that are
Returns to the previous (higher) hierarchy. currently being received, and printing data that are being processed.
Pressing this button when the top hierarchy (menus) is selected switches
the panel setting mode to the normal operation mode. START/STOP BUTTON (10)
In normal operations
UP BUTTON (3)
Stops or resumes printing operations. Toggling this button will cause the
In normal operations print Ready light to alternate between being illuminated / not illuminated.
Shifts to the panel setting mode. Pressing this button after starting print processing stops printing after
outputting a currently processed page.
In the panel setting mode Pressing the button again resumes printing.
Displays the value prior to the currently selected hierarchy (menus, items
or values). NOTE: Since processing apart from printing continues even if the Ready
light is off, data receiving continues until the receive buffer
becomes full.
ENTER BUTTON (4)
In case of pressing this button longer when printing is impossible
Forcibly ejects paper if printing data exist.
Shifts to the panel setting mode.
In the panel setting mode
Moves on to the next (lower) hierarchy.
Determines values or selects items.
DOWN BUTTON (5)

Shifts to the panel setting mode.
In the panel setting mode
Displays the value next to the currentlyselected hierarchy (menus, items or
values).

1.14.4 Special Operations 1.14.4.2 Functions Description
1.14.4.1 List of Operating Functions HEX DUMP

A list of the special operating functions supported by this printer is shown
This function converts receiced data into hexadecimal ASCII, then outputs it.
below.
Functions other than Hex dump and the Support Mode are not disclosed
publicly for users. SUPPORT MODE
This mode allows the Support Menu to be added to the settings menu.
Table 1-33. List of Operating Functions
Function Operating Method
INITIALIZATION OF EEPROM
Hex Dump Turn the power on pressing the Start/Stop button
Support Mode Turn the power on pressing the Down button This function first clears the EEPROM by overwriting it with 00h. Then the
factory default settings are rewritten into the EEPROM.
Turn the power on pressing the Back, Job Cancel,
Initialization of EEPROM After this, a warm boot is performed and the printer will return to normal status.
and Start/Stop buttons
Panel Setting Value
Turn the power on pressing the Job Cancel button PANEL SETTING VALUE INITIALIZATION
Initialization
Forced Deleting of the Flash Turn the power on pressing the Up, Down, Enter, This function sets all the panel settings values back to their factory default
ROM A Module and Job Cancel buttons settings. After thes, a warm boot is performed and the printer will return to
Turn the power on pressing the Down, Job Cancel, normal status.
Program ROM Update
Turn the power on pressing the Enter, Job Cancel, FORCED DELETING OF THE FLASH ROM A MODULE
ROM Module Copy
This function deletes all data from the flash ROM module that has been
Turn the power on pressing the Back, Up, Down,
Maintenance Mode inserted into slot A. After this, a warm boot is performed and the printer will
and Enter buttons
return to normal status.
CPU reset in a Service Call Press the Back, Up, Down, Enter, and Job Cancel
occurrence. buttons when a Service Call error occurs
PROGRAM ROM UPDATE
Detailed Information Display in Press the Back, Enter, and Job Cancel buttons
a Service Call occurrence when a Service Call occurs This function updates the flash ROM module that has been inserted into the
programming socket.
Press the Enter button after resetting the CPU when
Printing of the Error Sheet
a Service Call error occurs

PROGRAM MODULE COPY 1.14.5 Panel Setting Item List

This printers setting item list is shown below.
This function copies the contents of the ROM module in socket P, to the flash
Furthermore, the factory defaults values are shown in Bold style.
ROM module that has been inserted into socket A. After this, a warm booty is
performed and printer will return to normal status.
INFORMATION MENU
MAINTENANCE MODE Item Value
This mode allows the Maintenance Menu to be added to the setting menu. Status Sheet
Reserve Job List *1
Form Overlay List *2
CPU RESET IN A SERVICE CALL OCCURRENCE
NetworkStatus Sheet *3
This function allows the unit to recover from a Service Req effff error without ColorRegist Sheet
having to reboot. AUX Status Sheet *4
PS3 Status Sheet *5
PS3 Font Sample *5
DETAILED INFORMATION DESPLAY
ESC/Page Font Sample *6
This function displays information in greater detail, for use in the event of a LJ4 Font Sample
service call. ESCP2 Font Sample
FX Font Sample
I239X Font Sample
PRINTING OF THE ERROR SHEET
C Toner *7 E****F, E*** F, E** F, E* F, E F
If this procedure is performed after a CPU Reset has been done during a M Toner *7 E****F, E*** F, E** F, E* F, E F
service call, then the unit will print out an error sheet. Y Toner *7 E****F, E*** F, E** F, E* F, E F
K Toner *7 E****F, E*** F, E** F, E* F, E F
Photocondctr *7 E****F, E*** F, E** F, E* F, E F
Total Pages *7 0 ~ 99999999
Color Pages *7 0 ~ 99999999
B/W Pages *7 0 ~ 99999999
*1: This is displayed only when a Job is registered in the Quick Print Job.
*2: This is displayed and can be executed only when the Form Overlay is
implemented.
*3: This is displayed and can be executed only when the Network I/F = On.
*4: This is displayed and can be executed only when the printer is equipped
with Level 3 compatible Type-B host interface and AUX I/F = On is set at
startup.

*5: This is displayed and can be executed only when the PostScript 3 module is
EMULATION MENU
installed.
*6: This is not displayed on the panel. It can be executed in EJL. It is not open Item Value
to users.
Parallel Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3 *1, GL2
*7: This item is only displayed, and cannot be changed in the setting.
USB Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3 *1, GL2
TRAY MENU Network Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3 *1, GL2
AUX *2 Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3 *1, GL2
Item Value *1: This is displayed and can be selected only when the PostScript 3 module is
A4 *1, A5, B5, LT *1, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, installed.
MP Tray Size
F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, C6, IB5 *2: This is displayed and can be specified only when the Type-B host interface
is installed.
LC1 Size *2 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE
LC2 Size *2 *3 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE
PRINTING MENU
LC3 Size *2 * 3 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE
Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Trnsprncy, Item Value
MP Type
Labels Page Size A4 *1, A5, B5, LT *1, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4,
MON, C10, DL, C5, C6, IB5, CTM *2
LC1 Type Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
Wide A4 Off, On
LC2 Type *3 Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
Orientation Port, Land
LC3 Type *3 Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
Resolution 600, 1200 *3, 300
*1: LT is the default value of the Letter type controller and A4 is the default RITech On, Off
value of the A4 type controller.
Toner Save Off, On
*2: This item is only displayed, and its setting cannot be changed.
*3: This item is displayed only when the optional lower cassette is installed. Image Optimum Auto, Off, On
Also, Paper Size is display only. Top Offset -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
Left Offset -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
T Offset B -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
L Offset B -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
*1: LT is the default value of the Letter type controller and A4 is the default
value of the A4 type controller.
*2: Paper sizes (width x length) for CTM (Custom) are min: 88.9 x 139.7 mm
and max: 215.9 x 355.6 mm.

*3: This is valid only for the ESC/Page, ESC/Page-Color and PS3 mode. Other LCD Contrast 0 ~ 8~ 15
modes print in 600 dpi.
Cyan_Regist -7 ~ 0 ~ 7
Transparencies cannot be printed at 1200 dpi. (Print quality cannot be
guaranteed, so 1200 dpi is not offered as an option in the driver.) Magenta_Regist -7 0 7
Yellow_Regist -7 0 7
SETUP MENU Panel Lock*5 Off, On
Item Value
*1: This is displayed and can be selected only when the optional lower paper
Lang English cassette is installed.
Lang Franais *2: This is not displayed on the panel. It can be set in EJL or PJL. It is not
Sprache Deutsch stored in NVRAM.
LINGUA ITALIANO *3: Duplex printing is available only for A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, EXE and
LENG ESPAOL GLG paper sizes. Use single-side printing for other sizes.
SPRK SVENSKA
*4: This is valid for PCL5e, ESC/Page, ESC/P2, FX and I239X.
Sprog Dansk
Taal *5: This is not displayed, and not printed on the Status Sheet. It can be set by
Nederl.
KIELI SUOMI EJL, EpsonNet WebAssist,etc.
Lng. Portugus
Time Out 0, 5 ~ 60 ~ 300 step1 QUICK PRINT JOB MENU *1
Paper Source Auto, MP, LC1, LC2 *1, LC3 *1 Item Value
MP Mode *1 Normal, Last user xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Manual Feed Off, On Job *2 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Copies 1 ~ 999 Copies *3 1 ~ 999
Quantity *2 1 ~ 999 Delete *3 *4
Duplex *3 Off, On
Binding Long Edge, Short Edge *1: This menu is not displayed when nothing is registered in the Verify Job, Re-
print Job, and Stored Job.
Start Page Front, Back *2: By selecting the Value (User name) and pressing the Enter button when the
Paper Type Normal, Thick, ExtraThk, Trnsprnc, Coated User is displayed, this Item appears.
Paper Side Front, Back *3: By selecting the Value (Job name) and pressing the Enter button when the
Job is displayed, this Item appears and can be selected and executed. After
Skip Blank Page *4 Off, On executing this Item, the printer return to the status when recovering from
Auto Eject Page Off, On the SelecType mode.
Size lgnore Off, On *4: After activating Delete, display will return to Job. If there is no Job, display
will return to User. If there is no User, display will return to previous
Auto Cont Off, On condition after escaping from Select Type.
Page Protect Auto, On

CONFIDENTIAL JOB MENU *1 PARALLEL MENU *1

Item Value Item Value
user xxxxxxxxxxxxxx Parallel I/F On , Off
Enter Password *2 XXXX Speed Fast , Normal
Job *3 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Bi-D Nibble , ECP , Off
Copies *4 1 999 Buffer Size Normal , Maximum , Minimum
Delete *4 *5
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm
*1: This menu is not displayed when nothing is registered in the Confidential boot or restarting the printer.
Job. The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL
*2: By selecting the Value (User name) and pressing the Enter button when the read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting
User is displayed, this Item appears. A password must be input pressing the printer.
the 1 (Back), 2 (Up), 3 (Enter), and 4 (Down) buttons.
*3: After entering a password when Enter Password is displayed, this item USB MENU *1
appears if a job with the matching password exists.
*4: By selecting the Value (Job name) and pressing the Enter button when the Item Value
Job is displayed, this Item appears and can be selected and executed. After USB I/F On , Off
executing this Item, the printer return to the status when recovering from
Buffer Size Normal , Maximum , Minimum
the SelecType mode.
*5: After activating Delete, display will return to Job. If there is no Job, display
will return to User. If there is no User, display will return to previous *1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm
condition after escaping from Select Type. boot or restarting the printer.
The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL
read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting
RESET MENU the printer.
Item Value
Clear Warning
Reset
Reset All
SelecType Init

NETWORK MENU *1 AUX MENU *1 *2

Network I/F On , Off AUX I/F On , Off
Network Config No , Yes AUX Config *3 No , Yes
Get IPAddress *2 Panel, Auto , PING Get IPAddress *3 *4 Panel, Auto, PING
IP Byte 1 *2 *3 0 ~ 192 ~ 255 IP Byte 1 *3 *4 *5 0 255
IP Byte 2 *2 *3 0 ~ 168 ~ 255 IP Byte 2 *3 *4 *5 0 255
IP Byte 3 *2 *3 0 ~ 192 ~ 255 IP Byte 3 *3 *4 *5 0 255
IP Byte 4 *2 *3 0 ~ 168 ~ 255 IP Byte 4 *3 *4 *5 0 255
SM Byte 1 *2 0 ~ 255 SM Byte 1 *3 *4 0 255
SM Byte 2 *2 0 ~ 255 SM Byte 2 *3 *4 0 255
SM Byte 3 *2 0 ~ 255 SM Byte 3 *3 *4 0 255
SM Byte 4 *2 0 ~ 255 SM Byte 4 *3 *4 0 255
GW Byte 1 *2 0 ~ 255 GW Byte 1 *3 *4 0 255
GW Byte 2 *2 0 ~ 255 GW Byte 2 *3 *4 0 255
GW Byte 3 *2 0 ~ 255 GW Byte 3 *3 *4 0 255
GW Byte 4 *2 0 ~ 255 GW Byte 4 *3 *4 0 255
Buffer Size Normal , Maximum, Minimum NetWare *3 *4 On, Off
AppleTalk *3 *4 On, Off
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm
NetBEUI *3 *4 On, Off
boot or restarting the printer.
The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL AUX Init *3 *4
read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting Buffer Size Normal , Maximum, Minimum
the printer.
*2: This is displayed and can be selected only when Network Config = Yes. *1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm
*3: This is not displayed when Get IPAddress = Auto. boot or restarting the printer.
The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL
read-back, however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting
the printer.
*2: This is displayed only when the Type-B host interface is installed.
*3: This is displayed and can be selected/executed only when Level 3
compatible Type-B host interface is installed. This automatically returns to
"AUX Config = No" when the printer status changed to Online.

*4: This is displayed and can be selected/executed only when "AUX Config =
Yes" is selected.
The setting value switches to the Online status, and becomes valid when
the network card restarts.
Therefore, when changing the setting value, executing AUX Status Sheet
of the Test print menu before recovering from the Panel setting mode prints
the previous setting value.
*5: This is not displayed when Get IPAddress = Auto.
ESC/PAGE MENU *1
Item Value
Auto CR On, Off
Auto FF On, Off
CR Function CR, CR+LF
LF Function CR+LF, LF
FF Function CR+FF, FF
Error Code Ignore, Space
Avoid Error Off, On
PGI On, Off
TriColorSpace Normal, sRGB
CM Media Type Off, Opt1, Opt2
*1: This is not displayed on the panel or the Status Sheet. It can be specified in
EJL.

LJ4 MENU Source SymSet *5 0 ~ 277 ~ 3199

Dest SymSet 0 ~ 277 ~ 3199
Item Value
CR Function CR , CR+LF
Font Source Resident , Download *1 , ROM A *2
LF Function LF , CR+LF
Font Number 0 ~ available (Max 65535)
Tray Assign 4, 4K , 5S
Pitch *3 0.44 ~ 10.00 ~ 99.99 cpi step 0.01 cpi
Height *3 4.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt *1: This is displayed only when some download fonts exist.
SymSet IBM-US, Roman-8, Roman-9, *2: This is displayed only when an optional font is inserted to the ROM socket.
ECM94-1, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-9 ISO, *3: Either of these is displayed depending on the selected font type. In the case
8859-10ISO, 8859-15ISO, PcBlt775, of a fixed pitch font, "Pitch" is displayed and in the case of a proportional
pitch font, "Height" is displayed. Neither of these is displayed in the case of
IBM-DN, PcMultiling, PcE.Europe,
a bitmap font. Both Pitch and Height appears in some cases (such as
PcTk437, PcEur858, Pc1004,
changing Font Source or Font Number when PCL5 is not run internally).
WiAnsi, WiE.Europe, WiTurkish,
*4: 60 if A4/LT configuration is set to LT, 64 if it is set to A4.
WiBALT, DeskTop, PsText, *5: When changing the Value of SymSet, and the font specified by Font
VeInternati, VeUS, MsPublishin, Number does not include the Symbol Set, the settings are coupled to be
Math-8, PsMath, VeMath, Font Source = Resident and Font Number = 0, therefore when printing with
PiFont, Legal, UK, this Symbol Set, set the Value of Font Source and Font Number to a font
ANSI ASCII, Swedis2, Italian, that supports this Symbol Set.
Spanish, German, Norweg1,
French2, Windows, McText,
PcIcelandic, PcLt774, PcTurk1,
PcPortugues, PcEt850, PcTurk2,
PcCanFrench, PcSl437, PcNordic,
8859-3 ISO, 8859-4 ISO, WiBaltic,
WiEstonian, WiLatvian, Mazowia
CodeMJK, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp,
PcGk437, PcGk851, PcGk869,
8859-7 ISO, WiGreek, Europe3,
PcCy855, PcCy866, PcLt866,
PcUkr866, PcLit771, 8859-5 ISO,
WiCyrillic, Bulgarian, Hebrew7,
8859-8 ISO, Hebrew8, PcHe862,
Arabic8, PcAr864, 8859-6 ISO,
OCR A, OCR B
Form 5 ~ 60 *4 ~ 64 *4 ~ 128 Lines

GL2 MENU ESCP2 MENU

GLMode LJ4GL2, GLlike Font Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman T, Orator
S, Sans H, Script, OCR A, OCR B
Scale Off, A0, A1, A2, A3
Pitch 10 cpi , 12 cpi ,15 cpi , Prop.
Origin Corner, Center
Condensed Off , On
Pen Pen0, Pen, Pen2 *1, Pen3 *1, Pen4 *1, Pen5 *1, Pen6 *1
T.Margin 0.40 ~ 0.50 ~ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
End Butt, Square, Triangular, Round
Text 1 ~ 62 *1 ~ 66 *1 ~ available (Max : 67) Lines
Join Mitered, Miteredbeveled, Triangualr, Round, Beveled,
None CGTable PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin,
PcPortugue, PcCanFrenc, PcNordic,
Pen0 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
PcTurkish2, Pclcelandic PcE.Europe,
Pen1 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp, Roman 8,
Pen2 *1 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm PcEur858, ISO Latin 1, 8859-15ISO,
PcSl437, PcTurkish1, 8859-9 ISO,
Pen3 *1 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm Mazowia, CodeMJK, PcGk437,
Pen4 *1 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm PcGK851, PcGk869, 8859-7 ISO,
PcCy855, PcCy866, PcUkr866,
Pen5 *1 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm PcLit 771, Bulgarian, Hebrew7,
Pen6 *1 0.05 ~ 0.35 ~ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm Hebrew8, PcAr862, PcHe864
Country USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy,
*1: This is displayed only in the GLlike mode. Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2,
LatinAmeric, Korea, Legal
PS3 MENU Auto CR On , Off
Auto LF Off , On
Item Value
Bit Image Dark , Light , Barcode
Error Sheet Off, On
ZeroChar 0,
Coloration Color, Mono, TrueCol.
Image Protect Off, On
*1: This is displayed only when PS3 is installed.

FX MENU 1239X MENU

Font Courier, Font Courier, Prestige, Gothic, Orator, Script, Presentor,
Prestige, Sans serif
Roman, Sans
Pitch 10cpi, 12cpi,15cpi, 17cpi, 20cpi, 24cpi, Prop.
serif, Script,
Orator S, OCR Code Page 437, 850, 858, 860, 863, 865
A, OCR B T. Margin 0.30 ~ 0.40 ~ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
Pitch 10 cpi, 12 cpi,15 Text 1 ~ 63 *1 ~ 67 *1~ available (Max: 81) Lines
cpi, Prop.
Auto CR Off, On
Condensed Off, On
Auto LF Off, On
T. Margin 0.40 ~ 0.50 ~ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
Alt. Graphics Off, On
Text 1 ~ 62 *1 ~ 66 *1 ~ available (Max : 81) Lines
Bit Image Dark, Light
CGTable PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin,
PcPortugue, PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, ZeroChar 0,
PcTurkish2, Pclcelandic, PcE.Europe, Character Set 1 *2, 2 *2
BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp, Roman-8,
PcEur858, ISO Latin1, 8859-15ISO
Country USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, *2: 1 if A4/LT configuration is set to LT, 2 if it is set to A4.
Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2,
LatinAmeric
Auto CR On, Off
Auto LF Off, On
Bit Image Dark, Light, Barcode
ZeroChar 0,

*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been
SUPPORT MENU *1
activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on.
Item Value *2: The current changes 5% for each step.
*3: Warm boot occurs after Enter key is pressed. The contents of this menu are
HDD Format *3
not localized. When this menu is active, cover open/closed errors do not
PS3 HDD Init *4 occur and printer data is not sent.
Standby *2 Enable , Disable *4: This setting menu sets cleaning cycle which is 32 pages or 48 pages in
case the total printing number of sheets of Photoconductor Unit is 5000 or
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been less sheets. This setting will be valid after power on cycle.
activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. *5: This menu makes the life counter of Toner Cartridge and Transfer Unit
*2: STANDBYTIME command (nondisclosure) of EJL is also supported. clear, when Toner Cartridge and Transfer Unit are replaced before life
When Disable is selected, Fuser is in the status where printing is end.The printer is rebooted after executing this menu.
immediately possible, except when any engine errors occur.
*3: This is displayed and can be executed only when HDD is installed. MAINTENANCE MENU *1
*4: This is displayed and can be executed only when both of PS3 and HDD are
installed. Item Value
Engine Status Sheet
PRINTER ADJUST MENU *1 Clear Error Log
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Maintenance Mode has been
Item Value activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on. Always
Normal -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2*3 displayed in English regardless of the Lang setting in the Setup Menu.
Thick -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2*3
A list of user setting items which are not included in the Setup Menu are shown
ExtraTHK -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2*3 below. Initialization by the initialization menu of the Panel does not clear these
Trnsprnc -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2*3 setting items.
Coated -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2*3 Setting Item Setting Value Default Value Setting Method
Envelope -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2*3 PrinterName 32-byte EJL, PrinterName
(TBD)
Thick Back -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2*3 character string command
ExtraThk Back -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2*3 MFG in the Device ID 32-byte
(Undefined) EJL
character string
Cleaning Cycle 32, 48 *3 *4
MDL in the Device ID 32-byte
Reset C Toner Count*5 (Undefined) EJL
character string
Reset M Toner Count*5
DES in the Device ID 32-byte
(Undefined) EJL
Reset Y Toner Count*5 character string
Reset K Toner Count*5 CID in the Device ID 32-byte
(Undefined) EJL
character string
Reset Trnfr Unit Ct*5

1.14.6 Explanation of Each Setting Menu and Reference: (This cannot be included in the manual)
Setting Items The remaining toner is displayed according to the Dispense Time
(3,050 Sec = 0 %) that is administrated by the engine. However,
This section describes the detailed model-dependent specifications of this this value is not always accurate.
printer's setting items.
Table 1-34. C Toner
1.14.6.1 Information Menu TonerSensor
STSLIFE Dispense time Remaining Toner
(STSWRN)
COLOR_REGIST SHEET less than near end value Calculated value
Off (inactive) inactive
This menu prints the sheet for adjusting Registration of each color (Y, M, C, K). rear end value or more Up to 2 %
Set the value Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, Cyan Regist where each color is less than near end value Adapt to 2 %
darkest or black and each color are in a line in the printing result. When inactive
On (active) end value or more Up to 1 %
reprinting the Color Registration Sheet after setting, each color results in
darkest or in a line with black are located at the center of the each belt where active --- 0%
the value is set.
Design note:If any data remain in the printer mode when pressing the M TONER
Enter button, the printer ejects paper. Print the Color
The remaining M (Magenta) toner level is displayed in 5 steps (display only,
Registration Sheet with the factory default setting expect
exclusive readout).
Resolution = 600 dpi, Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, Cyan
The specifications are the same as the C Toner.
Regist settings are current value. The LCD blinks when
printing is in progress.
Y TONER
C TONER
The remaining Y (Yellow) toner level is displayed in 5 steps (display only,
exclusive readout).
The remaining C (Cyan) toner level is displayed in 5 steps (display only,
exclusive readout).
E****F : 100 % Remaining Toner > 75% K TONER

E*** F : 75 % Remaining Toner > 50%
The remaining K (Black) toner level is displayed in 5 steps (display only,
E** F : 50 % Remaining Toner > 25% exclusive readout).
E* F: 25 % Remaining Toner > 0%
E F: Remaining Toner = 0%

PHOTOCONDUCTOR 1.14.6.2 Tray Menu
This displays the remaining life of the Photoconductor Unit in % (display only, MP TYPE, LC1 TYPE, LC2 TYPE, LC3 TYPE
exclusive readout).
This menu specifies the type of paper set in the MP Tray, LC1/2/3 Cassette.
E****F : 100 % life cycle > 75 %
E*** F : 75 % life cycle > 50 % Paper Type

Contents of Setting Engine control Applicable Tray
Setting Value
E** F : 50 % life cycle > 25 %
Plain Paper
E* F: 25 % life cycle > 0 % Plain Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3
(copy paper etc.)
E F: life cycle = 0 % Letterhead Letterform Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3
Recycled Recycled paper Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3

Reference: (This cannot be included in the manual)
The value is displayed according to the smallest remaining amount value Color Color paper Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3
among the number of copies printed by the Photoconductor read from the
Trnsprncy OHP transparency OHP (half-speed) MP
engine, the Dispense Time of each color, and the Work Time. The value is
automatically reset when installing new Photoconductor Unit. Theremaining Label paper
Labels Label paper MP
amount is assumed as 0% after activating PHD Life Over of the engine status (half-speed)
(STSLIFE).
When Paper Size = envelopes (IB5, C10, C5, DL, MON, C6), the Paper
Source used is always the MP tray. Engine control is performed for
TOTAL PAGES
envelopes. The printing speed is 8ppm.
This displays the number of sheets printed by the printer up to present (display When Page Size = HLT, GLT, F4, CTM, the Paper Source used is always
only). the MP tray.
The engine control is performed giving priority to the Paper Type settings.
COLOR PAGES When Paper Type is Normal, the engine control is performed according to
the MP Type setting.
This displays the number of sheets printed by the printer up to present (display
only).
B/W PAGES
This displays only the number of sheets printed in monochrome by the printer
up to present (display only).

When Page Size = A4, LT, A5, B5, LGL, GLG, EXE, 1.14.6.4 Setup Menu
Paper Type = Normal and
PAPER SOURCE
Paper Source = Auto :
Selects the Paper Source that matches the
Selects the paper source when Paper Type = Normal.
specified Paper Size from the Paper Sources
where the Paper Type specified by the mode Auto : Feeds paper from the paper source that loads paper of the specified
matches the setting value for each tray as shown paper type and paper size.
in the above table.
MP : Feeds paper from the MP Tray.
Paper Source = MP, LC1, LC2, LC3 :
Selects the specified Paper Source. LC1 : Feeds paper from the LC1.
Paper Type = Thick, ExtraThk, Trnsprnc, Coated :
LC2 : Feeds paper from the LC2.
The Paper Source always selects the MP Tray.
Engine control LC3 : Feeds paper from the LC3.
Engine control is performed giving priority to the Paper Type When Page Size is set to envelopes (IB5, C10, C5, DL, MON, C6),
settings. When Paper Type is set to Normal, engine control is Paper Source always selects the MP Tray.
performed with the setting value of the selected tray. The When Paper Type = Thick, ExtraThk, Trnsprnc, Coated, Paper Source is
Paper Type, that is determined when selecting Paper Source, always set to the MP Tray.
is specified only by the ESC/Page, ESC/Page-Color or LJ4
commands. The Paper Type setting does not use Bond to QUANTITY
avoid confusion with Thick.
This menu sets the number of copies printed by collating a set of sequential
1.14.6.3 Printing Menu pages (Collate printing), and it is specified prior to the Copies setting.
Therefore, when Quantity is set to 2 or more, the setting value of Copies
RITECH becomes invalid. Collate printing is performed by the RAM or HDD. Unless any
HDD is installed, the driver uses the Quantity setting when the printer's RAM
This is an outline correction function which is equivalent to that of a size is 64 MB or more.
monochrome page printer in B/W printing. In color printing, the outline This setting is specified only by PJL and EJL, or the ESC/Page and ESC/Page-
correction function is accomplished by the CRIT function. Color commands, and the printer cannot store the setting value.
If data for one job cannot be stored in the printer, the printer displays the
"Collate was disabled" warning and prints only one copy.
TONER SAVE
During color printing, by controlling the halftone growth and by printing with a
low density, toner consumption is reduced.

PAPER TYPE
Set the Paper Type to match the change in the kind of paper to be used. Printing speed and CM (Color Matching) will be decided based on the setting.
Table 1-35. Engine Control, CM (Color Matching)

Paper Type Specified Engine Control
Page Size Paper Type EJL Paper Face Paper Source MP or LC1-3 Type*2 CM
by Driver (Host) (Video Media Type)
Envelope*1 --- --- --- --- --- Envelope Plain Paper
Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color Thicker paper-H See Table 1-36
Specified Trnsprnc Transparency See Table 1-36
Auto
Normal --- Labels Heavier paper-L See Table 1-36
Not Specified --- Thicker paper-H See Table 1-37
Other Than Auto --- --- Thicker paper-H See Table 1-37
FRONT --- --- --- Heavier paper-L Plain Paper
Other Than Envelope Thick
BACK --- --- --- Heavier paper-L Back Plain Paper
FRONT --- --- --- Heavier paper-H Plain Paper
ExtraThk
BACK --- --- --- Heavier paper-H Back Plain Paper
Trnsprnc --- --- --- Transparency OHP
Plain paper-H High
Coated --- --- --- --- Plain Paper
Gloss
*1: MON, C10, DL, C5, C6
*2: The Paper Type specified for the Paper Source that actually feeds paper.
*3: For the actual printing spped, refer to Section 1.2.1.2 "Printer Basic Specification".
Table 1-36. CM 1 Table 1-37. CM 2

CM Media Type MP or LC1-3 Type*3 CM CM Media Type CM
Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Labels Plain paper Off Plain paper
Off
Trnsprnc OHP Option1 Option1
Option1 --- Option1 Option2 Option2
Option2 --- Option2

PAGE SIDE 1.14.6.5 Reset Menu
Front : Select this when printing on the front side of Paper Type = Thick or SELECTYPE INIT
ExtraThk
This function returns the panel setting values to the factory default. However
Back : Select this when printing on the back side of Paper Type = Thick or following panel setting values are not returned to factory default.
ExtraThk
a.) A value that can not be set by user
(remaining toner, total printing number of sheets, etc)
LCD CONTRAST
b.) Interface setting value
This function adjusts the display density of LCD by adjusting the contrast c.) Password of mailbox
voltage of LCD.
d.) Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, Cyan Regist setting value
When 0 is selected, the LCD display is lowest contrast and weakest.
When 15 is selected, the LCD display is highest contrast and darkest.
Selecting the Up button makes the contrast higher, while selecting the Down 1.14.6.6 Support Menu
button makes it lower. Pressing the Up or Down button changes the contrast This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated
without pressing the Enter button. By pressing the Enter button, the setting is by a special operation when the power is turned on, and can be selected. Then
determined and becomes effective. restarting the printer deletes the Support Menu from the Menu.
The timing when this setting is made effective after turning the printer on is in
the on-going system check, therefore the LCD shows the default value 7 just
after powering on.
When the panel setting value is set to 0 and the display is too light to be visible,
initialize the panel setting by restarting the printer pressing the Job Cancel
button.
CYAN / MAGENTA / YELLOW REGIST
This menu adjusts the registration of laser scan printing position for Black in 1-
dot unit of 600 dpi. The adjustment is made when primarily locating the main
unit and when moving it. Additionally the adjustment is performed if required.
The value can be set from -7 to 7 in 1/unit (0 for default).
The setting becomes valid after pressing the Enter button.

1.14.6.7 Printer Adjust Menu COATED

This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated
by a special operation when the power is turned on, and can be selected. Then Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the Paper Type = Coated setting.
restarting the printer deletes the Printer Adjust Menu from the Menu. These The rest of processing is same as Normal.
settings become effective after powering on or warm boot. When changing the
default values, these changes apply to print on special paper, etc., however ENVELOPE
color quality is not guaranteed.
Sets the Transfer Current for printing the paper of the Envelope sizes.
When executing an item in the Printer Adjust Menu of the Support Mode, The rest of processing is same as Normal.
confirm that there is no engine-related service call in normal mode (not in
Support Mode).
THICK BACK
NORMAL Sets the Transfer Current for printing the back of the Paper Type = Thick
setting.
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the Paper Type = Normal setting. The rest of processing is same as Normal.
The value can be set from -15 to 15 in units of 5.
The current changes 5% for each step.
(0 for default) Printing result is lightest when -15 is set, and darkest when 15 is EXTRATHK BACK
set.
Sets the Transfer Current for printing the back of the Paper Type = ExtraThk
setting.
THICK The rest of processing is same as Normal.
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the PaperType = Thick setting.
The rest of processing is same as Normal.
EXTRATHK
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the PaperType = ExtraThk setting.
TRNSPRNC
Sets the Transfer Current for printing with the PaperType = Trnsprnc setting.

1.14.6.8 Maintenance Menu

(This cannot be included in the manual)
This setting menu is displayed and can be selected only when the Maintenance
Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the power is turned on.
Then restarting the printer deletes the Maintenance Menu from the Menu (the
Maintenance Mode is deleted = the printer has switched to the normal mode).
Basically, this setting is for maintenance by service personnel.
ENGINE STATUS SHEET
Pressing the Enter button starts printing the Engine Status Sheet. If data
remains in the mode, paper is output. Be sure to switch to the Maintenance
Mode after confirming that there are no engine related service call in the
normal mode (a mode that is not the Maintenance Mode), then execute. The
RITech, Toner Save and Resolution values are printed with the value in
operation, while the other values are printed with the factory default settings.
Even after printing, the User Default environment (setting) does not change.
The LCD display blinks during printing.
The contents of the Engine Status Sheet are output with the count value of
each unit of the engine.
Also, the Engine Status Sheet is always printed as Lang = English regardless
of the Lang setting of the Setup Menu
CLEAR ERROR LOG
This function clears the Error Log List stored to display on the Engine Status
Sheet.

1.15 About RAM Expansion 1.16 Dimensions

In case of an insufficient memory, the following errors occur in this printer: Dimensions: 439mm x 638mm x 445mm (W x L x H)
Mem Overflow, Image Optimum, Need Memory, Duplex Mem 439mm x 638mm x 781mm (Include the option feeder unit)
Overflow. In these cases, error processing listed below can possibly release Mann: Approx. 36.5kg (Printer body only)
the errors.
The dimension of EPSON AcuLaser C4000 is shown below.
Set the resolution to 300 dpi in the case of B/W printing.
In color printing, change the compression format to the non-reversible
compression.
Make the receive buffer size smaller.
Set an unused I/F to Off.
However, in order to surely avoid problems with an insufficient memory, it is

necessary to install additional memory.
Figure 1-10. Dimension of AcuLaser C4000
Product Descriptions About RAM Expansion 1-69

2
CHAPTER
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
2.1 Print Process
2.1.1 Print Process Overview

This printer is a full color laser printer that uses the principle of
electrophotographic recording. Each YMCK color (yellow, magenta, cyan,
black) has its own special drum and developer that are used in tandem, three
Intermediate Data Transfer rollers are coordinated (2 IDT 1 rollers, 1 IDT 2
roller), and at the end of the process the layered color toner images produce a
full color print.
The major steps of the print process are described below:
1) Charging: The drum surfaces are charged with electricity.

2) Exposure: Image areas are exposed on drums with laser radiation.
3) Developing: Image areas on drums are developed with toner.
4) Primary transfer:
The toner image on drums is transferred to transfer rollers (IDT1).
5) Secondary transfer:
The toner images on primary transfer rollers (IDT 1) are transferred to the
secondary transfer roller (IDT 2).
6) Cleaning: Primary transfer rollers (IDT 1) are cleaned.
7) Tertiary transfer:
The complete four-color toner image on the secondary transfer roller (IDT
2) is transferred to the paper.
Figure 2-1. Print Process Overview
8) Cleaning: Secondary transfer roller (IDT 2) is cleaned.
9) Electrical charge removal: The electrical charge of the paper is discharged.
10) Fusing: Toner on the paper is fixed with heat and pressure.
11) Cleaning: Residual toner on the drums and transfer rollers is collected.
Operating Principles Print Process 2-71

2.1.2 Print Process Diagram All major components of the printing process are consolidated in the PHD
ASSY (PL11.1.3), as shown in the diagram below.
The diagram below illustrates the entire print process.
Figure 2-3. PHD ASSY Diagram
Figure 2-2. Print Process Diagram

2.1.3 Print Process Technical Explanation 2.1.3.9 Electrical Carge Removal

This process neutralizes / removes any positive electrical charge that remains
2.1.3.1 Charging Process on the back of the paper due to the tertiary transfer, through the provision of a
This process gives an electrical charge to the surfaces of the photoconductive negative bias (negative voltage) by Detack Daw.
drums. The removal of this electrostatic charge helps to prevent the paper from
sticking to, coiling around or being attracted toward the paper pathways, the
2.1.3.2 Exposure Process fuser and the paper eject tray. In addition, this procedure prevents image
disturbances that may be caused by electrical discharges and electrostatic
This process uses laser light to expose the imaging drums and form an noise.
invisible electrostatic latent image on the drum surface.
2.1.3.3 Developing Process

This process builds up the images on the drum surfaces, using the toners.
2.1.3.4 Primary Transfer Process

This process transfers the toner images that have been built up on the drums,
to the Primary Intermediate Transfer Drums (IDT1).
2.1.3.5 Secondary Transfer Process

This process transfers the toner images from the Primary Intermediate
Transfer Drums (IDT1) to the Secondary Intermediate Transfer Drum (IDT2).
2.1.3.6 Cleaning
This process cleans the Primary Intermediate Transfer Drums (IDT1).
2.1.3.7 Tertiary Transfer Process

This process transfers the complete 4-color toner image from the Secondary
Intermediate Transfer Drum (IDT2) onto the paper.
2.1.3.8 Cleaning
This process cleans the Secondary Intermediate Transfer Drum (IDT2).

2.1.3.10 Fusing Process 2.1.3.11 Cleaning Process

The Fusing process fixes the toner to the paper using heat and pressure. This process recovers any excess toner that remains on the image drums and
on the intermediate transfer drums.
The toner image that is transferred to the paper by IDT 2 can be easily
smudged by even a light touch of a finger, so the toner image is fixed to the
paper by the FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1).
With the Heater Lamp as its heat source, the Heat Roll melts the toner,
then components inside the Belt opposite the Heat Roll applies pressure to
the paper and the toner is fixed in place.
The fusing method of the AcuLaser C4000 differs from previous heat-roll
and pressure-roll fusing methods. By using a pressure method with the
belt:
Contact area for the Heat-Roll is expanded.
Nip pressure is reduced by expansion of contact area.
Heat transferability is improved by thinner Heat-Roll,
reducing warm-up time and fusing time.
Figure 2-4. Fusing Process

2.1.3.12 Cleaning (Full)

The Cleaning (Full) process removes residual toner from the HTC, Refresher,
IDT 1 Cleaner, and IDT 2 Cleaner after the complete toner image has been
transferred to the paper.
Toner that is not transferred during the Secondary Transfer and 3rd
Stage Transfer processes is retained on the IDT 1 Cleaner and IDT 2
Cleaner. The polarity also changes and toner returned to the drum is
retained on the Refresher. Any toner that slips by the Refresher adheres to
the HTC.
The toner in these locations is cleaned after completion of the print. The
method used to collect the toner on IDT 1 Cleaner and IDT 2 Cleaner is
different from the method used on the Refresher and HTC.
1) IDT 1 Cleaner, IDT 2 Cleaner

The same high voltage used during the print transfer process is applied
to IDT 1, IDT 2 and BTR. By applying zero volts to the IDT 1 Cleaner
and IDT 2 Cleaner, any remaining toner (negative polarity) on the IDT
cleaners is transferred by electric charge to IDT 1 and IDT 2. From that
point, as with the print transfer process, the electric potential difference
of IDT 1, IDT 2 and BTR causes the remaining toner to be collected on
the BTR surface.
Figure 2-5. Cleaning 1

2) Refresher, HTC
High voltage opposite that used during the print transfer process
(negative) is applied to IDT 1, IDT 2 and BTR. The drum surfaces are
negatively charged by contact with IDT 1 rollers. By applying zero volts
to the Refresher and HTC, residual toner (positive polarity) on the
Refresher and HTC is transferred by electric charge to the drums. From
that point, as with the print transfer process, the electric potential
difference of IDT 1, IDT 2 and BTR causes the remaining toner to be
collected on the BTR surface.
Toner picked up by the BTR surface is scraped off by the Scraper and
collected in the toner collection space inside the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2).
Figure 2-6. Cleaning 2

2.2 Flow of Print Data
2.2.1 Data Flow

Print data (electric signal) from the Printer Controller follows the flow shown
below to become a print image.
Operating Principles Flow of Print Data 2-77

2.3 Drive Transmission Path
2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2)

Rotational force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN is transferred through the flow
shown below.
Figure 2-8. DRIVE ASSY MAIN 2
Figure 2-7. DRIVE ASSY MAIN 2
Operating Principles Drive Transmission Path 2-78

2.3.2 DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) 2.3.3 HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5 ~ 8) (Y, M, C, K)
Rotational force of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE drives each of the color developers Rotational force of the Toner Motor inside the HOLDER ASSY drives the
inside the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3). Agitator inside the TONER CARTRIDGE (PL12.1.1~4) in order to supply toner
from the TONER CARTRIDGE to the HOLDER ASSY. It also drives the Auger
inside the HOLDER ASSY to supply toner to the Developer inside the PHD
ASSY (PL11.1.3). There are four HOLDER ASSY, one for each YMCK color,
and they all work the same way.
Figure 2-9. DRIVE ASSY DEVE 1
Figure 2-11. HOLDER ASSY 1
Figure 2-10. DRIVE ASSY DEVE 2

2.3.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18)

Rotational force of the DRIVE ASSY FUSER drives the FUSER ASSY
(PL9.1.1).
Figure 2-12. HOLDER ASSY 2
Figure 2-13. DRIVE ASSY FUSER

2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8)

Rotational force of the MOTOR ASSY DUP is transferred through the flow
shown below.
Figure 2-15. MOTOR ASSY DUP 2
Figure 2-14. MOTOR ASSY DUP 1

2.4 Paper Feed 2.4.2 Paper Feed Path Diagram
2.4.1 Paper Feed Path (without options in use)
Figure 2-16. Paper Feed Path Diagram 1
Operating Principles Paper Feed 2-82

Figure 2-17. Paper Feed Path Diagram 2

2.5 Functions of Main Components

The main components that make up this device will be explained with
corresponding illustrations.
Components are divided into blocks according to the structure of the printer.
Paper Cassette (PL3.1 ~ 2)
Paper Feeder (PL4.1 ~ 3)
Housing Assy Retard (PL5.1)
Chute Assy In (PL6.1)
Chute Assy Out (PL7.1)
Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1)
Fuser Assy & BTR Assy (PL9.1)
Xerographics (PL11.1)
TCRU Assy (PL12.1 ~ 3)
Frame (PL13.1) & Drive (PL14.1) Figure 2-18. Functions of Main Components
Electrical (PL15.1 ~ 2) & CONTROLLER BOARD (ESS) (PL16.1)
2.5.1 Paper Cassette (PL3.1 ~ 2)

2.5.1.1 Main Functions
Side Guide
Adjusts to needed width for paper feed direction and maintains paper
position.
End Guide
Adjusts to needed width for paper feed direction and determines the paper
supply size. Paper size is detected when the End Guide position changes
the ON/OFF condition of the SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8). (See
Section 2.5.2 Paper Feeder)
ROLL ASSY (Cassette) (PL3.1.6)
Paper is fed by the pinching action of the ROLL ASSY (Cassette) and
ROLL ASSY (PICK UP ASSY) (PL4.3.25). (See Section 2.5.2 Paper
Feeder)
Operating Principles Functions of Main Components 2-84

2.5.2 Paper Feeder (PL4.1 ~ 3) SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4)

Detects temperature and humidity inside the printer.
2.5.2.1 Main Functions The printer adjusts the charge voltage, the supply voltage to each transfer
roller, and the developer bias according to the detected temperature and
SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 (PL4.2.8) humidity.
SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 detects the presence/absence of the tray and the
size of the paper.
SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (No paper Sensor) (PL4.3.4)
Detects the presence/absence of paper inside the tray by change in the
actuator position. (No paper: sensor blocked)
SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Low Paper Sensor) (PL4.3.4)
The actuator lowers according to the level of paper in the tray. When the
actuator descends to a certain level, the sensor becomes shaded, thereby
allowing detection of the low quantity of paper.
The actuator position can be seen from the front of the tray, allowing a
rough estimate of remaining paper.
SOLENOID FEED TRAY1 (PL4.3.17)
The ROLL FEED ASSY (PL4.3.3) motion (rotating/stopped) is controlled
by the GEAR FEED (PL4.3.11, PL4.3.12) rotation.
CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY1 (PL4.3.18)
Driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) is transferred to the
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL4.3.21).
ROLL ASSY FEED (PL4.3.3)
When the SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 moves, force from the SPRING
FEED (PL4.3.9, PL4.3.10) causes the GEAR FEED and GEAR IDLER
FEED (PL4.3.14) to engage, the ROLL ASSY FEED begins rotating by
receiving driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, and the ROLL ASSY
(PICK UP ASSY) (PL4.3.25) feeds a sheet of paper from the tray. A notch
in the GEAR FEED causes the GEAR FEED and GEAR IDLER FEED to
disengage after one revolution, cutting the transfer of force and stopping
rotation of the ROLL ASSY FEED. In this way, one sheet of paper is fed at Figure 2-19. Paper Feeder
a time.
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL4.3.21)
ROLL ASSY TURN begins turning by receiving driving force from DRIVE
ASSY MAIN through CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 and conveys the
paper fed from the tray to the CHUTE REGI (Regi Roll) (PL10.1.14). (See
Section 2.5.8 Xerographics)

2.5.3 Housing Assy Retard (PL5.1) 2.5.4 Chute Assy In (PL6.1)

2.5.3.1 Main Functions 2.5.4.1 Main Functions
CLUTCH TURN MSI (MSI Turn Clutch) (PL5.1.9) SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11)
Driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) is transferred to the Determines the density of the toner image on the surface of the BTR inside
ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2). the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) (See 5.7 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY) and sends
that feedback to the Process Controller. (See Section 2.8.4 PROCESS
ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2) CONTROLLER)
ROLL TURN begins turning by receiving driving force from DRIVE ASSY
MAIN through CLUTCH TURN MSI (MSI Turn Clutch) and conveys the SENSOR TNR FULL (PL6.1.13)
paper fed from the tray to the CHUTE REGI (Regi Roll) (PL10.1.14). (See Detects the full condition of the BTR ASSY waste toner collection space.
Section 2.5.8 Xerographics) (See Section 2.5.7 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY)
DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18)
Supplies driving force to the FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1). (See Section 2.5.7
FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY)
Figure 2-20. Housing Assy Retard
Figure 2-21. Chute Assy In

2.5.5 Chute Assy Out (PL7.1)

SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack Sensor) (PL7.1.4)
Change in the actuator position detects exceeded quantities of discharged
or collected paper on the top cover.
(Full stack: sensor receiving)
SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam Sensor) (PL7.1.4)
Change in the actuator position detects if the paper has reached or is
passing through the ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12).
(Paper present: sensor receiving)
SENSOR PAPER (MSI No Paper Sensor) (PL7.1.4)
Change in the actuator position detects presence/absence of paper on the
manual feed tray.
(Paper absent: sensor blocked)
SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL7.1.40)
The ROLL ASSY FEED (PL7.1.27) motion (rotating/stopped) is controlled
by the GEAR MSI (PL7.1.22) rotation.
ROLL ASSY FEED (PL7.1.27)
When the SOLENOID FEED MSI moves, force from the SPRING SOL
(PL7.1.39) causes the GEAR MSI and GEAR IDLER (DRIVE MAIN ASSY)
to engage, the ROLL ASSY FEED begins rotating by receiving driving
force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) and feeds a sheet of paper
from the manual feed tray.
A notch in the GEAR MSI causes the GEAR MSI and GEAR Idler (DRIVE
ASSY MAIN) to disengage after one revolution, cutting the transfer of force
and stopping rotation of the ROLL ASSY FEED. In this way, one sheet of Figure 2-22. Chute Assy Out
paper is fed at a time.
ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12)
ROLL DUP begins rotating by receiving driving force from MOTOR ASSY
DUP (PL8.1.8) and then conveys single-side printed paper from the
CHUTE ASSY EXIT (PL8.1.1) to the ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2). (See Section
2.5.3 HOUSING ASSY RETARD)

2.5.6 Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1)

MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8)
Supplies driving force to the ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4), ROLL MID (PL8.1.5),
ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12).
ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4)
ROLL EXIT begins rotating by receiving driving force from MOTOR ASSY
DUP and then conveys the fused print onto the top cover. For double-sided
printing, ROLL EXIT reverses rotation and conveys the single-side printed
paper toward the REGI.
ROLL MID (PL8.1.5)
ROLL MID begins rotating by receiving driving force from MOTOR ASSY
DUP and then conveys the fused print onto the top cover. For double-sided
printing, ROLL EXIT reverses rotation and conveys the single-side printed
paper toward the REGI.
Figure 2-23. Chute Assy Exit

2.5.7 Fuser Assy & BTR Assy (PL9.1)

FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1)
The FUSER ASSY fixes the toner to the paper with heat and pressure, and
it also conveys the paper toward and away from the fusing location.
The FUSER ASSY is constructed of the following main components:
Heat Roll Belt Unit
Heater Lamp Roll Assy Exit
Thermostat Exit Sensor
Temp Sensor
Exit Sensor
Change in the actuator position detects passage of the paper after the
image is fused.
BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2)
The BTR ASSY is constructed of the BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) and the
waster toner collection system.
The BTR is positioned opposite IDT 2 of the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3) and
transfers the toner image on IDT 2 to the paper.
FAN FUSER (PL1.1.9)
Vents heat from FUSER ASSY and prevents inside the printer overheating.
Figure 2-24. Fuser Assy & BTR Assy 1




2.5.8 Xerographics (PL11.1) CHUTE ASSY REGI (CLUTCH REGI) (PL10.1.1)

The CHUTE ASSY REGI is constructed of the CLUTCH REGI (PL10.1.12),
2.5.8.1 Main Functions the ROLL REGI RUBBER (PL10.1.10) and the ROLL REGI METAL.
Driving force is transferred from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) to the
ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1) ROLL REGI RUBBER by the CLUTCH REGI (PL10.1.12), and the paper is
The ROS ASSY (Raster Output Scanner Assembly) is an exposure device conveyed toward the PHD ASSY from either the Tray path or the MSI path.
that sends out laser radiation to form electrostatic images on the surface of In addition, when the leading edge of the paper reaches the CHUTE REGI
the drum.
(PL10.1.14), the CLUTCH REGI becomes a retaining loop for the paper
In this manual, items related to the ROS ASSY are simply called ROS.
until the ROLL REGI RUBBER begins rotating, and it corrects skew of the
The ROS ASSY is constructed of the following main components: paper edge to ensure proper feed.
Quad Beam Laser Diode SENSOR REGI (Regi Sensor) (PL10.1.20)
Scanner Motor Assy Detects the leading edge of the paper when it reaches the CHUTE REGI.
(Paper present: sensor receiving)
SOS PWB
SENSOR OHP (PL10.1.16)
Lens Regular paper scatters radiated light, and the SENSOR OHP catches that
Mirror reflected light, detecting the paper. OHP (Over Head Projector)
transparencies do not scatter much direct light, so the SENSOR OHP
Window
cannot catch any reflected light. This method determines if the sheet being
PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3) fed from the MSI is an OHP transparency or regular paper.
The PHD ASSY (Print Head Assembly) handles the charging, developing
and transferring steps of the print process.
The PHD ASSY is constructed of the following components:
Drum (Y) Developer (Y)
Drum (M) Developer (M)
Drum (C) Developer (C)
Drum (K) Developer (K)
HTC (Y) Refresher (Y)
HTC (M) Refresher (M)
HTC (C) Refresher (C)
HTC (K) Refresher (K)
IDT 1 (2) IDT 2
IDT 1 Cleaner (2) IDT 2 Cleaner
Figure 2-28. Xerographics

2.5.9 TCRU Assy (PL12.1 ~ 3) HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9)

Provides high voltage to the following components during 3rd Stage
2.5.9.1 Main Functions Transfer and De-electrification of the print process.
SWITCH TCRU ASSY (Y) (PL12.2.10) The BTR inside the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2)
The Detack Saw inside the BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2)
SWITCH TCRU ASSY (M) (PL12.2.10)
SWITCH TCRU ASSY (C) (PL12.2.10)
SWITCH TCRU ASSY (K) (PL12.2.10)
Detects the presence/absence of TCRU ASSY (toner bottle) for each color.
SENSOR TONER LOW (Y) (PL12.2.9)
SENSOR TONER LOW (M) (PL12.2.9)
SENSOR TONER LOW (C) (PL12.2.9)
SENSOR TONER LOW (K) (PL12.2.9)
Detects the toner quantity for each color.
HOLDER ASSY (Y) (Toner Motor : Y) (PL12.2.5)
HOLDER ASSY (M) (Toner Motor : M) (PL12.2.6)
HOLDER ASSY (C) (Toner Motor : C) (PL12.2.7)
HOLDER ASSY (K) (Toner Motor : K) (PL12.2.8)
The Toner Motor built into each HOLDER ASSY drives the Agitator inside
the TCRU ASSY and the Auger inside the HOLDER ASSY, thereby
supplying toner to the Developers in the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3).
TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL12.1.1)
TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL12.1.2)
TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL12.1.3)
TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL12.1.4)
The toner for each color is contained in the built-in toner bottle.
PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8)
Stores printer dedicated data.
Figure 2-29. TCRU Assy

2.5.10 Frame (PL13.1) & Drive (PL14.1) 2.5.11 Electrical (PL15.1 ~ 2) & CONTROLLER
BOARD (ESS) (PL16.1)
DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) 2.5.11.1 Main Functions
Supplies driving force to the following components: FAN REAR (PL15.1.3)
Vents heat from inside the printer and prevents internal overheating.
PAPER FEEDER (PL4.1 ~3)
HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1) HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11)
CHUTE ASSY OUT (MSI component) (PL7.1.1) Made up of the Main Switch and the Inlet, this controls supply of AC power
CHUTE ASSY REGI (PL10.1.1) from the power source to LVPS (PL15.1.10).
PHD ASSY (IDT 2, IDT 1, Drum) (PL11.1.3) LVPS (PL15.1.10)
BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) There are two types of LVPS: for 100/200V and for 230V.
DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) It provides AC power from the power source to the heater of the FUSER
ASSY (PL9.1.1) and also supplies stable low voltage DC power for use by
Supplies driving force to the following components: such components as the logic circuits.
PHD ASSY (Developer) (PL11.1.3)
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2)
Controls print operations based on PRINT CONTROLLER
communications and data from sensors and switches. HVPS is built into
the printer.
HVPS has the following main functions:
Communications with PRINT CONTROLLER
Reception of sensor/switch data
Control of ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1)
To support Charging, Developing, Primary Transfer and Secondary
Transfer of the print process, the HVPS supplies high voltage to the
following components of the PHD ASSY (PL11.1.3):
HTC
Refresher
Developer
IDT 1
IDT 2
IDT 1 Cleaner
IDT 2 Cleaner
Figure 2-30. Frame & Drive

PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15)

Controls the motor and other components according to PWBA MCU &
HVPS signals and sends data from sensors/switches to PWBA MCU &
HVPS. Power from the LVPS passes through this PWB and is supplied to
PWBA MCU & HVPS. This PWB is equipped with an interlock switch.
PWB DRIVE has the following main functions:
Reception of data from sensors/switches
Control of DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2), DRIVE ASSY DEVE
(PL14.1.1), DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18), MOTOR ASSY DUP
(PL8.1.8), and Toner Motors in HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5~8)
Distribution of low voltage DC power from LVPS to each component
Interruption of 24VDC circuits by interlock switch activation
PWB CONTROLLER (PWB ESS) (PL16.1.5)
Receives data from the host computer, executes printing, and has overall
control of the printer.
Figure 2-31. Electrical & CONTROLLER BOARD (ESS)

2.6 Switches and Sensors

Switches and sensors installed on this printer are shown in the diagrams
below. For the function of each component, see 2.5 "Functions of Main
Components".
Figure 2-32. Switches and Sensors 1 Figure 2-33. Switchse and Sensors 2
Operating Principles Switches and Sensors 2-96

2.7 Mode 2.7.2 Operation Mode

The following five modes are available in the printers Operation Mode.
2.7.1 Print Mode DIAG TEST Mode
There are three print modes: Normal Mode, High Resolution Mode, and High Printer is ready to receive diagnostic commands or is executing
Gloss Mode. These modes have sub-categories based on resolution (600 dpi/ diagnostics.
1200 dpi) and process speed (full speed/half speed). WAIT Mode
When process speed is set to half speed, video data transfer speed to the ROS Printer is adjusting print quality.
is double the 600 dpi speed, yielding 1200 dpi resolution.
READY Mode
1. Use Normal Mode to print at 600 dpi Printer is ready to print.
2. Use High Resolution Mode to print at 1200 dpi on plain paper PRINTING Mode
Printer is printing.
3. Use High Gloss Mode at 600 dpi with half speed to improve gloss on plain
paper ERROR Mode
Printer has detected some kind of problem.
Relationships of resolution, process speed, paper and print mode are shown
below.
Table 2-1. Print Mode

Resolution / Process speed
Paper Print Mode 600dpi 1200dpi
Simplex Duplex Simplex Duplex
Full Full
Normal
Speed Speed
Half Half
Normal Paper High Resolution
Speed Speed
Half Half
High Gloss
Speed Speed
Half
Normal
Special Speed
Applications *1 Half
High Resolution
Speed
*1: Thick paper, Labels, Transparencies, Envelopes, Postcards
Operating Principles Mode 2-97

2.8 Control 2.8.2 Paper Supply Selection Control

When not actively controlled by the Printer Controller, TRAY 1 is selected as
2.8.1 Paper Size Control the paper supply when the power is turned ON.
The table below shows Paper Size Switch ON/OFF conditions for SWITCH NOTE: TRAY 1 is used as the name for the printers internal paper
SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8) and corresponding Diagnostic Tool Display Data supply, TRAY 2 is the first level of the optional TRAY UNIT and
according to the paper size loaded. TRAY 3 is the second level of the TRAY UNIT.
NOTE: Paper size switch order from the highest to lowest positions is
SW1, SW2, SW3.
2.8.3 ROS Light Control
Image data enters the laser diode of the ROS ASSY as an electric signal (data
Table 2-2. Paper Size Control is expressed by high/low condition of the voltage), and the laser diode converts
that electric signal to a light signal (data is expressed by on/off condition of the
Paper Size Switch Diagnostic Display
Paper Size light).
SW1 SW2 SW3 Data
Occurrence of variations such as fluxuations in laser radiation quantity,
LEGAL14 (SEF) ON ON ON 00 irregularities in the optics (such as the lens) or variations in the sensitivity of the
drum can prevent the formation of a suitable electrostatic image, so the laser
LEGAL13 (SEF) ON ON OFF 01
diode monitors the laser radiation quantity and controls it in order to always
EXECUTIVE (SEF) ON OFF ON 02 obtain a suitable electrostatic image.
The ROS in this printer has four separate laser diodes, one each for yellow,
B5 (SEF) ON OFF OFF 03
magenta, cyan and black, and quantity of laser radiation is automatically
A4 (SEF) OFF ON ON 04 adjusted for each.
LETTER (SEF) OFF OFF ON 06
A5 OFF ON ON
No cassette OFF OFF OFF 07
Operating Principles Control 2-98

2.8.4 PROCESS CONTROL An overview of POTENTIAL CONTROL is shown below.
In order to render a stable print, timely correction of image formation 1) Temperature and humidity is measured by the SENSOR HUM TEMP
parameters is needed. Control of the entire process that includes parameter (PL4.2.4) and target values are set for drum charge voltage and
adjustment control is called PROCESS CONTROL. developer DC voltage.
2) A POTENTIAL CONTROL patch for each color (yellow, magenta, cyan,
The following two items are the main controlling functions:
black) is formed and transferred to the BTR surface. (The shape of the
Potential Control patches is shown below.)
Toner Density Control
The controlling functions above are supplemented by the following functions:

High Area Coverage Mode
Admix Mode
SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) LED Light Quantity Setting
2.8.4.1 POTENTIAL CONTROL

In order to obtain stable print image density, POTENTIAL CONTROL regulates
the drum charge voltage and the developer DC voltage to match the fluctuating
developer capability moment by moment.
Adjusted drum charge voltage and developer DC voltage is monitored, and a
fixed level of print image density is maintained.
POTENTIAL CONTROL performs its functions just before printing starts under
the following conditions:
When printing the first page after power has been turned on
When the number of pages lined up for printing is 16 or more
Figure 2-34. POTENTIAL CONTROL
When performing a cleaning cycle between a series of pages to be
printed
3) Density on the portion of the BTR surface not holding toner and density
of the patch are both measured by the SENSOR ASSY ADC (Density
Sensor).
4) Density measurements taken at Step 3) are compared with target values
set in Step 1). Adjustments to drum charge voltage and developer DC
voltage for each color are made according to the difference in the
values.

2.8.4.2 Toner Density Control method determines the number of dispense rotations.
ADC dispense rotation calculations are cancelled after 8 pages are
It is necessary to maintain fixed toner densities in order to obtain stable print printed.
quality. Accurately refreshing the areas of toner used by the previous print will If ADC calculates that dispense rotations will be insufficient for 16
maintain a fixed toner density. This arrangement is called PCDC. However, pages, the insufficient portion is used to print the first 8 pages, that
because PCDC used by itself will generate differences in the targeted toner amount is doubled (16 8 = 2) and added to the dispense rotations
densities, a method of correcting this is needed. Toner density correction using calculated by the PCDC.
SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) accomplishes this. The combination of these In the same way, if ADC calculates that dispense rotations will be
two methods is called Toner Density Control. excessive for 16 pages, the excess amount is used for the first 8
pages, and the amount of dispense rotations calculated by the PCDC
1) PCDC (Pixel Count Dispense Control)
is decreased. If the subtraction for 8 pages will not be enough to use
By counting the video signals entering the ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1), the up the excess amount, the remainder is subtracted from additional
amount of toner used during the developing process can be pages.
calculated. The video signal count is done by detecting the charge/
discharge cycle of a condenser in the CR circuit arranged in parallel
with the video signal line. Toner use is calculated by the toner
dispensing time. The Toner Motor inside the HOLDER ASSY
(PL12.2.5~8) is turned according to the calculated toner dispense time,
and toner is supplied to the developer.
2) ADC (Auto Destiny Control)
A toner density control patch for each color (yellow, magenta, cyan,
black) is formed by the set electric potential conditions, the patches are
transferred the BTR, and the density on the BTR is measured by the
SENSOR ASSY ADC. The measured values are compared to
standard values. When the toner density is low, the toner dispense Figure 2-35. Toner Density Control
quantity is increased for subsequent printing; when toner density is
high, the toner dispense quantity is decreased for subsequent printing.
Toner dispense quantity is calculated by toner dispense time. The
calculations are made for each color.
ADC performs its functions after printing is completed under either of
the following conditions:
When the number of pages lined up for printing is 16 or more
When performing a cleaning cycle between pages in a print series
3) Toner Dispensing Example

The Toner Motor will rotate one time for each set period of time. Toner
dispense time, calculated by items (1) and (2) above, is used to
calculate the needed number of Toner Motor rotations. The following

2.8.4.3 High Area Coverage Mode 2.8.4.5 SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) LED Light Quantity
Control
When printing a series of pages with an image coverage area requiring toner
dispensing, the toner density inside the developer can become low. The SENSOR ASSY ADC is a refection type density sensor that uses an
To counter this, High Area Coverage Mode delays the feeding of the next sheet internal LED to shine light on a target, detect the reflected light with a receptor,
of paper when the toner dispense time has reached its set value and continues and send an electric signal corresponding to light quantities detected. In order
to allow toner dispensing. to correctly measure the density, it is necessary for the sensor output value
(reflected light quantity) from the BTR target (when no toner is present) to be
2.8.4.4 Admix Mode like a required value. The reflected light quantity will change according to the
condition of the BTR surface and the amount of dust on the SENSOR ASSY
There are times when High Area Coverage Mode will not be able to fully ADC surface. For the reflected value to become a standard, the light emitted
counteract low density of toner inside the developer. In another case, by from the LED must be controlled.
bringing the printer to a location with low humidity after using it in an area of This control sets the light quantity as though the reflected light quantity were a
high humidity, SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) measured values and toner prescribed value and thereafter regulates quantities to be within the allowed
density standard values will differ greatly because the toner density standard limits.
values will change with each environment.
To handle this, Admix Mode prevents a drop in toner density by activating toner 1) Light Quantity Setting
dispensing when the toner density control patch measurements taken by the The reflected light quantity can change substantially when the BTR
SENSOR ADC ASSY at the time of patch formation greatly falls below the ASSY (PL9.1.2) is replaced or the SENSOR ASSY ADC is cleaned.
standard value. This is assumed to happen, and setting is performed when power is
turned on or the front cover is closed. The LED light quantity is
increased gradually, and output from the SENSOR ASSY ADC
becomes the set value when it surpasses the prescribed value. At this
time, if the SENSOR ASSY ADC output cannot be set as the
prescribed value even at its maximum light quantity, then the sensor is
judged to be dirty. If the output is unusually high, the sensor is judged
to be damaged.
2) Light Quantity Adjustment
Light Quantity Adjustment is performed just before formation of the
toner density control patch when ADC is activated.
Light is emitted at the currently set LED light quantity, and SENSOR
ASSY ADC output is evaluated to see if it is within the fixed range. If
the output value is low, the fixed value for light quantity is increased the
next time ADC is activated. If the output value is high, the fixed value
for light quantity is reduced the next time ADC is activated.
At this time, if the value falls to the first minimum limit, the sensor is
judged to be dirty and an alarm is sounded. If the value falls to the
second minimum limit, the sensor is judged to be dirty and printing is
stopped.

2.8.5 Color Registration Control An overview of Color Registration Controls shown below.
This printer uses a dedicated drum and developer for each of the colors yellow, 1) SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) output is measured when there is no
magenta, cyan and black. Images are formed on each drum, and when they toner on the BTR, and the threshold is established.
are layered on top of each other, some gaps in the quantity needed for each
2) A Color Registration Control patch is formed on the BTR surface. The
color can occur. To avoid this, Color Registration Control calculates the
patch consists of a leading black trigger followed by 10mm lines of color
registration gaps and adjusts the timing of writing from the ROS.
in K, C, K, M, K, Y order, repeated four times.
C H E C K The Color Registration Control explained in this section

P O IN T makes adjustments to avoid color gaps in the secondary
scan direction (paper transport direction). During process
control, adjustments are made according to moment by
moment changes in printer internal temperature and
number of print pages. Because control is based on
conditions in the printer, adjustment by manual operation is
not possible. To avoid color gaps in the primary scan
direction that are not influenced by the printer's internal
conditions, make adjustments from the control panel.
(Refer to Chapter 6.6.5 "Color Registration Adjustment")
Figure 2-36. Color Registration Control
3) The density of the formed patch is read by the SENSOR ASSY ADC.
4) The registration gap adjustment quantity is calculated according to the
threshold established at 1) and the patch density measured at 3).
5) The ROS write timing is adjusted according to the registration gap
adjustment quantity.

2.8.6 BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Control 4) Cancellation of BTR Worklife Warning and BTR Worklife Error
The SENSOR TNR FULL does not detect that the collection space is full
2.8.6.1 Detection of BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Position when the power is turned on or the front door is closed, the BTR
Worklife Warning or BTR Worklife Error output will be cancelled.
Detection of the BTR ASSY position occurs whenever the power is turned on
or the front cover is closed. Position detection is made by the SENSOR ASSY
ADC, not by a sensor specialized for the task.
A fixed quantity of light is emitted from the LED of the SENSOR ASSY ADC,
and SENSOR ASSY ADC output above a fixed value determines the if the BTR
is in the correct position. When stopped for a paper jam, there could be a toner
image on the BTR, so to prevent an error in detection due to low sensor output,
when the set value is not met the BTR is rotated half a revolution. When the
SENSOR ASSY ADC output is above the fixed value, the BTR is judged to be
in position, and when the fixed value cannot be obtained, the BTR is judged to
be not in the correct position.
NOTE: When the BTR ASSY is not in place, "Install Transfer Unit" and an
error message will be displayed on the LCD panel.
2.8.6.2 Detection of BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Worklife Expiration

The BTR ASSY is made up of the BTR and the waste toner collection system,
and it detects expiration of worklife by detecting when the waster toner
collection space becomes full.
The SENSOR TNR FULL (PL6.1.13) detects the full condition of the toner
collection space.
1) Timing for checking of waste toner collection space condition

Whenever the power is turned on or the front cover is closed
Whenever paper is discharged
2) Output of BTR Worklife Warning
When the SENSOR TNR FULL detects that the collection space is full,
the BTR Worklife Warning is output.
3) Output of BTR Worklife Error
After a BTR Worklife Warning is output, the number of prints made and
the toner dispense time is calculated. If a predetermined value has been
exceeded, BTR Worklife Error is output.

2.8.7 Toner Control This condition is established to prevent erroneous detection that can
occur due to position of the film as explained at 2.8.7.1 About SENSOR
Installation of the toner bottle is detected by the SWITCH TCRU ASSY TONER LOW.
(PL12.2.10), and the presence/absence of toner in the bottle is detected by the
3) Output of No Toner Error
SENSOR TONER LOW (PL12.2.9). There is a set of these sensors for each
After a No Toner Warning is output, the toner dispense time is
color, and each functions separately.
calculated. If a predetermined value has been exceeded, No Toner
Error is output.
2.8.7.1 About SENSOR TONER LOW (PL12.2.9)
4) Cancellation of No Toner Warning and No Toner Error
A SENSOR TONER LOW is installed for each color, but the printer cannot After output of No Toner Error , toner dispense is activated for 1.5
monitor each color at the same time, so checking is done one at a time. seconds when the toner bottle installation is confirmed. After this, if
Checking of each color takes 3.5 seconds, so the total time for all four colors is SENSOR TONER LOW detects toner in accordance with toner
14 seconds. A single check for toner presence/absence of all four colors takes presence/absence timing control, the No Toner Warning or No Toner
14 seconds. Error will be cancelled.
However, in this case, the printer continues to recognize this as a No
The SENSOR TONER LOW is installed in the HOLDER ASSY (PL12.2.5~8), Toner condition. When the SENSOR TONER LOW detects the
and it detects presence/absence of dispensed toner inside the HOLDER ASSY presence of toner three times in a row while toner is dispensing, the
as it is transported from the toner bottle by the Toner Motor. printer will revert to the Toner Present condition.
Because material sticking to the SENSOR TONER LOW surface can cause it
to malfunction, it is cleaned by an installed film inside the HOLDER ASSY near
the Auger when toner is being dispensed. This film rotates with the Auger when
toner is dispensed, cleaning toner from the surface of SENSOR TONER LOW.
When the Toner Motor is stopped, however, the film may be positioned in such
a way that toner presence may be judged even though there is no toner and
toner absence may be judged when there is actually toner available. This
misjudgment is avoided by the control functions inside the printer.
2.8.7.2 Toner Presence/Absence Control

An overview of Toner Presence/Absence Control is shown below.
1) Activation Timing
Whenever the power is turned on or the front cover is closed
Every 14 seconds
2) Output of No Toner Warning
The No Toner Warning is output when SENSOR TONER LOW detects
the absence of toner twice in a row, provided that the Toner Dispense
was active between those two detections.

2.8.8 Fuser Control intervals are opened after a set number of pages, and because the number of
pages output in one minute is reduced, this method is called PPM DOWN.
2.8.8.1 Fuser Temperature Control PPM DOWN is activated on the basis of paper size or paper class.
A target temperature is set, and the Fuser Temperature Control turns ON/OFF
the HEATER LAMP to constantly keep the temperature of the HEAT ROLL
surface at the target temperature.
The temperature of the HEAT ROLL surface is detected by the TEMP

SENSOR. The TEMP SENSOR detects the temperature for a period of 40ms,
activated alternately with disconnection that is controlled by observance of the
resistance value. In this way, the temperature detection cycle is 80ms, and
when the temperature is found to be above the target temperature, the
HEATER LAMP is turned OFF, and when the temperature is found to be below
the target temperature, the HEATER LAMP is turned ON.
The set temperature targets are different according printer status, such as
when it is inactive, printing, or executing the print process. In addition, the
target temperature changes according to the internal printer temperature
detected by SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4) (temperature and humidity
sensor), by the print volume, by the Print Mode, and by the power source input
voltage.
2.8.8.2 COOL DOWN

When printing jobs are intermittent, heat distribution on the HEAT ROLL
becomes uneven because of paper conveyance and paper stopping
components. To keep the HEAT ROLL temperature as even as possible,
HEATER LAMP activation wait times are established. This is the COOL DOWN
function.
COOL DOWN is only activated during a series of pages printed in a certain
class/size or for an amount of time determined by the number of pages printed
in the series when such a print job has been completed.
In addition, COOL DOWN will activate midway through a print job of several
hundred pages even when the paper class/size is changed.
PPM DOWN (Pages Per Minute Down) is a simplification of COOL DOWN.

This technique also seeks to improve even temperature distribution on the
HEAT ROLL, and it accomplishes this by establishing non-loaded rotation time
for the FUSER when paper is not being conveyed between prints.
When a series print job at a certain paper class/size is being done, page

2.9 Operating Principles for the Large

Capacity Paper Unit (Option Feeder)
The following sections describes Operating Principles for the Large Capacity
Paper Unit.
2.10 Drive Transmission Path
2.10.1 DRIVE ASSY FEEDER

Rotational force of the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER is transferred through the flow
shown below.
NOTE: On the following pages, Tray 1 refers to the paper tray in the bottom
of the printer, Tray 2 refers to the lower tray of the OPTION FEEDER
and Tray 3 refers to the upper tray of the OPTION FEEDER.
Figure 2-37. DRIVE ASSY FEEDER
Operating Principles Operating Principles for the Large Capacity Paper Unit (Option Feeder) 2-106
2.10.2 Gear Layout
Figure 2-38. Gear Layout

2.11 Paper Feed 2.11.2 Paper Feed Path Diagram
2.11.1 Paper Feed Path

When the OPTION FEEDER is attached, paper is supplied in the following order.
Figure 2-39. Paper Feed Path Diagram

2.12 Functions of Main Components ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2) (PL17.3.3)

ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 3) (PL17.3.3)
The main components that make up this device will be explained with When the SOLENOID FEED moves, force from the SPRING FEED
corresponding illustrations. (PL17.3.9, PL17.3.10) causes the GEAR FEED and GEAR IDLER FEED
(PL4.3.14) to engage, the ROLL ASSY FEED begins rotating by receiving
Components are divided into blocks according to the structure of the printer. driving force from the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER, and the ROLL ASSY
Two Tray Module II/III (PL17.3.25) feeds a sheet of paper from the tray. A notch in the GEAR
FEED causes the GEAR FEED and GEAR IDLER FEED to disengage
Two Tray Module IV after one revolution, cutting the transfer of force and stopping rotation of
the ROLL ASSY FEED. In this way, one sheet of paper is fed at a time.
2.12.1 Two Tray Module II/III (PL17.2 ~ 3) ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) (PL17.3.20)
ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) (PL17.3.20)
ROLL ASSY TURN begins turning by receiving driving force from DRIVE
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2) (PL17.2.7) ASSY FEEDER through CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 and conveys the
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 3) (PL17.2.7) paper fed from the tray to the Tray 1.
SWITCH ASSY SIZE detects the presence/absence of the tray and the
size of the paper.
SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2) (No Paper Sensor) (PL17.3.4)

SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 3) (No Paper Sensor) (PL17.3.4)
Detects the presence/absence of paper inside the tray by change in the
actuator position.
(No paper: sensor blocked)
SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2) (PL17.3.17)

SOLENOID FEED (Tray 3) (PL17.3.17)
The ROLL FEED ASSY (PL17.3.3) motion (rotating/stopped) is controlled
by the GEAR FEED (PL17.3.11, PL17.3.12) rotation.
CLUCH ASSY TURN (Tray 2) (PL17.3.18)

CLUCH ASSY TURN (Tray 3) (PL17.3.18)
Driving force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL17.1.2) is transferred to the
ROLL ASSY TURN .

Figure 2-40. Two Tray Module II/III

2.12.2 Two Tray Module IV (PL17.4)

SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2) (Low Paper Sensor) (PL17.4.7)
SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 3) (Low Paper Sensor) (PL17.4.7)
The actuator lowers according to the level of paper in the tray. When the
actuator descends to a certain level, the sensor becomes shaded, thereby
allowing detection of the low quantity of paper.
The actuator position can be seen from the front of the tray, allowing a
rough estimate of remaining paper.
PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1)
Controls the paper supply operation for the PAPER FEEDER of each tray
based on communications with PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and input
from the sensors/switches.
The following features are included:
PWBA MCU & HVPS communications
Reception of input from sensors/switches
Control of DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5), each solenoid and
each clutch
Control of paper supply operation
Distribution of low voltage DC power to each component from the
printer power supply.
DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5)
Supplies drive to the PAPER FEEDER of each tray.
Figure 2-41. Two Tray Module IV

2.13 Switches and Sensors

Switches and sensors installed on the AcuLaser C4000 Base Engine are
shown in the diagrams below. For the function of each component, see
Section 2.5 Functions of Main Components.
Figure 2-42. Switches and Sensors
Operating Principles Switches and Sensors 2-112

2.14 Controller Operating Principles The following figure shows C470 MAIN circuit board components.
This section describes C470MAIN board which is the main controller of

AcuLaser C4000.
The following describes controller features of the AcuLaser C4000.

CPU
High-speed controller with a new CPU adopted
64-bit RISC CPU Power PC 750CX 400MHz
64-bit high-speed memory PC100 SDRAM DIMM
64MB of standard RAM. The memory can be expanded up to 1GB.
ASIC
Enhanced ASIC is equipped. (VIP2, CDMC) The color management
technologies is incorporated into the hardware to achieve high-speed
processing.
Interface
Parallel Interface
Ethernet interface (100 Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB 1.1
Type-B Slot (Optional interface)
HDD
HDD can be installed. The following additional functions will become available, Figure 2-43. C470 Main Circuit Board Components
upon installation of the optional HDD unit:
Storing of print jobs and printing (Reserve Job, Confidential Job)
Storing and printing of Form Overlays
Increasing the size of the I/F receiving buffer
Installation of fonts under PostScript 3 mode
NOTE: The Form Over function is available only in Windows.
Furthermore, it is not available when in PostScript3 mode.
NOTE: Only the Ethernet I/F receiving buffer may be increased in size.
Operating Principles Controller Operating Principles 2-113

The following figure shows C470 Main Circuit Board Diagrams.
Figure 2-44. C470 Main Circuit Board Diagrams

The following table shows C470 Main Circuit Board Major Components. Table 2-3. C470 Main Circuit Board Major Components
Name Location Model Number / Function
Table 2-3. C470 Main Circuit Board Major Components E05B93BA /
Name Location Model Number / Function 352BGA
IBM25PPC750CX-DP20-3T / Power supply voltage: 2.5V, 3.3V
64bit RISC CPU IC102 PowerPC 750CX 400MHz Manufactured by NEC
VIP2 IC601
Manufactured by IBM This ASIC has the following functions:
1. Half Tone Gradation Control ASIC
E05B92NA /
2. Managing a data processing at CPGI and
480pin CRIT control
Manufactured by Toshiba
This ASIC has the following functions: C309PROG /
1. Memory Control ASIC (relation to RAM/ ROM) Slot P
CODE IC3: Program, 16Mbit Flash PROM
ASIC CDMC IC101 2. ACC (Image Accelerator) function supports CN300
the following processings: ROM DIMM IC4: Program, 16Mbit Flash PROM
CCTL (color control) DIMM IC1: Font, 16Mbit Mask ROM
CCNV (color conversion) IC2: Font, 16Mbit Mask ROM
CCMP (color compression) Slot A
OPTION CN301
With a built-in SRAM (data processing Empty slot for option
exclusive work area) Slot S0
E05B72BA / Standard CN200 64Mbyte (Standard)
BGA-313pin, 2.54mm pich, Staggered, Full 168pin
glid SDRAM Slot S1
Power supply voltage: 3.3V, 5V 168pin
Additional CN201
Manufactured by NEC Empty slot for additional
This ASIC has the following functions: Max. 1Gbyte
1. I/O Control ASIC (manages the following I/F)
Parallel I/F
DIOC IC402
USB I/F
Engine I/F (connection to the Mechanical
Controller)
Control Panel I/F
2. Other Functions
Interrupt Control
DMA Control (11ch)
Timer

Table 2-3. C470 Main Circuit Board Major Components

Name Location Model Number / Function
M51953BFP /
8SOP
Reset IC IC502
340mS
4.25V
SCGPWM4B /
1. IC for pulse width modulation for connection
between the VIP2 and the Engine
PWM IC600
(Mechanical Controller)
2. A pulse width modulation based on Video
Data generated by VIP2
AT25128 /
EEPROM IC401 2MHz
128kbit

3
CHAPTER
TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 Overview 3.1.2 Preliminary Checks

Check the following before troubleshooting:
After confirming the problem and carrying out preliminary checks, you should take
advantage of FIP (Fault Isolation Procedure), and the information in Chapter 2: 1. Make sure that the power source voltage is within the specifications. (Measure
OPERATING PRINCIPLE and Chapter 7: APPENDIX to troubleshoot efficiently. the voltage at the electrical outlet.)
2. Make sure that the power cord (PL15.1.9) is not damaged, shorted or
3.1.1 Troubleshooting Procedure disconnected, and that there are no incorrect connections inside the power
cord.
The troubleshooting procedure flow is as follows:
3. Make sure that the printer is properly grounded.
4. Avoid setting up the printer in places that are exposed to high temperatures,
excessive humidity, low temperatures, low humidity and sudden changes in
temperature.
Situation/problem confirmation
DIAG Operation
5. Avoid setting up the printer near water lines, humidifiers, heat-radiating
Writing Connection equipment, sources of fire, and in places that are exposed to excessive dust or
Preliminary check
Diagram where it might be directly exposed to air from air conditioners.
Writing Connection
Diagram 6. Avoid setting up the printer in places where volatile or inflammable gases are
produced.
Start
7. Avoid setting up the printer in places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
Level 1 FIP Level 2 FIP

8. The printer should be set up in a well-ventilated area.
9. The printer should be set up on a stable, level surface.
Fault restoration 10. The paper used in the printer should be within the correct specifications.
confirmation (Standard-sized paper is recommended.)
11. The printer should be handled correctly as described in the printer
Preventative maintenance documentation.
12. Parts that need to be replaced periodically should be replaced after the
Complete prescribed number of pages have been printed.
Troubleshooting Overview 3-118

3.1.3 Precautions When Performing Work 5. When carrying out work, you should use a wrist band to ground your body in
order to eliminate static electricity from your body.
1. Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD (PL15.1.9) except when necessary
when performing work.
W A R N IN G When the printer power is turned on, never touch parts that
power is being applied to other than when required to as a part
of working. The power switch/inlet of the LVPS (PL15.1.10) has
power applied even when the printer power is turned off, so
never touch these parts at any time.
2. When carrying out work with the covers off, the interlock and safety switches
on and the power turned on, make sure that you disconnect the connector (P/
J151) of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) or remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) to
prevent laser radiation from being emitted, particularly when these
components are not needed.
W A R N IN G When carrying out work with the covers off, the interlock and
safety switches on and the power turned on, dangerous laser
radiation is emitted by the ROS Assy, so always be sure to
disconnect the connector (P/J151) of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1)
or remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) when these components
are not needed.
3. When carrying out work with the left cover removed and the power turned on,
make sure that you disconnect the connector (P/J5011) of the HVPS SUB
board (PL12.1.9), particularly when this component is not needed.
When carrying out work with the left cover removed and
W A R N IN G
the power turned on, a voltage is output from the HVPS
SUB board, so make sure that you disconnect the HVPS
SUB connector (P/J5011).
If FIP requires the HVPS SUB connector (P/J5011) to be
connected, never touch the HVPS SUB board and other
components that output high voltages.
4. Be careful to avoid harmful burns when touching parts that may be hot.

3.1.4 Test print by engine itself
Overview
This printer can perform test print as a operation check by engine itself. The printer
prints a test print pattern with built-in engine function.
Test Print Method
1. Remove the PWB Controller. (Refer to Chapter 4.2.19 "CONTROLLER

BOARD".)
2. Put standard A4 paper in Tray 1 and turn the power ON. Figure 3-1. Test Print Procedure
C A U T IO N While performing the following step, absolutely DO NOT touch Test Print Patterns
electrified or moving components.
The test print pattern is printed at 600 dpi in a stair step pattern generated at
horizontal and vertical intervals of 128 dots for each of the black (K), cyan (C),
magenta (M) and yellow (Y) colors, in that order.
3. Short circuit the 2 pins of the test print connector (P31) on the PWBA MCU & NOTE: The lines printed in vertical direction (paper feeding direction)
HVPS. The location of the test print connector is shown in Figure 3-1. becomes notched with this pattern. (This is not an irregularity with
the print out.)
NOTE: Use some conductive object; like a tip of screwdriber to short-
circuit the pins.
4. After the printer has switch to READY Mode, start the print operation. (A
double-sided print operation will be performed.)
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 2.7.2 "Operation Mode" about READY Mode.
5. To stop the print operation, remove the conductive object from the pins.
NOTE: Tray 1 is set as the paper supply, so if there is no paper in Tray 1,

the print operation cannot be performed.
NOTE: If the printer is in error state after power on, the print operation will
not start.
Figure 3-2. Test Print Pattern

3.1.5 Precautions When Using FIP 10. When measuring voltages inside the FIP, the minus-side P/J3-4 at the rear is
always set to SG (signal ground) or RTN (return). Because of this, after
1. When carrying out troubleshooting for the FIP, it is assumed that the PWB checking that both the SG and RTN lines are conducting correctly, the rear
Controller is functioning normally, so if the problems cannot be fixed by mines-side can be connected to some other SG and RTN terminals instead of
carrying out troubleshooting, try replacing the printer controller with a normal the P/J3-4 connector.
part. However, SG and RTN are not always necessarily at the same level, so be
2. If the problems cannot be fixed by carrying out troubleshooting using the 3.3.4 careful not to connect them incorrectly.
Image Quality Troubleshooting FIP, check the symptoms while replacing parts 11. The special tool should be use to measure voltage for compact connectors. The
in the order given in "Related Parts". tip of the tool is sharp, and so it should be handled with care.
3. When using the FIP to carry out troubleshooting, there are times when parts 12. When measuring voltages, install the PHD Assy, fuser Assy, BTR Assy and
such as the PWBA MCU & HVPS and PHD Assy that are known to be working paper tray and close the front head cover Assy when turning on the power,
normally are required in order to identify causes of problems, and so such unless specifically instructed otherwise.
parts should be made ready beforehand.
13. The numeric values inside the FIP are intended as a guide only. Actual values
4. The "Initial Check" function of the FIP should be used to make basic level can be considered satisfactory if they approximate these values.
checks.
14. There are no specific procedures for parts that must be removed or operations
5. The "Initial Check" function of the FIP should be used to check structural parts that must be carried out in order to carry out checks specified in the FIP.
and parts related to the main parts to be checked, as well as the main parts
15. The "Replace" section of the FIP indicates parts that are considered to be the
themselves.
source of the problem, and indicate that the part itself or the Assy which contains
6. Always disconnect the power cord when carrying out work, unless there is a this part should be replaced in order to check the problem.
reason for it to be connected. Furthermore, when the power cord is connected,
16. In the FIP, paper supply from the paper tray at the bottom of the unit is
never touch parts that power is being applied to other than when required to as
indicated as "Tray 1", the first tray of the optional paper feed unit is "Tray 2"
a part of working.
and the second tray is "Tray 3".
7. The following indications are used for connectors.
17. The FIP is divided into different sections based on specifications. Checking of
P/J12 : Connector P/J12 when it is connected problems should be carried out in accordance with the procedures given in
these sections.
P12 : Plug side of connector P/J12 when the connector is disconnected
(except when connected directly to circuit board) 18. The instruction sections provided with optional units contain procedures for
troubleshooting these units.
J12 : Jack side of connector P/J12 when the connector is disconnected
(except when connected directly to circuit board)
8. With the P/J1-2 <=> P/J3-4 connection inside the FIP, the plus side of the
measuring instrument should be connected to terminal 2 of P/J1 and the minus
side should be connected to terminal 4 of P/J3 when measurement is carried
out.
9. With the P/J1 <=> P/J2 connection inside the FIP, all corresponding terminals
between P/J1 and P/J2 should be measured, while referring to the connection
layout diagram.

3.2 Level 1 FIP
The Level 1 FIP is the first step to take in diagnosing problems. The Level 1 FIP
involves identifying error codes and other trouble symptoms, and is intended as a
guide for proceeding to the troubleshooting procedures in Level 2.
3.2.1 Level 1 FIP Flowchart
Ask operator about trouble symptoms.

Is the operator operating the unit correctly?
Y N
Explain the correct

Is an error code displayed?
operating method.
Y N
Is there an image
quality problem?
Y N
Does an error or jam occur

Image quality FIP when printing in the problem
mode?
Y N
Level 2 FIP Level 2 FIP Other FIP
Troubleshooting Level 1 FIP 3-122

3.3 Level 2 FIP Face-down Tray
3.3.1 Level 2 FIP

The Level 2 FIP includes the procedures for diagnosing problems by classifying
them according to error codes and other trouble symptoms. The method of problem
diagnosis allow the causes of problems to be located quickly by following the
procedures indicated in the FIP or the checking procedures. Cover A
Cover B
3.3.2 Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message MP Tray
This printer is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. If the printer detects an LC1
error, it indicates the error information with the LED lamps on the LCD panel.
C Power Switch
Types of error occur to a page printer vary widely, such as poor print quality or LC2
abnormal operation, and it makes identification of failed part and component more LC3
difficult. For easy and efficient repair, this section describes troubleshooting
procedures using LCD messages and typical types of abnormal output.
The following tables list the LCD messages. As for the units used for the messages
Photoconductor
and the cover positions, see Table 3-1.
Unit Top Cover
Figure 3-3 shows the locations of the components and covers referred to in the Fuser Unit
messages.
Transfer Unit Toner Cartridge
Cover D
Figure 3-3. Locations of Units/Covers

3.3.2.1 List of Printer Messages Table 3-1. Printer Messages

The table below shows the list of printer message of AcuLaser C4000. Each LED Message Category Status code Refer to:
message is the one when Lang = English is set. uuuu Toner Out Error
(uuuu = CMYK, only the relevant item is displayed) 4065 ~ 4079 Page 129
Table 3-1. Printer Messages
Replace Photocondctr Error 4028 Page 129
LED Message Category Status code Refer to:
Replace TransferUnit Error 4224 Page 129
(Display when Power is
status - Printer Open Error 4002 Page 130
Turned On)
Service Req Cffff Service call error 6000 - Install LC1 Error 4007 Page 130
Service call error Install LC2 Error 4007 Page 130

Service Req Eggg 6001 ~ 6999 -
(Eggg: See *1) Manual Feed sss Error (sss: See *3) 1013 -
HDD Format ***% status - - Cant Print Duplex Error 3005 -
Optional RAM Error Error - Page 126 Paper Out ttt sss Error (ttt: See *2, sss: See *4) 4010 Page 130
ROM CHECK status - - Paper Set ttt sss Error (ttt: See *2, sss: See *4) 3003 -
RAM CHECK status - - Print Overrun Error 3000 -
HDD CHECK status - - Mem Overflow Error 3001 -
Self Test status - - Duplex Mem Overflow Error 3004 -
Reset All status 1004 - Invalid HDD Error 4202 -
Reset status 1004 - Invalid PS3 Error 4201 -
Cancel All Print Job status 1003 - Invalid IPDS Error 4232 -
Cancel Print Job status 1003 - Invalid AUX I/F Card Error 4014 -
Unable Clear Error status - - Invalid ROM A Error 4003 -
Check Transparency Error 4021 Page 126 Invalid ROM B Error 4003 -
4008, 4009, Write Error ROM A Error 4006 -
Jam xxxx Error Page 127
4017, 4012 Write Error ROM P Error 4006 -
Face-down Full Error 4090 Page 127 Reset to Save status - -
uuuu Toner Cart Out Error Writing ROM A status 1005 -
(uuuu = CMYK, only the relevant item is displayed) 4049 ~ 4063 Page 127 Writing ROM P status 1005 -
Install Photocondctr Error 4022 Page 128 Menus Locked Warning 1001
Install Fuser Error 4221 Page 128 (Panel setting display) -
Install TransferUnit Error 4222 Page 128 Hard Disk full Warning 2569 -
Clear Sensor Error 4228 Page 128 Reserve Job Canceled Warning 2565 -
Wrong Photoconductor Error 4032 Page 129 PS3 Hard Disk full Warning 2561 -

Table 3-1. Printer Messages Note *1: See Section 3.3.3 "Service Call Error Messages".
LED Message Category Status code Refer to: *2: The relevant values among the Values of Paper Source in the panel setting
except for Auto are displayed.
Form Data Canceled Warning 2570 Page 132
*3: The relevant values among the Values for Paper Size in the panel setting are
Collate was disabled Warning 2013 -
displayed.
Check Paper Size Warning 2004 -
*4: The relevant values among the Values for each paper feed Size in the Tray
Image Optimum Warning 2002 - Menu in the panel setting are displayed.
Check Paper Type Warning 2008 -
Need Memory Warning 2003 -
Format Error ROM A Warning 2000 -
Form Feed status 1008 -
(Display in test printing) 1010 -
Calibrating Printer status 1014 Page 126
Offline status 1001 -
Cancel Print Job status (Job cancel by host) 1003 -
uuuu Toner Low Warning -
(uuuu=CMYK, only the relevant item is displayed) 2017 ~ 2031 Page 131
Worn Photoconductor Warning 2010 Page 131
Worn Fuser Warning 2562 Page 132
Worn TransferUnit Warning 2563 Page 132
Standby status 1007 -
Ready status 1000 -
(Printing) status 1009 -
(Communication to
status 1012 -
non-active I/F)
(executing of Job
status 1002 -
(possible to print))
C H E C K The Printer Message list are described in the order or

P O IN T descending priorities (the top item is the highest on the list or
priorities).

3.3.2.2 Details of Status Message and Treatment 3.3.2.3 Details of Error Message and Treatment
This section describes the status messages specific to AcuLaser C4000. This section describes the error messages specific to AcuLaser C4000.
NOTE: READY message means that the printer performs printing as

soon as the READY message is displayed during the message Optional RAM Error
shown. Description
Read/Write error occurs when checking optional RAM at power on testing.
Calibrating Printer
LED
Description
The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on.
This is one of the READY messages. The engine is under adjustment. At the
following timing, the engine is automatically calibrated. Treatment
Power off and remove the optional RAM DIMM then power on. This error will
When turning the printer on
occur that RAM access time is slower than the specification time or RAM DIMM
Adjusting print quality is broken.
LED
Check Transparency
The Error LED is off and the LCD display blinks.
Treatment Description
Wait for about 10 seconds to three minutes (TBD) and the printer will Paper apart from an OHP sheet is fed when OHP sheet is set to the Paper
automatically resume. While calibrating, do not open any printer cover and do Type setting. Or, an OHP sheet s fed although OHP has not been selected in
not turn the printer off. the Paper Type setting. A paper jam occurs in the Reg (paper feeding) area.
LED
Treatment
Remove set papers on MP tray then remove jammed paper from MP tray side.
Open and close Cover A. Set the correct papers then the jammed print data
will be print.
Reference FIP
FIP-9

Jam xxxx uuuu Toner Cart Out

Description Description
A paper jam has occurred at the location indicated in X. One of the C, M, Y, K toner cartridges is not installed.
The uuuu display corresponds to the C, M, Y, K toner cartridges, and indicates
Engine Status the cartridge that is not installed.
Jam xxxx Status
Fuser Jam Reg Jam Feed Jam Duplex Jam LED
X (A B) --- --- --- AB 4012 The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on.
--- X (A) --- --- A 4008 Treatment
--- --- X (A C) --- AC 4009 By opening the top cover and setting the displayed toner cartridge, the error is
released.
--- --- --- X (B) B 4017
Reference FIP
--- X (A) --- X (B) AB 4012
FIP-1 ~ 4
X (A B) --- X (A C) --- ABC 4009
--- --- X (A C) X (B) ABC 4009 Face-down Full
NOTE: In some cases, a Jam occurs two locations at most Description
simultaneously.
When the printer ejects paper into the Face -down tray that has been full,
LED
printing stops. Paper that is being ejected just after the Face Down Full error
The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. occurs, the paper is ejected as it is.
Treatment LED
Jam A B: Open the Cover A and B and remove jammed paper (Fuser The Ready LED is off and the Error LED shows Blink 2.
Jam).
Treatment
Jam A: Open the Cover A and remove jammed paper (Reg Jam). Open
the Cover D, and detach the Photoconductor Unit to remove the paper if Remove paper in the Face -down tray and press the Start/Stop button to
needed. resume printing.
Jam A C: Open the Cover A and the cassette C and remove jammed Reference FIP
paper (Feed Jam).
FIP-41
Jam B: Open the Cover B and remove jammed paper (Duplex Jam).
Jam A B C: Open the Cover A and the cassette C and remove jammed
paper (Feed Jam). When Fuser Jam or Duplex Jam is occurred, handle
same as above Fuser Jam or Duplex Jam.
Reference FIP
FIP-10 ~ 13

Install Photocondctr Install TransferUnit

The Photoconductor Unit is not installed or is not set correctly. The Transfer Unit is not installed.
LED LED
The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on. The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on.
Treatment Treatment
Open the Cover A and then open the Cover D. Install the Photoconductor Unit. Opening the Cover A and closing it after installing the Transfer Unit releases
Closing the Cover D and A release the error automatically. the error automatically.
Reference FIP Reference FIP
FIP-5 FIP-6
Install Fuser Clean Sensor

The Fuser U nit is not installed, or is not set correctly. Or the Fuser Unit is The sensor window for calibrating the engine is soiled.
broken.
LED
LED The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on.
Treatment
Treatment
Open the Cover A, remove the Transfer Unit, and clean up the transparent
Turn the printer off, open the Cover A, then open the Cover D. Close the Cover plastic window on the backside. After that, set the Transfer Unit and close the
A, open the Cover B, and install the Fuser Unit correctly. Close the Cover D Cover A to release the error automatically.
and close the Cover B at the end. When Install Fuser massage is displayed in
Reference FIP
spite of above operation, the Fuser Unit is broken. Change to new Fuser Unit.
FIP-29, 37
Reference FIP
FIP-7

Wrong Photoconductor Replace Photocondctr

The appropriate Photoconductor Unit is not installed. Printing stops since this error cause damages to the engine.
LED NOTE: Do not open to an user this.
PHD Life Over2 of the engine status STSLIFE2 is activated.
Treatment
LED
By opening the Cover A and D to install the appropriate Photoconductor Unit
and closing the covers, the error is automatically released. The Ready LED is off and the Error LED is on.
Reference FIP Treatment
FIP-8 Open the Cover A, and then open the Cover D. Replace the Photoconductor
Unit with a new one. Closing the Cover D and A automatically releases the
error.
uuuu Toner Out
Reference FIP
Description
FIP-26, 46
The printer detects that a toner is empty according to the Toner End sensor
and the toner's Dispense Time of each color of the engine, and printing stops.
Replace TransferUnit
Printing in the Toner End status cannot provide proper color expression,
therefore the error cannot be released by pressing the Start/Stop button. The Description
uuuu shows CMYK corresponding to the each C, M, Y, K toner cartridge,
indicating only the toner cartridge detected that it contains no remaining toner. The Transfer Unit's life cycle has ended.
LED NOTE: Do not open to an user this.

Since the number of printed copies or Dispense Time after turning the Waste
Treatment Toner sensor of the engine on has reached to the setting value, the printer
detects that the life cycle of the Transfer Unit ends, and then printing stops.
Replace toner Cartridge.
LED
Reference FIP
FIP-22 ~ 25, 42 ~ 45
Treatment
By opening the Cover A, replacing the used Transfer Unit with a new Transfer
Unit, and closing the Cover A, the error is automatically released.
Reference FIP
FIP-27, 46

Printer Open Paper Out ttt sss

One of the Cover A, Cover B, and Cover D is open. 1: There is no paper loaded in the selected paper source sss.
LED 2: Paper is set in none of the paper sources.
ttt shows the paper size selected for the paper source sss.
LED
Treatment
Closing all the Covers (Cover A, Cover B, and Cover D) releases the error.
Treatment
Reference FIP
1: Load the correct size of paper ttt in the paper source sss to clear the error.
FIP-30
2: Load the correct size of paper in any of the paper sources to clear the error.
Install LC1, Install LC2 Reference FIP
Description FIP-39
Since the Cassette 1 and/or 2 is/are not installed correctly, printing is

impossible using the Cassette 2 or 3.
NOTE: When "Auto" is selected for the Paper Source setting, the error
"Paper Set" or "Paper Out" appears.
LED
Treatment
Installing the cassette s correctly releases the error.
Reference FIP
FIP-40

3.3.2.4 Details of Warning Message and Treatment Worn Photoconductor

This section describes the warning messages specific to AcuLaser C4000.
Description
NOTE: Warning displays do not change any LED lighting. This warning informs the user that the Photoconductor Unit has reached the
end of its life cycle. The printing quality after that this message appears is not
uuuu Toner Low guaranteed.
Description NOTE: Do not open to an user this.

This warning notifies the user that the remaining toner level of each color (C, This warning occurs when PHD Life Over of the engine status STSLIFE is
M, Y, K) is low. The remaining toner value for each color is calculated activated.
according to the engines remaining toner sensor, and this message is
displayed when the remaining toner is approximately 10% or. The u u u u Treatment
indicates CMYK, which correspond to the C, M, Y and K toner cartridges, and The Photoconductor Unit can be used until the Replace Photocondctr error
displays only the toner cartridges detected that the remaining toner is low. appears, however the printing quality after that the Worn Photoconductor
NOTE: Do not open to an user this. message appears is not guaranteed. This warning display is released by
performing any one of the following methods.
This warning occurs for the C, M, Y, K toners Dispense Time comes 90% of
Execute Clear Warning of the Reset Menu.
toner cartridge life cycle or Toner Near Empty bit of the engine status
(STSWRN), whichever comes first. Execute Reset of the Reset Menu.
Treatment Replace the Photoconductor Unit with a new one.
This warning display is released by performing any one of the following Reference FIP
methods.
FIP-35
Execute Reset of the Reset Menu.
NOTE: Be sure to open to an user.
The cartridge still has some toner until uuuu Toner Out appears. Be sure not to
replace the toner cartridge with a new one, or the remaining toner may pour
over.
NOTE: Do not open to an user this.
If the toner cartridge is replaced before uuuu Toner Out occurs, the engine
does not detect the new cartridge correctly in some cases.
Reference FIP
FIP-31 ~ 34

Execute Reset of the Reset Menu.

Worn Fuser
Replace the Transfer Unit with a new one.
Description
Reference FIP
This warning message informs the user that the Fuser Unit has reached the
end of its life cycle. The printing quality after that this message appears is not FIP-36
guaranteed.
Treatment Form Data Canceled (Warning)
NOTE: Be sure to open to an user. Description

This warning occurs when form data cannot be registered. The form data are
Replace the Fuser Unit promptly. not registered but discarded.
This warning display is released by performing any one of the following Treatment
methods.
Cause and Treatment
1: The number of registered form data have reached the maximum number
Execute Reset of the Reset Menu. allowed to be registered.
Reference FIP Delete a registered form.
FIP-28 2: The free space of the HDD for registration is insufficient.
Delete the registered forms until an adequate free space for registering the
Worn Transfer Unit target form is reserved.
Description 3: A HDD does not exist.
This warning message informs the user that the Transfer Unit has almost Install a HDD.
reached the end of its life cycle. Be aware that performing printing an image
data that exceeds the specified paper size shortens the Transfer Units' life
cycle.
Reason: The amount of wasted toner increases.
NOTE: Do not open to an user this.
This message appears when the remaining life is 5% e or less, or when the
Waste Toner Box sensor is On.
Treatment
This warning display is released by performing any one of the following
methods.
Execute Warning Clear of the Reset Menu.

3.3.3 Service Call Error Messages Controller Related Service-Call Error

See the following tables for the detailed information on the Service-Call Error
messages. Table 3-3. List of Service-Call Errors (Controller Related)
Error Error Reference
Explanation
Engine Related Service-Call Error Category Code ffff FIP
C or D 0017 CPU error (Interrupt exception) FIP-48

Table 3-2. List of Service-Call Errors (Engine Related)
C or D 0088 CPU error (System call exception) FIP-48
Explanation C or D 0089 CPU error (Break point exception) FIP-48
Category Code ffff FIP
CPU error (Disabled floating-point
E 100 ROS failure FIP-14 C or D 0091 FIP-48
exception)
E 101 Fuser error FIP-15
C or D 0300 CPU error (Reserved (undefined) exception) FIP-48
E 102 NV-RAM error FIP-16
C or D 0301 CPU error (Machine check exception) FIP-48
E 103 CTD sensor error FIP-17
C or D 0302 CPU error (Data access exception) FIP-48
E 104 Fan motor error FIP-18
C or D 0303 CPU error (Instruction access exception) FIP-48
E 105 Low density error FIP-19
C or D 0304 CPU error (Alignment exception) FIP-48
E 106 Firmware error FIP-20
C or D 0305 CPU error (Program exception) FIP-48
E 107 Environment sensor error FIP-21
C or D 0306 CPU error (Trace exception) FIP-48
E 998 Engine communication error FIP-48
C or D 0307 CPU error (Performance monitor exception) FIP-48
CPU error (System administration interrupt

C or D 0308 FIP-48
exception)
CPU error (Temperature management
C or D 0309 FIP-48
interrupt exception)
C or D 0800 IPL error (Controller defective) FIP-48
Engine communication error (Only when

C or D 0998 FIP-16
powering on)
C or D 0999 No Engine Flash ROM program data FIP-16
Standard RAM error (When the standard

C or D 1002 FIP-50
size is not determined, etc.)
C or D 1010 Verify error FIP-49

Table 3-3. List of Service-Call Errors (Controller Related)

Explanation
Category Code ffff FIP
C or D 1020 RAM error (Slot 0) FIP-50
C or D 1021 RAM error (Slot 1) FIP-50
C or D 1100 ROM checksum error (bit 0 ~ 15) (Font) FIP-51
C or D 1101 ROM checksum error (bit 16 ~31) (Font) FIP-51
C or D 1120 ROM checksum error (bit 0 ~ 7) (Program) FIP-52
C or D 1121 ROM checksum error (bit 8 ~ 15) (Program) FIP-52
ROM checksum error (bit 16 ~ 23)

C or D 1122 FIP-52
(Program)
ROM checksum error (bit 24 ~ 31)
C or D 1123 FIP-52
(Program)
C or D 1180 Optional ROM module A checksum error FIP-53
C or D 1185 Unsupported ROM module FIP-53
C or D 1200 EEPROM write error FIP-54
C or D 1210 EEPROM write count limit FIP-54
C or D 1400 Engine initialization malfunction FIP-56
C or D 1500 CCNV hardware error FIP-55
Compression SRAM initialization hardware

C or D 1550 FIP-57
error
Video related hardware error (including
C or D 1600 FIP-58
PWM IC calibration error)
C or D 1700 Built-in network hardware error FIP-59
C or D 1800 DIMM SPD error FIP-60
C or D 1999 Other hardware error FIP-56
C or D 2000 Software error FIP-56

FIP-1 Yellow Toner Cartridge Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Do the following checks show a problem?
Cartridge installation With the tool: Go to step 2.
1 Reinstall applicable parts.
Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) (Y) installation Without the tool: Go to step 3.
Switch TCRU Assy (Y) actuator installation
Switch TCRU Assy (Y) connector installation
Switch TCRU Assy (Y) (PL12.2.10) check

Replace the PWBA MCU &
2 Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test. Go to step 3.
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Is the switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) functioning normally?
Switch TCRU Assy (Y) (PL12.2.10) signal voltage

1. Disconnect the P/J51 connector from the PWB drive (PL15.1.15).
3 Go to step 4. Go to step 6.
2. Measure the voltage between P51-11 <=> P51-12.
Is the voltage between P51-11 <=> P51-12 3.3V DC?
Switch TCRU Assy (Y) (PL12.2.10) operation

1. Push and release the switch TCRU Assy (Y).
4 2. Check the continuity between J51-11 <=> J51-12. Go to step 5.
Does J51-11 <=> J51-12 have continuity when the switch TCRU Assy (Y) is pressed, and
no continuity when it is released?
Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J431 connector from the switch TCRU Assy (Y).
2. Check the continuity between the following lines. Replace the Switch TCRU Assy Replace the Harness Assy TNR
5
J51-11 <=> J431-2 (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.6) (PL12.1.6).
J51-12 <=> J431-1
Is the continuity between J51 <=> J431 normal?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
PWB drive (PL15.1.15) continuity

1. Disconnect the connector (P/J42) and (P/J51) on the PWB Drive REGI. Replace the PWB Drive.
6 Go to step 7.
2. Check the continuity between P42-4 <=> J51-11. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Is the continuity between P42-4 <=> P51-11?
Harness Assy DRV 2 (PL15.2.3) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2
7
2. Check the continuity between J12-27 <=> J42-4. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) (PL15.2.3).
Is the continuity between J12-27 <=> J42-4 normal?

FIP-2 Magenta Toner Cartridge Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) (M) installation Without the tool: Go to step 3.
Switch TCRU Assy (M) actuator installation
Switch TCRU Assy (M) connector installation
Switch TCRU Assy (Y) (PL12.2.10) check

Switch TCRU Assy (M) (PL12.2.10) signal voltage

Switch TCRU Assy (M) (PL12.2.10) operation

1. Push and release the switch TCRU Assy (M).
Does J51-13 <=> J51-14 have continuity when the switch TCRU Assy (M) is pressed,
and no continuity when it is released?

5
J51-13 <=> J432-2 (M). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.6) (PL12.1.6).
J51-12 <=> J432-1
Is the continuity between J51 <=> J431?

1. Disconnect the connector (P/J42) and (P/J51) on the PWB Drive. Replace the PWB Drive.
6 Go to step 7.

1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector on the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2
7

FIP-3 Cyan Toner Cartridge Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) (C) installation Without the tool: Go to step 3.
Switch TCRU Assy (C) actuator installation
Switch TCRU Assy (C) connector installation
Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) check

Switch TCRU Assy (C) (PL12.2.10) signal voltage

Switch TCRU Assy (C) (PL12.2.10) operation

1. Push and release the switch TCRU Assy (C).
Does J51-29 <=> J51-30 have continuity when the switch TCRU Assy (C) is pressed, and

5
J51-29 <=> J433-2 (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.6) (PL12.1.6).
J51-30 <=> J433-1

6 Go to step 7.

7

FIP-4 Black Toner Cartridge Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) (K) installation Without the tool: Go to step 3.
Switch TCRU Assy (K) actuator installation
Switch TCRU Assy (K) connector installation
Switch TCRU Assy (PL12.2.10) check

Switch TCRU Assy (K) (PL12.2.10) signal voltage

Switch TCRU Assy (K) (PL12.2.10) operation

1. Push and release the switch TCRU Assy (K).
Does J51-31 <=> J51-32 have continuity when the switch TCRU Assy (K) is pressed, and

1. Disconnect the P/J431 connector from the switch TCRU Assy (K).
5
J51-31 <=> J434-2 (K). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.6) (PL12.1.6).
J51-32 <=> J434-1

6 Go to step 7.

7

FIP-5 PHD Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Do the following checks show a problem? Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2.
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) installation
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

1. Replace the PHD Assy.
2 Go to step 3. End of procedure
2. Turn on the power.
Does an error occur even when a new PHD Assy is installed?
Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection Reconnect or replace the
Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector for the harness Assy CRUM and the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8)
3 Go to step 4.
harness Assy EEPROM. or harness Assy EEPROM
Is P/J71 connected normally? (PL15.2.10).
Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) connection check

Reconnect or replace the
Check the connection of the P/J710 connector for the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10)
4 Go to step 5. harness Assy CRUM
and the harness Assy CRUM.
(PL12.3.8).
Is P/J710 connected normally?
Power supply to PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

1. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and
the harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
2. Measure the voltage between the following lines.
P71-3 <=> P71-2
Is there 3.3V DC between P71-3 <=> P71-2?
Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10). (Refer to
Ch4-4.2.15.1)
Replace the harness Assy
6 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Go to step 11.
CRUM (PL12.3.8).
P71-4 <=> P710-3
P71-5 <=> P710-2
Power supply to PWB drive (PL15.1.15)

1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector on the PWB Drive.
7 Go to step 8. Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
Is there 3.3V DC between P61-6 <=> P61-5/7?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB drive.
2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. Replace the PWB Drive.
8 Go to step 9.
P61-5 <=> P41-21/22 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
P61-6 <=> P41-23
Is there continuity between P61 <=> P41?
Harness Assy DRV1 (PL15.2.2) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the Harness Assy
9 Go to step 10.
J41-21/22 <=> J11-20/19 DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
J41-23 <=> J11-18

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity check

2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy
10
P71-2 <=> J140-5 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P71-3 <=> J140-4
Is the continuity between P71 <=> J140 normal?

1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10).
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.1)
2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the harness Assy CRUM and the harness
Replace the harness Assy
11 Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). Go to step 12.
CRUM (PL12.3.8).
3. Check the continuity for the following lines.
J71-2 <=> J710-5
J71-3 <=> J710-4

1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy
12 P71-2 <=> J140-5
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P71-3 <=> J140-4
P71-4 <=> J140-3
P71-5 <=> J140-2

FIP-6 BTR Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2.
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) installation
Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) installation
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

1. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
Does an error occur even when a new BTR Assy is installed?
Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) connection

1. Disconnect the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) Reinstall or replace applicable
3 Go to step 4.
2. Check the connection of the sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) P/J136 connector. parts.
Is P/J136 connected correctly?
Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) and Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) connection
Check the connection of the P/J1361 connector for the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness Reinstall or replace applicable
4 Go to step 5.
Assy Front 1. parts.
5V DC power supply to Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11)

1. Disconnect the P/J136 connector from the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11).
2. Measure the voltage between the following lines J136-4 <=> J136-3.
Is there 5V DC between J136-4 <=> J136-3?
Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J1361 connector from the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness Assy
Front 1 (PL15.2.7).
Replace the Harness Assy CTD
(PL6.1.10).
J136-3 <=> J1361-3
J136-4 <=> J1361-2
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 5V DC power supply

1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive.
2. Measure the voltage between J61-8 <=> J61-7.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive. Replace the PWB Drive.
8 Go to step 9.
2. Check the continuity between P61-8 <=> P41-24. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Is there continuity between P61-8 <=> P41-24?

1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS P/J11. (Refer to Ch4-
4.2.18.1)
Replace the Harness Assy
DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
J41-24 <=> J11-17
J41-22/21 <=> J11-19/20
Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity check

2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy Front 1
10
J13-13 <=> P1361-4 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) (PL15.2.7).
J13-14 <=> P1361-3

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) signal check Replace the Sensor Assy ADC.
11 Go to step 12.
Is there 0V DC between P/J136-5 <=> P/J136-3? (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)

1. Disconnect the P/J1361 relay connector between the Harness Assy CTD and the Harness
Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7).
12 J136-1 <=> J1361-5 Go to step 13.
(PL6.1.10).
J136-2 <=> J1361-4
J136-3 <=> J1361-3
J136-5 <=> J1361-1

J13-12 <=> P1361-5 Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy Front 1
13
J13-14 <=> P1361-3 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) (PL15.2.7).
J13-15 <=> P1361-2
J13-16 <=> P1361-1

FIP-7 Fuser Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) installation
Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) check

1. Remove the Fuser Assy (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1). Replace the Fuser Assy.
2 Go to step 3.
2. Measure the resistance between P321-A4 <=> P321-A5 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Is the resistance 400 between P321-A4 <=> P321-A5?
Fuser Assy (PL11.1.3)

1. Replace the Fuser Assy with a new part.
3 Go to step 4. Problem solved.
Does the error still occur?
Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) connection check

1. Check the connection of the P/J138 relay connector for the Harness Assy FSR2 and the
Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7).
FSR2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.4)
J232-A1 <=> P138-5
J232-A2 <=> P138-4
Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) connection check

1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1).
2. Measure the voltage between the following lines. Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy Front 1.
5
J138-1 <=> P13-21 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) (PL 15.2.7)
J138-2 <=> P13-20

FIP-8 CRUM ID Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
PWBA CRUM installation inside PHD Assy
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

1. Replace the PHD Assy with a new part.
Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection
check
Harness Assy CRUM
3 Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector for the harness Assy CRUM and the Go to step 4.
(PL12.3.8) or Harness Assy
harness Assy EEPROM.
EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
Plate Assy Dispenser (PL12.3.1) and Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) connection check
Check the connection of the P/J710 connector for the Plate Assy dispenser and Harness
4 Go to step 5. Harness Assy CRUM
Assy CRUM.
(PL12.3.8).
3.3V DC power supply to PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

1. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) and
the harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
2. Measure the voltage between the following lines.
P71-3 <=> P71-2

1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Plate Assy Dispenser (PL12.3.1).
2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and the Harness
Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). Replace the Harness Assy
6 Go to step 11.
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. CRUM (PL12.3.8).
J710-2 <=> J71-5
J710-3 <=> J71-4

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
3.3V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15)

7 Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295). Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
Is there 3.3V DC between J61-6 <=> J61-5?

2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. Replace the PWB Drive.
8 Go to step 9.
P41-21/22 <=> P61-5 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
P41-23 <=> P61-7
Is there continuity between P41 <=> P61?
Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch4-
4.2.18.1)
DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
J41-21/22 <=> J11-19/20
J41-23 <=> J11-18
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to
Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Replace the Harness Assy Replace the PWBA MCU &
10 2. Check the continuity for the following lines.
EEPROM (PL15.2.10). HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
P140-4 <=> P11-18
P140-5 <=> P11-19/20
Is there continuity in all circuits?

1. Disconnect the P/J710 connector from the Plate Assy Dispenser (PL12.3.1).
2. Disconnect the P/J71 relay connector between the harness Assy CRUM and the harness
Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). Replace the Harness Assy
11 Go to step 12.
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. CRUM (PL12.3.8).
J710-4 <=> J71-3
J710-5 <=> J71-2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

12 Go to step 13.
J140-2 <=> J71-5 EEPROM.
J140-3 <=> J71-4

1. Replace the PHD Assy with a new part.
13 Go to FIP-Noise (Page 5-296). Problem solved.

FIP-9 Media Type Mismatch

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Do the following checks show a problem? With the tool: Go to step 2.
Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) installation Without the tool: Go to step 3.
Chute Assy Regi installation
Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) check

1. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test.
2 2. Move a normal-sized piece of paper in and out of the sensor range. Go to step 3.
3. Move a piece of OHP film in and out of the sensor range.
Is the Sensor OHP functioning normally?
Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) signal check

1. Remove the Sensor OHP. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.4)
2. Connect the sensor OHP connector.
3. Measure the voltage between P/J321-2 <=> P/J321-3 with that out of the paper is sensor
range.
Is the voltage between P/J321-2 <=> P/J321-3 0V DC?
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) signal check

1. Move normal-sized piece of paper into the sensor OHP (PL10.1.16) range.
2. Measure the voltage between P/J321-2 <=> P/J321-3.
Does the voltage change between 0V DC and +3.3V DC between P/J321-2 <=> P/J321-3?
Harness Assy OHP (PL10.1.17) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J321 connector from the Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16).
Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy OHP
5 2. Disconnect the P/J32 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) (PL10.1.17).
3. Check the continuity between J32-2 <=> J321-2.
Is there continuity between J32-2 <=> J321-2?
Power supply to Sensor OHP (PL10.1.16)

Replace the Sensor OHP.
6 Measure the voltage between P/J321-1 <=> P/J321-3. Go to step 7.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Is the voltage between P/J321-1 <=> P/J321-3 5V DC?
Harness Assy OHP (PL10.1.17) continuity

1. Disconnect P/J32 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS.
Replace the Harness Assy OHP
7 2. Disconnect the P/J321 connector from the Sensor OHP. Go to step 8.
(PL10.1.17).

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) power supply circuit continuity

1. Disconnect P/J11 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS.
8 2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. Go to step 9.
P32-3 <=> P11-17

1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
Replace the Harness Assy DRV
1 (PL15.2.2).
J41-24 <=> J11-18
Is there continuity in all lines between J41 <=> J11?
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) continuity

Replace the PWD Drive.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
P41-24 <=> P61-8
Is there continuity in all circuits between P41 <=> P61?
Harness Assy LVCN (PL15.2.1) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10).
11 2. Check the continuity for the following circuit. Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
LVNC (PL15.2.1).
J165-1 <=> J61-8

FIP-10 Feed Jam

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Paper cassette installation
Condition of paper inside cassette
Worn or damaged roll or gear inside feeder
Paper scraps or foreign particles in paper path
Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) installation
Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) installation
Go to Option Feeder FIP-1 Feed

2 Does the problem only occur when paper is fed from Tray 2 or tray 3? Go to step 3.
Jam (Page 5-299).
The paper
Replace the paper and go to
3 Check the paper in Tray 1 and the Tray Assy MSI (PL1.2.12). Go to step 4.
step 4.
Is the paper normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture?
Paper feed path

Remove the foreign particles
4 Check the paper feed path. Go to step 5.
and go to step 5.
Are there any foreign particles in the paper feed path?
Carry out a test print. With the tool: Go to step 6.

5 Problem solved.
Does the problem still occur? Without the tool: Go to step7.
Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) check

1. Insert and remove a piece of paper upward between the Roll Regi Metal (PL10.1.9) and
6 the Roll Regi Rubber (PL10.1.10). Go to step 10. Go to step 7.
2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a digital input test.
Is the Sensor Regi functioning normally?
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) Harness connection check

1. Remove the Chute Assy Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1)
7 Go to step 8. Reinstall applicable parts
2. Check the connection of the Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) P/J181 connector.
Is the continuity between P/J181 normal?
3.3V DC power supply to Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20)

8 Measure the voltage between connectors P18-1 <=> P18-2 of the PWBA MCU & HVPS. Go to step 12. Go to step 9.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No


2. Check the continuity for the following circuits. Replace the PWD Drive.
10 Go to step 11.
P61-6 <=> P41-23 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
P61-5 <=> P41-21/22

11
J41-23 <=> J11-18 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
J41-22/21 <=> J11-19/20
Is there continuity in all lines?
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) harness continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J181 connector from the Sensor Regi (PL10.1.12).
2. Check the continuity for the following.
Replace the Clutch Regi.
12 J18-1 <=> J181-3 Go to step 13.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1)
J18-2 <=> J181-2
J18-3 <=> J181-1
Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20)

1. Replace the Sensor Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.2)
2. Carry out a test print.
Does the problem still occur?
Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2) operation check

TRAY1 With the tool:
1. Print a single page using the paper feed method that is giving the problem.
Go to step 27. Go to step 15.
14 2. Listen for a sound to check if the Drive Assy Main is operating. (If it is difficult to tell, carry
MSI Without the tool:
out the "No" procedure.)
Go to step 46. Go to step 16.
Is the Drive Assy Main operating?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.10) check

1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3).
2. Close the I/L switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the PWBA MCU &
15 Go to step 16.
3. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Drive Assy Main is HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
operating.
Is the Drive Assy Main functioning normally?
Power supply to Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2)

3. Close the I/L Switch.
4. Measure the voltage between P48-1 <=> P/J60-2.
Is there +24V DC between P48-1 <=> P/J60-2?
I/L Switch check

1. Remove the Cover Side R. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.9)
17 2. Open and close the Cover Assy Front Head (PL1.1.2). Go to step 18. Reinstall applicable parts.
3. Check the operation of the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
Is the I/L Switch being pressed correctly?
I/L Switch function check

1. Disconnect the P/J60 and P/J41 connectors of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
2. While pressing and releasing the I/L Switch, check the continuity for the following.
Replace the PWB Drive.
18 P60-1 <=> P41-17/18 Go to step 19.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
P60-2 <=> P41-35
For each circuit, is there continuity when the I/L Switch is pressed and no continuity
when it is released?
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 24V DC power supply check

1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the PWB Drive.
19 Go to step 20.
2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Is there +24V DC between P60-1 <=> P60-2?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J63 connector of the
LVPS (PL15.1.10).
Replace the Harness Assy 24V
(PL15.2.6)
J60-1 <=> J63-1
J60-2 <=> J63-2

21 Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
2. With the Interlock Switch pressed, check the continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) 5V DC power supply check

2. Measure the voltages between the following terminals.
J61-8 <=> J61-7 (5V DC)
J61-6 <=> J61-5 (3.3V DC)
Are the voltages between the P/J61 <=> P/J61 terminals at the standard values?
Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J61 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J165 connector of
the LVPS (PL15.1.10).
23 J61-5 <=> J165-4 Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
LVNC (PL15.2.1).
J61-6 <=> J165-3
J61-7 <=> J165-2
J61-8 <=> J165-1
Harness Assy Drive (PL15.2.2) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J41 connectors of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J11 connector of
the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the Harness Assy Drive 1
24 Go to step 25.
J41-30 <=> J11-11 (PL15.2.2).
J41-31 <=> J11-10
J41-33 <=> J11-8
Is there continuity in the J41 <=> J11 lines?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15)

1. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Drive Assy Main (PL14.1.2)

1. Replace the Drive Assy Main. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) Replace the PWBA MCU &
26 Problem solved.
2. Carry out a test print. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) operation check With the tool:
1. Carry out a test print. Go to step 28.
27 Go to step 35.
2. Check the leading edge of the paper. Without the tool:
Does the leading edge of the paper pass the Roll Assy Turn (PL4.3.21)? Go to step 29.
Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) operation check

Check if the clutch is slipping or
1. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
if the gears are damaged. If
28 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Clutch Assy Turn Go to step 29.
parts are damaged, replace
Tray 1 is operating.
appropriate parts.
Is the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 functioning normally?
24V DC power supply to Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18)

29 Measure the voltage between P/J47-13 <=> P/J47-9 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Go to step 30. Go to step 31.
Is there +24V DC between P/J47-13 <=> P/J47-9?
Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) continuity check

1. Disconnect P/J47 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J475 connector of the
Clutch Assembly Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18).
Feeder (PL4.3.28).
J47-13 <=> P475-2
J47-14 <=> P475-1
Is there continuity in all lines between J47 <=> P475?
PWD Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity

1. Disconnect P/J47 and P/J60 from the PWB Drive. Replace the PWB Drive.
31 Go to step 32.
2. With the Interlock Switch pressed, check the continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. Disconnect P/J60 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J163 connector of the
LVPS (PL15.1.10).
32 2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Go to FIP-DC.
(PL15.2.6).
J60-1 <=> J163-1
J60-2 <=> J163-2
Is there continuity in all lines normal?
Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18) resistance check

1. Disconnect the P/J475 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1. Replace the Clutch Assy Turn
33 Go to step 34.
2. Measure the resistance between J475-1 <=> J475-2. Tray 1 (PL4.3.18).
Is the resistance 200 between J475-1 <=> J475-2?

1. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy
34
2. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1). HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) DRV 2 (PL15.2.3).
Is the continuity normal between J12-9 <=> J42-22 normal?
Solenoid Feed Tray1 (PL.4.3.17) operation check With the tool:

1. Carry out a test print. Replace the PWBA MCU & Go to step 36.
35
2. Check the operation of the Roll Assy Feed (PL4.3.3) from the rear of the printer. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Without the tool:
Is the Roll Assy Feed operating? Go to step 37.
Solenoid Feed Tray1 (PL.4.3.17) check

36 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Solenoid Feed Tray Go to step 37.
1 is operating.
Is the Solenoid Feed Tray 1 functioning normally?
24V DC power supply to Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (PL.4.3.17)

37 Measure the voltage between P/J47-11 <=> P/J47-9 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Go to step 38. Go to step 39.
Is there 24V DC between P/J47-11 <=> P/J47-9?

2. Disconnect the P/J474 connector from the Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.17).
38 3. Check the continuity for the following. Go to step 44.
Feeder (PL4.3.28).
J47-11 <=> P474-2
J47-12 <=> P474-1
Is there continuity in all lines normal?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
I/L Switch check
1. Remove the Cover Side R. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.9)
39 2. Open and close the Cover Assy Front Head (PL1.1.2). Go to step 40. Reinstall applicable parts.
3. Check the operation of the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
Is the I/L Switch being pressed correctly?
I/L switch function check

1. Disconnect the P/J60 and P/J41 connectors of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
2. While pressing and releasing the I/L Switch, check the continuity for the following.
40 P60-1 <=> P47-13 Go to step 41.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
P60-2 <=> P41-35
For each circuit, is there continuity when the I/L Switch is pressed and no continuity
PWB drive (PL15.1.15) 24V DC power supply check

1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the PWB Drive.
41 Go to step 42.
2. Measure the voltage between P60-1 <=> P60-2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Is there +24V DC between P60-1 <=> P60-2?

1. Disconnect the P/J60 connectors of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) and P/J63 connector of
the LVPS (PL15.1.10).
(PL15.2.6).
J60-1 <=> J63-1
J60-2 <=> J63-2

Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer
43 With the Interlock Switch pressed, check the continuity between P47-13 <=> P60-1. Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Solenoid Feed Tray 1(PL.4.3.17) resistance check
Replace the Solenoid FeedTray 1
44 Disconnect the P/J474 connector from the Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.17). Go to step 45.
(PL.4.3.17).

Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2
45 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1).

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) operation check With the tool:

1. Print while feeding paper from the MSI. Go to step 47.
46 Go to step 52.
2. Check if the leading edge of the paper passes the Roll Turn (PL5.1.2). Without the tool:
Does the leading edge of the paper pass the Roll Turn? Go to step 48.
Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) check

Check if the clutch is slipping or
if the gears are damaged. If
47 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Clutch Turn MSI is Go to step 48.
parts are damaged, replace
operating.
appropriate parts.
Is the Clutch Turn MSI functioning normally?
Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9) resistance check

1. Disconnect the P/J19 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Replace the Clutch Turn MSI.
48 Go to step 49.
2. Measure the resistance between J19-1 <=> J19-2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.8.4)
24V DC power supply to Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9)

1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL.11.1.3).
3. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive.
4. Measure the voltage between P41-17/18 <=> P41-19/20.
Is the voltage 24V DC between P41-17/18 <=> P41-19/20?

2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> P60-2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Is the voltage 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2?

Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy DRV 1
J41-17 <=> J11-24
J41-18 <=> J11-23
J41-19/20 <=> J11-22/21
Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) operation check With the tool:

1. Print while feeding paper from the MSI. Replace the PWBA MCU & Go to step 53.
52
2. Check if the leading edge of the paper is fed from the Roll Assy Feed (PL7.1.27). HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Without the tool:
Is the paper fed? Go to step 54.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) check
53 2. Use the diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test to check if the Solenoid Feed MSI Go to step 54.
is operating.
Is the Solenoid Feed MSI functioning normally?
Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) resistance check

1. Disconnect the P/J132 connector from the Solenoid Feed MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.12) Replace the Solenoid Feed MSI.
54 Go to step 55.

1. Disconnect the P/J139 relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 2 and the
Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7).
Replace the Harness Assy Front 2
(PL7.1.2).
J132-1 <=> J139-11
J132-2 <=> J139-10
Is there continuity between P132 <=> J139?

1. Disconnect the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1).
2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the Harness Assy Front 1
56 Go to step 57.
P139-1 <=> J13-11 (PL15.2.7).
P139-2 <=> J13-10
Is there continuity between P13 <=> J139?
Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40) 24V DC power supply

1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL 15.1.15).
57 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Go to step 58. Go to step 59.
3. Measure the voltage between P41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20.
Is the voltage 24V DC between P41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20?

Replace the Harness Assy Replace the PWBA MCU &
58 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
DRV1 (PL15.2.2). HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
3. Measure the voltage between connectors P41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20 of the PWB Drive.
Is the voltage 24V DC between P/J41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit
PWB Drive.
59 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Go to step 60.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Is the voltage 24V DC between P/J60-1 <=> P/J60-2?

2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Harness Assy 24V
3. Measure the voltage between connectors P/J163-1 <=> P/J163-2 of the LVPS (PL15.2.6).
(PL15.1.10).

FIP-11 Regi Jam

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Actuator Regi (PL10.1.21) installation Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2.
Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) installation
Chute Assy Regi (PL10.1.1) installation
Is the paper in tray 1/2/3 and the tray Assy MSI (PL1.2.12) normal with no curl, wrinkles Replace the paper and go to
2 Go to step 3.
or moisture? step 3.
Paper feed path

and go to step 4.

4 Problem solved.
Does the problem still occur? Without the tool: Go to step 6.
Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) check

5 Use the Sensor Regi diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 13. Go to step 6.
Is the Sensor Regi functioning normally?
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) harness connection check

1. Remove the Chute Assy Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1)
6 Go to step 7. Reinstall applicable parts.
2. Check the connection of the Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) P/J181 connector.
Is the continuity between P/J181 normal?
Actuator Regi (PL10.1.21)

Replace the Actuator Regi.
7 Operate and release the actuator regi manually and monitor the operation. Go to step 8.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.3)
Does the Actuator Regi move smoothly?
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) Harness continuity

3. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the Chute Assy Regi.
8 Go to step 9.
J181-1 <=> J18-3 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1)
J181-2 <=> J18-2
J181-3 <=> J18-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. Replace the PWBA MCU &
9 Go to step 10.
2. Check the continuity between P11-18 <=> P18-1. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)

1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). Replace the Harness Assy
10 Go to step 11.
2. Measure the voltage between P41-23 <=> P/J41-22/21 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
Is there 3.3V DC between P/J41-23 <=> P/J41-22/21?

1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). Replace the PWB Drive.
11 Go to step 12.
2. Measure the voltage between P61-6 <=> P/J61-5 of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Is there 3.3V DC between P/J61-6 <=> P/J61-5?
Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity

2. Measure the voltage between P165-3 <=> P/J165-4 of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). LVNC (PL15.2.1).
Sensor Regi (PL10.1.20) With the tool:

1. Replace the Sensor Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.2) Go to step 14.
13 Problem solved.
2. Carry out a test print. Without the tool:
Does the problem still occur? Go to step 15.
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) check

Use the Clutch Regi diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test.
The interlock switch should be closed.
Is the Clutch Regi functioning normally?
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) resistance check

Replace the Clutch Regi.
15 Disconnect the J18 connector from the Clutch Regi. Go to step 16.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1)
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12) power supply

2. Close the Interlock SW.
3. Measure the voltage between connectors P/J41-17/18 <=> P41-19/20 of the PWB Drive
(PL15.1.15).
Is there +24V DC between P41-17/18 <=> P41-19/20?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
J41-17/18 <=> J11-24/23
J41-19/20 <=> J11-22/21
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) power supply circuit

18 Go to step 21.
2. Check the continuity between P11-23/24 <=> P18-4. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Is there continuity between P11-23/24 <=> P18-4?
Roll Regi Metal (PL10.1.9) and Roll Regi Rubber (PL10.1.10) Replace the parts that are
19 Manually turn the Roll Regi Metal and Roll Regi Rubber. preventing the rollers from
Do both rollers turn smoothly? turning.
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit

PWB Drive.
20 2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Go to step 21.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)

2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Harness Assy 24V
3. Measure the voltage between connectors P/J163-1 <=> P/J163-2 of the LVPS (PL15.2.6).
(PL15.1.10).

FIP-12 Fuser Jam

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor Exit actuator installation
1 Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) installation Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2.
Chute Assy In (PL2.1.5) installation
PHD Assy In (PL11.1.3) installation

1. Replace the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Does the error still occur even when the new Fuser Assy is installed?
Is the paper in tray 1/2/3 and the tray Assy MSI (PL1.2.12) normal with no curl, wrinkles Replace the paper and go to
3 Go to step 4.
Paper feed path
and go to step 4.
Carry out a test print.

Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) connector

Remove the Fuser Assy (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) and check if there are any broken or bent Replace the Fuser Assy (Refer With the tool: Go to step 7.
6
terminals. to Ch4-4.2.12.1) Without the tool: Go to step 8.
Is the Fuser Assy connector bent or damaged?
Sensor Exit check

7 Use the Sensor Exit diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 14. Go to step 8.
Is the Sensor Exit functioning normally?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Power supply to Sensor Exit

2. Remove the Sensor Exit from the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
8 3. Connect the P/J232 of the Sensor Exit connector. Go to step 14. Go to step 9.
4. Measure the voltage between J232-A5 <=> J232-A4 of the Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9)
connector.
Is the voltage 3.3V DC between J232-A5 <=> J232-A4?
Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity
Replace the Harness with no
9 J13-17 <=> J138-5 / P138-1 <=> J232-A5 Go to step 10.
continuity.
J13-18 <=> J138-4 / P138-2 <=> J232-A4
J13-19 <=> J138-3 / P138-3 <=> J232-A3

10 Go to step 11.
Is there continuity between P11-18 <=> P/J13-17?
Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2) power supply circuit continuity

11 Go to step 12.

1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). Replace PWB Drive.
12 Go to step 13.


Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Sensor Exit signal check

1. Move a piece of paper into and away from the sensor element of the exit sensor.
14 2. Measure the voltage between P/J327-3 <=> P/J327-2. Go to step 15. Go to step 17.
Is the voltage between P/J327-3 <=> P/J327-2 0V DC when the paper is in the sensor
element, and 3.3V DC when it is away?
Harness Assy FSR 2 (PL6.1.9) continuity check

1. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
2. Disconnect the P/J138 relay connector between the Harness Assy FSR2 and the Harness
Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7). Replace the Harness Assy
15 Go to step 16.
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. FSR2 (PL 6.1.9).
J232-A4 <=> P138-2
J232-A3 <=> J138-3

16 Go to step 17.
J13-19 <=> J138-3 (PL 15.2.7).
J13-18 <=> J138-4
Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) operation check

With the tool:
Replace the PWBA MCU & Go to step 18.
17 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper passes in between the Heat Roller and Belt Assy.
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Without the tool:
Has the edge of the single printed page passed in between the heat roller and belt
Go to step 19.
Assy?
Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) check

18 Use the Drive Assy Fuser diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 19.
Is the Drive Assy Fuser functioning normally?
Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) power supply

19 2. Turn ON the I/L Switch. Go to step 22. Go to step 20.
3. Measure the voltage between P/J52-1 <=> P/J60-2 of the PWB Drive.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

20 2. Turn On the I/L switch. Go to step 21.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
3. Measure the voltage between P60-1 <=> P/J60-2 of the PWB Drive.

21 3. Check the continuity for the following. Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
(PL15.2.6).
J60-1 <=> J163-1
J60-2 <=> J163-2
Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) check

1. Replace the Drive Assy Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.4) Replace the PWBA MCU &
22 End of procedure
2. Carry out a test print. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)

FIP-13 Duplex Jam

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1.1) installation
Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) installation
Actuator Dup (PL7.1.13) installation
Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1) installation
Is the paper in Tray 1/2/3 and the Tray Assy MSI (PL1.2.12) normal with no curl, wrinkles Replace the paper and go to
2 Go to step 3.
Paper feed path

and go to step 4.

4 Problem solved.
Does the problem still occur? Without the tool: Go to step 6.
Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam) check

5 Use the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam) diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 7. Go to step 6.
Is the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam) functioning normally?
Power supply to Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam)

1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL.11.1.3).
6 2. Disconnect the P/J133 connector from the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam). Go to step 12. Go to step 7.
Is the voltage 3.3V DC between J133-3 <=> J232-A4?
Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2) and the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity
7 J13-1 <=> P139-11 / J139-1 <=> J133-3 Go to step 8.
continuity.
J13-2 <=> P139-10 / J139-2 <=> J133-2
J13-3 <=> P139-9 / J139-3 <=> J133-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

8 Go to step 9.
2. Check the continuity between P11-18 <=> P/J13-1. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)

9 Go to step 10.

1. Remove the PHD Assy (PL11.1.3). Replace the PWB Drive.
10 Go to step 11.

Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam) signal check

2. Remove the Sensor Paper (Dup Jam), and then reconnect the connector.
3. Move a piece of paper into and away from the sensor element of the Sensor Paper (Dup
Jam).
Is the voltage between J133-1 <=> J133-2 0V DC when the paper is inserted, and 3.3V
DC when the paper is removed?

1. Disconnect the P/J133 connector from the Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam).
2. Disconnect the P/J139 relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and
the Harness Assy Front 2.
(PL7.1.2).
J133-1 <=> J139-3
J133-2 <=> J139-2
J133-3 <=> J139-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

14 J13-1 <=> J139-11 Go to step 16.
(PL15.2.7).
J13-2 <=> J139-10
J13-3 <=> J139-9
Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Dup Jam) check

1. Replace the Sensor Paper. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.2)
2. Carry out duplex printing.
Exit Roll Replace the parts that are

16 Turn the Exit Roll of the Fuser Assy (PL.9.1.1) manually. Go to step 17. preventing the rollers from
Does the Exit Roller turn smoothly when it is turned manually? turning.
With the tool:
Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) operation check
Go to step 18.
17 Carry out duplex printing. Go to step 23.
Without the tool:
Does the paper turn over when duplex printing is carried out?
Go to step 19.
Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) check
1. Install the PDH Assy.
2. Use the Motor Assy Dup diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test.
Is the Motor Assy Dup functioning normally?
Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) power supply

19 2. Turn On the I/L Switch. Go to step 20.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
3. Measure the voltage between P/J50-1 <=> P/J60-2 of the PWB Drive.

20 2. Turn On the I/L switch. Go to step 21.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
3. Measure the voltage between P60-1 <=> P/J60-2 of the PWB Drive.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

21 3. Check the continuity for the following. Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
(PL15.2.6).
J60-1 <=> J163-1
J60-2 <=> J163-2
Harness Assy Dup (PL7.1.23) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J131 connector from the Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8).
J131-1 <=> J50-6
Replace the Harness Assy Dup
22 J131-2 <=> J50-5 Go to step 23.
(PL 7.1.23).
J131-3 <=> J50-4
J131-4 <=> J50-3
J131-5 <=> J50-2
J131-6 <=> J50-1
Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8) check

1. Replace the Motor Assy Dup. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.11.4) Replace the PWBA MCU &
23 End of procedure
2. Carry out duplex printing. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Does the error occur even when the Motor Assy Dup is replaced with a new one?

FIP-14 ROS Failure

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy ROS (PL15.2.5) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J151 connector from the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1)
Replace the Harness Assy SOS
1 2. Disconnect the P/J15 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Go to step 2.
(PL15.2.5).
3. Check the continuity in all lines between J15 <=>J151.
Is the continuity normal between J15 <=> P151?
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

1. Install the new PHD Assy.
2. Turn On the power.
LD 5V DC circuit continuity (1)

1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Replace the PWBA MCU &
3 Go to step 4.
Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10), Harness Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8) continuity

Check the continuity for the following lines.
Replace the harness with no
4 J140-1 <=> P71-6/J71-1 <=> J710-6 Go to step 5.
continuity.
J140-6 <=> P71-1/J71-6 <=> J710-1
Power supply to 5V DC/24V DC

2. Measure the voltages at each terminal of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
P/J41-24 <=> P/J41-21/22 (5V DC)
P/J41-17/18 <=> P/J41-19/20 (24V DC when interlock switch is on)
Are the voltages between all terminals at the standard values?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

J41-17/18 <=> J11-24/23 Replace the Harness Assy
6 Go to step 7.
J41-19/20 <=> J11-22/21 DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
J41-24 <=> J11-17
J41-23 <=> J11-18
J41-21/22 <=> J11-20/19

1. Disconnect the P/J15 and P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS.
7 P11-23/24 <=> P15-4 Go to step 10.
P11-17 <=> P15-7 <=> P140-6
P/J15-6 <=> P/J1401

1. Disconnect the P/J60 and P/J61 connector from the PWB Drive.
2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer
8 Go to step 9.
P60-1 <=> P41-17/18 (Press the interlock switch) to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
P61-8 <=> P41-24
Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6), Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J163 and P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10).
2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the harness with no
J163-1 <=> J60-1 continuity.
J165-1 <=> J61-8

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
ROS Assy (PL11.1.1)

1. Replace the ROS Assy with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1)

1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10)

1. Replace the Conn Assy CRUM MC.

FIP-15 Fuser Failure

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) installation
Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) and Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9) connector check
2. Check if there are any broken or bent terminals in the Fuser Assy and Harness Assy
2 Go to step 3. Replace the applicable parts.
FSR2.
Are any of the terminals in the Fuser Assy and Harness Assy FSR2 connectors bent or
broken?

1. Replace the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Harness Assy FSR 2 (PL6.1.9) continuity

2. Disconnect the P/J138 relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and
the Harness Assy FSR2.
FSR2 (PL 6.1.9).
J232-A2 <=> P138-4
J232-A1 <=> P138-5
J232-3 <=> J162-2
J232-1 <=> J162-1
Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity

5 Go to step 6.
J138-5 <=> J13-17 (PL15.2.7).
J138-4 <=> J13-18

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

6 2. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Go to step 7.
LVNC (PL15.2.1).

Replace the Harness Assy DRV
7 2. Disconnect the P/J42 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Go to step 8.
2 (PL15.2.3).

8 Check the continuity between P42-11 <=> P61-4 of the PWB Drive. Go to step 9.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
LVPS (PL15.1.10)
1. Replace the LVPS with a new part. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.3) Replace the PWBA MCU &
9 Problem solved.
2. Turn On the power. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)

FIP-16 NV-RAM Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Turn off the power and turn on the power. Problem solved, or if an error
1 Go to step 2.
Does the problem occur? occurs again, go to step 2.


FIP-17 CTD Sensor Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) check

PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) check


1. Remove the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)
2. Disconnect the P/J1361 replay connector from the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and
the Harness Assy CTD.
4 J136-1 <=> J1361-5 Go to step 5.
(PL6.1.10).
J136-2 <=> J1361-4
J136-3 <=> J1361-3
J136-4 <=> J1361-2
J136-5 <=> J1361-1

1. Remove the P/J13 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
J13-12 <=> P1361-5
5 J13-13 <=> P1361-4 Go to step 6.
(PL15.2.7).
J13-14 <=> P1361-3
J13-15 <=> P1361-2
J13-16 <=> P1361-1
Is the continuity between J13 <=> P1361 normal?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Replace the Sensor Assy ADC (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)

1. Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)
5V DC power supply
2. Measure the voltage between P41-24 <=> P41-21/22.
Is there 5V DC between P41-24 <=> P41-21/22?

1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Replace the Harness Assy DRV 1
8 Go to step 9.
2. Check the continuity between J41-24 <=> J11-17. (PL15.2.2).
Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11)

1. Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) Replace the PWBA MCU &
9 End of procedure
Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Assy ADC is installed?

10 Go to step 11.
Is there 5V DC between J61-8 <=> J61-7.

1. Disconnect the P/J165 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Replace the Harness Assy
2. Measure the voltage between P165-1 <=> P165-2. LVNC (PL15.2.1).
Is there 5V DC between P165-1 <=> P165-2.

FIP-18 Fan Motor Failure

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) installation
Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) installation
Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) Fail signal

Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector.
P/J42-29 <=> P/J42-14/15
Power supply to Fan Rear (PL15.1.3)

Replace the LVPS.
3 Measure the voltage between connectors P/J166-1 <=> P/J166-3 of the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Go to step 4.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.3)
Is the voltage 15V DC or 24V DC between P/J166-1 <=> P/J166-3?
Fan Rear (PL15.1.3)

1. Replace the Fan Rear. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.2) Replace the PWBA MCU &
4 Problem solved.
2. Turn On the power. HVPS.
Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) Fail signal

Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. Replace the PWBA MCU &
5 Go to step 6.
P/J42-27 <=> P/J42-14/15 HVPS.
Power supply to Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9)

Measure the following voltages at the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) connector. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer
6 Go to step 7.
P/J50-7 <=> P/J50-9 to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9)

1. Replace the Fan Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.3) Replace the PWBA MCU &
7 Problem solved.

FIP-19 Low Density Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Remaining Toner
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) check


Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10) connection check

Check the P/J136 connector of the Harness Assy CTD and sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11).
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)
Is the Harness Assy CTD connected correctly to the Sensor Assy ADC?

1. Disconnect the P/J136 connector from the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11).
5 J136-1 <=> J1361-5 Go to step 6.
(PL6.1.10).
J136-2 <=> J1361-4
J136-3 <=> J1361-3
J136-4 <=> J1361-2
J136-5 <=> J1361-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

P1361-1 <=> J13-16
6 P1361-2 <=> J13-15 Go to step 7.
(PL15.2.7).
P1361-3 <=> J13-14
P1361-4 <=> J13-13
P1361-5 <=> J13-12
5V DC power supply
2. Measure the voltage between P41-24 <=> P41-21/22.
Is there 5V DC between P41-24 <=> P41-21/22?

1. Disconnect the P/J11 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Replace the Harness Assy DRV 1
8 Go to step 9.
2. Check the continuity between J41-24 <=> J11-17. (PL15.2.2).
Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11)

1. Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) Replace the PWBA MCU &
9 End of procedure
Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Assy ADC is installed?

10 Go to step 11.


FIP-20 Firmware Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
See if the problem recurs; if it

1 Does the error occur even when the power is turned Off and back On? Go to step 2.
does, go to step 2.
Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection check
2 Check the connection of the P/J144 connector of the PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8). Go to step 3. Connect P/J144 correctly.
Is P/J144 correctly connected?
3.3V DC power supply to PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8)

1. Disconnect the P/J144 connector from the PWB EEPROM.

Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection

1. Remove the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
5 Go to step 6. Connect P/J140 correctly.
2. Check the connection of the P/J140 connector of the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) continuity

Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
J140-9 <=> J144-2
J140-10 <=> J144-1
PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8)

1. Replace the PWB EEPROM. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.8)
Does the error code still appear?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10) connection

8 Go to step 9. Connect P/J140 correctly.

EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
J140-7 <=> J144-4
J140-8 <=> J144-3


FIP-21 Environment Sensor Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor Hum Temp (PL4.2.4) installation
Connector connections
1. Remove the Housing Assy Elec. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1)
3. Remove the Cover Side L. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.14) Reconnect the connector or
2 Go to step 3.
4. Check the connection of the P/J2361 relay connector between the Harness Assy TMPB replace the parts.
(PL15.2.12) and the Harness Assy TMPA (PL4.2.3).
5. Check the connection P/J231 connector of the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11).
Are the connectors connected correctly?
Sensor Hum Temp (PL4.2.4) signal check

Measure the voltage at the P/J2361 relay connector between the Harness Assy TMPB
(PL15.2.12) and the Harness Assy TMPA (PL4.2.3).
P/J2361-1 <=> P/J2361-2 (3V DC or 0.1V DC or less)
P/J2361-3 <=> P/J2361-2 (2.5V DC or more)
Are the voltages between P/J2361 <=> P/J2361 within the ranges?
Sensor Hum Temp (PL4.2.4) signal check

1. Remove the Sensor Hum Temp. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.5)
2. Connect the P/J231 connector of the Sensor Hum Temp.
4 3. Measure the voltages between the following terminals. Go to step 5.
TMPA (PL4.2.3).
P/J231-4 <=> P/J231-3 (3V DC or 0.1V DC or less)
P/J231-2 <=> P/J231-3 (2.5V DC or more)
Are the voltages between P/J231 <=> P/J231 within the ranges?
Power supply to Sensor Hum Temp (PL4.2.4)

Replace the Sensor Hum Temp.
5 Measure the voltage between P231-1 <=> P231-3. Go to step 6.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.5)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy TMPA (PL4.2.3), Harness Assy TMPB (PL15.2.12) continuity

J24-1 <=> P2361-4/J2361-1 <=> J231-4
6 J24-2 <=> P2361-3/J2361-2 <=> J231-3 Go to step 7.
continuity.
J24-3 <=> P2361-2/J2361-3 <=> J231-2
J24-4 <=> P2361-1/J2361-4 <=> J231-1

1. Disconnect the P/J11 and P/J24 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-
7 4.2.18.1) Go to step 8.
2. Check the continuity between P11-17 <=> P24-4.
Is the continuity normal between P11-17 <=> P24-4 normal?

1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Harness Assy DRV 1
8 Go to step 9.
2. Measure the voltage between connectors P41-24 <=> P42-14/15 of the PWB Drive. (PL15.2.2).
Is there 5V DC between P41-24 <=> P42-14/15.

9 Go to step 10.


FIP-22 Yellow Toner Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2.
Toner Cartridge installation
Toner Motor installation
Toner Cartridge (Y) (PL12.1.1) check

1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (Y).
Does an error occur even when a new Cartridge is installed?
Sensor Toner Low (Y) (PL12.2.9) signal check

Measure the voltage between connectors P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15 of the PWB Drive
(PL15.1.15).
Is the resistance + 0.2V DC between P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15?

2. Disconnect the P/J441 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (Y).
Replace the Harness Assy TNR
(PL12.1.6).
J441-2 <=> J51-16
J441-3 <=> J51-15
Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) check

1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7)

With the tool: Go to step 7. Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2
6 2. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Without the tool: Go to step 8. (PL15.2.3).

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Toner Motor check

Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. Check the toner mixing Auger
7 Go to step 8.
The Interlock SW should be closed. and the Gears for damage.
Is the Toner Motor functioning normally?
Power supply to Toner Motor (Y) of Holder Assy (Y) (PL12.2.5)

8 2. Turn on the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Go to step 9. Go to step 12.
Is there +24V DC between P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2.

1. Disconnect the P/J514 connector from the Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8).
J511-1 <=> J51-5 Replace the Harness Assy TNR
9 Go to step 10.
J511-2 <=> J51-4 (PL12.1.6).
J511-3 <=> J51-3
J511-4 <=> J51-2
J511-5 <=> J51-1
Toner Motor check

1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2)
Does an error occur even when a new Toner Motor is installed?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy Drive 1 (PL15.2.2) continuity check

Check the following. Are the continuities normal? Replace the PWB Drive (Refer
J11-25 <=> J41-16 to Ch4-4.2.18.5). If this does not
Replace the Harness Assy Drive 1
11 J11-26 <=> J41-15 solve the problem, replace the
(PL15.2.2).
J11-27 <=> J41-14 PWBA MCU & HVPS.
J11-28 <=> J41-13 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)

12 Go to step 13.

1. Disconnect the P/J163 connector from the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Replace the Harness Assy 24V
2. Measure the voltage between P163-1 <=> P163-2. (PL15.2.6).
Is there 24V DC between P163-1 <=> P163-2?

FIP-23 Magenta Toner Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Toner Cartridge (M) (PL12.1.2) check

1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (M).
Sensor Toner Low (M) (PL12.2.9) signal check

(PL15.1.15).

2. Disconnect the P/J442 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (M).
(PL12.1.6).
J442-2 <=> J51-18
J442-3 <=> J51-17



Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Toner Motor check

7 Go to step 8.
Power supply to Toner Motor (M) of Holder Assy (M) (PL12.2.6)


9 Go to step 10.
J513-2 <=> J51-9 (PL12.1.6).
J513-3 <=> J51-8
J513-4 <=> J51-7
J513-5 <=> J51-6
Toner Motor check

1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (M). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.3)

(PL15.2.2).
J11-31 <=> J41-10 PWBA MCU & HVPS.
J11-32 <=> J41-9 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

12 Go to step 13.


FIP-24 Cyan Toner Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Toner Cartridge (C) (PL12.1.3) check
1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (C).
Sensor Toner Low (C) (PL12.2.9) signal check
(PL15.1.15).
Is the resistance +0.2V DC between P/J51-34 <=> P/J51-33?
2. Disconnect the P/J443 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (C).
(PL12.1.6).
J443-2 <=> J51-34
J443-3 <=> J51-33
Toner Motor check
7 Go to step 8.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Power supply to Toner Motor (C) of Holder Assy (M) (PL12.2.7)
9 Go to step 10.
J513-2 <=> J51-22 (PL12.1.6).
J513-3 <=> J51-21
J513-4 <=> J51-20
J513-5 <=> J51-19
Toner Motor check
1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.4)
Replace the Harness Assy Drive
1 (PL15.2.2).
J11-35 <=> J41-6 PWBA MCU & HVPS.
J11-36 <=> J41-5 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
12 Go to step 13.

FIP-25 Black Toner Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Toner Cartridge (K) (PL12.1.4) check
1. Replace the Toner Cartridge (K).
Sensor Toner Low (K) (PL12.2.9) signal check
(PL15.1.15).
(PL12.1.6).
J444-2 <=> J51-36
J444-3 <=> J51-35
Toner Motor check
7 Go to step 8.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Power supply to Toner Motor (K) of Holder Assy (K) (PL12.2.8)
9 Go to step 10.
J514-2 <=> J51-27 (PL12.1.6).
J514-3 <=> J51-26
J514-4 <=> J51-25
J514-5 <=> J51-24
Toner Motor check
1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (K). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.5)
Replace the Harness Assy Drive
1 (PL15.2.2).
J11-39 <=> J41-2 PWBA MCU & HVPS.
J11-40 <=> J41-1 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
1. Disconnect the P/J60 connector from the PWB Drive. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer
12 Go to step 13.
2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. to Ch4-4.2.18.5)

FIP-26 PHD Life Over

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting

Does the error still occur even when the new PHD Assy is installed?
check Reconnect or replace the
1. Remove the Cover Side L. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.14) Harness Assy CRUM
3 Go to step 4.
2. Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and (PL12.3.8) or Harness Assy
Harness Assy EEPROM. EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
Is the continuity between Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM normal?
PWBA CRUM connection check

1. Remove the Holder TCRU Assy Unit. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.1) Reconnect or replace the
4 2. Check the connection between the Conn Assy CRUM MC (PL12.3.10) and the Harness Go to step 5. Harness Assy CRUM
Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8). (PL12.3.8).
Is the PWBA CRUM connector connected correctly to the harness connector?

Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
5 Go to step 6.
J710-2 <=> J71-5 CRUM (PL12.3.8).
J710-3 <=> J71-4
J710-4 <=> J71-3
J710-5 <=> J71-2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. Disconnect the P/J140 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS.
P71-2 <=> J140-5 Replace the Harness Assy
6 Go to step 7.
P71-3 <=> J140-4 EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P71-4 <=> J140-3
P71-5 <=> J140-2


FIP-27 BTR Life Over

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) installation
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

1. Remove the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
2. Look at the part of the BTR Assy that goes into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner Replace the BTR Assy.
2 Go to step 3.
Full (PL6.1.13). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
Is the part of the BTR Assy that goes into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner Full
blocked with recovered toner?
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

Are the transparent sections at the left and right of the BTR Assy part that goes into the
3 Go to step 4. Clean the transparent surfaces.
sensor element of the Sensor Toner Full (PL6.1.13) clean?
Is the BTR Assy part that goes into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner Full clean?
BTR Assy (PL11.1.3)

1. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) With the tool: Go to step 5.
4 End of procedure
2. Turn On the power. Without the tool: Go to step 6.
Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) check

5 Use the Sensor TNR Full diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 9. Go to step 6.
Is the Sensor TNR Full functioning normally?
Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) signal check

2. Insert an obstruction such as a piece of paper into the sensor element of the Sensor Toner
Full and then remove it.
6 3. Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS Go to step 9. Go to step 7.
and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P/J141-2 <=> P/J141-1
Is the voltage between P/J141-2 <=> P/J141-1 3.3V DC when the obstruction is inserted,
and 0V DC when it is removed?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Power supply to Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13)
Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS
7 and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). Go to step 8.
EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P/J141-3 <=> P/J141-1
Harness Assy TFLSNS (PL6.1.14) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J142 connector from the Sensor TNR Full.
2. Disconnect the P/J141 relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS and the
Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
Replace the Sensor TNR Full. Replace the Harness Assy
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.3) TFLSNS (PL6.1.14).
J142-1 <=> J141-3
J142-2 <=> J141-2
J142-3 <=> J141-1


FIP-28 Fuser Life Over

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No


FIP-29 CTD Sensor Dustiness

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor Assy (PL6.1.11) cleaning

1. Clean the sensor element of the Sensor Assy ADC with a soft cloth.

1. Open the BTR Assy (PL9.1.2).
2. Check the connection of the P/J136 connector for the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11).

1. Disconnect the P/J136 connector from the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)
4 J136-1 <=> J1361-5 Go to step 5.
(PL6.1.10).
J136-2 <=> J1361-4
J136-3 <=> J1361-3
J136-4 <=> J1361-2
J136-5 <=> J1361-1

P1361-1 <=> J13-16
5 P1361-2 <=> J13-15 Go to step 6.
(PL15.2.7).
P1361-3 <=> J13-14
P1361-4 <=> J13-13
P1361-5 <=> J13-12

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) signal check

Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1
Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. Replace the PWBA MCU &
6 (PL15.2.7) and the Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10).
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2) HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
P/J1361-1 <=> P/J1361-3

FIP-30 Front Cover

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
With the tool: Go to step 2.
1 PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) installation Reinstall applicable parts.
Without the tool: Go to step 3.
Front Cover installation
Interlock SW actuator installation
Interlock SW check
2 Use the Interlock SW diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 3.
Is the Interlock SW functioning normally?
Interlock Switch operation check

1. Check that the PHD Assy is installed. Replace the parts that are
2. Remove the Cover Side R. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.9) causing the obstruction, or
3 Go to step 4.
3. Open and close the Chute Assy Out (PL2.1.6) and check the operation of the Interlock replace the PWB Drive (Refer to
Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Ch4-4.2.18.5).
Does the Interlock Switch operate normally?
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) signal check

1. Open and close the Chute Assy Out (PL2.1.6).
2. Check the following voltages. Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer
4
P/J41-35 <=> P/J41-21/22 HVPS. to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Are the voltages between P/J41-35 <=> P/J41-21/22 0V DC when the Chute Assy Out is
closed?

FIP-31 Yellow Toner Near Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) installation Reinstall applicable parts Go to step 2.


P/J51-16 <=> P/J51-15

1. Disconnect the P/J441 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (Y).
(PL12.1.6).
J441-2 <=> J51-16
J441-3 <=> J51-15

1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7)
Does an error occur even when a new Sensor Toner Low is installed?

J12-23 <=> J42-8
J12-3 <=> J42-28

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Toner Motor check

7 Go to step 8.

P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2
Is there + 24V DC between P/J51-1 <=> P/J60-2.
24V DC power supply to PWB Drive (PL15.1.15)

2. Measure the voltage between J60-1 <=> J60-2. to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Is there + 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2?

1. Disconnect the P/J511 connector from the Holder Assy (Y) (PL12.2.5).
10 Go to step 11.
J511-2 <=> J51-4 (PL12.1.6).
J511-3 <=> J51-3
J511-4 <=> J51-2
J511-5 <=> J51-1
Toner Motor check

1. Replace the Holder Assy (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

12 J11-25 <=> J41-16 Go to step 13.
(PL15.2.2).
J11-26 <=> J41-15
J11-27 <=> J41-14
J11-28 <=> J41-13

1. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5) Replace the PWBA MCU &
13 Problem solved.

FIP-32 Magenta Toner Near Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting


P/J51-18 <=> P/J51-17

1. Disconnect the P/J442 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (M).
(PL12.1.6).
J442-2 <=> J51-18
J442-3 <=> J51-17

1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low (M). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7)

J12-22 <=> J42-9
J12-3 <=> J42-28

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Check the toner mixing Auger
Toner Motor check and the Gears for damage. If
Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. there is damaged part, replace
7 Go to step 8.
The Interlock SW should be closed. the applicable part and if there is
Is the Toner Motor functioning normally? nothing, replace the PWBA
MCU & HVPS.

P/J51-6 <=> P/J60-2

Is there +24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2?

1. Disconnect the P/J512 connector from the Holder Assy (M) (PL12.2.6).
10 Go to step 11.
J512-2 <=> J51-9 (PL12.1.6).
J512-3 <=> J51-8
J512-4 <=> J51-7
J512-5 <=> J51-6
Toner Motor check


Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

12 J11-29 <=> J41-12 Go to step 13.
(PL15.2.2).
J11-30 <=> J41-11
J11-31 <=> J41-10
J11-32 <=> J41-9

13 Problem solved.

FIP-33 Cyan Toner Near Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting


P/J51-34 <=> P/J51-33

(PL12.1.6).
J443-2 <=> J51-34
J443-3 <=> J51-33

1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7)

J12-21 <=> J42-10
J12-3 <=> J42-28

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
7 Go to step 8.
MCU & HVPS.
Power supply to Toner Motor (C) of Holder Assy (C) (PL12.2.7)

P/J51-19 <=> P/J60-2
Is there + 24V DC between P/J51-19 <=> P/J60-2.

Is there + 24V DC between J60-1 <=> J60-2?

1. Disconnect the P/J513 connector from the Holder Assy (C) (PL12.2.7).
10 Go to step 11.
J513-2 <=> J51-22 (PL12.1.6).
J513-3 <=> J51-21
J513-4 <=> J51-20
J513-5 <=> J51-19
Toner Motor check

1. Replace the Holder Assy (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.4)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

Replace the Harness Assy DRV 1
12 J11-33 <=> J41-8 Go to step 13.
(PL15.2.2).
J11-34 <=> J41-7
J11-35 <=> J41-6
J11-36 <=> J41-5

13 Problem solved.

FIP-34 Black Toner Near Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting


P/J51-36 <=> P/J51-35

(PL12.1.6).
J444-2 <=> J51-36
J444-3 <=> J51-35

1. Replace the Sensor Toner Low (K). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.7)

J12-24 <=> J42-7
J12-3 <=> J42-28

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
7 Go to step 8.
MCU & HVPS.

P/J51-24 <=> P/J60-2


10 Go to step 11.
J514-2 <=> J51-27 (PL12.1.6).
J514-3 <=> J51-26
J514-4 <=> J51-25
J514-5 <=> J51-24
Toner Motor check


Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

Replace the Harness Assy DRV 1
12 J11-37 <=> J41-4 Go to step 13.
(PL15.2.2).
J11-38 <=> J41-3
J11-39 <=> J41-2
J11-40 <=> J41-1

13 Problem solved.

FIP-35 PHD Life Warning

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting

3 Go to step 4.
2. Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector for the Harness Assy CRUM and (PL12.3.8) or Harness Assy

Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8). (PL12.3.8).

5 Go to step 6.
J710-2 <=> J71-5 CRUM (PL12.3.8).
J710-3 <=> J71-4
J710-4 <=> J71-3
J710-5 <=> J71-2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

6 Go to step 7.
P71-3 <=> J140-4 EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P71-4 <=> J140-3
P71-5 <=> J140-2


FIP-36 BTR Life Warning

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

1. Replace the BTR Assy. With the tool: Go to step 3.
2 End of procedure
Does the error still occur even when the new BTR Assy is installed?
Sensor TNR Full check


2. Insert an obstruction into the sensor element of the Sensor TNR Full and then remove it.
4 3. Measure the following voltage at the P/J142 connector of the sensor TNR Full. Go to step 11. Go to step 5.
P/J142-2 <=> P/J142-3
Is the voltage between P/J142-2 <=> P/J142-3 3.3V DC when the obstruction is inserted,
and 0V DC when it is removed?

Measure the following voltage at the P/J142 connector of the sensor TNR Full.
5 Go to step 6. EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P/J142-1 <=> P/J142-3
Go to step 6.

1. Disconnect the P/J142 connector of the sensor TNR Full. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.3)
J142-1 <=> J141-3
J142-2 <=> J141-2
J142-3 <=> J141-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

2. Measure the voltage between P61-8 <=> J61-7.
PWB drive (PL15.1.15) power supply circuit continuity

8 Go to step 9.
2. Check the continuity between P61-8 <=> P41-24. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5).

9 Go to step 10.
J11-17 <=> J41-24 DRV1 (PL15.2.2).
J11-19/20 <=> J41-22/21

10
J140-12 <=> J141-2 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
J140-11 <=> J141-3


FIP-37 CTD Sensor Dustiness

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor Assy (PL6.1.11) cleaning

1. Clean the sensor element of the sensor Assy ADC with a soft cloth.

1. Open the BTR Assy (PL9.1.2).
2. Check the connection of the P/J136 connector for the Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11).

1. Disconnect the P/J136 connector from the Sensor Assy ADC. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.2)
4 J136-1 <=> J1361-5 Go to step 5.
(PL6.1.10).
J136-2 <=> J1361-4
J136-3 <=> J1361-3
J136-4 <=> J1361-2
J136-5 <=> J1361-1

P1361-1 <=> J13-16
5 P1361-2 <=> J13-15 Go to step 6.
(PL15.2.7).
P1361-3 <=> J13-14
P1361-4 <=> J13-13
P1361-5 <=> J13-12

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Sensor Assy ADC (PL6.1.11) signal check

Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1
Replace the Sensor Assy ADC. Replace the PWBA MCU &
6 (PL15.2.7) and the Harness Assy CTD (PL6.1.10).
P/J1361-1 <=> P/J1361-3

FIP-38 Tray 1 Paper Near Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) installation
Sensor actuator installation
2 Does the error occur even when paper is added? End of procedure
Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) check
3 Use the Sensor No/Low Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 4.
Is the Sensor No/Low Paper functioning normally?
Lever Low Paper (PL4.2.10)

1. Remove the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4). Replace the Lever Low Paper.
4 Go to step 5.
2. Operate the Lever Low Paper manually. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.8).
Does the Lever Low Paper move smoothly?
Power supply to Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P)


1. Disconnect the P/J47 connector from the PWBA Drive (PL15.1.15).
2. Disconnect the P/J473 connector from the Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4).
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the Sensor Assy
6 Go to step 7.
J47-8 <=> J423-3 Feeder (PL4.3.28).
J47-9 <=> J423-2
J47-10 <=> J423-1
Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) sensor signal check

2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Sensor No/Low
7 3. While operating the Lever Low Paper (PL4.2.10) manually, measure the following voltage. Go to step 8. Paper (L/P).
P/J47-10 <=> P/J47-9 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.13)
Is the voltage between P/J47-10 <=> P/J47-9 +3.3V DC at the Low Paper condition, and
0V DC when the lever is released?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. Disconnect the P/J42 and P/J47 connector from the PWB Drive. Replace the PWB Drive. (Refer
8 Go to step 9.
2. Measure the voltage between P47-10 <=> P42-20. to Ch4-4.2.18.5)

Check the continuity for the following. Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2
9
J42-20 <=> J12-11 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) (PL15.2.3).
Is there continuity between each terminal?

1. Disconnect the P/J61 and P/J47 connector from the PWB Drive. Replace the PWB Drive.
10 Go to step 11.
Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) continuity check

11 3. Check the continuity for the following lines. Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295). Replace the LVNC (PL15.2.1).
J61-6 <=> J165-3
J61-5 <=> J165-4

FIP-39 Paper Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (L/P) installation Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2.
Link Actuator (PL4.3.6) installation
Actuator No Paper (PL4.3.4) installation
2 Does the error occur even when paper is added? Go to step 3. End of procedure
Link Actuator (PL4.3.6), Actuator No Paper (PL4.3.5) Replace the part that is causing
3 Operate the Link Actuator manually and check. the problem. (Refer to Ch4-
Do the Link Actuator and Actuator No Paper operate smoothly? 4.2.7.15, 4.2.7.16)
Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (N/P) check

4 Use the Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P) diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 5.
Is the Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P) functioning normally?
Power supply to Sensor No/Low Paper (PL4.3.4) (N/P)

P/J47-5 <=> P/J47-6
Is there +3.3V DC between P/J47-5 <=> P/J47-6?
Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J472 connector from the Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P).
6 Go to step 7.
J47-5 <=> J472-3 Feeder (PL4.3.28).
J47-6 <=> J472-2
J47-7 <=> J472-1
PWB Drive (PL15.1.15) sensor signal check

2. Close the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Sensor No/Low
7 3. While operating the Link Actuator (PL4.3.6) manually, measure the following voltage. Go to step 8. Paper (N/P).
P/J47-7 <=> P/J47-6 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.13)
Is the voltage between P47-7 <=> P47-6 +3.3V DC at the No Paper condition, and 0V DC
when paper is present?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

8 Go to step 9.
2. Measure the voltage between P47-7 <=> P42-19. to Ch4-4.2.18.5)

1. Disconnect the P/J12 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2
9
2. Check the continuity between P42-19 <=> J12-12. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) (PL15.2.3).
Is there continuity between P42-19 <=> J12-12?

10 Go to step 11.

2. Check the continuity between J61-6 <=> J1165-3. LVNC (PL15.2.1).

FIP-40 Upper Cassette Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Switch Size Tray 1 (PL4.2.8) installation
Paper Cassette installation
Switch Size Tray 1 (PL4.2.8)

1. Remove the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4). Replace the Switch Size Tray 1.
2 Go to step 3.
2. Operate the Switch Assy Tray 1 actuators manually. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.7)
Do the switch Assy Tray 1 actuators operate smoothly?
Switch Size Tray 1 (PL4.2.8) continuity

While operating the Switch Assy Tray 1 actuators manually, check the following continuities.
P/J47-1 <=> P/J47-3
3 P/J47-2 <=>P/J47-3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
P/J47-4 <=> P/J47-3
For each circuit, is there continuity when the actuator is operated, and no continuity
Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28) continuity

P/J47-1 <=> J471-4
Replace the Switch Size Tray 1. Replace the Harness Assy
4 P/J47-2 <=> J471-3
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.7) Feeder (PL4.3.28).
P/J47-3 <=> J471-2
P/J47-4 <=> J471-1

Check the continuity for the following circuits.
P47-1 <=> P42-16 Replace the PWB Drive.
5 Go to step 6.
P47-2 <=> P42-17 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
P47-4 <=> P42-18

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

J42-16 <=> J12-15 Replace the Harness Assy DRV 2
6 Go to step 7.
J42-17 <=> J12-14 (PL15.2.3).
J42-18 <=> J12-13
Actuator Size (PL3.2.21) Replace the cassette Assy

7 While changing the paper size settings, check the Actuator Size operation. (Refer to Ch7.) Go to step 8. (PL2.1.4), or replace the
Does the Actuator Size operate correctly? defective part.
Switch size tray 1 (PL4.2.8) signal

1. Insert a Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4) that contains paper.
2. Check the voltages between the following terminals, and compare them with the specified
paper size values. (Refer to Ch7.) Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Switch Size Tray 1.
8
P/J47-1 <=> P/J47-3 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.7)
P/J47-2 <=> P/J47-3
P/J47-4 <=> P/J47-3
Do the signals match the paper size settings?

FIP-41 Full Stack

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack) installation
Actuator Full Stack (PL7.1.5) installation
Actuator Full Stack (PL7.1.5)

Operate the full stack actuator manually, and look at the relationship between its movement With the tool: Go to step 3. Replace the Actuator Full Stack.
2
and the paper sensor (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack). Without the tool: Go to step 4. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.3)
Does the Actuator Full Stack move smoothly?
Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack) check

3 Use the Sensor Paper (Full Stack) diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 4.
Is the Sensor Paper (Full Stack) functioning normally?
Power supply to Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack)
1. Remove the Sensor Paper (Full Stack).
2. Measure the voltage between J134-3 <=> P/J134-2.
Sensor Paper (PL7.1.4) (Full Stack) signal check

1. Operate the Actuator Full Stack (PL7.1.5) manually.
Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Sensor Paper (Full
5 2. Measure the voltage between P/J134-1 <=> P/J134-2.
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) Stack). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.2)
Is the voltage between P/J13-3 <=> P/J13-2 +3.3V DC when the Actuator Full Stack is
operated, and 0V DC when it is released?
Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2), Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity

6 J13-5 <=> P139-7/J139-5 <=> J134-2 Go to step 7.
continuity.
J13-6 <=> P139-6/J139-6 <=> J134-1
Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2), Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) continuity

7 J13-4 <=> P139-8/J139-4 <=> J134-3 Go to step 8.
continuity.
J13-5 <=> P139-7/J139-5 <=> J134-2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. Disconnect the P/J11 and P/J13 connectors of the PWBA MCU & HVPS. Replace the PWBA MCU &
8 Go to step 9.

1. Disconnect the P/J41 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Harness Assy DRV 1
9 Go to step 10.
2. Measure the voltage between P41-23 <=> P41-21/22. (PL15.2.2).
Is there 3.3V DC between P41-23 <=> P41-21/22?

10 Go to step 11.

11 Replace the LVNC (PL15.2.1). Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
2. Measure the voltage between P165-3 <=> J165-4.

FIP-42 Yellow Toner Empty 2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting


(PL15.1.15).

2. Disconnect the P/J441 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (Y).
(PL12.1.6).
J441-2 <=> J51-16
J441-3 <=> J51-15



Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. there is damaged part, replace
7 Go to step 8.
MCU & HVPS.

8 2. Turn On the Interlock Switch of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Go to step 9. Go to step 12.

9 Go to step 10.
J511-2 <=> J51-4 (PL12.1.6).
J511-3 <=> J51-3
J511-4 <=> J51-2
J511-5 <=> J51-1
Toner Motor check

1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (Y). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2)

Check the following. Are the continuities normal?
J11-25 <=> J41-16
11 J11-26 <=> J41-15 Go to step 12.
(PL15.2.2).
J11-27 <=> J41-14
J11-28 <=> J41-13

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

12 Go to step 13.


FIP-43 Magenta Toner Empty 2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting


(PL15.1.15).

2. Disconnect the P/J442 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (M).
(PL12.1.6).
J442-2 <=> J51-18
J442-3 <=> J51-17



Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
7 Go to step 8.
MCU & HVPS.


9 Go to step 10.
J512-2 <=> J51-9 (PL12.1.6).
J512-3 <=> J51-8
J512-4 <=> J51-7
J512-5 <=> J51-6
Toner Motor check


J11-29 <=> J41-12
11 J11-30 <=> J41-11 Go to step 12.
(PL15.2.2).
J11-31 <=> J41-10
J11-32 <=> J41-9

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

12 Go to step 13.


FIP-44 Cyan Toner Empty 2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting


(PL15.1.15).

(PL12.1.6).
J443-2 <=> J51-34
J443-3 <=> J51-33



Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Use the Toner Motor diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. there is damaged part, replace
7 Go to step 8.
MCU & HVPS.
Power supply to Toner Motor (C) of Holder Assy (C) (PL12.2.7)


9 Go to step 10.
J513-2 <=> J51-22 (PL12.1.6).
J513-3 <=> J51-21
J513-4 <=> J51-20
J513-5 <=> J51-19
Toner Motor check

1. Replace the Holder Toner Assy (C). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.4)

J11-33 <=> J41-8
11 J11-34 <=> J41-7 Go to step 12.
(PL15.2.2).
J11-35 <=> J41-6
J11-36 <=> J41-5

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

12 Go to step 13.


FIP-45 Black Toner Empty 2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting


(PL15.1.15).

2. Disconnect the P/J444 connector from the Sensor Toner Low (PL12.2.9) (K).
(PL12.1.6).
J444-2 <=> J51-36
J444-3 <=> J51-35



Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
7 Go to step 8.
MCU & HVPS.


9 Go to step 10.
J514-2 <=> J51-27 (PL12.1.6).
J514-3 <=> J51-26
J514-4 <=> J51-25
J514-5 <=> J51-24
Toner Motor check


J11-37 <=> J41-4
11 J11-38 <=> J41-3 Go to step 12.
(PL15.2.2).
J11-39 <=> J41-2
J11-40 <=> J41-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

12 Go to step 13.


FIP-46 PHD Life Over 2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting

3 Go to step 4.
2. Check the connection of the P/J71 relay connector between the Harness Assy CRUM and (PL12.3.8) or Harness Assy
Are the Harness Assy CRUM and Harness Assy EEPROM connected correctly?

Assy CRUM (PL12.3.8). (PL12.3.8).
Is the PWBA CRUM Connector connected correctly to the harness connector?

5 Go to step 6.
J710-2 <=> J71-5 CRUM (PL12.3.8).
J710-3 <=> J71-4
J710-4 <=> J71-3
J710-5 <=> J71-2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

6 Go to step 7.
P71-3 <=> J140-4 EEPROM (PL15.2.10)
P71-4 <=> J140-3
P71-5 <=> J140-2


FIP-47 BTR Life Over 2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

1. Replace the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2) With the tool: Go to step 3.
2 End of procedure
Does the error still occur even when the new BTR Assy is installed?
Sensor TNR Full (PL6.1.13) check


1. Disconnect the BTR Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
2. Measure the following voltage the relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS
and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P/J141-2 <=> P/J141-1

Measure the following voltage at the relay connector between the Harness Assy TFLSNS
5 and the Harness Assy EEPROM (PL15.2.10). Go to step 6.
EEPROM (PL15.2.10).
P/J141-3 <=> P/J141-1

1. Disconnect the P/J142 connector from the Sensor TNR Full.
J142-1 <=> J141-3
J142-2 <=> J141-2
J142-3 <=> J141-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No


FIP-48 Engine Communication Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the
Replace or reinstall the relevant
1 printer back to the standard status. Go to step 2.
part.
Check if all connectors are properly connected to the CONTROLLER PWB.
Reinsert the DIMM.
Improving the CONTROLLER PWB Environment: Replace or reinstall the relevant
2 Go to step 3.
Update the program to the latest one in the DIMM.B part.
Replacing the CONTROLLER PWB and Performing Checks:
3 - Problem solved.
Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU PWB with a normal one?

FIP-49 Verify (DIMM Slot Related) Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the
Replace or reinstall the relevant
1 printer back to the standard status. Go to step 2.
part.
Reinsert the DIMM.
Checking the DIMM:
After formatting the DIMM, load the control program to the DIMM.
Insert the DIMM in the socket P until it locks securely. Replace or reinstall the relevant
2 Problem solved.
part.
NOTE: Since the DIMM has the right direction to insert, be sure to insert it in the correct
direction.

FIP-50 Error in Standard RAM (Slot 0, 1)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the Replace or reinstall the relevant
1 Go to step 2.
printer back to the standard status. part.
Checking the SD-RAM:
Remove all SD-RAMs from the RAM slots and then reinsert them in the RAM slots. Be sure
to insert the SD-RAMs one by one (S0 and S1) in order so that the SD-RAM error can be
identified. Every time you insert an SD-RAM, follow the procedures below and repeat it for
each one.
1. Turn the power off. Replace or reinstall the relevant
2 Problem solved.
2. Add the SD-RAM. part.
3. Turn the power on.
Insert the SD-RAM in the socket until it is locked securely.
NOTE: Since the SD-RAM has the right direction to insert, be sure to insert it in the
correct direction.

FIP-51 ROM Checksum Error (MASK ROM for Font)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2.
Replace the CODE ROM-DIMM (C309PROG):
Replace the CONTROLLER
2 Replace the mounted CODE ROM-DIMM. Problem solved.
PWB.

FIP-52 ROM Checksum Error (CODE, IPL)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2.
Replace the CODE ROM-DIMM (C309PROG):
Replace the CONTROLLER
2 Replace the mounted CODE ROM-DIMM. Problem solved.
PWB.

FIP-53 ROM Module (DIMM Slot A Related) Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2.
Checking the DIMM:
Insert the DIMM in the socket until it is locked securely.
NOTE: Since the DIMM has the right direction and location for insertion, be sure to insert Replace or reinstall the relevant
2 Problem solved.
it in the correct direction and location. part.
Check if the DIMM is available for this printer, AcuLaser C4000.

In cases other than above, replace the CONTROLLER PWB.

FIP-54 EEPROM Writing Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2.
Checking the EEPROM:
Error C1200... Execute SelecType Init in the Panel Setting, or replace EEPROM. Replace or reinstall the relevant
2 Problem solved.
Error C1210...Replace EEPROM. part.

FIP-55 CCNV Hardware Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2.
Replacing the IC concerned:
Replace IC601 (VIP2: E05B93BA). Replace or reinstall the relevant
2 Problem solved.
Replace IC600 (PWM). part.

FIP-56 Engine Initialization Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
Remove all the optional units and modules related to the electrical system and bring the Replace or reinstall the relevant With the tool: Go to step 2.
1
printer back to the standard status. part. Without the tool: Go to step3.
Initializing the MCU PWB:
2 By using the DIAG command, execute Slave Initialize. Turn the power off once and on Problem solved. Go to step 3.
again. Does the printer operate normally?
Replacing the relevant unit: Replace or reinstall the relevant
3 Problem solved.
Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. part.

FIP-57 SRAM (for Compression) Initialization Hardware Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2.
Checking the SD-RAM:
Remove all SD-RAMs from the RAM slots and then reinsert them in the RAM slots. Be sure
to insert the SD-RAMs one by one (S0 and S1) in order so that the SD-RAM error can be
identified. Every time you insert an SD-RAM, follow the procedures below and repeat it for
each one.
1. Turn the power off. Replace or reinstall the relevant
2 Go to step 3.
2. Add the SD-RAM. part.
3. Turn the power on.
Insert the SD-RAM in the socket until it is locked securely.
NOTE: Since the SD-RAM has the right direction to insert, be sure to insert it in the
correct direction.
3 Problem solved.

FIP-58 Video System Hardware Error (including PWM Calibration Error IC)
Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2
2 Problem solved.

FIP-59 Built - in Network Hardware Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2.
Checking the network setting
Check if the existing network is operating normally.
2 Problem solved. Go to step 3.
Print the network status sheet to check if the every setting is correct.
Check if the network environment of the client side is correct.
Replacing the relevant unit: Replace or reinstall the relevant
3 Problem solved.
Replacing the CONTROLLER PWB. part.

FIP-60 DIMM SPD Error

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting:
1 Go to step 2.
Replacing CODE ROM (C309PROG): Replace the CONTROLLER
2 Problem solved.
Replace the mounted CODE ROM with another one for checking. PWB.

3.3.4 Image Quality Troubleshooting FIP FIP-P5 "Dropout, thin areas, stripes or bands in the direction perpendicular
to the paper feed direction"
NOTE: This section contains instructions for troubleshooting when the
FIP-P6 "Black Dots"
printer controller is operating normally. However, it is possible to
tell basically if there is a problem with the printer controller or with FIP-P7 "Fogging"
the engine itself by carrying out a test print using just the printer
FIP-P8 "Paper Skew"
engine, except for some problems which cannot be checked by
means of a test print. FIP-P9 "Wrinkles"
If the print test using the engine is normal There is a problem with the FIP-P10 "Unsatisfactory Fixing"
printer controller.
NOTE: The types of rollers that relate to image quality troubleshooting and
If the print test using the engine also shows a problem There is a their spacing in the printer are given in the following table.
problem with the printer engine.
If the problem is judged to be with the printer controller, replace the printer Part Cycle
controller with a normal part and re-check.
Magnet Roll 29mm
If the problem still occurs after the printer controller has been replaced,
check the host computer, and then use the following image quality FIP Drum 63mm
classified by trouble symptoms to carry out troubleshooting more
BTR 65mm
efficiently.
Padolle 7.5mm
If problems occur with the image quality of printouts, make a printout using an A4
page and use the image quality FIP table classified by trouble symptoms to make HTC 23mm
an accurate judgment and to get a proper understanding of the problem so that IDT 1 132mm
troubleshooting can be carried out effectively.
IDT 2 132mm
If the problem cannot be fixed using the image quality FIP, repeat the check
Heat Roll 82mm
procedure once more using the image quality FIP, and then check by replacing
parts in the order given in the "Related parts" section of the image quality FIP, and
also use the specifications section to carry out troubleshooting. Check that all
assemblies are properly grounded.
The image quality FIP contains instructions on diagnosing the following basic
image quality problems.
FIP-P1 "Light image"
FIP-P2 "All White"
FIP-P3 "All Black"
FIP-P4 "Dropout, thin areas, ripples or bands in paper feed direction"

FIP-P1 "Light image"
Description / initial check
Dropout in print image

This means that there are patches in the printed image where the ink is missing or is coated very lightly.
initial check
Are any parts being used that have incorrect specifications, or that are installed incorrectly, damaged, bent, dirty or that have foreign particles adhering to them?
Related parts
The following parts are related to this problem. There may be a problem with one of these parts, so if the problem cannot be solved by following this FIP, replace the following parts
one by one and check.
Parts connected to Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1), HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) and PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)
Item Check Yes No
Paper condition
1. Insert a fresh, dry piece of paper.
Is the image density normal?
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

2 Replace the PHD Assy. Problem solved. Go to step 3.
Drum grounding
Repair, clean or replace the
3 Check the Drum grounding circuit. Go to step 4.
malfunctioning part.
Is the Drum grounding normal?

Item Check Yes No
Laser beam path

1. Check that thee are no obstructions to the laser beam path between the ROS Assy
Remove the obstruction or clean
(PL11.1.1) and the Drum.
4 Go to step 5. the window of the ROS Assy
2. Check that the window of the ROS Assy is not dirty.
(PL11.1.1).
Is the laser beam path free from obstructions, and is the window of the ROS Assy
clean?
ROS Assy (PL11.1.1)

1. Replace the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1)
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

Replace the BTR Assy.
6 Check the BTR Assy roller. Go to step 7.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
Is the BTR Assy roller dirty or worn?
Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2), Spring BTR R2 (PL6.1.3), Shaft BTR In (PL6.1.4)
Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the part that is
7 Check the continuity between Wire Assy BTR2 <=> Shaft BTR In.
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) preventing continuity.
Is there continuity between Wire Assy BTR2 <=> Shaft BTR In?

FIP-P2 "All White"

Printout is completely white (on white paper)
This means that no printing image is appearing at all, so that the whole page remains white.
initial check
Related parts
Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1), HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.1/2/3/4) and HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9)
Item Check Yes No
Toner Cartridge (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.1.1/2/3/4) Replace the TONER

1 Go to step 2.
Is there enough toner inside the Toner Cartridge? CARTRIDGE.
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

2 Replace the PHD Assy. Problem solved. Go to step 3.
Does this solve the problem?
Drum grounding
Repair, clean or replace the
3 Check the Drum grounding circuit. Go to step 4.
malfunctioning part.

Item Check Yes No
Laser path
1. Check the laser path from the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) to the drum inside the PHD Assy
4 (PL11.1.3). Go to step 5.
or dirt.
Are there any foreign particles or dirt in the laser path?
ROS Assy (PL11.1.1)

1. Replace the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1)
Does this solve the problem?
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2), Spring BTR R2 (PL6.1.3), Shaft BTR In (PL6.1.4)
Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the part that is
7 Check the continuity between Wire Assy BTR2 <=> Shaft BTR In.
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) preventing continuity.
Is there continuity between Wire Assy BTR2 <=> Shaft BTR In?

FIP-P3 "All Black"
Printout is completely black

This means that the whole image appears solid black.
initial check
Related parts
Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1), BTR Assy (PL9.1.2), HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) and LVPS (PL15.1.10)
Item Check Yes No
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

Is printing normal?

1. Cover the whole of the laser beam output window of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) with a piece
2 of paper. Go to step 3.
Is the printout completely black?

Item Check Yes No

ROS Assy (PL11.1.1)
1. Cover half of the laser beam output window of the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) with a piece of
Replace the ROS Assy. Replace the PWBA MCU &
3 paper.
Is the printout half white and half black?

FIP-P4 "Dropout, thin areas, ripples or bands in paper feed direction"
Printout contains white dropout or black stripes.

This means that there are white or thin stripes or dark stripes in the printout in the paper feed direction.
initial check
Related parts
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9)
Item Check Yes No
Paper
1. Insert some fresh standard-sized paper.
Does the same problem still occur?
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)


Item Check Yes No

Laser path
1. Check the laser path from the ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) to the drum inside the PHD Assy
Remove the foreign particles or
3 (PL11.1.3). Go to step 4.
dirt.
Are there any foreign particles or dirt in the laser path?
Paper feed path

Remove the obstructions from
4 Check the paper feed path for foreign particles or obstructions. Go to step 5.
the paper feed path.
Are there any obstructions in the paper feed path?
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)

W A R N IN G Wait for the Fuser Assy to cool down before starting.
Replace the Fuser Assy. Replace the related parts one
6
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) by one.
2. Check if there is any damage, dirt or foreign particles on the Belt Assy or Heat Roll.
Is the Belt Assy or Heat Roll dirty or damaged?

FIP-P5 "Dropout, thin areas, stripes or bands in the direction perpendicular to the paper feed direction"
Printout contains white dropout or black stripes.

This means that there are white or thin stripes or dark stripes in the printout in the direction that is perpendicular to the paper feed direction.
initial check
Related parts
Parts connected to ROS Assy (PL11.1.1), HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) and PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)
Item Check Yes No
Paper
1. Insert some fresh standard-sized paper.
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)


Item Check Yes No
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.2)
Periodicity check
4 Replace the applicable parts. Go to step 5.
Does the problem show periodicity?

Replace the Fuser Assy.
5 Go to step 6.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Drive Assy Deve (PL14.1.1)

1. Replace the Drive Assy Deve. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.2)
2. Reprint the problem image.

1. Replace the Drive Assy Main. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.2)
2. Reprint the problem image.
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3) connection

8 Check the connections of each circuit in the PHD Assy. Go to step 9. Replace or repair parts.
Are all circuits in the PHD Assy connected correctly?
Drum grounding
Replace the PWBA MCU & Repair, clean or replace the
9 Check the Drum grounding circuit.
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) malfunctioning part.

FIP-P6 "Black Dots"

Black dots appear on print.
This means that there are round black (colored) spots in the printout.
initial check
Related parts
ROS Assy (PL11.1.1) and HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9)
Item Check Yes No
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)


Item Check Yes No

2 Go to step 3.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2)

Replace the BTR Assy. Replace the PWBA MCU &
3 Check the BTR Assy roller.

FIP-P7 "Fogging"
Printout is blurry.
This means that toner is adhering to the white areas of the printout.
initial check
Related parts
BTR Assy (PL9.1.2), ROS Assy (PL11.1.1), HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9) and PWB Controller (PL16.1.5)
Item Check Yes No
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

Chute Assy In (PL6.1.1) grounding

Repair the location of the
2 Check the Chute Assy In grounding circuit. Go to step 3.
grounding fault.
Is the in Chute Assy In grounded?
Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1) grounding

3 Check the Chute Assy Out grounding circuit. Go to step 4.
grounding fault.
Is the in Chute Assy Out grounded?

Item Check Yes No
Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1.1) grounding

4 Check the Chute Assy Exit grounding circuit. Go to step 5.
grounding fault.
Is the in Chute Assy Exit grounded?
Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1) grounding

Replace the PWBA MCU & Repair the location of the
5 Check the Fuser Assy grounding circuit.
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) grounding fault.
Is the in Fuser Assy grounded?

FIP-P8 "Paper Skew"
Printing skewed
This means that the image is printed at an angle.
initial check
Related parts
PAPER FEEDER, Chute Assy Regi (PL10.1.1), Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1), BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) and Fuser Assy (PL9.1.1)
Item Check Yes No
Paper setting/Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4)

1. Remove the Cassette Assy where the problem occurred.
1 2. Reinsert the paper. Go to step 2. Problem solved.
3. Reprint the page that caused the problem.
Paper feed path

Clean or replace the applicable
2 Check if there are any problems such as burring, foreign matter or dirt in the paper feed path. Go to step 3.
part.
Are there any obstacles in the paper feed path?

Item Check Yes No
Paper supply rollers

3 Check the paper supply rollers. Go to step 4.
part.
Are the paper supply rollers worn or damaged?
Paper feed rollers

Check all rollers in the paper feed path. Clean or replace the applicable
4 Go to step 5.
Are there any problems with the paper feed rollers such as foreign particles or dirty, part.
bent or malfunctioning rollers?
ROS Assy (PL11.1.1)

Reinstall the ROS Assy.
5 Check the installation of the ROS Assy. Go to step 6.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1)
Is there a problem with the installation of the ROS Assy?
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)

1. Replace the PHD Assy. Replace the related parts one
6 Problem solved.
2. Carry out a test print. by one.

FIP-P9 "Wrinkles"
Wrinkles in printout
This means that there are wrinkles in the paper after printing.
initial check
Related parts
PAPER FEEDER, Chute Assy Regi (PL10.1.1), Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1), BTR Assy (PL9.1.2) and PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)
Item Check Yes No
Paper moisture
1. Replace with fresh paper from a packet that has just been opened.

Item Check Yes No

2 Go to step 3.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Paper skew
3 Go to FIP-P8 (Page 5-276). Go to step 4.
Is the paper being fed at an angle?
Paper feed path

4 Check if there are any problems such as burring, foreign matter or dirt in the paper feed path. Go to step 5.
part.
Are there any obstacles in the paper feed path?
Paper feed rollers

Check all rollers in the paper feed path. Clean or replace the applicable Replace the related parts one
5
Are there any problems with the paper feed rollers such as foreign particles or dirty, part. by one.
bent or malfunctioning rollers?

FIP-P10 "Unsatisfactory Fixing"
Poor toner fixing

This means that when the image is rubbed it a finger, the printed image can be removed easily.
initial check
Related parts
LVPS (PL15.1.10), PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11)
Item Check Yes No
Paper moisture
1. Replace with fresh paper from a packet that has just been opened.

2 Go to step 3.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)

Item Check Yes No

Turn the Gear Idler by hand and check that the Heat Roll and the Belt Assy contact each Replace the related parts one Replace the Fuser Assy.
3
other evenly. by one. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Are the Heat Roll and Belt Assy contacting each other evenly?

3.3.5 Printer Operation Troubleshooting FIP

This section describes the FIP for troubleshooting printer operation.
FIP-OP1 Printer does not work

Main power supply does not turn on.
Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Power Cord (PL15.1.9) and cord connection
Mains power supply voltage
LVPS (PL15.1.10)
PWB Controller (PL16.1.5)
HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9)
PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1)
Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9)
Fan Rear (PL15.1.3)
ROS Assy (PL11.1.1)
Repair or replace the applicable
1 Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18) Go to step 2.
part.
Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8)
Holder Assy (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.2.5/6/7/8)
Drive Assy Feeder (PL17.4.5)
Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (PL4.3.17)
Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40)
Solenoid Feed (PL17.3.17)
Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18)
Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9)
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12)
Clutch Assy Turn (PL17.3.18)
Harness Assy FSR2 (PL6.1.9)
Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2)
Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6)
Harness Assy DRV 1 (PL15.2.2)
Harness Assy SOS (PL15.2.5) Repair or replace the applicable
1 Go to step 2.
Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) part.
Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8)
Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9)
Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2)
Power Cord (PL15.1.9) continuity
Replace the Power Cord
2 Check the continuity in Power Cord. Go to step 3.
(PL15.1.9).
Is there continuity in Power Cord?
AC power supply
Ask the customer to fix the
3 Measure the AC power supply voltage. Go to step 4.
power supply.
Is the AC power supply voltage within the specifications?
Fuse
4 Check the fuse in the LVPS (PL15.1.10). Go to step 5. Go to step 7.
Is the fuse blown?

5 2. Remove the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) Go to step 6.
FSR2 (PL6.1.9).
3. Check the insulation between J162-1 <=> J162-3.
Is there a short-circuit between J162-1 <=> J162-3?
Heater
Replace the LVPS. Replace the Fuser Assy.
6 Measure the resistance between P232-1 <=> P232-3.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.3) (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1)
Is the resistance around 10 between P232-1 <=> P232-3?
24V power supply

2. Turn on the I/L Switch of the PWB Drive.
3. Turn on the power and measure the following voltage.
J60-1 <=> J60-2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. With the P/J60 connector of the PWB Drive connected, turn on the power. Replace the PWBA Drive.
8 Go to step 9.
2. Check if the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.5)
Does the Fan Rear operate?
Fan Rear (PL15.1.3)

1. Connect the P/J60 connector of the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
Replace the Fan Rear.
9 2. Remove the Fan Rear. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.2) Go to step 10.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.2)
3. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9) operates.
Does the Fan Fuser operate?
Two Tray Module

1. Remove the Two Tray Module.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates.
PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1), Solenoid Feed (PL17.3.17), Clutch Assy Turn (PL17.3.18)
1. Install the Two Tray Module.
2. Remove the following parts one by one, and turn the power on after each part is removed Replace applicable parts.
and check if the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.7)
11 Drive Assy Feeder (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.7) (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) Go to step 12.
PWBA Feeder (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22)
Solenoid Feed (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22) (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.30)
Clutch Assy Turn (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.30)
Does the Fan Rear operate when a part is removed?
Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy FDR 3T (PL17.4.4)

1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J83 connectors one by one from the PWBA Feeder
(PL17.4.1). Replace the PWBA MCU &
12 Replace applicable harness.
2. Turn the power on after each connector is disconnected and check if the Fan Rear HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
(PL15.1.3) operates.
Does the Fan Rear operate when a harness is disconnected?
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) related check


Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
ROS Assy (PL11.1.1)

1. Remove the ROS Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.14.1) Replace the ROS Assy. (Refer
14 Go to step 15.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. to Ch4-4.2.14.1)
Solenoid Feed MSI (PL7.1.40)

1. Remove the Solenoid Feed MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.12) Replace the Solenoid Feed MSI.
15 Go to step 16.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.12)
Clutch Turn MSI (PL5.1.9)

1. Remove the Clutch Turn MSI. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.8.4) Replace the Clutch Turn MSI.
16 Go to step 17.
Clutch Regi (PL10.1.12)

1. Remove the Clutch Regi. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.13.1) Replace the Clutch Regi.
17 Go to step 18.
HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9)

1. Remove the HVPS Sub. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.9) Replace the HVPS Sub.
18 Go to step 19.
Harness Assy SOS (PL15.2.5)

1. Disconnect P/J15 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Replace the Harness Assy SOS
19 Go to step 20.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. (PL15.2.5).
Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and Harness Assy Front 2 (PL7.1.2)

1. Disconnect P/J13 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). Replace the PWBA MCU &
20 Go to step 21.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. Connect P/J15 of the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
2. Disconnect the P/J139 relay connector between the Harness Assy Front 1 (PL15.2.7) and Replace the Harness Assy Front Replace the Harness Assy Front
21
the Harness Assy Front 2. 2 (PL7.1.2). 1 (PL15.2.7).
Solenoid Feed Tray 1 (PL4.3.17)

1. Remove the Solenoid Feed Tray 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.17) Replace the Solenoid Feed Tray
22 Go to step 23.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.17)
Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 (PL4.3.18)

1. Remove the Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.18) Replace the Clutch Assy Turn
23 Go to step 24.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Tray 1. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.7.18)
Harness Assy Feeder (PL4.3.28)

1. Disconnect P/J47 from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Harness Assy
24 Go to step 25.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. Feeder (PL4.3.28).

1. Remove the Drive Assy Main. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.2) Replace the Drive Assy Main.
25 Go to step 26.

1. Remove the Drive Assy Deve. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.17.1) Replace the Drive Assy Deve.
26 Go to step 27.
Drive Assy Fuser (PL6.1.18)

1. Remove the Drive Assy Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.4) Replace the Drive Assy Fuser.
27 Go to step 28.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Motor Assy Dup (PL8.1.8)

1. Remove the Motor Assy Dup. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.11.4) Replace the Motor Assy Dup.
28 Go to step 29.
Fan Fuser (PL1.1.9)

1. Remove the Fan Fuser. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.3) Replace the Fan Fuser.
29 Go to step 30.
Harness Assy Dup (PL7.1.23)

1. Disconnect P/J50 connector from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Harness Assy Dup
30 Go to step 31.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. (PL7.1.23).
Holder Assy (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.2.5/6/7/8)

1. Remove the Holder Assy (Y/M/C/K) one by one. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2, 4.2.15.3,4.2.15.4, Replace applicable Holder
31 4.2.15.5) Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.15.2, Go to step 32.
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. 4.2.15.3,4.2.15.4, 4.2.15.5)
Harness Assy TNR (PL12.1.6)

1. Disconnect P/J51 from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15). Replace the Harness Assy TNR Replace the PWBA MCU &
32
2. Turn on the power and check that the Fan Rear (PL15.1.3) operates. (PL12.1.6). HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)

FIP-OP2 LCD/LED display error

LCD/LED display is incorrect.
Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Control Panel (PL TBD)
Repair or replace the applicable
1 PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) Go to step 2.
part.
LVPS (PL15.1.10)
Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4)
Harness Assy Opepane (PL15.2.9)
Harness Assy Opepane BS (PL7.1.3)
3.3V DC power supply

2 Measure the voltage between connectors P/J164-1 <=> P/J164-2 of the LVPS. Go to step 3. Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
Is the voltage 3.3V DC between P/J164-1 <=> P/J164-2?
Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) continuity

1. Disconnect P/J164 from the LVPS (PL15.1.10).
2. Disconnect P/J311 from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
LVRPG. (PL 15.2.4)
J164-1 <=> J311-1
J164-2 <=> J311-2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy Opepane (PL15.2.9) and Harness Assy Opepane BS (PL7.1.3)

1. Disconnect P/J22 controller from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
2. Disconnect P/J220 controller from the Control Panel (PL TBD).
J22-1 <=> J221-1 <=> J2211-1
J22-2 <=> J221-2 <=> J2211-2
J22-3 <=> J221-3 <=> J2211-3
J22-4 <=> J221-4 <=> J2211-4
J22-5 <=> J221-5 <=> J2211-5
J22-6 <=> J221-6 <=> J2211-6
J22-7 <=> J221-7 <=> J2211-7
J22-8 <=> J221-8 <=> J2211-8
4 J22-9 <=> J221-9 <=> J2211-9 Go to step 5.
continuity.
J22-10 <=> J221-10 <=> J2211-10
J22-11 <=> J221-11 <=> J2211-11
J22-12 <=> J221-12 <=> J2211-12
J22-13 <=> J221-13 <=> J2211-13
J22-14 <=> J221-14 <=> J2211-14
J22-15 <=> J221-15 <=> J2211-15
J22-16 <=> J221-16 <=> J2211-16
J22-17 <=> J221-17 <=> J2211-17
J22-18 <=> J221-18 <=> J2211-18
J22-19 <=> J221-19 <=> J2211-19
J22-20 <=> J221-20 <=> J2211-20

1. Replace the Control Panel. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.1)
Is the display still unstable?

1. Replace the PWB Controller. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.19.1) Replace the PWBA MCU &
6 Problem solved.
2. Turn on the power. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Is the display still unstable?

FIP-OP3 Keypad operation not possible

Keypad buttons do not operate.
Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Repair and replace the
1 PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) Go to step 2.
applicable part.
LVPS (PL15.1.10)
Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4)
Harness Assy Opepane (PL15.2.9)
Harness Assy Opepane BS (PL7.1.3)

2. Measure the voltages between the following terminals.
P164-1 <=> P164-4 (3.3V DC)
P164-3 <=> P164-4 (5V DC)
Are the voltages between all terminals at the standard values?
Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) continuity

1. Disconnect P/J311 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch4-
4.2.18.1)
LVRPG (PL15.2.4).
J164-1 <=> J311-1
J164-2 <=> J311-2

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy Opepane (PL15.2.9) and Harness Assy Opepane BS (PL7.1.3)

1. Disconnect P/J22 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2). (Refer to Ch4-
4.2.18.1)
2. Disconnect P/J220 connector from the Control Panel (PL TBD).
J22-1 <=> J221-1 <=> J2211-1
J22-2 <=> J221-2 <=> J2211-2
J22-3 <=> J221-3 <=> J2211-3
J22-4 <=> J221-4 <=> J2211-4
J22-5 <=> J221-5 <=> J2211-5
J22-6 <=> J221-6 <=> J2211-6
J22-7 <=> J221-7 <=> J2211-7
J22-8 <=> J221-8 <=> J2211-8 Replace the harness with no
4 Go to step 5.
J22-9 <=> J221-9 <=> J2211-9 continuity.
J22-10 <=> J221-10 <=> J2211-10
J22-11 <=> J221-11 <=> J2211-11
J22-12 <=> J221-12 <=> J2211-12
J22-13 <=> J221-13 <=> J2211-13
J22-14 <=> J221-14 <=> J2211-14
J22-15 <=> J221-15 <=> J2211-15
J22-16 <=> J221-16 <=> J2211-16
J22-17 <=> J221-17 <=> J2211-17
J22-18 <=> J221-18 <=> J2211-18
J22-19 <=> J221-19 <=> J2211-19
J22-20 <=> J221-20 <=> J2211-20

1. Replace the Control Panel. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.1)
Do the keypad switches still not work?

1. Replace the PWB Controller. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.19.1) Replace the PWBA MCU &
6 Problem solved.
Do the keypad switches still not work?

FIP-OP4 Incorrect printer operation

Printer operation is unstable.
Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) Repair or replace the applicable
1 Go to step 2.
PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) part.
LVPS (PL15.1.10)
Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1)
Printer engine
2 Carry out a test print. Go to step 7. Go to step 3.
Does the test print complete normally?
5V DC power supply
1. Disconnect P/J61 from the PWB Drive (PL15.1.15).
Is the voltage 5V DC between J61-8 <=> J61-7?

1. Leave the P/J61 connector of the PWB Drive (PL.15.1.15) disconnected.
Is the voltage 3.3V DC between J61-6 <=> J61-5?

1. Leave the P/J61 connector of the PWB Drive (PL.15.1.15) disconnected.
5 P165-1 <=> P61-8 Go to FIP-DC (Page 5-295).
LVNC (PL15.2.1).
P165-2 <=> P61-7
P165-3 <=> P61-6
P165-4 <=> P61-5
Is there continuity in all lines between P165 <=> P61?
Reset
6 Carry out a test print. Go to FIP-Noise (Page 5-296). Go to step 7.
Is the printer Reset after test printing is carried out?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Interface Cable
1. Replace the Interface Cable connecting the host computer and the printer.
2. Send a print command from the host computer.
Is the printer operation still unstable?

1. Replace the PWB Controller. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.19.1)

Notify the customer that the
1. Replace the PWBA MCU & HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
9 problem is probably with the Problem solved.
host computer.

3.3.6 Other FIP

This section contains power supply FIP and noise FIP that are not included in the
error code FIP, image quality FIP and printer operation FIP. It should be used as a
result of first referring to the error code FIP, image quality FIP and printer operation
FIP.
FIP-AC
Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Repair Go to step 2.
Power Cord (PL15.1.9) disconnection or breakage
Incorrect mains power supply voltage
Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11) continuity check

1. Disconnect the Power Cord (PL15.1.9) and wait 10 seconds. Replace the LVPS. Replace the Harness Assy AC
2
2. With the Power Cord disconnected, turn on the Harness Assy AC SW. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.3) SW. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.4)
Is the continuity normal between J161-1 <=> J161-2?

FIP-DC
Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Repair. Go to step 2.
Blown fuse inside LVPS (PL15.1.10)
AC power supply problem
LVPS (PL15.1.10) check

1. Disconnect the LVPS connectors J163, J165 and J164.
2. Turn on the Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11).
3. Measure the voltages between the following terminals. Replace the LVPS. (Refer to
2 Go to step 3.
P163-1 <=> P163-2 (24V DC) Ch4-4.2.18.3)
P165-1 <=> P165-2 (5V DC)
P165-3 <=> P165-4 (3.3V DC)
Are the voltages normal between each terminal?
Harness Assy LVRPG (PL15.2.4) check

1. Turn off the Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11), and then connect J164 to the LVPS
Check for a Harness Assy
3 (PL15.1.10). Go to step 4.
LVRPG (PL15.2.4) frame short.
2. After connecting the connector, turn on the Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11).
Is the voltage +3.3V DC between P/J164-1 <=> P/J164-2?
Harness Assy LVNC (PL15.2.1) check

Check for a Harness Assy
4 (PL15.1.10). Go to step 5.
LVNC (PL15.2.1) frame short.
2. After connecting the connector, turn on the Harness Assy AC SW.
Is the voltage +5V DC between P/J165-1 <=> P/J165-2?
Harness Assy 24V (PL15.2.6) check

Check for a Harness Assy 24V
5 (PL15.1.10). End of procedure
(PL15.2.6) frame short.
2. After connecting the connector, turn on the Harness Assy AC SW.
Is the voltage +24V DC between P/J163-1 <=> P/J163-2?

FIP-Noise
Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
HSG Assy Bias (PL11.1.4)
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)
Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11)
Chute Assy In (PL6.1.1)
Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1) Repair or replace the applicable
1 Go to step 2.
Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1.1) part.
Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2)
Wire Assy DTSK (PL6.1.5)
Wire Assy FSR Earth (PL6.1.20)
Wire Assy Dup Earth (PL7.1.43)
Incorrect mains power supply voltage
External interference
1. Check if there is any electrical equipment such as generators, wireless transmitters and
motors that may generate interference being used within 3 meters of the printer.
2. Turn off the power for any electrical equipment that may be generating interference, or
move the printer at least 6 meters away from such equipment.
Does the electrical interference problem still occur?
AC ground
Ask the customer to repair the
3 Check the AC power supply outlet. Go to step 4.
AC power supply outlet.
Is the AC power supply outlet positioned correctly and grounded?
PHD Assy (PL11.1.3)


Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy AC SW (PL15.1.11)

Check the grounding screw for the grounding cable of the Harness Assy AC SW. (Refer to Install the grounding screw
5 Go to step 6.
Ch4-4.2.18.4) correctly.
Is the cable grounded correctly?
HSG Assy Bias (PL11.1.4)

Check the spring and Stud Plunger (PL11.1.5) of the HSG Assy Bias. (Refer to Ch4-
6 Go to step 7. Replace the applicable parts.
4.2.14.2)
Are the spring and Stud Plunger not bent or dirty, and are they contacting correctly?
Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2) and Wire Assy DTSK (PL6.1.5) connection
Check the connection of the Wire Assy BTR2 connector (P/J5020) and the Wire Assy DTSK
7 Go to step 8. Connect correctly.
connector (P/J5030) on the HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9).
Are the Wire Assy BTR2 and Wire Assy DTSK connected correctly?
Wire Assy BTR2 (PL6.1.2) and Wire Assy DTSK (PL6.1.5) connection
1. Disconnect the connector (P/J5020) and (P/J5030) on the HVPS Sub (PL12.1.9).
2. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the part that is
8 Go to step 9.
J5020 <=> Shaft BTR In (PL6.1.4) preventing continuity.
J5030 <=> Stud BTR (PL6.1.7)
Is there continuity in both the Wire Assy BTR2 and the Wire Assy DTSK?
Ground harnesses
Check that the following harnesses are grounded and that they have continuity.
Wire Assy Dup Earth (PL7.1.43) Replace or ground any
9 Go to step 10.
Wire Assy FSR Earth (PL6.1.20) harnesses without continuity.
Are all harnesses connected correctly and do they have continuity?
Chute Assy In (PL6.1.1) Repair or replace any blades

1. Remove the Chute Assy In. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.1) that are bent or contaminated,
10 Go to step 11.
2. Check the shape and installation of all blades in the Chute Assy In. or replace the Chute Assy In.
Are all blades free from bends and contamination and are they correctly installed? (Refer to Ch4-4.2.9.1)
Chute Assy Out (PL7.1.1) Repair or replace any blades

1. Remove the Chute Assy Out. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.10.1) that are bent or contaminated,
11 Go to step 12.
2. Check the shape and installation of all blades in the Chute Assy Out. or replace the Chute Assy Out.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Chute Assy Exit (PL8.1.1) Repair or replace any blades

1. Remove the Chute Assy Exit. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.11.1) that are bent or contaminated,
12 Go to step 13.
2. Check the shape and installation of all blades in the Chute Assy Exit. or replace the Chute Assy Exit.
Circuit board grounding

Check that all of the circuit board mounting screws that are used as grounding screws are Repair any poor ground
13 Go to step 14.
securely tightened. connections.
Are all circuit boards grounded correctly?

1. Replace the Fuser Assy. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.12.1) Replace the PWBA MCU &
14 Problem solved.

3.4 Level 2 FIP Large Capacity Paper Unit
3.4.1 Level 2 FIP

The following is described about troubleshooting of the Large Capacity Paper Unit.
The Level 2 FIP includes the procedures for diagnosing problems by classifying them according to error codes and other trouble symptoms. The method of problem
diagnosis allow the causes of problems to be located quickly by following the procedures indicated in the FIP or the checking procedures.
FIP-1 Feed Jam

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Paper cassette installation
1 Condition of paper inside cassette Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2.
Worn or damaged Roll or gear inside Feeder
Paper scraps or foreign particles in paper path
Drive Assy Feeder (PL17.4.5) installation
Drive Assy Feeder (PL17.4.5)

1. Carry out a print.
2. Listen for a sound to check if the Drive Assy Feeder is energized.
Is the Drive Assy Feeder energized?
Power supply to Drive Assy Feeder (PL17.4.5)

Replace the Drive Assy Feeder
2. Disconnect the P/J84 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1).
3 (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.7) and go Go to step 33.
to step 4.
4. Measure the voltage between P84-3/4 <=> P/J81-1.
Is there 24V DC between P84-3/4 <=> P/J81-1?
PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1)

1. Carry out a print.
2. Listen for a sound to check if the Drive Assy Feeder is energized.
Is the Drive Assy Feeder energized?
5 Does the problem only occur when paper is fed from TRAY 3? Go to step 19. Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting Level 2 FIP Large Capacity Paper Unit 3-299

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

6 Is the paper in TRAY 2 normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture? Go to step 7.
step 7.
Paper feed path

and go to step 8.
Print while feeding paper from the TRAY 2.

Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) operation check

With the tool:
1. Print a single page while feeding paper from the TRAY 2.
Go to step 10.
9 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper passes the Roll Assy Turn (PL17.3.20). Go to step 14.
Without the tool:
Does the leading edge of the paper pass the Roll Assy Turn when a single page is
Go to step 11.
printed?
Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) check Check if the Clutch Assy Turn
Use the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test. TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) is slipping
10 Go to step 11.
The INTERLOCK SW should be closed. or if the gears are damaged and
Is the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 functioning normally? go to step 14.
Power supply to Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18)

2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder.
Harness Assy FDR 2T (PL17.4.3) continuity check

1. Disconnect the P/J825 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn (Tray 2) (PL17.3.8). (Refer to
Ch4-4.2.20.4)
2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) Replace the Harness Assy FDR
12 Go to step 13.
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. 2T.
J82-13 <=> P825-2
J82-14 <=> P825-1
Is the continuity between J82 <=> P825 normal?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 2 (PL17.3.18) resistance check

1. Disconnect the J825 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn. Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace the Clutch Assy Turn
13
2. Measure the resistance between the terminals. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) TRAY 2. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.4)
Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 (PL17.3.17) operation check With the tool:

1. Print a single page while feeding paper from the TRAY 2. Go to step 15.
14 Go to step 19.
2. Check if the leading edge of the paper is fed from the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4). Without the tool:
Is the paper fed from the Cassette Assy when a single page is printed? Go to step 16.
Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 (PL17.3.17) check

Check if the Solenoid Feed
Use the Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test.
15 (PL17.3.17) spring or stopper is Go to step 16.
The INTERLOCK SW should be closed.
loose and go to step 19.
Is the Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 functioning normally?
Power supply to Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 (PL17.3.17)


1. Disconnect the P/J824 connector from the Solenoid Feed (Tray 2). (Refer to Ch4-
4.2.20.22)
2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10) Replace the Harness Assy
17 Go to step 18.
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. FDR2T (PL17.4.3).
J82-11 <=> P824-2
J82-12 <=> P824-1
Solenoid Feed TRAY 2 (PL17.3.17) resistance check

1. Disconnect the P/J824 connector from the Solenoid Feed (Tray 2). (Refer to Ch4- Replace the Solenoid Feed
18 4.2.20.22) Go to step 19. TRAY 2.

19 Does the problem only occur when paper is fed from TRAY 2? Go to step 20.

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

20 Is the paper in TRAY 3 normal with no curl, wrinkles or moisture? Go to step 21.
step 21.
Paper feed path

and go to step 22.
Print while feeding paper from the TRAY 3.

Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18) operation check

With the tool:
1. Print while feeding paper from the TRAY 3.
Go to step 24.
23 2. Check if the leading edge of the paper passes the Roll Assy Turn (PL17.3.20) Go to step 28.
Without the tool:
Does the leading edge of the paper pass the Roll Assy Turn when a single page is
Go to step 25.
printed?
Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18) check

Check if the Clutch is slipping or
Use the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test.
24 if the gears are damaged and go Go to step 25.
to step 28.
Is the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 functioning normally?
Power supply to Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18)


1. Disconnect the P/J835 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn (Tray 3) (PL17.3.18). (Refer
to Ch4-4.2.20.30)
26 Go to step 27.
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. 3T (PL17.4.4).
J83-13 <=> P835-2
J83-14 <=> P835-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18) resistance check
1. Disconnect the P/J835 connector from the Clutch Assy Turn TRAY 3 (PL17.3.18). (Refer Replace the Clutch Assy Turn
27 to Ch4-4.2.20.30) TRAY 3.
Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 (PL17.3.17) operation check Check that no parts are missing.
With the tool:
If all parts are okay, replace the
1. Print a single page while feeding paper from the TRAY 3. Go to step 29.
28 paper and replace the PWBA
2. Check if the leading edge of the paper is fed from the Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4). Without the tool:
MCU & HVPS.
Is the paper fed from the Cassette Assy when a single page is printed? Go to step 30.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 (PL17.3.17) check
Check if the Solenoid Feed
Use the Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Output Test.
29 (PL17.3.17) spring or stopper is Go to step 30.
loose.
Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 functioning normally?
Power supply to Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 (PL17.3.17)


1. Disconnect the P/J834 connector from the Solenoid Feed (Tray 3) (PL17.3.17). (Refer to
Ch4-4.2.20.22)
31 Go to step 32.
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. 3T (PL17.4.4).
J83-11 <=> P834-2
J83-12 <=> P834-1
Solenoid Feed TRAY 3 (PL17.3.17) resistance check

Replace the Solenoid Feed
1. Disconnect the J834 connector from the Solenoid Feed (Tray 3). (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22) Replace the PWBA MCU &
32 TRAY 3.
2. Measure the resistance between J834-1 <=> J834-2. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.22)

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) continuity

1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder.
2. Check the continuity for the following circuits.
P81-2/25 <=> P82-11 <=> P82-13 <=> P83-11 <=> P83-13 <=> P84-3/4
Replace the PWBA Feeder.
33 P81-22 <=> P82-14 Go to step 34.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10)
P81-21 <=> P83-14
P81-20 <=> P82-12
P81-19 <=> P83-12
Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy
OPF PLG (PL17.4.2) continuity
J81-1 <=> J21-26
J81-2 <=> J21-25
J81-4 <=> J21-23
J81-5 <=> J21-22
J81-6 <=> J21-21 Replace the PWBA MCU &
34 Go to step 35.
J81-7 <=> J21-20 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
J81-14 <=> J21-13
J81-19 <=> J21-8
J81-20 <=> J21-7
J81-21 <=> J21-6
J81-22 <=> J21-5
J81-25 <=> J21-2
J81-26 <=> J21-1

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity

1. Disconnect the J210/P810 relay connector between the Harness Assy OPT Main and the
Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9).
J21-26 <=> P210-A1
J21-25 <=> P210-A2
J21-23 <=> P210-A4
J21-22 <=> P210-A5
J21-21 <=> P210-A6 Replace the Harness Assy OPF
35 Go to step 36.
J21-20 <=> P210-A7 Main (PL15.2.8).
J21-13 <=> P210-B1
J21-8 <=> P210-B6
J21-7 <=> P210-B7
J21-6 <=> P210-B8
J21-5 <=> P210-B9
J21-2 <=> P210-B12
J21-1 <=> P210-B13

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) continuity

1. Remove the Option Feeder (Refer to Ch2), and then disconnect the P/J810 relay
connector between the Harness Assy OPF REC and the Harness Assy OPF PLG
(PL17.4.2).
J210-A13 <=> P810-B1
J210-A12 <=> P810-B2
J210-A10 <=> P810-B4
J210-A9 <=> P810-B5
J210-A8 <=> P810-B6 Replace the Harness Assy OPF Replace the Harness Assy
36
PLG (PL17.4.2). OPFREC (PL4.2.9).
J210-A7 <=> P810-B7
J210-B13 <=> P810-A2
J210-B8 <=> P810-A7
J210-B7 <=> P810-A8
J210-B6 <=> P810-A9
J210-B5 <=> P810-A10
J210-B2 <=> P810-A13
J210-B1 <=> P810-A14


Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) installation
Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) installation
Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) check
3 Use the Sensor Low Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 4.
Is the Sensor Low Paper functioning normally?
Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) Replace the Lever Low Paper

4 Go to step 5.
Does the Lever Low Paper move smoothly? (PL17.4.9).
Power supply to Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7)

1. Remove the Cover R. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.4.9)
5 2. Disconnect the P/J82 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1). Go to step 6. Go to step 10.
Harness Assy Feeder 2T (PL17.4.3) continuity

2. Disconnect the P/J823 connector from the Sensor Low Paper Tray 2 (PL17.4.7).
3. Check the continuity between the following lines. Replace the Harness Assy
6 Go to step 7.
J82-8 <=> J823-3 Feeder 2T (PL17.4.3).
J82-9 <=> J823-2
J82-10 <=> J823-1
Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) sensor signal check

Replace the Sensor Low
7 3. While operating the Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) manually, measure the following voltage. Go to step 8.
Paper (PL17.4.7).
P/J82-10 <=> P/J82-9
Is the voltage between P/J82-10 <=> P/J82-9 +3.3V DC at the low paper condition, and

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder. Replace the PWBA Feeder.
8 Go to step 9.
Harness Assy OPF PLG (PL17.4.2), Harness Assy OPFREC (PL4.2.9) and Harness Assy
OPF Main (PL15.2.8) continuity check
Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace any Harness Assy with
9 2. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS.
HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) no continuity.
J81-18 <=> J810-A9/P810-A6 <=> J210-B9/P210-B5 <=> J21-9

10 Go to step 11.
11 2. Disconnect the P/J21 connector from the PWBA MCU & HVPS.
J81-24 <=> J810-A3/P810-A12 <=> J210-B3/P210-B11 <=> J21-3


Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) installation
Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) installation
Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) check
3 Use the Sensor Low Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 4.
Is the Sensor Low Paper functioning normally?
Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) Replace the Lever Low Paper

4 Go to step 5.
Does the Lever Low Paper move smoothly? (PL17.4.9).
Power supply to Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7)


2. Disconnect the P/J833 connector from the Sensor Low Paper Tray 3 (PL17.4.7).
3. Check the continuity between the following lines. Replace the Harness Assy
6 Go to step 7.
J83-8 <=> J833-3 Feeder 3T (PL17.4.4).
J83-9 <=> J833-2
J83-10 <=> J833-1
Sensor Low Paper (PL17.4.7) sensor signal check

Replace the Sensor Low Paper
7 3. While operating the Lever Low Paper (PL17.4.9) manually, measure the following voltage. Go to step 8.
(PL17.4.7).
P/J83-10 <=> P/J83-9
Is the voltage between P/J83-10 <=> P/J83-9 +3.3V DC at the low paper condition, and

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

8 Go to step 9.
9 2. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1).
J81-17 <=> J810-A10/P810-A5 <=> J210-B10/P210-B4 <=> J21-10

10 Go to step 11.
J81-24 <=> J810-A3/P810-A12 <=> J210-B3/P210-B11 <=> J21-3

FIP-4 Tray 2 Paper Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) installation Reinstall applicable parts Go to step 2.
Link Actuator (PL17.3.6) installed
3 Operate the Link Actuator manually and check. the problem.
Does the Link Actuator and Actuator No Paper move smoothly? (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.35)
Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) check

4 Use the Sensor No Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 5.
Is the Sensor No Paper functioning normally?
Power supply to Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4)

Harness Assy Feeder 2T (PL17.4.3) and Harness Assy NPRSJ (PL17.4.11) continuity
2. Disconnect the P/J822 connector from the Sensor No Paper (Tray 2) (PL17.3.4). (Refer to
Ch4-4.2.20.36)
Replace any Harness Assy with
6 3. Check the continuity between the following lines. Go to step 7.
no continuity.
J82-5 <=> J8220-3/P8220-1 <=> J822-3
J82-6 <=> J8220-2/P8220-2 <=> J822-2
J82-7 <=> J8220-1/P8220-3 <=> J822-1
PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) sensor signal check

Replace the Sensor No Paper
7 3. While operating the Link Actuator (PL17.3.6) manually, measure the following voltage. Go to step 8.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.36).
P/J82-7 <=> P/J82-6
Is the voltage between P/J82-7 <=> P/J82-6 +3.3V DC at the no paper condition, and 0V
DC when paper is present?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

8 Go to step 9.
J81-16 <=> J810-A11/P810-A4 <=> J210-B11/P210-B3 <=> J21-11

10 Go to step 11.
J81-24 <=> J810-A3/P810-A12 <=> J210-B3/P210-B11 <=> J21-3

FIP-5 Tray 3 Paper Empty

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
1 Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) installation Reinstall applicable parts. Go to step 2.
Link Actuator (PL17.3.6) installed
3 Operate the Link Actuator manually and check. the problem.
Does the Link Actuator and Actuator No Paper move smoothly? (Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.35)
Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4) check

4 Use the Sensor No Paper diagnosis tool to carry out a Digital Input Test. Go to step 5.
Sensor No Paper functioning normally?
Power supply to Sensor No Paper (PL17.3.4)

Harness Assy Feeder 3T (PL17.4.4) and Harness Assy NPRSJ (PL17.4.11) continuity
2. Disconnect the P/J832 connector from the Sensor No Paper (Tray 3). (Refer to Ch4-
4.2.20.36)
no continuity.
J83-5 <=> J8220-3/P8220-1 <=> J832-3
J83-6 <=> J8220-2/P8220-2 <=> J832-2
J83-7 <=> J8220-1/P8220-3 <=> J832-1
PWBA Feeder (PL17.4.1) sensor signal check

Replace the Sensor No Paper
7 3. While operating the Link Actuator (PL17.3.6) manually, measure the following voltage. Go to step 8.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.36).
P/J83-7 <=> P/J83-6
Is the voltage between P/J83-7 <=> P/J83-6 +3.3V DC at the no paper condition, and 0V
DC when paper is present?

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No

8 Go to step 9.
4.2.18.1) Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace any Harness Assy with
9
2. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder. HVPS. no continuity.
J81-15 <=> J810-A12/P810-A3 <=> J210-B12/P210-B1 <=> J21-12

10 Go to step 11.
4.2.18.1) Replace the PWBA MCU & Replace any Harness Assy with
11
2. Disconnect the P/J81 connector from the PWBA Feeder. HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1) no continuity.
J81-24 <=> J810-A3/P810-A12 <=> J210-B3/P210-B11 <=> J21-3

FIP-6 Upper Cassette Detached

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
Initial setting
Switch Assy Size TRAY 2 (PL17.2.7) installation
PAPER CASSETTE installation
Replace the Switch Assy Size

Switch Assy Size TRAY 2 (PL17.2.7)
2 Go to step 3. TRAY 2.
Do the Switch Assy Size TRAY 2 actuators operate smoothly?
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.20)
Switch Assy Size TRAY 2 (PL17.2.7) continuity

1. Operate the Switch Assy Size (Tray 2) actuators manually.
2. Check the continuity between the following terminals of the P/J82 connector of the PWBA
Feeder.
3 P/J82-1 <=> P/J82-3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
P/J82-2 <=> P/J82-3
P/J82-4 <=> P/J82-3
For each circuit, is there continuity when the actuator is operated, and no continuity

2. Disconnect the P/J821 connector from the Switch Assy Size (Tray 2). (Refer to Ch4-
4.2.20.20)
3. Check the continuity for the following lines. Replace the Switch Assy Size
4 TRAY 2.
J82-1 <=> J821-4 Feeder 2T (PL17.4.3).
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.20)
J82-2 <=> J821-3
J82-3 <=> J821-2
J82-4 <=> J821-1

1. Disconnect the P/J81 and P/J82 connectors of the PWBA Feeder.
Replace the PWBA Feeder.
5 P81-11 <=> P82-1 Go to step 6.
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.10)
P81-12 <=> P82-2
P81-13 <=> P82-4

Treatment
Step Check
Yes No
no continuity.
J81-11 <=> J810-B3/P810-B11 <=> J210-A3/P210-A11 <=> J21-16
J81-12 <=> J810-B2/P810-B12 <=> J210-A2/P210-A12 <=> J21-15
J81-13 <=> J810-B1/P810-B13 <=> J210-A1/P210-A13 <=> J21-14
Actuator Size (PL3.2.21) Replace the Cassette Assy

7 While changing the paper size settings, check the Actuator Size operation. (Refer to Ch7.) Go to step 8. (PL2.1.4), or replace the
Does the Actuator Size operate correctly? defective part.
Switch Assy Size (PL17.2.7) signal

1. Insert a Cassette Assy (PL2.1.4) that contains paper.
2. Check the voltages between the following terminals, and compare them with the specified
paper size values. (Refer to Ch7.) Replace the Switch Assy Size
8 TRAY 2.
P/J82-1 <=> P/J82-3 HVPS. (Refer to Ch4-4.2.18.1)
(Refer to Ch4-4.2.20.20)
P/J82-2 <=> P/J82-3
P/J82-4 <=> P/J82-3
Do the signals match the paper size settings?

4
CHAPTER
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

4.1 Overview 4.1.2 Tools

The table below shows the tools used for servicing.
This chapter describes procedures for disassembly and assembly of the
AcuLaser C4000. Note the procedures are applicable only when the printer has
no options installed. For information on removing/installing the options, please Table 4-1. Tools
see the AcuLaser C4000 Setup Guide.
Must Recommended
Phillips screw driver (#2) Soldering iron
4.1.1 Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly
Phillips screw driver (#1) E-ring holder
Precautions for disassembly and assembly are as follows:
Tweezers Mini screw driver
W A R N IN G Before starting, be sure to turn the printer off and unplug
Pliers
the power cable from the AC power socket.
As this printer weighs as much as 36.5 Kg , make sure Guidance Video
that it is always carried carefully by 4 people or more.
When working on the FUSER ASSY or nearby parts, be 4.1.3 Items to Check after Assembly
sure to wait until the temperature of the parts cool down
to a safe level. Performs the items described below when completing assembly after repairing
When printing, make sure that all the outer covers are the printer or replace any parts.
installed. Clean the housings and the interior of the engine. Refer to chapter 6.
In case you need to print before assembling, note the
cautions below: After assembling or adjust the printer, print an engine status sheet to check
1. Be careful not to get your hands and clothes caught in the counters for the consumables and other parts which need replacing. If
the rotating parts such as rollers and cooling fans. any of them is close to its life, replace it with a new one.
2. Never touch any electrical terminal or high voltage Check the program ROM version, and update it if necessary. Refer to
components such as HVPS and LVPS. Section 4.2.3.
Use anti-static devices such as wrist straps in order to
Print several status sheets and check print quality.
avoid static electric discharges when touching internal
components, in order to protect the microprocessor and Send a few pages of data from the host computer and check for proper
order circuits. functions of the printer.
C A U T IO N
When servicing, avoid handling any parts forcibly. Doing
so might damage the parts and cause printer malfunction.
Various types of screws are used to assemble the printer,
and wrong usage might crush tapped hole and cause
troubles. Therefore, be sure to mount the right screws to
the specified positions.
Disassembly and Assembly Overview 4-318

4.2 Disassembly Assembly Procedures Refer to the followings which explain descriptions used in this chapter.
This section describes procedures for disassembling/assembling the printer. Regarding (PL X, Y, Z) at the end of each heading of removal
Unless otherwise specified, assembly can be performed by reversing the sections, it corresponds to the numbers in the part list in Appendix.
disassembly procedure. In principle, you are to remove all options before Referring to the numbers, you can find the appearance and location
servicing. However, you can leave them if possible. of the parts efficiently.
Directions are described as mentioned below. (See Figure 4-1.)
C A U T IO N Some parts are listed as spare parts but not mentioned in Front: Front side viewing the printer toward its front side
disassembly/assembly procedure. Therefore, look
carefully how they are installed before you removing them. Back: Rear side viewing the printer toward its front side
Left: Left hand side viewing the printer toward its front side
Right: Right hand side viewing the printer toward its front side
NOTE: Directions used in this section are defined as shown in the figure
below: Screws are mentioned with descriptions including (mounting
location, color, feature, thread part length, and so on).
Rear The number in drawing corresponds to the step number in the
section.
Secre the screws in the drawings using a Philips screw driver if no
Left instruction is given.
If black arrows are shown with numbers, they show the order to act
for the step.
Refer to Appendix for the connector (P/J) locations and harness
routings.
Right
Front
Figure 4-1. Directions
Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly Assembly Procedures 4-319

In this procedure, "Press latch A" and "Press latch B" releases the latch 4.2.1 Large capacity paper unit removal
that is shown in the below figures.
1. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.
2 2. Remove all interface cables from the interface connectors.
W A R N IN G Be sure to lock both casters before removing the unit from

the printer. Otherwise, the unit may move and cause an
accident.
3. Remove the standard lower cassette from the printer.

4. Remove the two screws securing the front of the unit to the printer.
Figure 4-2. Large capacity paper unit 1

2
5. Remove the cover on the back of the standard lower cassette, and remove
the two screws securing the back of the unit. Then reattach the cover.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_201FA

6. Insert the standard lower cassette into the printer. 4.2.2 Removing/Replacing the Consumables
7. Carefully lift up the printer with two or more people until the holes on the
The consumables available (can be replaced by users) for this printer are as
bottom of the printer are free from the five pins on the top of the unit, and
shown below. Refer to Chapter 6 for the procedure.
place it on a flat stable surface.
TONER CARTRIDGE (Y, M, C, K)
PHD ASSY
BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY
4.2.3 Updating the Main Controller Program ROM

The program ROM of this printer is a flash ROM module and can be updated in
one of the following 2 ways:
1. Transferring the ROM updating program data (*.CRB) from the host
computer via the standard parallel interface.
2. Copying the program ROM from the flash ROM module which has the most
updated program.
Also, when you failed to write the program into the flash ROM and perform the
same writing operation again or when you copy the program from the flash
ROM module to another flash ROM module.
See the following sections for the procedures of each operation.

4.2.3.1 Updating the ROM using a standard parallel interface
Follow the instructions below to update the program ROM using a standard
parallel interface.
NOTE: The personal computer to be used should be able to send binary data
from DOS prompt via a parallel interface.

PROCEDURE 4.2.3.2 Updating by copying from the FLASH ROM module

Follow the steps below.
1. Print a status sheet, and make sure of current program version.
1. Set the ROM module in which the program is to be written in the socket A
2. Turn off the printer and the personal computer, and connect an interface to
of the CONTROLLER PWB.
each of them. Be sure to disconnect all interface cables except for the
parallel interface cable so the printer will not receive data from any other NOTE: Format this ROM module in the way describe in Section 4.2.3.3.
interfaces.
3. Turn on the printer while pressing the DOWN, JOB CANCEL and START/ 2. Turn the printer on while pressing the ENTER, JOB CANCEL, and START/
STOP buttons. STOP buttons. (Keep the buttons down until proceeding to Step 4.)
4. The LCD panel of the printer will indicate the messages as follows:
RAM CHECK**MB
Program Device Ver. xx.xx Please Send Data
3. When the RAM CHECK finishes, the printer will enter the program ROM
5. Check that the message Please Send Data is indicated on the LCD
copy mode. The LCD message show below appears.
panel of the printer.
6. To transfer the program data file from the computer to the printer, type the ROM Copy Mode
command (shown below) on the DOS prompt (from the directory that has
****.crb) and press the ENTER key of the computer.
Then press the Enter button. You see the message below:
copy /b pic****. crb 1ptl
DIMM P>A COPYING
7. The LCD panel of the printer will indicate the message as follow:
OLD: xxxx NEW: xxxx
8. Press the ENTER button on the controller panel of the printer. 4. When the program has been properly updated, the printer enters the
Ready status.
9. You see the messages changing as follow:
5. Turn the printer power off and remove the ROM module from the socket A.
Erasing Device PRG FF XXXXC0
10. When the check sum is indicated on the LCD panel, the program has been
downloaded. Then turn the printer off.
11. Turn the printer back on and print a status sheet. Then referring to the
status sheet you printed in step 1, check that the program firmware version
was updated.

4.2.3.3 Formatting the FLASH ROM Module

Flash ROM module can be formatted as instructed below.
1. Install the ROM module to be formatted to the socket A of the

CONTROLLER PWB.
NOTE: Leave the ROM module in the socket P of the CONTROLLER PWB
as it is.
2. Turn the printer on while pressing down the UP, DOWN, ENTER, and JOB
CANCEL buttons, and keep the buttons down until instructed to release
them.
RAM CHECK **MB
When the RAM CHECK finishes, the printer will enter the ROM formatting
mode. The LCD message show below appears.
DIMM A ERASING
Release the buttons at this point. The LCD message below appears.
DIMM A ERASING
3. After while, the message below appears and the ROM has been formatted.
DIMM A ERASED

4.2.4 COVER
4.2.4.1 CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1) Removal
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD (PL1.1.2). (See Section
4.2.4.2.)
2. Remove the HOLDER LEVER OUT. (See Section 4.2.4.3.)
3. Release the 2 hooks securing the CONTROL PANEL (PL.1.1.1) to the
COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. And then push the upper part of control
panel to outside a little bit.
4. Pull up the control panel to direction of allows on the figure, then remove
the CONTROL PANEL from the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD.
Figure 4-5. CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1) Removal (1)
Figure 4-6. CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1) Removal (2)

4.2.4.2 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD (PL1.1.2) Removal

1. Press the latch B on the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT C A U T IO N Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD in condition without
(PL7.1.1). the B latch button being pushed in.
C A U T IO N In the following step, the CHUTE ASSY OUT and the COVER
ASSY FRONT HEAD are kept connected to the printer body
with a harness. Therefore, does not move the CHUTE ASSY
OUT and the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD too far from the
printer.
2. Free the 2 hooks securing the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD to the CHUTE
ASSY OUT and remove the hooks from the upper locations.
3. Move the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD a little way from the CHUTE ASSY
OUT.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J220) on the CONTROL PANEL (PL1.1.1).
5. Free the HARNESS ASSY DUP (PL7.1.23) from the hooks of the COVER
ASSY FRONT HEAD.
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J137) on the HOLDER LEVER OUT
(PL1.1.5).
7. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
Follow the steps below when assembling the COVER ASSY

FRONT HEAD.
1. Press the latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
2. Connect the connector (P/J137) of the HOLDER LEVER
OUT.
3. Secure the HARNESS ASSY DUP to the hooks of
COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD.
4. Connect the connector of the CONTROL PANEL.
5. Close the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
6. Place the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD over its
installation location and press down to set the retaining
hooks.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_001FC
Figure 4-7. COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD (PL1.1.2) Removal

4.2.4.3 FAN FUSER (PL1.1.9) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.)
2. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the HOLDER LEVER
OUT (PL1.1.5) to the rear of the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD.
3. Remove the HOLDER LEVER OUT (PL1.1.5) along with the FAN FUSER
and the LEVER OUT (PL1.1.7) from the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J137) for the FAN FUSER.
5. Release the 4 hooks securing the FAN FUSER to the HOLDER LEVER
OUT.
6. Remove the FAN FUSER from the HOLDER LEVER OUT.
Figure 4-8. FUN FUSER (PL1.1.9) Removal

4.2.4.4 COVER ASSY TOP MAIN (PL1.1.12) Removal

1. Remove the COVER TOP (PL1.1.11) from the printer body.
2. Remove the 4 TONER CARTRIDGES (Y/M/C/K) (PL12.1.1, 2,3,4).
3. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN
(PL7.1.1).
4. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) from the printer body.
5. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the COVER ASSY
TOP MAIN to the printer body.
6. Release the 2 secured hooks at the back of the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN
to the printer body and the hooks at the upper front of COVER SIDE L
(PL7.2.1) and COVER SIDE R (PL7.2.2).
7. Lift the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN a short distance from the printer body,
and then remove the left side component of the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN
as it bends to the left direction.
8. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN from the printer.
Figure 4-9. COVER ASSY TOP MAIN (PL1.1.12) Removal

4.2.4.5 COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) Removal 4.2.4.6 COVER REAR (PL1.1.28) Removal
1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.)
2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.)
3. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD from the printer body. 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.)
4. Pull out the STUD TOP (PL1.1.29) securing the COVER ASSY TOP PHD 4. Lift the COVER REAR a little in the rear direction, then remove the COVER
at the left and right. REAR.
5. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP PHD from the printer body.
Figure 4-10. COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) Removal Figure 4-11. COVER REAR (PL1.1.28) Removal

4.2.4.7 LINK: L (PL1.2.5) Removal 4.2.4.8 LINK: R (PL1.2.5) Removal

2. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) 2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.)
3. Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK (PL 1.2.8) on the rear of the COVER 3. Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK (PL 1.2.9) on the rear of the CONVER
FRONT IN (PL 1.2.10), then release the boss of the LINK;L. FRONT (PL 1.2.9), then release the boss of the LINK;R.
4. At the left side of the printer body, release the hook of the SPRING LINK: L 4. At the right side of the printer, pull out the hook of the SPRING LINK: R
(PL1.2.4) from the convex surface. (PL1.2.4) from the convex surface.
5. Slide the LINK: L toward the rear of the printer, then align the axle of the 5. Slide the LINK: R toward the rear of the printer, then align the axle of the
printer body with the hole of the LINK: L. printer body with the hole of the LINK: R.
6. Remove the LINK: L along with the SPRING LINK: L from the printer body. 6. Remove the LINK: R along with the SPRING LINK: R from the printer body.
7. Remove the SPRING LINK: L from the LINK: L. 7. Remove the SPRING LINK: R from the LINK: R.
C H E C K It is better to Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK by using the C H E C K It is better to Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK by using the
P O IN T small screwdriver. P O IN T small screwdriver.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_109FB HANABI_BE_CHAP03_108FB
Figure 4-12. LINK: L (PL1.2.5) Removal

Figure 4-13. LINK: R (PL1.2.5) Removal

4.2.4.9 COVER SIDE R (PL1.2.2) Removal 4.2.4.10 COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.2.6) Removal
1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.) 1. Release the latch A and open CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1) and CHUTE
ASSY IN (PL6.1.1).
2. Remove the 1 screw (silver, with a brim, 8mm) securing the COVER SIDE
R to the rear of the printer body. 2. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the COVER ASSY
3. Release the 1 hook securing the front side of the COVER SIDE R. FRONT to the CHUTE ASSY IN .
3. Close the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
C H E C K In the next procedure, it is easy to remove by moving the 4. Release the latch B and open CHUTE ASSY OUT.
P O IN T front of the COVER SIDE R with pushing and spreading 5. Pull the COVER ASSY FRONT a little ways from the CHUTE ASSY IN.
COVER ASSY FRONT (PL 1.2.6) to outside a little bit.
6. Release the boss at the front of the LINK:R (PL 1.2.5) with spreading the
SPRING PLATE LINK (PL 1.2.8) at the back of the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Then remove the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4. Lift the upper part of the COVER SIDE R while pulling it to the right, then
remove it from the printer body.
C H E C K It is better to Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK by using the
P O IN T small screwdriver.
LINK R
Figure 4-14. COVER SIDE R (PL1.2.2) Removal Figure 4-15. COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.2.6) Removal

4.2.4.11 COVER MSI (PL1.2.21) Removal 4.2.4.12 TRAY ASSY MSI (PL1.2.12) Removal
1. Open the COVER MSI (PL1.2.21) from the front side of printer body. 1. Open the COVER MSI (PL1.2.21) from the printer body.
2. While allowing the left side of the COVER MSI left side elongated hole 2. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.)
section to bend, pull out the reinforced portion of the TRAY ASSY MSI 3. Open the TRAY ASSY MSI, slide the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI
(PL7.2.12) of the elongated hole section. (PL7.1.42) inward then lift it up to avoid the left and right mounting pieces
3. Pull the reinforced portion of the TRAY ASSY MSI from the COVER MSI and remove the plate.
right side elongated hole section.
4. While lowering the front edge of the COVER MSI, pull the COVER MSI
toward the front and remove it.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_114FB
Figure 4-17. TRAY ASSY MSI (PL1.2.12) Removal
Figure 4-16. COVER MSI (PL1.2.21) Removal

4.2.4.13 COVER ASSY FRONT IN (PL1.2.10) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.)
2. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.)
3. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.)
5. Release the reinforced portion at the front of the LINK: L (PL1.2.5) from the
back panel of the COVER ASSY FRONT.
6. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the COVER ASSY
FRONT IN to the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1).
7. Release the 2 hooks securing the COVER ASSY FRONT IN to the CHUTE
ASSY OUT, and remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN.
C H E C K It is better to Spread the SPRING PLATE LINK by using the

P O IN T small screwdriver.
Figure 4-18. COVER ASSY FRONT IN (PL1.2.10) Removal

4.2.4.14 COVER SIDE L (PL1.2.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.)
2. Remove the 1 screw (silver, with a brim, 8mm) securing the COVER SIDE
L to the rear side of the printer body.
3. Release the 1 hook securing the front side of the COVER SIDE L.
C H E C K In the next procedure, it is easy to remove by moving the

P O IN T front of the COVER SIDE L with pushing and spreading
COVER ASSY FRONT IN (PL 1.2.10) to outside a little bit.
4. Remove the COVER SIDE L from the printer body.
HANABI_BE_CHAP03_007FD
Figure 4-19. COVER SIDE L (PL1.2.1) Removal

4.2.5 CHASIS & FEEDER/CASSETTE

4.2.5.1 FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3) Removal
1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body.
3. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) J47
4. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.)
5. Remove the COVER CASSETTE REAR. (See Section 4.2.7.2.)
6. Move the shaft socket of the LINK ACTUATOR secured to the ACTUATOR
NO PAPER (PL4.3.6) away from the FEEDER parts, the let the shaft of the P/J2361
ACTUATOR NO PAPER come free.
7. Pull out the LINK ACTUATOR of the hole of the FEEDER part and remove
it.
P/J210
8. Disconnect the connector (P/J2361) used to connect the printer body and
the FEEDER ASSY from the left side surface of the printer body. FEEDER ASSY
9. Disconnect the connector (P/J210) that connect the printer body and
FEEDER ASSY from the right side surface of the printer body.
10. Disconnect the connector (P/J47) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the
right side surface of the printer body.
11. Remove the 8 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the FEEDER ASSY to
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, the 1 screw (L85)
(PL4.1.13) at the left side of the FEEDER ASSY can scrape
against the printer body housing as it is being removed,
so it is better to also remove the other 3 long screws and
hold the body parts to the side while removing the HANABI_BE_CHAP03_008FE
FEEDER ASSY. Figure 4-20. FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3) Removal
When performing the following step, the Washer
(PL4.1.14) can easily fall out, so this may be prevented by
using a punch or other tool to hold the washer while
removing the part or by using a screwdriver with a strong
magnetic tip.
12. Remove the 4 screws (L85) with a washer securing the FEEDER ASSY to
the printer body.

W A R N IN G Lifting the upper unit of the printer body should be done by

2 people.
C A U T IO N
When removing the FEEDER ASSY from the printer body
upper unit, be careful not to drop the upper unit or
damage the components.
When lifting the printer body, remove it by allowing the left
side HARNESS ASSY TEMP B (PL15.2.12) and right side
HARNESS ASSY OPF MAIN (PL15.2.8) and the HARNESS
ASSY FEEDER (PL4.3.28) to come free of the square holes
in the printers main frame.
13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY.
When the FEEDER ASSY is placed on the upper unit of the

printer body, do not constrict the left side HARNESS ASSY
TEMP B and right side HARNESS ASSY OPF MAIN and the
HARNESS ASSY FEEDER.

4.2.5.2 STRAP (PL2.1.8) Removal 4.2.6 PAPER CASSETTE

1. Release the latch B of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT
(PL7.1.1). 4.2.6.1 ROLL ASSY (PL3.1.6) Removal
2. Release the hook securing the STRAP lower section from the CHUTE 1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body.
ASSY OUT, then slide the STRAP lower section to the right and remove it. 2. Release the 1 hook securing the CHUTE RETARD (PL3.1.5) to the
3. Let the STRAP upper section securing the upper right section of the CASSETTE and open the CHUTE RETARD.
CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) rotate, align the keyhole of the CHUTE ASSY 3. Release the 1 hook securing the ROLL ASSY to the SHAFT RETARD from
IN with the convex surface, remove the STRAP upper section, then the CASSETTE.
remove the STRAP.
4. Pull out the ROLL ASSY from the SHAFT RETARD.
I
1
Figure 4-22. ROLL ASSY (PL3.1.6) Removal
Figure 4-21. STRAP (PL2.1.8) Removal

4.2.6.2 HOLDER RETARD (PL3.1.9) Removal 4.2.6.3 CASSETTE ASSY FRONT (REFERENCE ONLY)
Removal
2. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.6.3.) 1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body.
3. Remove the ROLL ASSY. (See Section 4.2.6.1.) 2. From the right side of the CASSETTE, release the upper and lower section
hooks securing the CHUTE CASSETTE (PL3.1.2) with a tool like a small
4. Pull out the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION 400 (PL3.1.7) on the SHAFT screwdriver.
RETARD from the CASSETTE.
3. From the left side of the CASSETTE, release the upper and lower section
5. Release the hook of the SPRING RETARD (PL3.1.10) hanging from the hooks securing the CHUTE CASSETTE with a tool like a small
channel of the lower portion of the HOLDER RETARD from the screwdriver.
CASSETTE.
4. Pull out the CHUTE CASSETTE along with the HANDLE CASSETTE
6. Release the 1 hook securing the upper portion of the HOLDER RETARD to (PL3.1.1) from the CASSETTE.
the CASSETTE, and let the HOLDER RETARD shift to the left.
7. After moving the right end of the HOLDER RETARD away from the
CASSETTE toward the front, remove the HOLDER RETARD by pulling it
out.
Figure 4-24. CASSETTE ASSY FRONT Removal

Figure 4-23. HOLDER RETARD (PL3.1.9) Removal

4.2.7 PAPER FEEDER 4.2.7.2 COVER CASSETTE REAR (PL4.1.3) Removal

1. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY REAR from the back of the printer body by
4.2.7.1 CHUTE ASSY TURN (PL4.1.6) Removal letting it revolve upward as it is pulled in this direction.
2. Release the 2 hooks securing the CHUTE ASSY TURN to the printer body
FEEDER.
3. Let the rear axle of the CHUTE ASSY TURN rotate 90 degrees upward.
4. Release the hooks securing the left and right shaft sections of the CHUTE
ASSY TURN to the printer body FEEDER.
5. Pull out the CHUTE ASSY TURN toward the front and remove it from the
printer body FEEDER.
Figure 4-26. COVER CASSETTE REAR (PL4.1.3) Removal
Figure 4-25. CHUTE ASSY TURN (PL4.1.6) Removal

4.2.7.3 HOUSING FDR L (PL4.2.1) Removal

3. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.)
NO PAPER (PL4.3.6) away from the FEEDER parts, the let the shaft of the
it.
the FEEDER ASSY from the left side surface of the printer body.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
hold the body parts to the side while removing the
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.
Figure 4-27. HOUSING FDR L (PL4.2.1) Removal


2 people.
C A U T IO N
C H E C K In case of removing the HOUSING FDR L as a unit,

P O IN T removing the SENSOR HUM TEMP is not necessary.
14. Remove the SENSOR HUM TEMP. (See Section 4.2.7.5.)

15. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.7.1.)
16. Remove the PICKUP ASSY. (See Section 4.2.7.11.)
17. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the HOUSING FDR L
to the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM (PL4.1.5).
18. Move the HOUSING FDR L toward the interior, and remove the 3 hooks
from the holes in the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM.
19. Remove the HOUSING FDR L upward from the FRAME FEEDER
BOTTOM.

4.2.7.4 HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) Removal

it.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.
Figure 4-28. HOUSING FDR L (PL4.2.1) Removal


2 people.
C A U T IO N
C H E C K In case of removing the HOUSING FDR R as a unit,

P O IN T removing the SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 is not necessary.
14. Remove the SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1. (See Section 4.2.7.5.)

17. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the HOUSING FDR
R from the base of the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM (PL4.1.5).
18. Move the HOUSING FDR R toward the interior, and remove the 3 hooks
from the holes in the FRAME FEEDER BOTTOM.
19. Remove the HOUSING FDR R upward from the FRAME FEEDER
BOTTOM.

4.2.7.5 SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4) Removal

1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. 2 people.
C A U T IO N
5. Remove the COVER CASSETTE REAR. (See Section 4.2.7.2.) upper unit, be careful not to drop the upper unit or
NO PAPER (PL4.3.6) away from the FEEDER parts, the let the shaft of the When lifting the printer body, remove it by allowing the left
ACTUATOR NO PAPER come free. side HARNESS ASSY TEMP B (PL15.2.12) and right side
7. Pull out the LINK ACTUATOR of the hole of the FEEDER part and remove ASSY FEEDER (PL4.3.28) to come free of the square holes
it. in the printers main frame.
8. Disconnect the connector (P/J2361) used to connect the printer body and 13. Lift the printer body and clear it from the FEEDER ASSY.
14. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the SENSOR HUM
9. Disconnect the connector (P/J210) that connect the printer body and TEMP to the HOUSING FDR L (PL4.2.1) and remove the SENOR HUM
FEEDER ASSY from the right side surface of the printer body. TEMP along with the HARNESS ASSY TMPA (PL4.2.3).
10. Disconnect the connector (P/J47) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the 15. Disconnect the connector (P/J231) on the SENSOR HUM TEMP and
right side surface of the printer body. remove the HARNESS ASSY TMPA.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.
Figure 4-29. SENSOR HUM TEMP (PL4.2.4) Removal

4.2.7.6 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC (PL4.2.9) Removal

it.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
against the printer body housing as it is being removed, Figure 4-30. HARNESS ASSY OPFREC (PL4.2.9) Removal
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
14. Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC from the
HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) of the FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3).
15. Release the 2 hooks securing the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC to the
HOUSING FDR R.
16. Remove the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC by pulling it downward from the
HOUSING FDR R.

4.2.7.7 SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 (PL4.2.8) Removal

it.
the printer body.
Figure 4-31. SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 (PL4.2.8) Removal
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
14. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the SWITCH SIZE
TRAY1 from the HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) of FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3)
and remove the SWITCH SIZE TRAY1 from the HOUSING FDR R.
15. Disconnect the connector (P/J471) on the SWITCH SIZE TRAY1.

4.2.7.8 LEVER LOW PAPER (PL4.2.10)

it.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body. Figure 4-32. LEVER LOW PAPER (PL4.2.10) Removal


2 people.
C A U T IO N
14. Remove the INDICATOR. (See Section 4.2.7.9.)
15. Remove the GUIDE INDICATOR. (See Section 4.2.7.10.)
17. Remove the HOUSING FDR R. (See Section 4.2.7.4.)
18. Shift the shaft socket of the HOUSING FDR R secured to right side shafts
of the LEVER LOW PAPER away from lower surface of the HOUSING
FDR R (PL4.2.2), then release the right side shafts.
19. From the left side of the HOUSING FDR R, insert the actuator of the
LEVER LOW PAPER into the HOUSING FDR R.
20. From the upper surface of the HOUSING FDR R, position the LEVER LOW
PAPER so that it is perpendicular, then remove it in an upward direction.

4.2.7.9 INDICATOR (PL4.2.11) Removal

it.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
(PL4.1.13) at the left side of the FEEDER ASSY can scrape Figure 4-33. INDICATOR (PL4.2.11) Removal
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
14. From the HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) of the FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3),
grab the front end of the INDICATOR with needle nose pliers and pull out
the INDICATOR.
When installing the INDICATOR, do so while pressing on

the GUIDE INDICATOR (PL4.2.13).

4.2.7.10 GUIDE INDICATOR (PL4.2.13) Removal

it.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.
Figure 4-34. GUIDE INDICATOR (PL4.2.13) Removal


2 people.
C A U T IO N
14. Remove the INDUCATOR. (See Section 4.2.7.9.)
15. Release the 2 hooks securing the HOLDER L-PAPER (PL4.2.12) to the
HOUSING FDR R (PL4.2.2) of the FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3).
16. Pull out the GUIDE INDICATOR along with the SPRING INDICATOR
(PL4.2.14) and the SHAFT INDICATOR (PL4.2.15) from the HOUSING
FDR R.
17. Pull out the GUIDE INDICATOR from the SHAFT INDICATOR.
When ready to install the GUIDE INDICATOR, let the front

end of the LEVER LOW PAPER ride on the convex portion
on the left side of the GUIDE INDICATOR.
Install the HOLDER L PAPER in the direction from which
the corner drops down.

4.2.7.11 PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1) Removal

it.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, the 1 screw (L85) Figure 4-35. PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1) Removal
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
14. Disconnect the connector (P/J471) for the SWITCH SIZE TRAY1
(PL4.2.8).
15. Release the PICKUP ASSY harness from the hook at the right side of the
FEEDER ASSY (PL2.1.3).
16. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PICKUP ASSY
from the FEEDER ASSY.
17. Lift the PICKUP ASSY upward and remove it from the FEEDER ASSY.

4.2.7.12 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL4.3.3) Removal

2. From the FEEDER, let the SHAFT FEED 1 (PL4.3.2) rotate so that the
rubber part of the ROLL ASSY FEED faces downward.
3. Pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED downward and remove it from SHAFT
FEED 1.
Install the ROLL ASSY FEED from either side.
Figure 4-36. ROLL ASSY FEED (PL4.3.3) Removal

4.2.7.13 SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 N/P) (PL4.3.4)

RIGHT
Removal
LEFT
it. TOP
Figure 4-37. SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 N/P) (PL4.3.4) Removal
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
15. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. (See Section 4.2.7.15.)
16. Disconnect the connector (P/J472) on the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER
(Tray1 N/P).
17. Release the hooks securing the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 N/P)
from the PICKUP ASSY, and remove the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER.

4.2.7.14 SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 L/P) (PL4.3.4)

Removal
it.
the printer body. Figure 4-38. SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 L/P) (PL4.3.3) Removal
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
15. Disconnect the connector (P/J473) on the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER
(Tray1 L/P).
16. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (Tray1 L/P)
to the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1), and remove the SENSOR NO/LOW
PAPER(Tray1 L/P) from the PICKUP ASSY.

4.2.7.15 ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL4.3.5) Removal

1. Pull out the CASSETTE from the printer body. RIGHT
it.
the FEEDER ASSY from the left side surface of the printer body. TOP
9. Disconnect the connector (P/J210) that connect the printer body and LEFT
FEEDER ASSY from the right side surface of the printer body. HANABI_BE_CHAP03_139FA
10. Disconnect the connector (P/J47) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the Figure 4-39. ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL4.3.5) Removal
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
15. Place the PICKUP ASSY on the workbench with its bottom surface facing
upward.
16. Open toward the front and release the 1 hook securing the ACTUATOR
NO PAPER to the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1), then remove the shaft part at
the left side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.
17. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the PICKUP ASSY by pulling it
the upper left direction.

4.2.7.16 LINK ACTUATOR (PL4.3.6) Removal

2. Open the front section of the LINK ACTUATOR to the left and right, and
release the LINK ACTUATOR bracket from shaft of the ACTUATOR NO
PAPER (PL4.3.5).
3. Shift the LINK ACTUATOR to the front and pull out it of the holes on the
printer body, then remove the LINK ACTUATOR.
Figure 4-40. LINK ACTUATOR (PL4.3.6) Removal

4.2.7.17 SOLENOID FEED TRAY1 (PL4.3.17) Removal

it.
the printer body.
C A U T IO N Figure 4-41. SOLENOID FEED TRAY1 (PL4.3.17) Removal
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
15. Disconnect the connector (P/J474) of SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 from the
PICKUP ASSY, and free the SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 harness from the
PICKUP ASSY.
16. Remove the 1 screw (gold, 4mm) securing the SOLENOID FEED TRAY1
from the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1).

4.2.7.18 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY1 (PL4.3.18) Removal

it.
the printer body.
Figure 4-42. CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY1 (PL4.3.18) Removal
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
15. Disconnect the intermadiate connector (P/J475) of CLUTCH ASSY TURN
TRAY 1 from the PICKUP ASSY.
16. Release the 1 hook securing the STOPPER CLUTCH (PL4.3.16) to the
shaft at the left side of the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1), then shift it to the left
and remove it.
17. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 from the shaft at the left side
of the PICKUP ASSY.

4.2.7.19 ROLL ASSY TURN (PL4.3.21) Removal

it.
9. Disconnect the connector (P/J210) that connect the printer body and Figure 4-43. ROLL ASSY TURN (PL4.3.21) Removal
the printer body.
C A U T IO N
FEEDER ASSY.
magnetic tip.
the printer body.


2 people.
C A U T IO N
15. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY1. (See Section 4.2.7.18.)
16. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR FEED 2 (PL4.3.13) to the shaft of
the PICKUP ASSY (PL4.3.1), the remove GEAR FEED 2.
17. Remove the GEAR IDLER (PL4.3.15) from the shaft of the PICKUP ASSY.
18. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN (PL4.3.19) from the shaft of the PICKUP
ASSY.
19. Remove the left and right E-rings securing the shaft of the ROLL ASSY
TURN to the PICKUP ASSY.
20. Remove the BEARING (PL4.3.7) securing the shaft at the left side of the
ROLL ASSY TURN from the PICKUP ASSY.
21. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE (PL4.3.22) securing the shaft at the left
side of the ROLL ASSY TURN from the PICKUP ASSY.
22. From the PICKUP ASSY, let the ROLL ASSY TURN slide to the left,
remove the left end of the ROLL ASSY TURN from the shaft socket hole,
then remove the ROLL ASSY TURN by pulling it up and to the left.

4.2.7.20 ROLL ASSY (PL4.3.25) Removal

2. Release the 1 hook securing the ROLL ASSY to SHAFT FEED 2
(PL4.3.23) from the FEEDER.
3. Remove the ROLL ASSY to the left side, away from SHAFT FEED 2.

4.2.8 HOUSING ASSY RETARD

4.2.8.1 HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1) Removal
1. Pull out the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.)
2. Disconnect the connector (P/J19 ) of CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) from
the upper part of PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2), then free the harness
from clamp of CHASSIS MAIN (PL2.1.9).
FRONT
C A U T IO N When operating the following procedures, operate holding LINK L
the FRONT COVER by hand.
3. Release the hooks of the SPRING PLATE LINK (PL1.7, 1.8) side of the
LINK (PL1.2.5).
4. Remove the 3 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the HOUSING ASSY
RETARD to the printer body.
5. Lift the HOUSING ASSY RETARD to the left, and remove the CLUTCH
TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) by shifting it to the left and pulling it from the
CHASSIS MAIN.
If the HOUSING ASSY RETARD will not go in easily, pull it to

the left side a little and let it fall in.
LINK R
Figure 4-45. HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1) Removal

4.2.8.2 ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2) Removal

1. Pull out the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.)
2. Remove the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. (See Section 4.2.8.1.)
3. Remove the CLUTCH TURN MSI. (See Section 4.2.8.4.)
4. Remove the E-ring securing the left side of the ROLL TURN to the
HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1).
5. Remove the BEARING EARTH (PL5.1.13) securing the shaft at the left
side of the ROLL TURN from the HOUSING ASSY RETARD.
6. Remove the BEARING RUBBER R (PL5.1.13) set on the shaft at the right
side of the ROLL TURN from the HOUSING ASSY RETARD.
7. From the HOUSING ASSY RETARD, let the ROLL TURN slide to the right,
remove the shaft on the left side of the ROLL TURN from the shaft socket
hole, then remove the ROLL TURN upward and to the left.
Figure 4-46. ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2) Removal

4.2.8.3 ROLL ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.5) Removal

1. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT
(PL5.1.1).
2. Hold the front end of the HOLDER RETARD (PL5.1.6) of the upper part of
the HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1), and let the HOLDER RETARD
rotate toward the rear.
3. Let the HOLDER RETARD slide to the right, then remove the shaft at the
left side of the HOLDER RETARD from the shaft socket hole of the
HOUSING ASSY RETARD.
4. Pull the HOLDER RETARD upward to the left, out of the HOUSING ASSY
RETARD.
5. Release the 1 hook securing the right side of SHAFT RTD (PL5.1.3) to the
HOLDER RETARD.
6. While holding the SHAFT RTD upward to the right side, remove the
SHAFT RTD along with the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY
FRICTION (PL5.1.4).
7. Pull the SHAFT RTD from the ROLL ASSY RETARD.
Figure 4-47. ROLL ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.5) Removal (1) Figure 4-48. ROLL ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.5) Removal (2)

4.2.8.4 CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) Removal 4.2.8.5 STUD RETARD (PL5.1.10) Removal
1. Remove out the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.)
2. Remove the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. (See Section 4.2.8.1.) 2. Remove the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. (See Section 4.2.8.1.)
3. Remove the E-ring securing the CLUTCH TURN MSI to the shaft of the 3. Release the 2 hooks securing the CAP RETARD (PL5.1.12) to the convex
ROLL TURN (PL5.1.2). part of the lower section of the HOUSING ASSY RETARD (PL5.1.1).
4. Remove out the CLUTCH TURN MSI from the shaft of the ROLL TURN. 4. Remove the CAP RETARD along with the STAD RETARD and the
SPRING RETARD 390 (PL5.1.11) from the HOUSING ASSY RETARD.
5. Remove the STAD RETARD from the CAP RETARD.
Figure 4-49. CLUTCH TURN MSI (PL5.1.9) Removal
Figure 4-50. STUD RETARD (PL5.1.10) Removal

4.2.9 CHUTE ASSY IN

4.2.9.1 CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) Removal
J5030
2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.2.)
4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) J5020
5. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) J1361 J141

7. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.)
8. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.)
9. Remove the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) J138

11. Remove the CHUTE ASSY OUT. (See Section 4.2.10.1.)
C A U T IO N Before performing the following step, lock the printer body

with latch A in order to prevent the CHUTE ASSY IN from
falling.
J52
12. Disconnect the connector (P/J5030) and the connector (P/J5020) on the
HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9) from the printer body left side. J162
13. Disconnect the connector (P/J141), connector (P/J1361) and connector (P/
J138) from the connector bracket of the printer body left side.
14. Free the connector harness that was removed by the instructions above
from the lower part of the HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4) of the printer body
left side.
15. Disconnect the connector (P/J52) on the HWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the
printer body right side.
16. Disconnect the connector (P/J162) on the LVPS (PL15.1.10) from the
printer body right side. HANABI_BE_CHAP03_032FC
Figure 4-51. CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) Removal (1)

17. Remove the 1 screw securing the WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH to the printer
body right side.
18. Free the harness (J52) of the DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) from the
upper clamp of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2).
19. Free the HARNESS ASSY FSR 2 (PL6.1.9) from the hook on the housing
at the printer body right side.
20. Release latch A of the printer body, then remove the CHUTE ASSY IN by
pulling it up and out.
Figure 4-52. CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) Removal (2)

4.2.9.2 SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) Removal 4.2.9.3 SENSOR TONER FULL (PL6.1.13) Removal
1. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN 1. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN
(PL6.1.1). (PL6.1.1).
2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.2.) 2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.2.)
3. Lift the SENSOR ASSY ADC a little way from the CHUTE ASSY IN, and
disconnect the connector (P/J136). C H E C K In the next step, it may help to insert a screwdriver into the
4. Release the 4 hooks securing the SENSOR ASSY ADC to the CHUTE P O IN T upper part of the connector when removing the hook from
ASSY IN of the printer body. the right side. (See illustration.)
5. Remove the SENSOR ASSY ADC along with the SPRING ADC (PL6.1.12)
from the CHUTE ASSY IN.
6. Remove the SPRING ADC from the SENSOR ASSY ADC. 3. Release the 2 hooks securing the left and right sides of the SENSOR
TONER FULL to the CHUTE ASSY IN by using a tool such as a small
screwdriver.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J142) on the SENSOR TONER FULL.
5. Remove the SENSOR TONER FULL from the CHUTE ASSY IN.
Figure 4-53. SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11) Removal
Figure 4-54. SENSOR TONER FULL (PL6.1.13) Removal

4.2.9.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) Removal

2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.2.)
(PL6.1.1).
7. Remove the 1 screw (gold, with outside toothed lock washer, 6mm)
securing the WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH (PL6.1.20) to the DRIVE ASSY
FUSER.
8. Remove the 1 screw (gold, with outside toothed lock washer, 6mm)
securing the wire to the upper part of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2).
9. Free the harness (J52) between the DRIVE ASSY DEVE and CHUTE
ASSY IN from clamps and the housing.
10. Remove the LATCH R. (See Section 4.2.9.5.)
11. Remove the 3 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the DRIVE ASSY
FUSER to the CHUTE ASSY IN.
12. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FUSER from the CHUTE ASSY IN.
Figure 4-55. DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18) Removal

4.2.9.5 LATCH R (PL6.1.21) Removal 4.2.9.6 LATCH L (PL6.1.30) Removal

1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.)
2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (See Section 4.2.4.10.) 2. Release the latch B of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT
3. Release the latch A of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1).
(PL6.1.1). 3. Release LATCH A, open CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1), release 1 hook of
4. Release the hook of the lower SPRING LATCH 1.2 kgf (PL6.1.22) secured LATCH L so it avoids LINK:L (PL1.2.5), then remove LATCH L to the left.
to the hole in the right side of the CHUTE ASSY IN.
5. Release the 1 hook attaching the LATCH R to the CHUTE ASSY IN by C H E C K If LATCH L is hard to remove from the SHAFT LATCH
pressing downward on it with a screwdriver. P O IN T (PL6.1.23), remove the SHAFT LATCH then separate the
parts.
6. Pull out the LATCH R along with the SHAFT LATCH (PL6.1.23) and the
SPRING LATCH 1.2kgf from the CHUTE ASSY IN.
7. Remove the SPRING LATCH 1.2kgf from the LATCH R.
8. Pull out the SHAFT LATCH from the LATCH R.
Figure 4-57. LATCH L (PL6.1.30) Removal

Figure 4-56. LUTCH R (PL6.1.21) Removal

4.2.10 CHUTE ASSY OUT

4.2.10.1 CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1) Removal
9. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) J221 J139
10. Remove the STRAP. (See Section 4.2.5.2.)
C A U T IO N When performing the following step, prevent parts from

falling by locking CHUTE ASSY IN (PL6.1.1) and CHUTE
ASSY OUT to the printer body with latches A and B.
11. Disconnect the connector (P/J221) from the connector bracket of the
printer body left side.
12. Disconnect the connector (P/J139) from the connector bracket of the
printer body left side.
13. Remove the TCRU ASSY earth screw (gold, tapped, 10mm), then release
the harness from the printer body left side.
14. From the bottom of the HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4) at the printer body left J50
side, release the HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE BS (PL7.1.3) removed at

Step 11 and the HARNESS ASSY FRONT 2 (PL7.1.2) removed at Step
12.
15. Disconnect the connector (P/J50) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) from the HANABI_BE_CHAP03_039FC
printer body right side.
16. Free the HARNESS ASSY DUP (PL7.1.23) from the printer body right side.
Figure 4-58. CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1) Removal-1

17. Remove the upper E-rings at the left and right of the SHAFT PIVOT
(PL6.1.1) securing the lower portion of the CHUTE ASSY OUT to the
printer body.
W A R N IN G When performing the following step, be careful not to cut

your hands on sharp edges of the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM
MSI (PL7.1.42).
18. Release LATCH B, open CHUTE ASSY OUT, use a finger to rotate the
rubber surface of the ROLL ASSY FEED rearward, then use needle-nosed
pliers to remove the left side SHAFT PIVOT from the CHUTE ASSY OUT
toward the interior.
19. Use needle nose pliers to pull the right side of the SHAFT PIVOT toward
the interior from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
20. Release latch B of the printer body, then remove the CHUTE ASSY OUT
by pulling it up and out.
Figure 4-59. CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1) Removal-2

4.2.10.2 SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) (PL7.1.4) Removal 4.2.10.3 ACTUATOR FULL STACK (PL7.1.5) Removal
1. Remove the ACTUATOR FULL STACK. (See Section 4.2.10.3.) 1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.)
2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 2. Move the shaft of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK away from the upper part
3. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) to the of the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1) on the printer body,then pull out the
CHUTE ASSY OUT. shaft of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK of the shaft socket hole on the left
side of the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
4. Remove the SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
3. Free the actuator of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK from the hole in the
5. Disconnect the connector (P/J134) of the SENSOR PAPER (FULL center of the CHUTE ASSY OUT, then remove the ACTUATOR FULL
STACK) from the upper part of the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1) on the STACK from the CHUTE ASSY OUT by pulling it upward.
printer body.
Figure 4-61. ACTUATOR FULL STACK (PL7.1.5) Removal
Figure 4-60. SENSOR PAPER (Full Stack) (PL7.1.4) Removal

4.2.10.4 SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) (PL7.1.4) Removal 4.2.10.5 SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P) (PL7.1.4) Removal
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.) 1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.)
2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.)
3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.) 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.)
4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.) 4. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.12.)
5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.) 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.)
6. Remove the ACTUATOR DUP. (See Section 4.2.10.8.) 6. Remove the ACTUATOR MSI. (See Section 4.2.10.11.)
7. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) to the 7. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P) to the
CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). CHUTE ASSY OUT.
8. Remove the SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT 8. Remove the SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
and disconnect the connector (P/J133).
9. Disconnect the connector (P/J135) on the SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P).
Figure 4-62. SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) (PL7.1.4) Removal Figure 4-63. SENSOR PAPER (MSI N/P) (PL7.1.4) Removal

4.2.10.6 ELIMINATOR ASSY (PL7.1.9) Removal 4.2.10.7 ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12) Removal
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.) 1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.12.1.)
2. Remove the 1 screw securing the ELIMINATOR ASSY to the CHUTE 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (See Section 4.2.4.2.)
ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). 3. Remove the COVER MSI. (See Section 4.2.4.11.)
3. After lifting the left end of the ELIMINATOR ASSY rearwards away from
the CHUTE ASSY OUT, remove the ELIMINATOR ASSY by pulling it out
to the left. 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT IN. (See Section 4.2.4.13.)
6. Release the 1 hook of GEAR 30 (PL7.1.10) secured to upper shaft of the
ROLL DUP from the CHUTE ASSY OUT of the printer body.
7. Remove the GEAR 30 from the shaft of ROLL DUP.
8. Remove the BEARING EARTH (PL7.1.11) securing the left side shaft of
the ROLL DUP to the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
9. Remove the E-ring securing the right side shaft of the ROLL DUP to the
CHUTE ASSY OUT.
10. Remove the BEARING (PL7.1.16) securing the right side shaft of the
ROLL DUP to the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
11. Lift the right side of the ROLL DUP shaft upward and away from the
CHUTE ASSY OUT, free it from the shaft socket, then remove the ROLL
DUP.
Figure 4-64. ELIMINATOR ASSY (PL7.1.9) Removal
Figure 4-65. ROLL DUP (PL7.1.12) Removal

4.2.10.8 ACTUATOR DUP (PL7.1.13) Removal

6. Release the 2 hooks securing the COVER ACTUATOR (PL7.1.14) to the
CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1) of the printer body.
C A U T IO N When performing the following step, be careful not to

interfer with SPRING DUP.
7. Remove the COVER ACTUATOR from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.

8. While pushing the actuator of the ACTUATOR DUP down into the interior
and away from the CHUTE ASSY OUT, let the ACTUATOR DUP slide to
the left, then pull out the ACTUATOR DUP right side shaft of the right side
shaft socket.
9. Pull out the ACTUATOR DUP along with the SPRING SNR DUP
(PL7.1.15) from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
10. Remove the SPRING SNR DUP from the ACTUATOR DUP.
Figure 4-66. ACTUATOR DUP (PL7.1.13) Removal

4.2.10.9 LATCH OUT (PL7.1.18) Removal

6. Remove the SPRING LATCH OUT (PL7.1.20) from the CHUTE ASSY
OUT (PL7.1.1) of the printer body.
7. Release the 2 back side hooks securing the HOLDER LATCH (PL7.1.19)
to the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
8. Remove the HOLDER LATCH along with the LATCH OUT from the
CHUTE ASSY OUT by pulling it to the right side.
9. Remove the LATCH OUT from the HOULDER LATCH.
Figure 4-67. LATCH OUT (PL7.1.18) Removal


1. Release the latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1). C A U T IO N Be careful of the installation direction of the ROLL ASSY
FEED during assembly. Installation in the wrong direction
2. While watching from slit of the CHUTE ASSY OUT, release the 1 hook can cause problems with functions such as paper feeding.
securing the ROLL CORE MSI: RIGHT (PL7.1.26) to the SHAFT MSI See Figure 4-69.
(PL7.1.28) above the CHUTE ASSY OUT from the printer body.
3. Push the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) above the CHUTE ASSY
OUT downward from the printer body, and then release the nipple of the REAR
ROLL ASSY FEED.
4. Let the ROLL ASSY FEED slide to the right away from the SHAFT MSI,
then remove the ROLL ASSY FEED outward.
REAR
FRONT
Figure 4-68. ROLL ASSY FEED (PL7.1.27) Removal Figure 4-69. ROLL ASSY FEED Assemble

4.2.10.11 ACTUATOR MSI (PL7.1.37) Removal

6. While pressing the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) above the
CHUTE ASSY OUT downward, push the actuator of the ACTUATOR MSI
toward the interior. Then release the actuator of the ACTUATOR MSI from
the hole in the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM.
7. Let the ACTUATOR MSI slide to the left away from the CHUTE ASSY
OUT, then remove the right side shaft of the ACTUATOR MSI.
8. Let the right side shaft of the ACTUATOR MSI shift outward from the
CHUTE ASSY OUT, then pull out the ACTUATOR MSI with the SPRING
SENSOR MSI (PL7.1.36).
9. Remove the SPRING SENSOR MSI from the ACTUATOR MSI.
Figure 4-70. ACTUATOR MSI (PL7.1.37) Removal

4.2.10.12 SOLENID FEED MSI (PL7.1.40) Removal

12. Release the hook of the SPRING SOL 0.5 (PL7.1.39) hanging from the
convex part above the STOPPER SOL (PL7.1.38) from the right side of the
CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1).
13. Disconnect the connector (P/J132) of the SOLENOID FEED MSI from the
CHUTE ASSY OUT. Figure 4-71. SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL7.1.40) Removal
14. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the SOLENOID FEED
MSI to the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
15. Remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.

4.2.10.13 SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED (REFERENCE ONLY) Removal

.

12. Remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI. (See Section 4.2.10.12.)
13. Release each single hook of the CAM MSI (PL7.1.25) secured to the
SHAFT MSI (PL7.1.28), then shift the CAM MSI toward the interior.
14. Release the hook of the SPRING SOL 0.5 (PL7.1.39) hanging from the
convex part above the STOPPER SOL (PL7.1.38).
15. Release the 1 hook securing the STOPPER SOL to the left side shaft of
the SHAFT MSI, then remove the STOPPER SOL from the shaft.
16. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR MSI (PL7.1.22) to the right side
shaft of the SHAFT MSI, then remove the GEAR MSI from the shaft.
17. Release the SPRING N/F MSI hooks from the right and left sides shaft of
the SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED.
18. Remove the BEARING MSI (PL7.1.24) above the SHAFT MSI toward the
interior and out of the CHUTE ASSY OUT shaft socket.
19. Lift the right end of the SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED, then pull out the
SHAFT ASSY FEED of the CHUTE ASSY OUT. HANABI_BE_CHAP03_049FB
Figure 4-72. SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED (REFERENCE ONLY) Removal

4.2.10.14 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) Removal

12. Remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI. (See Section 4.2.10.12.)
13. Remove the SHAFT ASSY ROLL FEED. (See Section 4.2.10.13.)
14. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PLATE OUT MSI
(PL7.1.35) to the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1).
C A U T IO N When performing the following step, release the actuator of
Figure 4-73. PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42) Removal
the ACTUATOR MSI (PL7.1.37) from the hole in the PLATE
ASSY BOTTOM MSI (PL7.1.42).
15. Remove the PLATE OUT MSI along with the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI
from the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
16. Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM MSI from the PLATE OUT MSI.

4.2.11 CHUTE ASSY EXIT

4.2.11.1 CHUTE ASSY EXIT (PL8.1.1) Removal
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J131) of the MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8)
from above the CHUTE ASSY OUT (PL7.1.1).
7. From the CHUTE ASSY OUT, release the harness of the MOTOR ASSY
DUP (PL8.1.8) in the direction of the CHUTE ASSY EXIT.
8. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the CHUTE ASSY
EXIT to the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
9. Remove the CHUTE ASSY EXIT from the left side surface of the CHUTE
ASSY OUT.
When installing the CHUTE ASSY EXIT, do not jam the

ACTUATOR FULL STACK (PL7.1.5) above the CHUTE ASSY
OUT in the ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4).
Figure 4-74. CHUTE ASSY EXIT (PL8.1.1) Removal

4.2.11.2 ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4) Removal

6. Remove the CHUTE ASSY EXIT. (See Section 4.2.11.1.)
7. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR ROLL (PL8.1.2) to the left side
shaft of the ROLL EXIT.
8. Remove the GEAR ROLL from the left side shaft of the ROLL EXIT.
9. Pull out the BEARING EARTH (PL8.1.3) from the left side shaft of the
ROLL EXIT of the CHUTE ASSY EXIT.
10. Remove the E-ring securing the right side shaft of the ROLL EXIT to the
CHUTE ASSY EXIT.
11. Pull out the BEARING (PL8.1.7) from the right side shaft of the ROLL
EXIT.
12. From the CHUTE ASSY EXIT, lift the right side shaft of the ROLL EXIT
upward, then remove the ROLL EXIT to the right and upward.
Figure 4-75. ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4) Removal

4.2.11.3 ROLL MID (PL8.1.5) Removal

shaft of the ROLL MID.
8. Remove the GEAR ROLL from the left side shaft of the ROLL MID.
9. Pull out the BEARING EARTH (PL8.1.3) from the left side shaft of the
ROLL EXIT of the CHUTE ASSY EXIT.
10. Remove the E-ring securing the right side shaft of the ROLL MID to the
CHUTE ASSY EXIT.
11. Pull out the BEARING (PL8.1.7) from the right side shaft of the ROLL MID.
12. From the CHUTE ASSY EXIT, lift the right side shaft of the ROLL MID
upward, then remove the ROLL MID to the right and upward. Figure 4-76. ROLL MID (PL8.1.5) Removal

4.2.11.4 MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) Removal

shaft of the ROLL EXIT (PL8.1.4).
9. Release the 1 hook securing the GEAR ROLL to the left side shaft of the
ROLL MID (PL8.1.5).
11. Remove the GEAR 40/42 (PL8.1.12) from the CHUTE ASSY EXIT left
side.
12. Remove the GEAR 48 (PL8.1.13) from the CHUTE ASSY EXIT left side. Figure 4-77. MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8) Removal
13. Remove the 2 screws securing the MOTOR ASSY DUP to the CHUTE
ASSY EXIT.
14. Remove the MOTOR ASSY DUP from the CHUTE ASSY EXIT.

4.2.12 FUSER ASSY & BTR ASSY

4.2.12.1 FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1) Removal
W A R N IN G The FUSER is very hot, so to avoid burns use great caution

when it is operating.
1. Release the latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY IN (PL7.1.1).

2. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD (PL1.1.15) from the printer body.
3. Close the CHUTE ASSY IN.
4. Release the latch B of the printer body and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT
(PL7.1.1).
5. Release the 2 lock of right and left side on the FUSER ASSY upper side.
6. Remove the FUSER ASSY from the printer body.
Figure 4-78. FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1) Removal

4.2.12.2 BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Removal

(PL6.1.1).
2. Release the lock by pinching the left and right side latches that secure the
BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) to the CHUTE ASSY IN of the printer body, then let
the BTR ASSY rotate rearward.
3. Pull out the BTR ASSY toward the front and remove it from the CHUTE
ASSY IN.
Figure 4-79. BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) Removal

4.2.13 REGISTRATION
4.2.13.1 CHUTE ASSY REGI (PL10.1.1) Removal
(PL6.1.1).
2. Release the 2 hooks securing the HOUSING ASSY ELEC (PL10.1.23),
then remove the HOUSING ASSY ELEC upward.
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J18) of the CHUTE ASSY REGI from the
printer body.
4. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the CHUTE ASSY
REGI to the printer body.
5. After lifting the left end of the CHUTE ASSY REGI upward, remove the
CHUTE ASSY REGI from the printer body by pulling it to the left.
While carefully watching the MYLAR insertion, install the

CHUTE ASSY REGI by lowering it straight down.
(See Figure 4-80)
Figure 4-80. CHUTE ASSY REGI (PL10.1.1) Removal

4.2.13.2 SENSOR REGI (PL10.1.20) Removal 4.2.13.3 ACTUATOR REGI (PL10.1.21) Removal
1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.) 1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.)
2. Remove the ACTUATOR REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.3.) 2. Grasp the screen of the ACTUATOR REGI, let the ACTUATOR REGI shift
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J181) on the SENSOR REGI. to the left side, then remove the right side shaft of the ACTUATOR REGI
from the shaft socket on the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
4. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR REGI to the CHUTE ASSY
REGI. 3. Pull out the ACTUATOR REGI along with the SPRING SENSOR REGI
(PL10.1.22) from the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
5. Remove the SENSOR REGI from the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
4. Remove the SPRING SENSOR REGI from the ACTUATOR REGI.
Figure 4-82. ACTUATOR REGI (PL10.1.21) Removal

Figure 4-81. SENSOR REGI (PL10.1.20) Removal

4.2.13.4 SENSOR OHP (PL10.1.16) Removal

1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (See Section 4.2.13.1.)
2. Remove the E-ring securing the GEAR REGI METAL (PL10.1.3), then pull
out the GEAR REGI METAL from the left side shaft of the ROLL REGI
METAL (PL10.1.9).
3. Remove the E-ring securing the GEAR REGI RUBBER (PL10.1.2), then
pull out the GEAR REGI RUBBER from the left side shaft of the ROLL
REGI RUBBER.
4. Pull out the BEARING EARTH (PL10.1.4) securing the left side shaft of the
ROLL REGI RUBBER (PL10.1.10) on the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
C A U T IO N When performing the following step, be careful that the

SPRING REGI:R and SPRING REGI:L do not jump away and
become lost.
5. Using a tool like a screwdriver, remove the SPRING REGI: R (PL10.1.8) HANABI_BE_CHAP03_133FA
from the left side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
6. Using a tool like a screwdriver, remove the SPRING REGI: L (PL10.1.8)
from the right side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
7. Remove the 1 screw securing the PLATE SIDE REGI (PL10.1.6) from the
left side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
8. Pull out the BEARING METAL L (PL10.1.7) (black) securing the left side
shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL (PL10.1.9) on the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
Figure 4-83. SENSOR OHP REGI (PL10.1.16) Removal (1)

9. Lift up the left side shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL from the CHUTE ASSY
REGI, and pull out the ROLL REGI METAL along with the right side shaft
of the BEARING METAL R (PL10.1.11) (white).
10. Release the 2 hooks of the lower CHUTE ASSY REGI securing the
SENSOR OHP from the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
11. Remove the SENSOR OHP from the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
Figure 4-84. SENSOR OHP REGI (PL10.1.16) Removal (2)

4.2.14 XEROGRAPHICS
4.2.14.1 ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1) Removal
4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.)
5. Disconnect the connector (P/J151) on the ROS ASSY.
6. Release the SPRING ROS (PL11.1.2) hooks securing the left and right
sides shaft of the ROS ASSY from the printer body.
7. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the ROS ASSY to the
printer body.
8. Remove the ROS ASSY from the printer body.
When installing the ROSS ASSY, carry out the following

pocedure.
1. Align the ROS ASSY in the position for installation on the printer body.
2. Secure the left and right sides shaft of the ROS ASSY to the printer body
by using the hooks on the upper part of the SPRING ROS.
3. Secure the ROSS ASSY with the 1 screw to the printer.
4. Connect the connector (P/J151) to the ROS ASSY. Figure 4-85. ROSS ASSY (PL11.1.1) Removal
5. Install the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.)
6. Install the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.)
7. Install the COVER SIDE L. (See Section 4.2.4.14.) C A U T IO N When removing the ROS ASSY, perform color registration
adjustment without fail. (Refer to Section 6.5)
8. Install the COVER ASSY TOP MAIN. (See Section 4.2.4.4.)

4.2.14.2 HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4) Removal

3. Remove the LINK: L. (See Section 4.2.4.7.)
P/J5030
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J5020, P/J5030) on the HVPS SUB
(PL12.1.9), and remove the WIRE ASSY BTR2 (PL6.1.2) and WIRE ASSY
DTSK (PL6.1.5) from the 4 hooks of the HGS ASSY BIAS.
5. Disconnect the connectors (P/J141, P/J1361, P/J71, P/J221, P/J139) on
the BRACKET CONNECTOR (PL15.1.16), and remove the HARNESS J141
ASSY TFLSNS (PL6.1.14), the HARNESS ASSY FRONT 1 (PL15.2.7), the
P/J5020 J1361
HARNESS ASSY EEPROM (PL15.2.10) and the HARNESS ASSY
OPEPANE A (PL15.2.9) from the 5 hooks of the HGS ASSY BIAS.
6. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the grounding wire, J138
then remove the grounding wire from the 6 hooks of the HGS ASSY BIAS. J221
J139
7. Remove the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the HGS ASSY BIAS
to the left side of the printer body.
8. Remove the HSG ASSY BIAS from the printer body.
Figure 4-86. HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4) Removal

4.2.15 TCRU ASSSY

J51
4.2.15.1 HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT Removal (REFERENCE
ONLY)
C A U T IO N
When disassembling the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT, use
as vacuum or other cleaning device to remove the residual
toner left on the HOLDER TONER ASSY before J166
proceeding.
When using a cleaning device like a vacuum cleaner to
remove residual toner from around the HOLDER TONER
ASSY, prevent static electrical discharge from the tip of
the cleaning device by attaching a grounding wire to the
tip of the device.
When using a cleaning device like a vacuum cleaner to
remove residual toner from around the HOLDER TONER
ASSY, be careful that toner is not propelled by static
electricity onto the sensors on the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
P/J5030
4. Remove the COVER REAR. (See Section 4.2.4.6.)
5. Disconnect the connector (P/J166) of the FAN REAR (PL15.1.3) on the
LVPS (PL15.1.10) from the right side surface of the printer body.
6. Free the FAN REAR harness (J166) from the hook on the HOLDER
TONER ASSY (PL12.2.1, 2, 3, 4) at the right side surface of the printer
body.
P/J5011 P/J5020
C H E C K Instead of releasing the FAN REAR harness, remove the

P O IN T FAN REAR and set in on the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT,
then remove the 2 parts together.
P/J144 P/J71
Figure 4-87. HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT Removal (1)

8. Disconnect the connector (P/J144) on the PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) from
the left side surface of the printer body.
9. Disconnect the connectors (P/J5020, P/J5030, P/J5011) on the HVPS
SUB (PL12.1.9) from the left side surface of the printer body.
10. Disconnect the P/J71 connector on the BRACKET CONNECTOR
(PL15.1.16) of the HARNESS ASSY FRONT1 (PL15.2.7), and release
from the clamp.
11. Release the 2 hooks securing the GEAR SLIDE (PL12.3.14) to the left side
surface of the printer body, and remove the GEAR SLIDE.
12. Remove the RACK V (PL12.3.13) from the printer body.
13. Remove the 8 screws securing the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT to the
printer body (4 right side screws: gold, 6mm; 1 upper side screw: gold,
tapped, 10mm; 1 left side screw: gold, 6mm; 2 left side screws: gold,
tapped, 10 mm Earth wire is attached with lower screw.).
14. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT from the printer body.
When installing the GEAR SLIDE, do so while maintaining
the aligned positions of the sharp leading end of the left
side gear rail with the leading end of the RACK V triangular
mark.
Figure 4-88. HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT Removal (3)

4.2.15.2 HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) (PL12.2.1) Removal

5. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K). (See Section 4.2.15.5.)
6. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C). (See Section 4.2.15.4.)
7. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M). (See Section 4.2.15.3.)
8. From the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT, use a small screwdriver to release
the hook securing the toner emitter of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) to
the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER (PL12.3.1).
9. Pull out the toner emitter on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) to the right
from the PLATE ASSY DISPENSER.
10. Pull out the connector (P/J511) of the motor from the right side of the
HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y).
11. Pull out the connectors (P/J441, P/J431) from the HOLDER TONER ASSY
(Y). Figure 4-89. HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) (PL12.2.1) Removal
12. Free the HARNESS ASSY TNR (PL12.1.6) from the hook of the HOLDER
TONER ASSY (Y) and then remove it.
13. Release the hook securing the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) to the PLATE
ASSY DISPENSER.
14. Slide the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) to the right to remove it.

4.2.15.3 HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) (PL12.2.2) Removal Be sure to attach the hook of motor side.
6. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C). (See Section 4.2.15.4.)
the hook securing the toner emitter of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) to
8. Pull out the toner emitter on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) to the right
HOLDER TONER ASSY.
C A U T IO N In the following step, the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT and

the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) are kept connected to the
printer body with a harness. Therefore, does not move too
far.
10. Release the hook fixing the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) to the PLATE Figure 4-90. HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) (PL12.2.2) Removal
ASSY DISPENSER, slide it to the right side and release the motor side
hook, shift the motor side toward the rear and open a gap between it and
the HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y).
(M).
12. Free the HARNESS ASSY TNR (PL12.1.6) from the hook of the HOLDER
TONER ASSY (M) and remove HOLDER TONER ASSY (M).

4.2.15.4 HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) (PL12.2.3) Removal

the hook securing the toner emitter of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) to
7. Pull out the toner emitter on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) to the right
HOLDER TONER ASSY.

the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) are kept connected to the
far.
9. Release the hook fixing the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) to the PLATE Figure 4-91. HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) (PL12.2.3) Removal
the HOLDER TONER ASSY (M).
(C).
11. Free the HARNESS ASSY TNR (PL12.1.6) from the hook on the HOLDER
TONER ASSY (C) and remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C).
Be sure to attach the hook of motor side.

4.2.15.5 HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) (PL12.2.4) Removal

the hook securing the toner emitter of the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) to
6. Pull out the toner emitter on the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) to the right
HOLDER TONER ASSY.

the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) are kept connected to the
far.
Figure 4-92. HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) (PL12.2.4) Removal
8. Release the hook fixing the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) to the PLATE
the HOLDER TONER ASSY (C).
(K).
10. Free the HARNESS ASSY TNR (PL12.1.6) from the hook on the HOLDER
TONER ASSY (K) and remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY (K).
Be sure to attach the hook of motor side.

4.2.15.6 SWITCH TCRU ASSY (PL12.2.10) Removal 4.2.15.7 SENSOR TONER LOW (PL12.2.9) Removal
3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) 3. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.)
4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.) 4. Remove the HOLDER TCRU ASSY UNIT. (See Section 4.2.15.1.)
5. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.15.2.), (See 5. Remove the HOLDER TONER ASSY. (See Section 4.2.15.2.), (See
Section 4.2.15.3.), (See Section 4.2.15.4.), (See Section 4.2.15.5.) Section 4.2.15.3.), (See Section 4.2.15.4.), (See Section 4.2.15.5.)
6. Use a small screwdriver to release the 2 hooks securing the SWITCH 6. Remove the 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the SENSOR
TCRU ASSY to the HOLDER TONER ASSY (PL12.2.1, 2, 3, 4). TONER LOW to the HOLDER TONER ASSY (PL12.2.1, PL12.2.2,
PL12.2.3, PL12.2.4).
7. Remove the SWITCH TCRU ASSY from the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
7. Remove the SENSOR TONER LOW from the HOLDER TONER ASSY.
Figure 4-93. SWITCH TCRU ASSY (PL12.2.10) Removal

Figure 4-94. SENSOR TONER LOW (PL12.2.9) Removal

4.2.15.8 PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) Removal 4.2.15.9 HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9) Removal
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J144) on the PWB EEPROM from the left side 3. Disconnect the connector (P/J5011) on the HVPS SUB from the left side of
of the printer body. the printer body.
4. Remove the 1 screw (gold, 10mm) securing the PWB EEPROM. 4. Disconnect the connector (P/J5030) on the HVPS SUB.
5. Remove the PWB EEPROM from the printer body. 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J5020) on the HVPS SUB.
6. Remove the 4 screws (gold, 6mm) securing the HVPS SUB.
Be careful about threading the harness when installing the 7. Remove the HVPS SUB from the printer body.
connector.
If the HARNESS ASSY EEPROM (PL15.2.10) and HARNESS
ASSY CRUM (PL12.3.8) are crossed, the connector on the
PWB EEPROM can come out when the COVER ASSY TOP
PHD (PL1.1.15) is closed.
PWB
EEPROM
J5030
HARNESS ASSY
EEPROM
HARNESS ASSY J5011

CRUM J5020
Figure 4-96. HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9) Removal
Figure 4-95. PWB EEPROM (PL12.1.8) Removal

4.2.16 FRAME
4.2.16.1 LEVER DRUM: L (PL13.1.4) Removal
3. Remove the LINK: L. (See Section 4.2.4.7.)
4. Remove the HSG ASSY BIAS. (See Section 4.2.14.2.)
5. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PLATE LEVER L
(PL13.1.1) from the left side of the printer body.
6. Remove the PLATE LEVER L from the printer body.
7. From the left side surface of the printer body, release the 4 hooks of the
SPRING LEVER 30N (PL13.1.5) hanging from the convex part of the
LEVER DRUM.
8. Remove the LINK LEVER: L (PL13.1.3) along with the SPRING LEVER
30N from the printer body.
9. Remove the LEVER DRUM: L from the printer body.
Figure 4-97. LEVER DRUM:L (PL13.1.4) Removal (1)

When installing the LINK LEVER L, do so after aligning the

GEAR IDL PRL (PL13.1.18) and lower part of the LINK
LEVER L to the positions shown in the drawing.

4.2.16.2 LEVER DRUM:R (PL13.1.4) Removal

3. Remove the PWB DRIVE. (See Section 4.2.18.5.)
4. Remove the LINK: R. (See Section 4.2.4.8.)
5. Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (See Section 4.2.17.2.)
6. Remove the ACTUATOR I/L. (See Section 4.2.16.3.)
7. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PLATE ASSY
LEVER R (PL13.1.7) from the right side of the printer body.
8. Remove the PLATE ASSY LEVER R from the printer body.
9. From the right side surface of the printer body, release the 4 hooks of the
SPRING LEVER 30N (PL13.1.5) hanging from the convex part of the
LEVER DRUM: R.
10. Remove the LINK LEVER:R (PL13.1.6) along with the SPRING LEVER
30N from the printer body.
11. Remove the LEVER DRUM:R from the printer body. HANABI_BE_CHAP03_200FA
Figure 4-99. LEVER DRUM:R (PL13.1.4) Removal (1)

When installing the LINK LEVER R (PL13.1.6), do so after

aligning the GEAR IDL PRR (PL13.1.11) and lower part of
the LINK LEVER R to the positions shown in the drawing.

4.2.16.3 ACTUATOR I/L (PL13.1.8) Removal

3. Remove the PWB DRIVE. (See Section 4.2.18.5.)
4. From the right side surface of the printer body, release the hooks of the
SPRING I/L (PL13.1.9) hanging from the convex part of the PLATE ASSY
LEVER R (PL13.1.9)
5. Release the 1 hook securing the ACTUATOR I/L to the part of the shaft on
the PLATE ASSY LEVER R from the printer body.
6. Remove the ACTUATOR I/L along with the SPRING I/L from the PLATE
ASSY LEVER R.
7. Remove the SPRING I/L from the ACTUATOR I/L.
Figure 4-101. ACTUATOR I/L (PL13.1.8) Removal

4.2.16.4 PWB ASSY EARTH (PL13.1.17) Removal

2. Remove the HOUSING ASSY RETARD. (See Section 4.2.8.1.)
3. Remove the 2 screws (gold, 10mm and gold, tapped, 10mm) and remove
the PLATE EARTH FRONT (PL13. 1. 16).
4. Remove 1 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the PWB ASSY EARTH
and the PLATE EARTH DIODE (PL13. 1.15) and remove the PWB ASSY
EARTH by floating the PLATE EARTH DIODE.
If the HOUSING ASSY RETARD will not go in easily, pull it to

the left side a little and let it fall in.
Figure 4-102. PWB ASSY EARTH (PL13.1.17) Removal

4.2.17 DRIVE 4.2.17.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) Removal

4.2.17.1 DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) Removal
3. Remove the LINK: R. (See Section 4.2.4.8.)
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J48, P/J52) on the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15)
3. Remove the PWB DRIVE. (See Section 4.2.18.5.) from the right side of the printer body.
4. Remove the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the DRIVE ASSY 5. Release the harness (J52) of the FUSER ASSY from the clamp on the
DEVE from the right side of the printer body. DRIVE ASSY MAIN of the right side of the printer body.
5. Remove the DRIVE ASSY DEVE from the printer body. 6. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, with outside toothed lock washer,
6mm) securing the ground wire of the lower section of the DRIVE ASSY
MAIN.
7. Remove the 4 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the DRIVE ASSY
MAIN to the printer body.
8. Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN from the printer body.
J52
J48
Figure 4-103. DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1) Removal

Figure 4-104. DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2) Removal

4.2.18 ELECTRICAL
4.2.18.1 PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) Removal
1. Remove the PWB Controller (PWB ESS). (See Section 4.2.19.1.)
C A U T IO N Be sure that the CHUTE ASSY REGI is removed when

performing the following step. If the step is performed with
the CHUTE ASSY REGI installed, it may cause deformation
of the SPRING DRUM EARTH.

C A U T IO N Be sure that the HSG ASSY BIAS is removed when

the HSG ASSY BIAS installed, it may cause deformation of
the HSG ASSY BIAS.

9. Remove the BOX ASSY ELEC. (See Section 4.2.18.6.) Figure 4-105. PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) Removal (1)
10. Remove the HOUSING ASSY CONTACT. (See Section 4.2.18.7.)
11. Remove the 4 screws securing the COVER MCU (PL15.1.1) to the BOX
ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6).
12. Remove the COVER MCU from the BOX ASSY ELEC.

13. Disconnect all the connectors on the PWBA MCU & HVPS from the BOX
ASSY ELEC.
14. Remove the 6 screws (gold, 6mm) securing the PWBA MCU & HVPS to
the BOX ASSY ELEC.
15. Remove the PWBA MCU & HVPS from the BOX ASSY ELEC.
Figure 4-106. PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) Removal (2)

4.2.18.2 FAN REAR (PL15.1.3) Removal

5. Disconnect the connector (P/J166) on the LVPS (PL15.1.10) from the right
side of the printer body.
6. Free the harness (J166) of the FAN REAR (PL15.1.3) from the 5 hooks of
the HOLDER TONER ASSY (PL12.2.1, PL12.2.2, PL12.2.3, PL12.2.4).
7. Remove the 2 SCREW FAN LVs (PL15.1.4) securing the FAN REAR to the
printer body, and remove the FAN REAR.
Install the FAN REAR so that its attached label faces toward
the rear (toward the outside).
Figure 4-107. SENSOR TONER LOW ASSY (PL12.2.9) Removal

4.2.18.3 LVPS (PL15.1.10) Removal P/J166 P/J163

2. Remove the COVER SIDE R. (See Section 4.2.4.9.) P/J167
P/J165
3. Remove the 2 CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS (PL15. 1. 5) on the GUIDE
P/J164
HARNESS SW (PL15. 1. 13).
P/J161
4. Free the harness from the GUIDE HARNESS SW.
5. Release the 2 hooks securing the GUIDE HARNESS SW to the switch
bracket part.
6. Remove the GUIDE HARNESS ASSY from the LVPS.
7. Disconnect the connectors (P/J161, P/J162, P/J163, P/J164, P/J165, P/ P/J162
J166, P/J167) on the LVPS.
8. Remove the 6 screws (gold, 6mm) securing the LVPS to the printer body.
9. Remove the LVPS from the printer body.
Figure 4-108. LVPS (PL15.1.10) Removal

4.2.18.4 HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11) Removal

3. Remove the 1screw (gold, with outside toothed lock washer, 10mm)
securing the grounding wire of the HARNESS ASSY AC SW to the printer
body.
4. Release the 2 hooks securing the GUIDE HARNESS SW (PL15.1.13) to
the switch bracket part, and free the GUIDE HARNESS SW to the upwards
direction.
5. Disconnect the connector (P/J161) on the LVPS.
6. While releasing the 2 hooks securing the socket of the HARNESS ASSY
AC SW to the rear part of the LVPS, remove the socket to the rear.
7. Remove the HARNESS ASSY AC SW from the printer body.
When installing the GUIDE HARNESS SW, it is easier to do

if the left side hook is set in the printer body frame hole
before the right side hook is set.
Figure 4-109. HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11) Removal

4.2.18.5 PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) Removal

3. Disconnect all the connectors on the PWB DRIVE from the right side
surface of the printer body.
4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the PWB DRIVE to the printer
body.
5. Remove the PWB DRIVE from the printer body.
Figure 4-110. PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) Removal

4.2.18.6 BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6) Removal




the HSG ASSY BIAS.

9. Disconnect the connector (P/J210) connecting the printer body and the
FEEDER from the right side surface of the printer body.
10. Disconnect the connector (P/J151) on the ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1) from the
11. Disconnect the connector (P/J2361) connecting the printer body and the
FEEDER from the left side surface of the printer body.
12. Disconnect the connectors (P/J141, P/J1361, P/J138, P/J221, P/J139) on
the BRACKET CONNECTOR (PL15.1.16) from the left side surface of the
printer body.
13. Disconnect the connectors (P/J19) on the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2)
from the inside of the printer body.
14. Remove the 1 screw securing the earth cable from the left side surface of
the printer body.
Figure 4-111. BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6) Removal (1)


16. Remove the 5 screws (gold, 6mm, 2 positions from upper front, 1 position
from LVPS side, 2 positions from rear side) securing the BOX ASSY ELEC
to the printer body.
17. Free the harness from the GUIDE HARNESS SW.
18. Release 2 hooks securing the GUIDE HARNESS SW to the switch bracket
part.
19. Remove the GUIDE HARNESS SW from the LVPS.
20. Pull out the BOX ASSY ELEC to the rear from the printer body, and
remove the BOX ASSY ELEC.
Figure 4-112. BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6) Removal (2)

4.2.18.7 HOUSING ASSY CONTACT (PL15.1.8) Removal




the HSG ASSY BIAS. Figure 4-113. HOUSING ASSY CONTACT (PL15.1.8) Removal

10. Remove the BOX ASSY ELEC. (See Section 4.2.18.6.)
11. Remove the 2 screws securing the HOUSING ASSY CONTACT to the
BOX ASSY ELEC (PL15.1.6).
12. Pull out the HOUSING ASSY CCONTACT from the BOX ASSY ELEC, and
remove HOUSING ASSY CCONTACT.

4.2.19 CONTROLLER BOARD

4.2.19.1 PWB CONTROLLER (PL16.1.5) Removal
1. Loosen the 2 SCREW KNURLING (PL16.1.6) securing the PLATE REAR
ESS (PL16.1.7) at the back of the printer body.
2. Hold the knobs of the GUIDE L ESS (PL16.2.12) and the GUIDE R ESS
(PL16.1.13), and remove the PWB CONTROLLER from the printer body.
C A U T IO N When performing the following step, eliminate static

electricity from your body by using a grounding wristband
or other static eliminator. A discharge of static electricity
can damage the PWB CONTROLLER or the OPTION
BOARDS.
3. When OPTION BOARDS are installed in the slots on the PWB

CONTROLLER, remove them.
4. Remove the 1 screw securing the USB connector to the PLATE REAR
ESS.
5. Remove the 2 screws securing the parallel connector to the PLATE REAR Figure 4-114. PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) Removal 1
ESS.
6. Remove the 5 screws securing the PLATE REAR ESS to the BASE
PLATE. Step 6
7. Remove the 2 screws (silver, 8mm) securing the rear of the PWB
Controller (PWB ESS) to the GUIDE L ESS, GUIDE R ESS (PL16.1.12),
(PL16.1.13).
8. Shift the PLATE REAR ESS to the rear to remove it.
9. Open the GUIDE L ESS and the GUIDE R ESS to the left and right, and
then remove it.
10. Remove the 12 screws securing the PWB Controller to the BASE PLATE.
11. Remove the 3 prop screws for HDD to the BASE PLATE, and then remove
the PWB Controller.
USB Connector Parallel Connector
Figure 4-115. PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) Removal 2

Step 7
C A U T IO N When removing the PWB Controller, perform USB ID input
without fail. (Refer to Section 5.1)
When installing the PWB CONTROLLER into the printer

body, be sure the PWB CONTROLLER front edge
connectors are properly connected to the connectors of the
PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
Step 11
Figure 4-116. PWB Controller (PL16.1.5) Removal 3

4.2.20 Large Capacity Paper Unit

(Option FEEDER UNIT)
4.2.20.1 COVER FRONT (PL17.1.5) Removal
1. Remove CASSETTE TRAY 2 and 3, and any others of the type that can be
withdrawn, by pulling them straight out then tilting them up to take them all
the way out.
2. Release the 3 hooks securing the COVER FRONT to the FRAME ASSY
OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the COVER FRONT.
C A U T IO N When removing the lower COVER FRONT, release the 3

hooks with a tool like a screwdriver.
Figure 4-117. COVER FRONT (PL17.1.5) Removal (1)
When putting the cover back on, be careful of which side is

the top and which is the bottom. Also, be sure to align the
slot of the COVER FRONT (PL17.1.5) with the opening of the
FRAME ASSY OPF.

4.2.20.2 COVER R (PL17.1.4) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.)
2. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with the brim, 8mm) securing the COVER R
to the TWO TRAY MODULE.
3. Use two hands to grasp both sides of COVER R, and while pulling front
part wider to the left and right, release the 3 bosses of front part COVER R
from the holes of FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
4. Lift the COVER R a little, release 4 hooks from the hooking holes of
FRAME ASSY OPF.
5. Move COVER R toward the front, then use a little power to slowly remove
the INDICATOR (PL17.1.8). (This must be done at 2 places, upper and
lower.)
6. Remove the COVER R from the TWO TRAY MODULE.
Figure 4-118. COVER FRONT (PL17.1.5) Removal (2) Figure 4-119. COVER R (PL17.1.4) Removal

4.2.20.3 COVER L (PL17.1.1) Removal REAR

2. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with the brim, 8mm) securing the COVER L
to the TWO TRAY MODULE.
3. Use two hands to grasp both sides of COVER L, and while pulling front
part wider to the left and right, release the 3 bosses of front part COVER L
from the holes of FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
4. Lift the COVER L a little, release 4 hooks from the hooking holes of
FRAME ASSY OPF, remove the COVER L from the TWO TRAY
MODULE.
Figure 4-120. COVER L (PL17.1.1) Removal

4.2.20.4 CHUTE ASSY TURN (PL17.2.8) Removal
C H E C K The following steps is a common to the TRAY 2 and the

P O IN T TRAY 3.
3
1. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY (PL2.1.3). (See Section 4.2.20.1.)

4
2. Press in on both ends of the CHUTE ASSY TURN at the handhold spots,
then by adding a little power in the downward direction release the 2 hooks
of the CHUTE ASSY TURN from the holes in the FRAME ASSY OPF
(PL17.1.3).
3. Release the hooks on GUIDE CASSETTE L (PL17.2.3) and GUIDE
CASSETTE R (PL17.2.6) that are securing the cassettes to the CHUTE 3
ASSY TURN, then remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN.
1
2
4 1 4
Figure 4-121. CHUTE ASSY TURN (PL17.2.8) Removal

4.2.20.5 HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (PL17.4.3) Removal

2. Remove the COVER R (PL17.1.4). (See Section 4.2.20.2.)
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J821) of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7)
(TRAY 2).
C A U T IO N Disconnect the connector (J82) on the PWBA FEEDER

(PL17.4.1) while holding the circuit board with your hand.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J82) on the PWBA FEEDER.

5. Disconnect the relay connector (P/J8220) between the HARNESS ASSY
FDR2T and the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ (PL17.4.11).
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J824) of the SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17)
(TRAY 2).
7. Disconnect the connector (P/J825) of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN
(PL17.3.18) (TRAY 2).
8. Disconnect the connector (P/J823) of the SENSOR LOW PAPER
(PL17.4.7) (TRAY 2).
9. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T from the 6 CLAMPs.
See the illustration for details on the installation of the

HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray) connector and routing of the
harness. Figure 4-122. HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (PL17.4.3) Removal

4.2.20.6 HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (PL17.4.4) Removal

2. Remove the COVER R (PL17.1.4). (See Section 4.2.20.2.)
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J821) of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7)
(TRAY 3).
C A U T IO N Disconnect the connector (J83) on the PWBA FEEDER

(PL17.4.1) while holding the circuit board with your hand.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J83) on the PWBA FEEDER.

5. Disconnect the relay connector (P/J8220) between the HARNESS ASSY
FDR2T and the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ (PL17.4.11).
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J834) of the SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17)
(TRAY 3).
7. Disconnect the connector (P/J835) of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN
(PL17.3.18) (TRAY 2).
8. Disconnect the connector (P/J833) of the SENSOR LOW PAPER
(PL17.4.7) (TRAY 2).
9. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T from the 4 CLAMPs.
See the illustration for details on the installation of the

HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (blue) connector and routing of the
harness. Figure 4-123. HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (PL17.4.4) Removal

4.2.20.7 DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5) Removal 4.2.20.8 INDICATOR ASSY (PL17.4.10) Removal
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.)
2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.)
3. Free the harness of DRIVE ASSY FEEDER from 4 CLAMPs. 3. Release the hook on the bottom of the STOPPER INDICATOR securing
the INDICATOR ASSY to the SHAFT INDICATOR, shift the STOPPER
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J84) on the PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1).
INDICATOR downward and remove it from the holes in the opening of the
5. From the 2 CLAMPs on the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER, free the harness of the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
HARNESS ASSY FDR2T (PL17.4.3) and the CLUTCH ASSY TURN
4. Shift the whole of the INDICATOR ASSY upward, and remove the lower
(PL17.3.18) (TRAY 2).
INDICATOR ASSY from the hole of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
6. Remove the 3 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER to
5. Pull the INDICATOR ASSY upper section from the holes in the opening of
the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
the FRAME ASSY OPF, then remove the INDICATOR ASSY.
7. Free the HARNESS ASSY FDR2T and the harness of the CLUTCH ASSY
TURN , and remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER.
When assembling, position the GUIDE INDICATOR under
the LEVER LOW PAPER (PL17.4.9).
Figure 4-124. DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5) Removal Figure 4-125. INDICATOR ASSY (PL17.4.10) Removal

4.2.20.9 HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG (PL17.4.2) Removal

1. Separate the TWO TRAY MODULE from the printer body.
3. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.)
4. Remove the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG from the connector (P81) on the
PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1).
5. Free the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG from the CLAMP on the FRAME
ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
6. Disconnect the harness from the drawer connector part of the HARNESS
ASSY OPF PLG.
7. Cut off 2 hooks securing the drawer connector part of theHARNESS ASSY
OPF PLG by using like a nipper, remove it from the hole of the FRAME
ASSY OPF.
When installing the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG, be careful of

the direction of the HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG.
Figure 4-126. HARNESS ASSY OPF PLG (PL17.4.2) Removal

4.2.20.10 PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) Removal

3. Disconnect the harness (P/J81, 82, 83, 84) on the PWBA FEEDER.
4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the PWBA FEEDER to the
FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the PWBA FEEDER.
When installing, combine the BOARD to the hole of the

PWBA FEEDER and the opening of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
(2 places)
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_009FC
Figure 4-127. PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) Removal

4.2.20.11 GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2) Removal

TRAY 2
Disassembly

4. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.)
5. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.)
6. Disconnect the harness (P/J821).
7. Remove the 1 screw securing the BRACKET LOW PAPER (PL17.4.8) to
the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the BRACKET LOW
PAPER.
8. Remove the 5 screws securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to the
FRAME ASSY OPF.
9. Release the 8 hooks securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to the
FRAME ASSY OPF.
10. While pulling the back end of the LEVER LOW PAPER (PL17.4.9) from the
slit of the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R, remove it to forward.
11. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R while leaning top of that to left.
Reassembly
1. Keep the GUIDE CASSETTE ASSY R near the installation position, with
the upper part leaning to the left.
2. Pass the back end of the LEVER LOW PAPER to the slit of the GUIDE
ASSY CASSETTE R while twisting it.
3. Pass the front end of the LEVER LOW PAPER through the opening in the
FRAME ASSY OPF, then move the upper part of the GUIDE CASSETTE
ASSY R to the right and keep it in the installation position. Figure 4-128. GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2) Removal (1)
4. Pushing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to right side, fix the GUIDE ASSY
CASSETTE R to FRAME ASSY OPF by 8 hooks.
5. Fix the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the GUIDE ASSY
CASSETTE to the FRAME ASSY OPF.

6. Insert the LEVER LOW PAPER axle into the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R
recess and the BRACKET LOW PAPER hole, then align the position
alignment hole of the BRACKET ASSY LOW PAPER with the position
alignment punch of the FRAME ASSY OPF and keep it in place.
7. Fix 1 screw (silver, 6mm) securing BACKET LOW PAPER to the FRAME
ASSY OPF.
8. Install the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.)
9. Install the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.)
10. Install the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.)
11. Install the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.)
12. Install the COVER FRONT.(See Section 4.2.20.1.)
TRAY 3
Disassembly

4. Disconnect the harness (P/J831).
5. Remove the 1 screw securing the BRACKET LOW PAPER (PL17.4.8) to
the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the BRACKET LOW
PAPER.
6. Remove the 5 screws securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to the
FRAME ASSY OPF.
7. Release the 8 hooks securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to the
FRAME ASSY OPF.
8. While pulling the back end of the LEVER LOW PAPER (PL17.4.9) from the
slit of the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R, remove it to forward.
9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R while leaning top of that to left.
Figure 4-129. GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2) Removal (2)

Reassembly
1. Keep the GUIDE CASSETTE ASSY R near the installation position, with
the upper part leaning to the left.
2. Pass the back end of the LEVER LOW PAPER to the slit of the GUIDE
ASSY CASSETTE R while twisting it.
3. Pass the front end of the LEVER LOW PAPER through the opening in the
FRAME ASSY OPF, then move the upper part of the GUIDE CASSETTE
ASSY R to the right and keep it in the installation position.
4. Pushing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R to right side, fix the GUIDE ASSY
CASSETTE R to FRAME ASSY OPF by 8 hooks.
5. Fix the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the GUIDE ASSY
CASSETTE to the FRAME ASSY OPF.
6. Insert the LEVER LOW PAPER axle into the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R
recess and the BRACKET LOW PAPER hole, then align the position
alignment hole of the BRACKET ASSY LOW PAPER with the position
alignment punch of the FRAME ASSY OPF and keep it in place.
7. Fix 1 screw (silver, 6mm) securing BACKET LOW PAPER to the FRAME
ASSY OPF.
8. Install the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.)
9. Install the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.)
10. Install the COVER FRONT.(See Section 4.2.20.1.)

4.2.20.12 GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L (PL17.1.5) Removal

2. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.)
4. Remove the 5 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the GUIDE ASSY
CASSETTE L to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
5. Release the 6 hooks securing the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L to the
FRAME ASSY OPF.
6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L while leaning it to right.
When assembling, do not overtighten the screws.
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_136FA
Figure 4-130. GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L (PL17.1.5) Removal)

4.2.20.13 LINK ACTUATOR (PL17.3.6) Removal

1. Remove the CASSETTE of the TRAY 2,3. (See Section 4.2.20.1.)
2. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR from the protrusions of the ACTUATOR NO
PAPER (PL17.3.5) by making it wider, then pull it from the holes in the
opening of the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
When assembling, bring large components to the machine

from the right side (as seen when facing the front of the
unit).
Installing the LINK ACTUATOR, do it after passing front end
of the LINK ACTUATOR to the hole of the opening of the
FRAME ASSY OPF.
Figure 4-131. LINK ACTUATOR (PL17.3.6) Removal

4.2.20.14 PICK UP ASSY TR2 (PL17.3.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) When assembling the screws, be careful not to damage the
GEAR or SPRING with the screwdriver. Also, be careful not
2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) the damage rubber components when placing the PICK UP
3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) ASSY TR 2 through the window of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.4.)
5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.)
8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R of the TRAY 2. (See Section
4.2.20.11.)
9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L of the TRAY 2. (See Section
4.2.20.12.)
10. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR of the TRAY 2. (See Section 4.2.20.13.)
C A U T IO N When disassembling the screws, be careful not to damage

the GEAR or SPRING with the screwdriver.
11. Remove the 2 screws securing the PICK UP ASSY TR2 to the right side of
the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
12. Shift the PICK UP ASSY TR2 to right, remove the 2 hooks of the PICK UP
Figure 4-132. PICK UP ASSY TR2 (PL17.3.1) Removal
ASSY TR2 and the leading edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN (PL17.3.20)
from the 2 slots in the left side of the FRAME ASSY OPF and the window.
C A U T IO N Be careful not the damage rubber components when

placing the PICK UP ASSY TR 2 through the window of the
FRAME ASSY OPF.
13. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR2 from the right side window part while
being careful to avoid interference with the FRAME ASSY OPF.

4.2.20.15 PICK UP ASSY TR3 (PL17.3.1) Removal

1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) When assembling the screws, be careful not to damage the
GEAR or SPRING with the screwdriver. Also, be careful not
2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) the damage rubber components when placing the PICK UP
3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) ASSY TR3 through the window of the FRAME ASSY OPF.
5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T (blue). (See Section 4.2.20.6.)
6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.)
7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.)
8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.)
C A U T IO N When disassembling the screws, be careful not to damage

the GEAR or SPRING with the screwdriver.
9. Remove the 2 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 to

the right side of the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
10. Shift the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 to right, remove the 2 hooks of the PICK UP
ASSY TR2 and the leading edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN (PL17.3.20)
from the 2 slots in the left side of the FRAME ASSY OPF and the window.
C A U T IO N Be careful not the damage rubber components when

Figure 4-133. PICK UP ASSY TR3 (PL17.3.1) Removal
placing the PICK UP ASSY TR 2 through the window of the
FRAME ASSY OPF.
11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 from the right side window part while
being careful to avoid interference with the FRAME ASSY OPF.

4.2.20.16 GEAR IDLER (PL17.4.6) Removal

4.2.20.11.)
4.2.20.12.)
10. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR3. (See Section 4.2.20.15.)
11. Remove the GEAR IDLER.
When assembling, face the big GEAR to the side of the

FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
Figure 4-134. GEAR IDLER (PL17.4.6) Removal

4.2.20.17 SENSOR LOW PAPER (PL17.4.7) Removal

TRAY 2

7. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME
ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
8. Disconnect the connector (P/J 823) of the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
TRAY 3

Figure 4-135. SENSOR LOW PAPER (PL17.4.7) Removal
5. Release the 3 hooks securing the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME
ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3), and remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J 833) of the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
When installing the SENSOR LOW PAPER, install the right

hook after you secure the left hook.

4.2.20.18 CASTER ASSY S (PL17.1.6) Removal 4.2.20.19 CASTER ASSY (PL17.1.7) Removal
1. Separate the TWO TRAY MODULE from the printer body. 1. Separate the TWO TRAY MODULE from the printer body.
C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to damage C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to damage
the position alignment pin of the TOW TRAY MODULE. In the position alignment pin of the TOW TRAY MODULE. In
addition, the module may be scratched by the surface of the addition, the module may be scratched by the surface of the
workbench, so spread out some cardboard before setting workbench, so spread out some cardboard before setting
down the module. down the module.
Be sure that 2 people work together to handle TWO TRAY Be sure that 2 people work together to handle TWO TRAY
MODULE. MODULE.
2. Put the TWO TRAY MODULE upside-down on the work table. 2. Put the TWO TRAY MODULE upside-down on the work table.
3. Remove the 3 screws (black, with a brim, 8mm) securing the CASTER 3. Remove the 3 screws (black, with a brim, 8mm) securing the CASTER
ASSY S to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3). ASSY to the FRAME ASSY OPF (PL17.1.3).
4. Remove the CASTER ASSY S from the FRAME ASSY OPF. 4. Remove the CASTER ASSY from the FRAME ASSY OPF.
Figure 4-136. CASTER ASSY S (PL17.1.6) Removal Figure 4-137. CASTER ASSY (PL17.1.7) Removal

4.2.20.20 SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7) Removal 4.2.20.21 STOPPER CST (PL17.2.4) Removal
TRAY 2
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) P O IN T TRAY 3.
1. Remove CASSETTE TRAY, and any others of the type that can be
withdrawn, by pulling them straight out then tilting them up to take them all
6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) the way out.
7. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the SWITCH ASSY 2. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the STOPPER CST to
SIZE fram upside to the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2), and the GUIDE CASSETTE L (PL17.2.3), and remove the STOPPER CST.
remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
TRAY 3

5. Remove the 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the SWITCH ASSY
SIZE fram upside to the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R (PL17.2.2), and
remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
Figure 4-139. STOPPER CST (PL17.2.4) Removal
Figure 4-138. SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7) Removal

4.2.20.22 SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) Removal

TRAY 2

3. Disconnect the connector (P/J 824) of the SOLENOID FEED.
4. Remove the 1 screw (silver, 6mm) securing the SOLENOID FEED to the
PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1).
5. Remove the SOLENOID FEED.
TRAY 3

3. Disconnect the connector (P/J 834) of the SOLENOID FEED.
4. Remove the 1 screw (silver, 6mm) securing the SOLENOID FEED to the
PICK UP ASSY (PL17.3.1).
5. Remove the SOLENOID FEED.
Hook the armature of the SOLENOID FEED to the bump of

the GEAR FEED H2. HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_023FD
Figure 4-140. SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) Removal

4.2.20.23 SPRING FEED H (PL17.3.10) Removal 4.2.20.24 SPRING FEED 1 (PL17.3.9) Removal
C H E C K The following steps is a common to the TRAY 2 and the C H E C K The following steps is a common to the TRAY 2 and the
P O IN T TRAY 3. P O IN T TRAY 3.
3. Remove the SPRING FEED H. 3. Remove the SPRING FEED 1.
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_024FD HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_025FD
Figure 4-141. SPRING FEED H (PL17.3.10) Removal Figure 4-142. SPRING FEED 1 (PL17.3.9) Removal

4.2.20.25 GEAR FEED H2 (PL17.3.11) Removal

TRAY 2

4. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.)
5. Free the armature of the SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) while releasing the
hook, and then remove the GEAR FEED H2 downward.
TRAY 3

4. Free the armature of the SOLENOID FEED (PL17.3.17) while releasing the
hook, and then remove the GEAR FEED H2 downward.
Figure 4-143. GEAR FEED H2 (PL17.3.11) Removal

4.2.20.26 GEAR FEED 1 (PL17.3.8) Removal

P O IN T TRAY 3.

3. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.)
4. Remove the GEAR FEED 1 while releasing the hook.
Figure 4-144. GEAR FEED 1 (PL17.3.8) Removal

4.2.20.27 GEAR FEED H1 (PL17.3.12) Removal

TRAY 2

5. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.)
7. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.)
8. Remove the GEAR FEED H1.
TRAY 2

4. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.) HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_028FD

6. Remove the GEAR FEED H2. (See Section 4.2.20.25.) Figure 4-145. GEAR FEED H1 (PL17.3.12) Removal
7. Remove the GEAR FEED H1.

4.2.20.28 GEAR FEED 2 (PL17.3.13) Removal 4.2.20.29 STOPPER CLUTCH (PL17.3.16) Removal
C H E C K The following steps is a common to the TRAY 2 and the C H E C K The following steps is a common to the TRAY 2 and the
P O IN T TRAY 3. P O IN T TRAY 3.
3. Release the hook securing the GEAR FEED 2 to the PICK UP ASSY 3. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH while releasing the hook.
(PL17.3.1), and remove the GEAR FEED 2.
When installing the STOPPER CLUTCH, combine the top of

the STOPPER CLUTCH (PL17.3.16) to the hook of CLUTCH
ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) to secure the CLUTCH ASSY TURN.
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_029FD
Figure 4-146. GEAR FEED 2 (PL17.3.13) Removal
Figure 4-147. STOPPER CLUTCH (PL17.3.16) Removal

4.2.20.30 CLUTCH ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) Removal

TRAY 2

4.2.20.11.)
4.2.20.12.)
11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.)
12. Remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. (See Section 4.2.20.29.)
13. Disconnect the connector (P/J825) of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN.
14. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN.
TRAY 3

4. Disconnect the connector (P/J835) of the CLUTCH ASSY TURN.
5. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN.
When assembling, do so in such a way that the hooks of the

CLUTCH ASSY TURN are to the right and the harness is to
the left.
Figure 4-148. CLUTCH ASSY TURN (PL17.3.18) Removal

4.2.20.31 GEAR IDLER (PL17.3.15) Removal

TRAY 2

4.2.20.11.)
4.2.20.12.)
13. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.)
14. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.)
TRAY 3

2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_032FD

5. Remove the GEAR FEED 2. (See Section 4.2.20.28.) Figure 4-149. GEAR IDLER (PL17.3.15) Removal

4.2.20.32 GEAR IDLER FEED (PL17.3.14) Removal

TRAY 2

4.2.20.11.)
4.2.20.12.)
14. Remove the GEAR IDLER. (See Section 4.2.20.31.)
15. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED.
TRAY 3


6. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED.
Figure 4-150. GEAR IDLER FEED (PL17.3.14) Removal

4.2.20.33 GEAR IDLER IN (PL17.3.19) Removal

TRAY 2

4.2.20.11.)
4.2.20.12.)
15. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN.
TRAY 3

Figure 4-151. GEAR IDLER IN (PL17.3.19) Removal
6. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN.


TRAY 2
1. Pull out the CASSETTE of the TRAY 2.

2. Rotate SHAFT FEED 1 (PL17.3.2) away from the FEEDER of TRAY 2 so
that the rubber part of ROLL ASSY FEED is facing downward.
3. Pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED downward, and remove it from SHAFT
FEED 1.
TRAY 3
1. Pull out the CASSETTE of the TRAY 3.

2. Rotate SHAFT FEED 1 (PL17.3.2) away from the FEEDER of TRAY 3 so
that the rubber part of ROLL ASSY FEED is facing downward.
3. Pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED downward, and remove it from SHAFT
FEED 1.
When assembling, do so from the side of SHAFT FEED 1

(PL17.3.2) that has the large holes. The ROLL ASSY FEED
may be done in the way you prefer.
HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_135FA
Figure 4-152. ROLL ASSY FEED (PL17.3.3) Removal

4.2.20.35 ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5) Removal

TRAY 2

Figure 4-153. ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5) Removal
12. Put the PICK UP ASSY TR 2 bottom faced up on the work table.
13. While releasing the hooks of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER, remove the
opposite side front end from the holes of the frame opening on the PICK
UP ASSY by moving it in the direction of the arrow and pulling it out.
TRAY 3

11. While releasing the hooks of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER, remove the
opposite side front end from the holes of the frame opening on the PICK
UP ASSY by moving it in the direction of the arrow and pulling it out.

4.2.20.36 SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal 9. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 3. (See Section 4.2.20.14.)
TRAY 2 10. Put the PICK UP ASSY TR 3 bottom faced up on the work table.
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 11. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5). (See Section 4.2.20.35.)
2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 12. Release the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ (PL17.3.5) from the clamps (2
places).
13. Disconnect the connector (P/J832) of the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ.
14. Release the 3 hooks of the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove the
5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) SENSOR NO PAPER.
7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) When installing the SENSOR NO PAPER, install the right
8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) hook after you secure the left hook.

13. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.5). (See Section 4.2.20.35.)
14. Release the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ (PL17.3.5) from the clamps (2
places).
15. Disconnect the connector (P/J822) of the HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ.
16. Release the 3 hooks of the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove the
SENSOR NO PAPER.
TRAY 3

8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.) Figure 4-154. SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal

4.2.20.37 ROLL ASSY (PL17.3.24) Removal

1. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY (PL2.1.4).
2. Pull out the ROLL ASSY to left side while releasing the hook, and remove
the ROLL ASSY.
When installing the ROLL ASSY, secure the gap of the

lower ROLL ASSY to the shaft of the SHAFT FEED 2
(PL17.3.22).

4.2.20.38 BEARING (PL17.3.7) Removal

TRAY 2

4.2.20.11.)
4.2.20.12.)
11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR 2.(See Section 4.2.20.14.)
20. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.30.) HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_039FC

22. Remove the GEAR IDLER FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.32.)
23. Remove the GEAR IDLER IN. (See Section 4.2.20.33.)
24. Remove the 3 E-rings securing the BEARING (3 places) to the PICK UP Figure 4-156. BEARING (PL17.3.7) Removal
ASSY (PL17.3.1).
25. Remove the BEARING (3 places).

TRAY 3

15. Remove the 3 E-rings securing the BEARING (3 places) to the PICK UP
ASSY (PL17.3.1).
16. Remove the BEARING (3 places).

4.2.20.39 BEARING SLEEVE (PL17.3.21) Removal
C H E C K See Section 4.2.20.42 about the procedure to remove the

P O IN T BEARING SLEEVE securing the SHAFT FEED 2.
TRAY 2

4.2.20.11.)
4.2.20.12.)
12. Remove the E-ring securing the BEARING SLEEVE to the PICK UP ASSY
(PL17.3.1).
13. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE. HANABI_FDR_CHAP03_040FC
TRAY 3 Figure 4-157. BEARING SLEEVE (PL17.3.21) Removal

3. Remove the E-ring securing the BEARING SLEEVE to the PICK UP ASSY
(PL17.3.1).
4. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE.

4.2.20.40 ROLL ASSY TURN (PL17.3.20) Removal

TRAY 2

Figure 4-158. ROLL ASSY TURN (PL17.3.20) Removal
24. Remove the BEARING of the ROLL ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.38.)
25. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE of the ROLL ASSY TURN.
(See Section 4.2.20.39.)

26. SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal

27. Shift the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right and left side, remove the ROLL
ASSY TURN from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.25).
TRAY 3

22. Remove the BEARING of the ROLL ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.38.)
23. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE of the ROLL ASSY TURN.
24. Shift the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right and left side, remove the ROLL
ASSY TURN from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.25).

4.2.20.41 SHAFT FEED 1 (PL17.3.2) Removal 6. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.)
TRAY 2 7. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.)
1. Remove the COVER FRONT. (See Section 4.2.20.1.) 8. Remove the LINK ACTUATOR. (See Section 4.2.20.13.)
2. Remove the COVER R. (See Section 4.2.20.2.) 9. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR3. (See Section 4.2.20.15.)
3. Remove the COVER L. (See Section 4.2.20.3.) 10. Remove the SPRING FEED H. (See Section 4.2.20.23.)
4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) 11. Remove the SOLENOID FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.22.)
5. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T (gray). (See Section 4.2.20.5.) 12. Remove the SPRING FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.24.)
6. Remove the DRIVE ASSY FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.7.) 13. Remove the GEAR FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.26.)
7. Remove the PWBA FEEDER. (See Section 4.2.20.10.) 14. Remove the ROLL ASSY FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.34.)
8. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R. (See Section 4.2.20.11.) 15. Remove the BEARING of the SHAFT FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.38.)
9. Remove the GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L. (See Section 4.2.20.12.) 16. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE of the SHAFT FEED 1.
17. Shift the SHAFT FEED 1 to the right and left side, remove the SHAFT
11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY TR2. (See Section 4.2.20.14.) FEED 1 from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.25).
16. Remove the ROLL ASSY FEED. (See Section 4.2.20.34.)
17. Remove the BEARING of the SHAFT FEED 1. (See Section 4.2.20.38.)
18. Remove the BEARING SLEEVE of the SHAFT FEED 1.
19. Shift the SHAFT FEED 1 to the right and left side, remove the SHAFT
FEED 1 from the shaft hole of the FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.25).
TRAY 3

4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN. (See Section 4.2.20.4.) Figure 4-159. SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal

4.2.20.42 SHAFT FEED 2 (PL17.3.22) Removal

TRAY 2

Figure 4-160. SENSOR NO PAPER (PL17.3.4) Removal
24. Shift the SHAFT FEED 2 to the left, pull out it from the shaft hole of the
FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.21).
25. Pull out the BEARING SLEEVE (PL17.3.21) to the right from the SHAFT
FEED 2.
26. Remove the E-ring secured in the middle of the SHAFT FEED 2.

TRAY 3

22. Shift the SHAFT FEED 2 to the left, pull out it from the shaft hole of the
FRAME ASSY DRIVE (PL17.3.21).
23. Pull out the BEARING SLEEVE (PL17.3.21) to the right from the SHAFT
FEED 2.
24. Remove the E-ring secured in the middle of the SHAFT FEED 2.

5
CHAPTER
ADJUSTMENT
5.1 USB ID Input 5.1.1 Installation Procedure for Program

Copy the adjustment program file (EJL BasePagePrinter_14.exe) onto
AcuLaser-C4000 comes with the USB inter face as standard, and the
the desk top or into a folder.
PC connected to the AcuLaser-C4000 via the USB interface identifies
the printer by referring to the USB ID information specific to each 5.1.2 Procedure for program operation
printer.
C A U T IO N
DO not start the adjustment program before
connecting the parallel cable to the printer.
This program can not be executed together with EPW
Since this USB ID information is stored on EEPROM on the MAIN
(EPSON Printer Window) on Windows 95/98. Be sure
Board of the printer, you have to re-define the ID information by the
to terminate the EPW before starting the adjustment
procedure described below when you have replaced the MAIN Board
program.
for repair.
If the power to the printer is turned off or the parallel
cable is disconnected during running of the
adjustment program, be sure to restart the program.
C A U T IO N When you repair the printer and re-define the USB ID
On the Details of Display tab of Property of
information, you have to tell the user to uninstall the
Screen, do not change font size.
previously installed printer driver as it is referring to
the old USB ID information. 1. When you execute the program EJL BasePagePrinter_14.exe, the
menu window shown Figure 5-1 will apper.
The program for USB ID input and the supported operating environment 2. Select the model name AL-C4000, then click OK button.
are as follows:
Program
EJL BasePagePrinter_14.exe
Operating environment
OS: Windows95 OSR 2.0 or later or Windows98
Port used: LPT1 - LPT3 (Windows95/98)
Figure 5-1. Program start up window
Adjustment USB ID Input 5-473

3. When the window as shown in Figure 5-2 is displayed, check USB 4. When the window as shown Figure 5-3 appears, input the serial
ID Input and click OK button. nember (10 digits) of the printer and click OK button to store the
USB ID information (18 digits in total) in EEPOM on the Main Board
of the printer. The USB ID value will be displayed in the status
window in the bottom area of the program for your later check of the
inputted USB ID.
Figure 5-2. USB ID Input window 1
Figure 5-3. USB ID Input window 2

5.1.3 USB ID Confirmation 3. The window as shown Figure 5-5 appears and a status sheet will be
printed automatically.
C A U T IO N Once you have input a new USB ID, never forget to

confirm it on the status sheet.
1. Execute the program EJL BasePagePrinter_14.exe which was

used to write the USB ID, and select the model name.
2. When the window as shown Figure 5-4 appears, check USB ID

Verify and click OK button.
Figure 5-5. USB ID Verify window 2
Figure 5-4. USB ID Verify window 1

4. Check that the USB ID printed on the status sheet is identical with
that shown on the window.
After completion of confirmation, press button.
USB ID
IC0 0 0 011P210202072024460MC010303
Figure 5-6. USB ID Confirmation

6
CHAPTER
MAINTENANCE
6.1 Maintenance 6.1.2 Consumable components and components

that require regular replacement
This chapter explains the maintenance of the EPSON AcuLaser C4000. The
maintenance of this product is designed for users to do maintenance. The following table shows the list and lifetime of the consumable components
and components that require regular replacement.
No lubrication or adhesion is repuired for this product.
Table 6-1. List of the replacement parts
6.1.1 Preparatory Maintenance Category Parts Name Lifetime Note Code
When visiting the customer, carry out preparatory maintenance in order to Consumable Black toner cartridge 9,000 sheets User replacement S050091
prevent any problems other than the ones being concentrated on from Components
Yellow toner cartridge 6,000 sheets User replacement S050088
occurring.
Magenta toner cartridge 6,000 sheets User replacement S050089
Preparatory maintenance procedure
Cyan toner cartridge 6,000 sheets User replacement S050090
1. Check the conditions under which the customer is using the equipment. Photoconductor unit 30,000 sheets User replacement S051081
2. Record the cumulative number of pages printed. Fuser unit 100,000 sheets User replacement S053007
NOTE: The number of pages printed is a guide for the replacement of Transfer unit 25,000 sheets User replacement S053006
consumable parts. Replace any consumable parts if required. Components
that require
3. Print several pages and check that there are no problems with printing. Roll assy 100,000 sheets Service replacement 1110099
regular
4. Remove any foreign particles from parts such as the Transfer Unit (BTR replacement
Assy), Photoconductor Unit (PHD Assy), Fuser Unit (Fuser Assy) and
paper feed rollers, and use a brush or a soft cloth to remove any NOTE: Lifetime of the replacement parts is calculated in consideration for
contamination. the product reliability and thereby it does not force the replacement
at the described timing which is recommended for the product
NOTE: If any parts are particularly dirty, clean them with a damp cloth an quality maintenance.
then wipe dry with another cloth. Be careful not to damage any
parts that are being cleaned.
5. Clean the FAN air outlets.

Remove the FRONT HEAD COVER, and use a brush to remove any dust
or other particles adhering to the Fan Fuser. Furthermore, remove the
REAR COVER and use a brush to remove any dust or other particles
adhering to the FAN.
NOTE: If the fan air outlet is blocked, the temperature inside the unit will
rise and cause operating problems.
6. Print a few more test pages and check that there are no problems.
Maintenance Maintenance 6-478

Figure 6-3. Fuser Unit

Figure 6-1. Toner Cartridge
Figure 6-4. Transfer Unit
Figure 6-2. Photoconductor Unit
Figure 6-5. Roll Assy

6.1.3 Cleaning
1. Clean the outer dirt using a dry and soft clean cloth. If the dirt is not
easy to remove, use the neutral detergent.
2. Remove the paper dust, the spilt toner and so on inside the printer,
and clean the dirt using a brush or dry soft cloth.
NOTE: To remove severe dirt, remove it with a moistened cloth then wipe
with a dry cloth. Be sure not to mar the dirty part during cleaning.
3. Clean the fan ducts. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD and
COVER REAR, and remove the dust adhered to the FAN FUSER and
FAN REAR with a brush. Cleaning point
NOTE: Clogged dust around the fan ducts and fans can heat up the air
inside of the printer, which may cause a printer malfunction.
4. Clean the window of the ROS ASSY, SENSOR ASSY ADC and ROLL Figure 6-7. SENSOR ASSY ADC
ASSY. Remove the paper dust and so on with a dry soft cloth or
cotton swab. Cleaning point
Cleaning point
Figure 6-8. ROLL ASSY
C A U T IO N
Do not use thinner or benzine since it may deteriorate the
plastic and rubber parts.
Figure 6-6. Window of the ROS ASSY

6.2 Maintenance Menu 6.2.2 Engine Status Sheet

The following explains each item of a status sheet.
The AcuLaser C4000 is equipped with the maintenance menu for
maintenance. The maintenance menu is added to panel menu by special 1. Total Counts
operation. The maintenance menu has following functions.
Total Pages : Same value as the Total Pages in the Information
1. Engine Status Sheet Menu. It is not dependent on the paper size.
2. Clear Error Log Total Planes : Number of the paper size.
Color Pages : Same value as the Color Pages in the Information
Menu. It is not dependent on the paper size.
C H E C K All replacement parts of the AcuLaser C4000 (except the 2. Jam Counts : The number of jam occurrence.
P O IN T ROLL ASSY) can be replaced by user. Therefore, it is
unnecessity for resetting the counter value which shows 3. ET Cartridge
progress of the operation time, and which is automatically C Toner : The amount of C Toner used (Dispense Time).
reset at the time of replacement. Installing a new toner cartridge will reset it.
C Toner Change : Counted up by detecting a new C Toner cartridge.
6.2.1 Entry to the Maintenance Menu M Toner : The amount of M Toner used.
The following explains how to enter the maintenance menu. M Toner Change : Counted up by detecting a new M Toner cartridge.
1. While pressing the BACK, UP, DOWN and ENTER buttons, turn on the Y Toner : The amount of Y Toner used.
printer.
Y Toner Change : Counted up by detecting a new Y Toner cartridge.
2. The following messages are displayed on a LCD panel.
K Toner : The amount of K Toner used.
K Toner Change : Counted up by detecting a new K Toner cartridge.
RAM CHECK ** MB
4. Photoconductor : Number of printed copies of the Photoconductor.
NOTE: Dont release the buttons until the next message appears. Installing a new Photoconductor Unit will reset it.
5. Photoconductor Change
: Counted up by detecting a new Photoconductor Unit.
MAINTENANCE MENU
6. Fuser : The life cycle of the Fuser ends.
3. The above message is displayed and the maintenance menu is added 7. Fuser Change : Counted up by detecting a new Fuser unit.
to the menu. 8. Transfer Unit : Number of printed copies of the Transfer Unit.
Installing a new Transfer Unit will reset it.
9. Transfer Unit Change
: Counted up by detecting a new Transfer Unit.
Maintenance Maintenance Menu 6-481

10. MCU : This is the printer units mechanical control and is the
value read from the engine.
11. Error Log : This is a history of the latest 20 errors which have
occurred in the panel messages, EJL status codes
and Total Pages.
The latest error is displayed first, and rest of errors is
shown in order of occurrence.
Target errors are the service call errors occurred
after Ready and paper jams.
If an error occurs while, if another error that occurred
at the same and the Total Pages count has already
been stored, the current error is not stored.
6.2.3 Clear Error Log

This function clears the Error Log List stored to display the Engine Status
Sheet.

The following List explains the control information and control methods.
Table 6-2. List of control information and control methods

Count Processing and
Information Name Range Units Counting Conditions Clear Conditions
Storage Location
Total Pages Controller ~ 99,999,999 Pages When printing (EEPROM initialization)
Total Planes Controller ~ 99,999,999 Planes When transcribing (EEPROM initialization)
Color Pages Controller ~ 99,999,999 Pages When printing (EEPROM initialization)
Jam Counter Controller ~100,000 Counts When a jam occurs (EEPROM initialization)
C Toner Counter Engine ~99,999 100msec When providing toner to the development Detecting a new C Toner Cartridge
C Toner Change Engine ~255 Detecting a new C Toner Cartridge
M Toner Counter Engine ~99,999 100msec Same as the above Detecting a new M Toner Cartridge
M Toner Change Engine ~255 Detecting a new M Toner Cartridge
Y Toner Counter Engine ~99,999 100msec Same as the above Detecting a new Y Toner Cartridge
Y Toner Change Engine ~255 Detecting a new Y Toner Cartridge
K Toner Counter Engine ~99,999 100msec Same as the above Detecting a new K Toner Cartridge
K Toner Change Engine ~255 Detecting a new K Toner Cartridge
Photoconductor Engine ~99,999 Pages When printing Detecting a new Photoconductor
Photoconductor Change Engine ~255 Detecting a new Photoconductor
Fuser Engine 100,000 Pages When printing Detecting a new Fuser
Fuser Change Engine ~255 Detecting a new Fuser
Transfer Unit Engine ~99,999 Pages When printing Detecting a new Transfer Unit
Transfer Unit Change Engine ~255 Detecting a new Transfer Unit
MCU Engine --- --- --- ---
Error Code 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs Select Type, (EEPROM initialization)
Error Page 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs Select Type, (EEPROM initialization)
:
Error Code 20 Controller --- --- When an error occurs Select Type, (EEPROM initialization)
Error Page 20 Controller --- --- When an error occurs Select Type, (EEPROM initialization)
NOTE 1: The values in parentheses of the Clear Conditions indicate that the values are cleared as the result.
NOTE 2: When exceeding the ranges, the items controlled by the controller are not guaranteed beyond the maximum limit.
NOTE 3: When counting value which storage in engine over the range, it will be 0 and continue to count and work.

6.3 Consumable components replacement 1. Confirm the color of the toner cartridge that needs to be replaced by
checking the LCD panel or EPSON Status Monitor 3.
This section describes consumable components of the AcuLaser C4000. Refer 2. Remove the top cover.
to 6.1.2 about consumable parts.
3. Turn the toner cartridge knobs to the unlocked position.
6.3.1 Toner Cartridge replacement
Do not install used toner cartridges.

C A U T IO N
Do not remove toner cartridges except when replacing
them; otherwise, toner may spill.
Wait for at least one hour before installing a toner car-
tridge after moving it from a cool to a warm environment
to prevent damage from condensation.
W A R N IN G Do not touch the toner and avoid getting toner in your

eyes. If toner gets on your skin or clothes, wash it off with
soap and water immediately.
Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in fire, as they 4. Lift the toner cartridge out of the slot.
may explode and cause injury. Dispose of them according
to local regulations.
Be careful not to spill the toner remaining in the cartridge.

C A U T IO N
Put the used cartridge on a flat surface with the toner
spout facing up to avoid spilling the toner.
Dispose of the used toner cartridge by putting it into its
disposal bag.
Maintenance Consumable components replacement 6-484

5. Take the new toner cartridge out of its package, and gently shake it from 7. Turn the toner cartridge knobs to the locked position.
side to side and front to back to distribute the toner evenly.
C A U T IO N
Be sure to turn the knob all the way to the locked position.
Otherwise, you may have toner problems or leakage.
C A U T IO N
Do not remove the protective tape yet.
8. Remove the protective tape from the toner cartridge.

6. Hold the toner cartridge as shown below, and lower it into the slot.
9. Replace the top cover.

6.3.2 Photoconductor Unit replacement 3. Raise cover D.
The photoconductor unit weighs 4.5 kg (9.9 lb). Be sure to

C A U T IO N
hold it firmly by the handle when carrying it.
When replacing the photoconductor unit, avoid exposing
it to room light any longer than necessary.
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the drum. Also,
avoid touching the drum, since oil from your skin may per-
manently damage its surface and affect print quality.
To get the best print quality, do not store the photocon-
ductor unit in an area subject to direct sunlight, dust, salty
air, or corrosive gases (such as ammonia). Avoid loca-
tions subject to extreme or rapid changes in temperature
or humidity.
W A R N IN G Do not dispose of the used photoconductor unit in fire, as it

may explode and cause injury. Dispose of it according to 4. Hold the photoconductor unit by the handle, and slowly lift it straight out of
local regulations. the printer.
1. Turn off the printer.

2. Press the latch on cover A and open the cover.

5. Take the new photoconductor unit and tear away the top portion of the bag Be careful not to touch or scratch the surface of the drum.
along the dotted line to expose the handle. Then, grab the handle and C A U T IO N
Avoid touching the drum, since oil from your skin may
remove the styrofoam insert and tear open the bag along the dotted line.
permanently damage its surface and affect print quality.
C A U T IO N
Always keep the cartridge positioned as shown in the
7. Remove the protective tapes.
illustration.
8. Holding the handle firmly, lower the photoconductor unit into the printer,
making sure the posts on the sides of the unit slide into the slots.
6. Unwrap the protective sheet and material while holding the handle as
shown below.

9. Close covers D and A. 6.3.3 Fuser Unit replacement
C A U T IO N
Do not touch the surface of the fuser unit. Doing so may
impair print quality.
W A R N IN G The fuser unit can be very hot if the printer has been in
use. Turn the printer off and wait for 30 minutes until the
temperature has returned to normal before replacing the
fuser unit.
Do not dispose of the used fuser unit in fire, as it may
explode and cause injury. Dispose of it according to local
regulations.
NOTE: For replacing the Fuser Unit (Fuser Assy), refer to Chapter 4
"Fuser Assy Removal".
Figure 6-9. Fuser Unit replacement

6.3.4 Transfer Unit replacement 6.4 Components that require regular

replacement
C A U T IO N
Do not touch the surface of the transfer unit. Doing so may The components of this printer that require regular replacement are only ROLL
impair the print quality. ASSY.
NOTE: For replacing the ROLL ASSY, refer to chapter 4.
W A R N IN G Do not dispose of the used transfer unit in fire, as it may

explode and cause injury. Dispose of it according to local
regulations.
NOTE: For replacing the Transfer Unit (BTA ASSY), refer to Chapter 4
"Transfer Unit (BTR Assy) Removal".
Maintenance Components that require regular replacement 6-489

6.5 Color Registration Adjustment

Straightest lines
This printer can adjust the color registration position of each color by control
panel operation. To confirm the amount of differences between Black and
Yellow / Magenta / Cyan in the laser scanning direction, the color registration
sheet is printed. Differential amount of each color with Black is quantitatively
measured according to overlap ratio of the cyclic Black pattern and the cyclic
Yellow / Magenta / Cyan pattern where the cycle is different from that of Black.
C H E C K The Color Registration Adjustment explained in this section

P O IN T makes adjustments to avoid color gaps in the primary scan
direction.
Related color gaps in the secondary scan direction are
6. Select the Set Up Menu.
dependent on the printer's internal conditions, so these
adjustments cannot be made from the control panel. (Refer 7. Select the Yellow Regist = xx, Cyan Regist = xx and Magenta Regist =
to Chapter 2. 2.8.5 "Color Registration Control") xx in the Set Up Menu, and set up the values which are found in step 5.
8. Exit the menu on the control panel.
The following explains the method of the color registration adjustment. Follow
the procedure below to adjust the color registration, when first installing the
printer or after moving it to a new location.
1. Turn on the printer.

2. Select the Information Menu.
3. Select the Color Regist Sheet in the Information Menu, and press the
ENTER button.
4. The color registration sheet is printed. The arrow indicates the current
setting values of each color.
5. Find the values of the straightest lines by comparing the lines of each color
with the black line on the both sides.
Figure 6-10. Color Registration Sheet Sample
Maintenance Color Registration Adjustment 6-490

7
CHAPTER
AcuLaser C4100
This chapter describes information that is unique to the EPSON

AcuLaser C4100. The chapter structures information by following
section.
Product Descriptions
Panel Message For Troubleshooting
Maintenance
AcuLaser C4100 7-492

7.1 Product Descriptions Font

Unification to AGFA font
7.1.1 Features Symbol set additional
ESC/Page Color Mode: 84 Scalable Fonts + 7 Bitmap Fonts
ENGINE FEATURES
PCL5e Mode: 93 Scalable Fonts + 7 Bitmap Fonts
Printing Speed: 24ppm for both color and monochrome printing ESC/P2 Mode: 10 Typefaces
(when printing A4/LT)
FX Mode: 8 Typefaces
Resolution: 600dpi I239X Mode: 8 Typefaces
Paper Feeding: Display remaining amount of C, M, Y, K toner on the panel (when
By adding the optional cassette unit, a maximum of 1600 sheets can Ready, Offline and Sleep display)
be fed from 4-bin in total.
Corresponding Job Monitoring MIB
Standard MP Tray 100 Sheets/A4, LT
A part of functions is restricted before WebManager 3.1a version
Lower Cassette 500 Sheets/A4, LT
Restrictions
Option 500-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit 500 Sheets/A4, LT
1000-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit 1000 Sheets/A4, LT EpsonNet WebManager
JOB items are disappeared
CONTROLLER FEATURES
EpsonNet Direct Print 2
A large capacity HDD (20GB) can be installed.
A JOB in HDD can not be canceled
SOFTWARE FEATURES Network
Function of update the engine controller ROM (only with flash DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System)
memory version).
Rendezvous
WebAssist
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
Renewal design
Link Speed
Reserve Job and Form Overlay is displayed by thumbnail.
Corresponding ENES (EpsonNet Event Sender)
Information Sheet, Job View and Form Overlay is located on left
Corresponding EpsonNet ASP
index as another menu.
AcuLaser C4100 Product Descriptions 7-493

7.1.2 Printer Basic Specification Table 7-1. Printing mode by paper type
Paper Type
Speed
RESOLUTION Mode Video I/F Mode name and
Mode
Thickness
Special Thick paper 1 Heavier Paper-L Mode Thick Paper Low1
600dpi
Paper 106~162 g/m2
Heavier Paper-L Back
Face
PRINT MODE
Heavier Paper-L Super Low2
600dpi Mode (Standard paper): Full speed High Gloss
Heavier Paper-L Super
600dpi Mode (High-Gross Mode):Low speed1 High Gloss Back Face
Super High-Gross Mode: Low speed2 Thick paper 2 Heavier Paper-H Mode Thick Paper Low1
163~216 g/m2
Heavier Paper-H Back
Face
PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE
Heavier Paper-H Super Low2
Table 7-1. Printing mode by paper type High Gloss
Paper Type Heavier Paper-H Super

Speed High Gloss Back Face
Mode Video I/F Mode name and
Mode
Thickness Label Label-L Mode Label Low1
Standard Standard Paper Plain Paper-L Mode Standard Paper Full (Low Temperature)
Label-L Super High Low2
Paper (Low Temperature) 60~105 g/m2 Gloss
Plain Paper-L Back
Face Label Label-H Mode Low1
Plain Paper-L High Low1 (High Temperature)
Label-H Super High Low2
Gloss Back Face Gloss
OHP Transparency Mode Transparency Low1
Transparency Super Low2
High Gloss
Envelope Envelope Mode Envelope Low1
Envelope Back Face
Envelope Super High Low2
Gloss
Envelope Super High
Gloss Back Face

PRINTING SPEED PAPER FEED
Table 7-2. First Printing Time Table 7-4. Paper Feed

Standard Option Cassette Unit Sheets
Speed Applicable
Paper Source Containing Paper Size
Mode MP Tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 paper Type
Capacity
A4 Simplex Full 13.2 13.5 14.4 15.3
MP Tray 100 Sheets*2 A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, Standard Paper
Printing Low1 19.4 20.0 21.8 23.5 (10mm) LGL, GLT*4, HLT, F4*4 Normal Paper
Low2 25.6 26.5 29.2 31.8 Unspecified sizes
Duplex Full 18.7 19.0 19.9 20.8 Min size: 88.9 x 139.7 mm
Printing Low1 29.4 30.0 31.8 33.5 Max size: 215.9 x 355.6 mm
Low2 40.1 41.0 43.7 31.8 1 Sheet 900 mm in length 64~105 g/m2
Unit: Second Standard Paper
Normal Paper
Table 7-3. Continuous Printing Speed TBD Sheets A4, LT Special
Paper Size Speed Mode Simplex Printing Duplex Printing Applications
(Labels,
A4 Full 24.0 15.1
Standard
Transparencies)
Low1 12.0 7.7
TBD Sheets Envelopes (Monarch, C10, Envelopes
Low2 8.0 5.1 (10 mm) DL, C5, C6*4, ISO-B5*4)
Unit: ppm Unspecified size
Min size: 88.9mm (width) x
NOTE 1:Speeds shown are for plain paper (Low Temperature) mode.
139.7mm (length) (with flap
NOTE 2:Cleaning cycle occurs during printing. opened)
Cassette 500 Sheets*2*3 A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, Standard Paper
(58 mm) LGL Normal Paper
350 Sheets*2*3 A5 Standard Paper
(58 mm) Normal Paper
100 Sheets A4, LT Labels,
Transparencies
500 Sheets Unit 500 Sheets*2*3 A4, A5, B5, EXE, LT, GLG, Standard Paper
Option
1000 Sheets Unit (58 mm) LGL Normal Paper
*1: The value in () is capable containing height

*2: Standard Paper: at RX-80 (80 g/m2)
*3: Refer to 1.4. "Paper Specifications" Refer to 1.4. "Paper Specifications"

COMPONENTS THAT REQUIRE REGULAR REPLACEMENT NOISE
Table 7-5. List of components Table 7-7. Main Unit

Name Life Sound Sound
Print Mode
Pickup Roll 100K pages pressure power level
Full Speed Mode 55.0dB (A) 6.7 (B)
Feed Roll Assy (for MP Tray) 300K pages
Low Speed 1 Mode 52.0dB (A) 6.45 (B)
Pickup Roll Assy 300K pages
Low Speed Mode 2 52.0dB (A) 6.45 (B)
Regi Roll Assy 300K pages
Standby Mode*1*2 36.5dB (A) 4.95 (B)
Feed Roll Assy (for cassette unit) 300K pages
Sleep Mode Background Noise
POWER CONSUMPTION
Table 7-8. With Options Installed
Table 7-6. Power Consumption Print Mode 500 Sheets Unit 1000 Sheets Unit
120V 240V Sound Sound Sound Sound
Maximum current rated 8A 4A pressure power level pressure power level
maximum at continuous printing 900W 900W Full Speed Mode 55.0dB (A) 6.8 (B) 55.0dB (A) 6.9 (B)
consumption
Average at continuous printing 600Wh 600Wh Low Speed 1 Mode 53.0dB (A) 6.7 (B) 51.0dB (A) 6.6 (B)
Power
Average during standby with heating on 180Wh 180Wh Low Speed Mode 2 53.0dB (A) 6.7 (B) 52.0dB (A) 6.6 (B)
Average during power save mode with heating off 45Wh 45Wh Standby Mode*1*2 36.5dB (A) 4.95 (B) 36.5dB (A) 4.95 (B)
Power-Source off 0Wh 0Wh
Sleep Mode Background Noise
PRODUCT LIFETIME (MAIN UNIT) NOTE 1:values measured by ISO7779 9-point method
600K printed pages or 5 years, whichever comes first. NOTE 2:measured with MP Tray closed
NOTE 3:both simplex printing and duplex printing have the same values
*1: The fan is rotating at a half velocity.
*2: In standby mode, a fan may stop according to the condition of a fuser. When the fan
stops, noise becomes background only.

7.1.3 Various Sensors 7.1.5 Consumable Components

Table 7-9. Various Sensors Table 7-10. Specifications
Detectable Weight
Unit Detectable Device Remarks Unit Lifetime Dimensions (mm)
Matter (kg)
Toner Cartridge Automatic detection by Micro Prioritize micro switch Toner Cartridge Black Average of 10,000 355 (W) x 51 (D) x 55 (H) 0.4
Cartridge presence/ switch and CSIC printed sheets*1
(Cyan, absence Toner Cartridge Cyan Average of 8,000
Magenta, New cartridge Automatic detection by CSIC --- printed sheets*1
Yellow, Toner Cartridge Magenta
Black) Cartridge type Irregular shape of cartridge The shape of cartridge
Toner Cartridge Yellow
housing is unique to each
color, and this prevents it Photoconductor Unit 30~50K sheets*2 359 (W) x 146 (D) x 179 (H) 4.5
from installing on the Transfer Unit 25K sheets 309 (W) x 85 (D) x 60 (H) 0.5
wrong cartridge holder.
Fuser Unit 100K sheets 389 (W) x 94 (D) x 86 (H) 1.5
Near life end Automatic detection ---
Work life end Softcounter --- *1: The number of sheets is the approximate number of printable images using A4
landscape continuous printing at 5% image occupation rate.
The first cartridge will Near End for TBD page count. (In order to fill the developer
7.1.4 Paper Specifications with toner.)
*2: Work life will differ with usage conditions.
STANDARD PAPER TYPE
RX-80 (80 g/m2): A4
XEROX 4024 DP 20lb (75g/m2): LT

7.1.6 Control Panel ROM MODULE COPY
7.1.6.1 Special Operations 1. Make sure that the printer is turned off. Insert a blank ROM module
into the slot A on the main controller and this is a destination
Table 7-11. List of Operating Functions
module. (The source module is the one inserted in the slot P.)
Function Operating Method
ROM Module Copy Refer to the description in right column. 2. Turn the printer on while holding down the buttons; [Start/Stop],
Ignore EpsonNet ASP in HDD Turn the power on pressing the Back, Enter and Job [Job Cancel], [Down].
Cancel buttons.
Hex Dump 3. As soon as the message Program Device is appeared on a
Support Mode
LCD panel, release all other buttons and press the [Up] button and
holding it untill Complex Exe is displayed.
Initialization of EEPROM
Panel Setting Value 4. Press [Up] button until the message Copy MENU is displayed.
Initialization
Forced Deleting of the Flash
C A U T IO N The special menu items; other than Copy MENU, are
ROM A Module
Refer to 1.14.4. "Special Operations" only for development purpose and not intend to be
Program ROM Update
operated for field service & support purpose.
Maintenance Mode
Never attempt to use other menu items unless
CPU reset in a Service Call specifically instructed to do so.
occurrence.
Detailed Information Display
in a Service Call occurrence 5. Press [Enter] button to enter Copy MENU.
Printing of the Error Sheet
6. Press [Up] buttons until the message Copy FONT + CODE] is
displayed.
7. Press [Enter] button to start copying the ROM module. When the
message Copy END is displayed, the copy operation is completed.
8. Turn the printer off and remove the ROM module from the slot A.

7.1.6.2 Panel Setting Item *3: This is displayed and can be executed only when the Network I/F = On.
NOTE: The factory defaults values are shown in Bold style. *4: This is displayed and can be executed only when the printer is equipped with Level 3
compatible Type-B host interface and AUX I/F = On is set at startup.
*5: This is displayed and can be executed only when the PostScript 3 module is
INFORMATION MENU
installed.
List *6: This is not displayed on the panel. It can be executed in EJL. It is not open to users.
*7: This item is only displayed, and cannot be changed in the setting.
Item Value
Explanation
Status Sheet
Reserve Job List *1 C, M, Y, K Toner
Form Overlay List *2 The remaining toner (C, M, Y, K) level is displayed in 7 steps
NetworkStatus Sheet *3 (display only, exclusive readout).
ColorRegist Sheet
AUX Status Sheet *4 E******F : 100% Remaining Toner > 83%
PS3 Status Sheet *5 E***** F : 83% Remaining Toner > 66%

E**** F : 66% Remaining Toner > 50%
PS3 Font Sample *5
E*** F : 50% Remaining Toner > 33%
ESC/Page Font Sample *6
E** F : 33% Remaining Toner > 16%
LJ4 Font Sample E* F : 16% Remaining Toner > 0%
ESCP2 Font Sample E F : Remaining Toner = 0%
FX Font Sample
Photocon
I239X Font Sample
C Toner *7 E* * * * * *F ~ E F The Photoconductor Unit Life level is displayed in 7 steps
M Toner *7 E* * * * * *F ~ E F
(display only, exclusive readout).
Y Toner *7 E* * * * * *F ~ E F
E******F : 100% Remaining Toner > 83%
K Toner *7 E* * * * * *F ~ E F
E***** F : 83% Remaining Toner > 66%
Photocon *7 E* * * * * *F ~ E F E**** F : 66% Remaining Toner > 50%
Total Pages *7 0 ~ 99999999 E*** F : 50% Remaining Toner > 33%
Color Pages *7 0 ~ 99999999 E** F : 33% Remaining Toner > 16%
B/W Pages *7 0 ~ 99999999 E* F : 16% Remaining Toner > 0%
E F : Remaining Toner = 0%
*1: This is displayed only when a Job is registered in the Quick Print Job.
*2: This is displayed and can be executed only when the Form Overlay is implemented.

STATUS MENU PRINTING MENU
When a warning message occurs, all warnings occurred at the List

entering SelecType is displayed.
Item Value
Page Size A4 *1, A5, B5, LT *1, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE,
F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, C6, IB5, CTM *2
Wide A4 Off, On
Orientation Port, Land
Resolution 600, 300
RITech On, Off
Toner Save Off, On
Image Optimum Auto, Off, On
Top Offset -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
Left Offset -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
T Offset B -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
L Offset B -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm step 0.5 mm
*1: LT is the default value of the Letter type controller and A4 is the default value of the
A4 type controller.
*2: Paper sizes (width x length) for CTM (Custom) are min: 88.9 x 139.7 mm and max:
215.9 x 355.6 mm.

SETUP MENU Item Value

Magenta_Regist -7 0 7
List
Yellow_Regist -7 0 7
Panel Lock*6 Off, On
Item Value
Lang English *1: This is displayed and can be selected only when the optional 500-sheets lower
(Lang, Sprache, LINGUA, LENG, Franais paper cassette is installed.
SPRK, Sprog, Taal, KIELI, Lng.) Deutsch
ITALIANO *2: This is displayed and can be selected only when the optional 1000-sheets lower
ESPAOL paper cassette is installed.
SVENSKA *3: This is not displayed on the panel. It can be set in EJL or PJL. It is not stored in
Dansk NVRAM.
Nederl.
SUOMI *4: Duplex printing is available only for A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, EXE and GLG paper
Portugus sizes. Use single-side printing for other sizes.
Time Out 0, 5 ~ 60 ~ 300 step1 *5: This is valid for PCL5e, ESC/Page, ESC/P2, FX and I239X.
Paper Source Auto, MP, LC1, LC2 *1*2, LC3 *1 *6: This is not displayed, and not printed on the Status Sheet. It can be set by EJL,
EpsonNet WebAssist,etc.
MP Mode *1 Normal, Last
Manual Feed Off, 1st Page, Eachpage
Copies 1 ~ 999
Quantity *3 1 ~ 999
Duplex *4 Off, On
Binding Long Edge, Short Edge
Start Page Front, Back
Paper Type Normal, Thick, ExtraThk, Trnsprnc, Coated
Paper Side Front, Back
Skip Blank Page *5 Off, On
Auto Eject Page Off, On
Size lgnore Off, On
Auto Cont Off, On
Page Protect Auto, On
LCD Contrast 0 ~ 8~ 15
Cyan_Regist -7 ~ 0 ~ 7

RESET MENU NETWORK MENU
List List

Clear Warning Network I/F On, off
Clear All Warning Network Config No, Yes
Reset Get IPAddress*2 Panel, Auto, PING
Reset All IP*2*3 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255
SelecType Init SM*2 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
GW*2 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
NetWare*2 On, Off
AppleTalk*2 On, Off
MS Network*2 On, Off
Rendezvous*2 On, Off
Link Speed*2 Auto, 100 Full, 100 Half, 10 Full, 10 Half
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum
*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm boot or
restarting the printer.
The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back,
however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting the printer.
*2: This is displayed and can be selected only when Network Config = Yes.
*3: This is displayed current values and can not be changed when Get IPAddress =
Auto is set.
When the setting Get IPAddress = Auto is changed to Panel or PING, the value
set up at the time of Panel or PING set before Panel is displayed.

*1: When this setting is changed, the setting value becomes valid after warm boot or
AUX MENU*1*2 restarting the printer.
List The setting value is reflected immediately to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back,
however it is changed in practice after warm boot or restarting the printer.
Item Value *2: This is displayed only when the Type-B host interface is installed.
AUX I/F On, Off *3: This is displayed and can be selected/executed only when Level 3 compatible Type-
B host interface is installed. This automatically returns to "AUX Config = No" when
AUX Config*3 No, Yes the printer status changed to Online.
Get IPAddress*2 Panel, Auto, PING
*4: This is displayed and can be selected/executed only when "AUX Config = Yes" is
IP*2*3 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255 selected.
The setting value switches to the Online status, and becomes valid when the
SM*2 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255
network card restarts.
GW*2 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255 Therefore, when changing the setting value, executing AUX Status Sheet of the
NetWare*3*4 On, Off Test print menu before recovering from the Panel setting mode prints the previous
setting value.
AppleTalk*3*4 On, Off
*5: This is displayed current values and can not be changed when Get IPAddress =
MS Network*3*4 On, Off Auto is set.
Rendezvous*3*4*5 On, Off When the setting Get IPAddress = Auto is changed to Panel or PING, the value
set up at the time of Panel or PING set before Panel is displayed.
AUX Init*3*4
*6: This is displayed and can be set only when Rendezvous compatible Type-B host
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum interface is installed.

ESC/PAGE MENU*1
List
Item Value
Auto CR On, Off
Auto FF On, Off
LF Function CR+LF, LF
FF Function CR+FF, FF
Error Code Ignore, Space
Avoid Error Off, On
PGI On, Off
TriColorSpace Normal, sRGB
CM Media Type Off, Opt1, Opt2
Process Mode 1, 2
*1: This is not displayed on the panel or the Status Sheet. It can be specified in EJL.

LJ4 MENU Item Value

Form 5~ 60 *4 ~ 64 *4 ~ 128 Lines
List
Source SymSet *5 0 ~ 277 ~ 3199
Dest SymSet 0 ~ 277 ~ 3199
Item Value
Font Source Resident, Download *1, ROM A *2
LF Function LF, CR+LF
Font Number 0 ~ available (Max 65535)
Tray Assign 4, 4K, 5S
Pitch *3 0.44 ~ 10.00 ~ 99.99 cpi step 0.01 cpi
Height *3 4.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt *1: This is displayed only when some download fonts exist.
SymSet IBM-US, Roman-8, Roman-9, *2: This is displayed only when an optional font is inserted to the ROM socket.
ECM94-1, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-9 ISO,
8859-10ISO, 8859-15ISO, PcBlt775, *3: Either of these is displayed depending on the selected font type. In the case of a
IBM-DN, PcMultiling, PcE.Europe, fixed pitch font, Pitch is displayed and in the case of a proportional pitch font,
PcTk437, PcEur858, Pc1004, Height is displayed. Neither of these is displayed in the case of a bitmap font. Both
WiAnsi, WiE.Europe, WiTurkish, Pitch and Height appears in some cases (such as changing Font Source or Font
WiBALT, DeskTop, PsText, Number when PCL5 is not run internally).
VeInternati, VeUS, MsPublishin, *4: 60 if A4/LT configuration is set to LT, 64 if it is set to A4.
Math-8, PsMath, VeMath,
PiFont, Legal, UK, *5: When changing the Value of SymSet, and the font specified by Font Number does
ANSI ASCII, Swedis2, Italian, not include the Symbol Set, the settings are coupled to be Font Source = Resident
Spanish, German, Norweg1, and Font Number = 0, therefore when printing with this Symbol Set, set the Value of
French2, Windows, McText, Font Source and Font Number to a font that supports this Symbol Set.
PcIcelandic, PcLt774, PcTurk1,
PcPortugues, PcEt850, PcTurk2,
PcCanFrench, PcSl437, PcNordic,
8859-3 ISO, 8859-4 ISO, WiBaltic,
WiEstonian, WiLatvian, Mazowia
CodeMJK, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp,
PcGk437, PcGk851, PcGk869,
8859-7 ISO, WiGreek, Europe3,
PcCy855, PcCy866, PcLt866,
PcUkr866, PcLit771, 8859-5 ISO,
WiCyrillic, Bulgarian, Hebrew7,
8859-8 ISO, Hebrew8, PcHe862,
Arabic8, PcAr864, 8859-6 ISO,
OCR A, OCR B
Pc866Cyr, Pc866Ukr, WinCyr,
ISOCyr, Pc8Grk, Pc851Grk,
WinGrk, ISOGrk, Greek8,
Pc862Heb, Pc864Ara, HPWARA

ESCP2 MENU SUPPORT MENU*1
List List

Font Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman T, Orator S, HDD Format*3
Sans H, Script, OCR A, OCR B
PS3 HDD Init*4
Pitch 10 cpi, 12 cpi,15 cpi, Prop.
Sleep Mode*2 Enable, Disable
Condensed Off, On
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated by
T.Margin 0.40 ~ 0.50 ~ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
hidden operation when the power is turned on.
Text 1 ~ 62 *1 ~ 66 *1 ~ available (Max: 67) Lines
*2: STANDBYTIME command (nondisclosure) of EJL is also supported.
CGTable PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin, PcPortugue, When Disable is selected, Fuser is in the status where printing is immediately
PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, PcTurkish2, Pclcelandic, possible, except when any engine errors occur.
PcE.Europe, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp, Roman 8, *3: This is displayed and can be executed only when HDD is installed.
PcEur858, ISO Latin 1, 8859-15ISO, PcSl437,
*4: This is displayed and can be executed only when both of PS3 and HDD are
PcTurkish1, 8859-9 ISO, Mazowia, CodeMJK,
installed.
PcGk437, PcGK851, PcGk869, 8859-7 ISO,
PcCy855, PcCy866, PcUkr866, PcLit 771,
Bulgarian, Hebrew7, Hebrew8, PcAr862,
PcHe864,
PcAr864Ara, PcAr720, PcLit774, Estonia,
ISO Latin2, PcLat866
Country USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy,
Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric,
Korea, Legal
Auto CR On, Off
Auto LF Off, On
Bit Image Dark, Light, Barcode
ZeroChar 0,

PRINTER ADJUST MENU*1 Explanation

Feed Offset
List
Fine adjust printing misalignment of paper feeding direction in
Item Value simplex printing of front side of duplex printing.
Normal -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2
Scan Offset
Thick -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2
ExtraThk -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2 Fine adjust printing misalignment of laser scan direction in
simplex printing or front side of duplex printing.
Trnsprnc -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2
Coated -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2 Feed Offset 2
Envelope -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2 Fine adjust printing misalignment of paper feeding direction in
Thick Back -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2 back side of duplex printing.
ExtraThk Back -15 ~ 0 ~ 15 A step is one level *2
Scan Offset 2
Cleaning Cycle 0 ~ -5 A step is one level *3
Feed Offset -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm Fine adjust printing misalignment of laser scan direction in back
side of duplex printing.
Scan Offset -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm
Feed Offset 2 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm
Scan Offset 2 -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Support Mode has been activated by
hidden operation when the power is turned on.
The contents of this menu are not localized.
When this menu is active, cover open/closed errors do not occur and printer data is
not sent.
When the value of this menu is changed and it escapes to a menu, the printer is
rebooted automatically.
*2: The current changes 5% for each step.
*3: This menu sets the shortening proportion of cleaning cycle.
(0: 100%, -1: 90%, -2: 80%, -3: 70%, -4: 60%, -5: 50%)
The cleaning cycle is regulated by total print volume of Photoconductor Unit.
This setting will work after restoring the printer.

MAINTENANCE MODE*1 Explanation

E Mode
This setting menu is displayed and can be selected only when the
Maintenance Mode has been activated by hidden operation when the For customization purpose only. (Yellow, Magenta and Cyan
power is turned on. Then restarting the printer deletes the Maintenance toner consumption (except Black) is economized to less than
Menu from the Menu (the Maintenance Mode is deleted = the printer 80% by this setting for special customer. The printer is rebooted
has switched to the normal mode). Basically, this setting is for after setting.)
maintenance by service personnel.
C A U T IO N Do not change this setting by service engineer.

Do not open to an user this mode.
C A U T IO N
Engine trouble error (include Calibrating printer) will
not occur if entering the maintenance mode with
opening Cover A or Cover B.
List
Item Value
Engine Status Sheet
E Mode 0, 1
Clear Error Log
*1: This setting menu is displayed only when the Maintenance Mode has been activated
by hidden operation when the power is turned on. Always displayed in English
regardless of the Lang setting in the Setup Menu.

7.1.7 Status Sheet THE LOWEST DESCRIPTION SECTION OF THE STATUS SHEET
ICxxx xxx xxx yyy yyy yyy: xxx xxx xxx indicates that number of
NETWORK MENU
Toner Cartridge replacements for
each color.
The current setting of NetWare, AppleTalk, Rendzvous and Link Speed
yyy yyy yyy indicates that number of
are printed.
clearing toner error for each color.
MCxxxxxxxxxx: MCU version (Upper 5-digit shows
INFORMATION
MCU version and lower 5-digit shows
NVRAM version in the engine.)
Describes Name (English only, 36-digit), Remaining Amount (10-digit),
Warning (20-digit) and Number (30-digit) of consumables that can be 22PNNYYMMDDhhmmssX: USB serial number
replaced by users. Needed soon is added when the amount reaches F: USB version (F: USB1.1)
the level where a warning occurs.
Name Parts Number

Toner Cartridge Cyan S050146
Toner Cartridge Magenta S050147
Toner Cartridge Yellow S050148
Toner Cartridge Black S050149
Photoconductor Unit S051093
Transfer Unit S053006
Fuser Unit 120(110-120V)/220(220-240V) S053011/S053012
SLEEP MODE = DISABLE
This is printed to inform user that the setting is Disable only when the
setting is Sleep Mode = Disable.
Figure 7-1. Status Sheet

7.2 Panel Message For Troubleshooting Table 9-1. List of Printer Messages
LED Message Category Error Light*6 Status code
Replace Photocondctr Error ON 4236
7.2.1 List of Printer Messages Replace TransferUnit Error ON 4236
Printer Open Error ON 4002
The table below shows the list of printer message of AcuLaser C4100. Install LC1 Error ON 4007
Each message is the one when Lang = English is set. Install LC2 Error ON 4007
Manual Feed sss*3 Error Flash2 1013
Table 9-1. List of Printer Messages Error
Cant Print Duplex Flash1 3005
LED Message Category Error Light*6 Status code Paper Out ttt*2 sss*4 Error ON 4010
(Display when Power is Turned On) Status Paper Set ttt*2 sss*4 Error Flash1 3003
Service Req Cffff*1 Service call error ON 6000 Print Overrun Error Flash1 3000
Service Req Eggg*1 Service call error*1 ON 6001 ~ 6999 Mem Overflow Error Flash1 3001
Formatting HDD Status --- - Duplex Mem Overflow Error Flash1 3004
Optional RAM Error Error ON - Invalid HDD Error ON 4202
ROM CHECK Status --- - Invalid PS3 Error ON 4201
RAM CHECK Status --- - Invalid AUX I/F Card Error ON 4014
HDD CHECK Status --- - Invalid ROM A Error ON 4003
Unable Clear Error Status ON - Write Error ROM A Error ON 4006
Self Test Status --- - Write Error ROM P Error ON 4006
Reset All Status All Flash 1004 Reset to Save Status --- -
Reset Status --- 1004 Writing ROM A Status --- 1005
Cancel All Print Job Status --- 1003 Writing ROM P Status --- 1005
Cancel Print Job Status --- 1003 Menus Locked Warning --- 1001
Check Transparency Error ON 4021 (Panel setting display)
Jam xxxx Error ON 4234 Reserve JobCanceled Warning --- 2565
Face-down Full Error Flash2 4090 Hard Disk full Warning --- 2569
Wrong Toner uuuu Error ON 4237 Form Data Canceled Warning --- 2570
NonGenuinetoner uuuu Error Flash2 4241~4255 PS3 Hard Disk full Warning --- 2561
TonerCart Error uuuu Error ON 4238 Cant Print Warning --- 2072
Install uuuu TnrCart Error ON 4235 Collate was disabled Warning --- 2013
Install Photocondctr Error ON 4235 Check Paper Size Warning --- 2004
Install Fuser Error ON 4235 Image Optimum Warning --- 2002
Install TransferUnit Error ON 4235 Check Paper Type Warning --- 2008
Clear Sensor Error ON 4228 Need Memory Warning --- 2003
Wrong Photoconductor Error ON 4237 Format Error ROM A Warning --- 2000
Replace Toner uuuu Error ON 4236 Form Feed Status --- 1008
AcuLaser C4100 Panel Message For Troubleshooting 7-510

Table 9-1. List of Printer Messages 7.2.2 Details of Error Message and Treatment
LED Message Category Error Light*6 Status code
(Display in test printing) 1010 Install uuuu TnrCart
Calibrating Printer Status --- 1014
Offline*5 Status --- 1001 Description
Cancel Print Job (by host) Status --- 1003
One of the C, M, Y, K toner cartridges is not installed.
uuuu Toner Low Warning --- 2571
The uuuu display corresponds to the C, M, Y, K toner cartridges,
Worn Photoconductor Warning --- 2571
Warning --- 2571
and indicates the cartridge that is not installed.
Worn Fuser
Worn Transfer Unit Warning --- 2571 When protect tape is removed with installing bran-new toner
Sleep*5 Status --- 1007 cartridge, this error occurs.
NonGenuine Toner Warning --- 2571
Treatment
Ready*5 Status --- 1000
(Printing) Status --- 1009 By opening the top cover and installing the displayed toner
(Communication to non-active I/F) Status --- 1012 cartridge, the error is released.
(executing of Job (possible to print)) Status --- 1002 When equipped a protect tape in the toner cartridge, remove the
toner cartridge from the printer, reinstall the toner cartridge and
remove the protect tape.
C H E C K The Printer Message list is described in the order or
P O IN T descending priorities (the top item is the highest on
the list or priorities). Install Fuser
Description
*1: Refer to 3.3.3. "Service Call Error Messages".
The Fuser Unit is not installed, or is not set correctry.Or the Fuser
*2: The relevant values among the Values of Paper Source in the panel setting except Unit is broken.
for Auto are displayed.
*3: The relevant values among the Values for Paper Size in the panel setting are
Treatment
displayed.
Turn the printer off, leave the printer for 30 minutes or more, open
*4: The relevant values among the Values for each paper feed Size in the Tray Menu in the Cover B, push the left lever of the Cover D, open the Cover D
the panel setting are displayed.
and install the Fuser Unit correctly. Close the Cover D and close the
*5: The remaining amount of toner is displayed on the right side of panel in order of C, Cover B at the end. When install Fuser message is displayed in
M, Y and K from the left.
spite of above operation, the Fuser Unit is broken or is not
*6: Refer to 1.14.2. "Display Elements Description" adaptable to this product.

Replace Toner uuuu TonerCart Error uuuu
The printer detects that a toner is empty according to the Toner End One of the toner cartridges is broken.
sensor and the toner's Dispense Time of each color of the engine,
Treatment
and printing stops. Printing in the Toner End status cannot provide
proper color expression, therefore the error cannot be released by Reinstall the toner cartridge or install new toner cartridge to clear
pressing the Start/Stop button. The uuuu shows CMYK this error. When this error is not cleared by above operation, turn the
corresponding to the each C, M, Y, K toner cartridge, indicating only printer off and then turn the printer on again.
the toner cartridge detected that it contains no remaining toner.
Treatment 7.2.3 Details of Warning Message and Treatment
Replace toner Cartridge.
NonGenuine Toner
Wrong Toner uuuu Description
Description One of the toner cartridges is not genuine.
An improper toner cartridge is installed. Treatment
Treatment This warning message is released by following operations.
Install appropriate toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge to genuine one.
Execute Clear All Warning.
NonGenuineToner uuuu
Execute Reset of Reset Menu.
Description
When restore the printer, this warning message appears again.
One of a toner cartridges is not genuine one.
Treatment
Install appropriate toner cartridge or press the Start/Stop button to
clear this error. In case of clearing this error by pressing Start/Stop
button, the warning message Non Genuine Toner appears.1

7.3 Maintenance
7.3.1 Consumable components and regularly replaced parts
LIST OF COMPONENTS
FUSER UNIT
ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY
ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED
TONER CARTRIDGE (Y, M, C, K)
CHUTE ASSY REGI

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
TRANSFER UNIT
Figure 7-2.
AcuLaser C4100 Maintenance 7-513

Table 9-2. List of components

Category Name Code Life (page) Replacement Time Note
Consumable components Cyan Toner Cartridge S050146 8,000 Replace Toner uuuu
Magenta Toner Cartridge S050147 8,000
---
Yellow Toner Cartridge S050148 8,000
Black Toner Cartridge S050149 10,000
Photoconductor Unit S051093 30,000~50,000 Worn Photocondctor The Photoconductor Unit can be
Replace Photocondctr used until the Replace
Photocondctr error appears,
however the printing quality after
that the Worn Photoconductor
message appears is not
guaranteed.
Transfer Unit S053006 25,000 Replace TransferUnit Same as ALC4000s one
Fuser Unit 120/220 S053011/S053012 100,000 Worn Fuser The printing quality after that the
Worn Fuser message appears is
not guaranteed. Therefore replace
the Fuser Unit immediately.
Regularly replaced parts Roll Assy 1110099 100,000 Judge the replacement The life values are reference
Roll Assy Feed 1111869 300,000 intervals depending on values.
Chute Assy Regi 2085209 300,000 both the printing volume
and wear status.
Roll Assy Feed 1110119 300,000

COMPATIBILITY
FUSER ASSY
Components ALC4100 => ALC4000 ALC4100 <= ALC4000
Toner Cartridge Not compatible. It can not install due to the shape difference.
Photoconductor Unit Compatible Not compatible. Wrong
Photoconductor error occurs.
Transfer Unit Compatible
COVER ASSY
Fuser Unit Not compatible. Install Fuser error occurs. TOP PHD
REPLACEMENT METHOD
Fuser Unit
1. Release the latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY OUT.
2. Press the Lever down and raise the COVER ASSY TOP PHD from
the printer body.
3. Release the 2 locks of the right and left side on the FUSER UNIT
upper side.
4. Remove the FUSER UNIT from the printer body.
5. Install the new FUSER UNIT to printer body.

Figure 7-3. Fuser Unit Replacement
6. Lock the FUSER UNIT.
7. Close covers.

7.3.2 Engine Status Sheet Paper Type (Type)

Transfer Unit Paper type is shown by decimal number.
Number of printed copies of the Transfer Unit. Table 9-4. Paper Type
Installing a new Transfer Unit will reset it when a waste toner box is Code Paper Type
full or warning message appears. 00 Normal
08 Transparency
Power On 04 Thick
14 Thick Back
Number of power on operation 05 ExtraThk
15 ExtraThk Back
Sleep
09 Labels
Number of times which the printer resumed form sleep mode 06 Envelopw
MCU
MCU version and NVRAM version (the value read from the engine)
Error Log
This is the history of the latest 20 errors which have occurred in the
penal messages, EJL status codes, Total Pages and Jam Code,
Paper Size and Paper Type when error occurs.
Jam Code (Jam)
Shows a jammed location as a bit information
Table 9-3. Jam Code

bit Jammed Location
4 Duplex Jam
3 Fuser Jam
2 Reg Jam
1 Feed Jam
Paper Size (Size)
Paper size is shown by character sequence displayed on a
panel (A4, A3, etc.).
Figure 7-4. Engine Status Sheet

7.3.3 List of control information and control methods

Table 7-12. List of control information and control methods
Count Processing and
Information Name Range Units Counting Conditions Clear Conditions
Storage Location
C Toner Counter
Dispense time Engine ~99,999 100msec When providing toner to the development Detecting a new C Toner Cartridge
Total Dot Controller 0~2147483647*1 --- Using toner (EEPROM initialization)
C Toner Change Controller ~255 Times Detecting a new C Toner Cartridge ---
M Toner Counter
Dispense time Engine ~99,999 100msec When providing toner to the development Detecting a new M Toner Cartridge
M Toner Change Controller ~255 Times Detecting a new M Toner Cartridge ---
Y Toner Counter
Dispense time Engine ~99,999 100msec When providing toner to the development Detecting a new Y Toner Cartridge
Y Toner Change Controller ~255 Times Detecting a new Y Toner Cartridge ---
K Toner Counter
Dispense time Engine ~99,999 100msec When providing toner to the development Detecting a new K Toner Cartridge
K Toner Change Controller ~255 Times Detecting a new K Toner Cartridge ---
Power On Controller 0~99999999 Times When power on (EEPROM initialization)
Sleep Controller 0~99999999 Times When back from sleep mode (EEPROM initialization)
Jam Code 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
Page Size 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
Paper Type 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
*1: When the Total dots overs the ranges, it will be 0 and continue to count and work.
NOTE 1:The values in parentheses of the Clear Conditions indicate that the values are cleared as the result.
NOTE 2:When exceeding the ranges, the items controlled by the controller are not guaranteed beyond the maximum limit.
NOTE 3:When counting value which storage in engine over the range, it will be 0 and continue to count and work.

7.4 Parts List for AL-C4100 Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100
RefNo. Part Name
16-1-200 RAM DIMM
16-1-202 GUIDE RAIL
Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100
16-1-203 "GROUNDING SPRING,TYPE-B"
RefNo. Part Name
NONFIG DC TOOL WO ADAPTER 16-1-50 "BOARD ASSY., MAIN"
01-1-01 CONTROL PANEL 16-1-51 "BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY"
01-1-02 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD CN402 CONNECTOR
01-1-03 COVER FRONT HEAD CN408 CONNECTOR
01-1-09 FAN FUSER CN600 CONNECTOR
01-1-10 CVR TOP STOPPER CN701 CONNECTOR
01-1-11 COVER TOP IC101 ASIC
01-1-12 COVER ASSY TOP MAIN IC102 MICROCONTROLLER
01-1-19 LATCH TOP R IC402 ASIC
01-1-23 LATCH TOP L IC501 HYBRID IC
01-1-28 COVER REAR IC600 ASIC
01-1-50 KIT COVER ASSY TOP IC601 ASIC
01-1-52 KIT COVER ASSY TOP PHD IC702 PERIPHERAL IC
01-2-01 COVER SIDE L IC704 PERIPHERAL/INTERFACE CONTROLLER IC
01-2-02 COVER SIDE R 02-1-08 STRAP
01-2-04 SPRING LINK 03-1-05 CHUTE RETADE
01-2-05 LINK 03-1-06 ROLL ASSY
01-2-06 COVER ASSY FRONT IN 03-2-01 GUIDE END
01-2-10 COVER ASSY FRONT 03-2-07 SPRING N/F
01-2-12 TRAY ASSY MSI 03-2-21 ACTUATOR SIZE
01-2-19 TRAY ASSY LOW 04-1-01 COVER FDR FRONT
NONFIG "LOGO PLATE 10X40;C,2COLOR SEIKEI" 04-1-03 COVER CASSETTE REAR
16-1-10 PANEL REAR ESS 04-1-04 BLOCK
16-1-12 GUIDE L ESS 04-1-06 CHUTE ASSY TURN
16-1-13 GUIDE R ESS 04-2-01 HOUSING FDR L
AcuLaser C4100 Parts List for AL-C4100 7-518

Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100 Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100
RefNo. Part Name RefNo. Part Name
04-2-02 HOUSING FDR R 06-1-13 WASTE TONER SENSOR
04-2-03 HARNESS ASSY TMPA 06-1-14 HARNESS ASSY TFLSNS
04-2-04 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR 06-1-18 DRIVE ASSY FUSER
04-2-05 FOOT 06-1-20 WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH
04-2-06 STOPPER CST 06-1-21 LATCH R
04-2-08 SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 06-1-30 LATCH L
04-2-09 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC 06-1-50 KIT ROLL PINCH TURN
04-2-10 LEVER LOW PAPER 06-1-51 KIT ROLL PINCH DUP
04-2-11 INDICATOR 07-1-01 CHUTE ASSY OUT
04-3-01 PICK UP ASSY 07-1-02 HARNESS ASSY FRONT 2
04-3-03 ROLL ASSY FEED 07-1-03 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE BS
04-3-04 EXIT SENSOR 07-1-04 E.R.M. SENSOR
04-3-06 ACTUATOR LINK 07-1-05 ACTUATOR FULL STACK
04-3-17 SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 07-1-12 ROLL DUP
04-3-18 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 07-1-13 ACTUATOR DUP
04-3-21 ROLL ASSY TURN 07-1-23 HARNESS ASSY DUP 2
04-3-25 ROLL ASSY 07-1-27 ROLL ASSY FEED
04-3-28 HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 07-1-37 ACTUATOR MSI
05-1-01 HOUSING ASSY RETARD 07-1-40 SOLENOID FEED MSI
05-1-02 ROLL TURN 07-1-43 WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH
05-1-05 ROLL ASSY RETARD 07-1-50 KIT ROLL PINCH EXIT
05-1-09 CLUTCH TURN MSI 07-1-51 KIT ROLL PINCH
06-1-01 CHUTE ASSY IN 08-1-01 CHUTE ASSY EXIT
06-1-02 WIRE ASSY BTR 2 08-1-04 ROLL EXIT
06-1-05 WIRE ASSY DTSK 08-1-05 ROLL MID
06-1-09 HARNESS ASSY FSR3C 08-1-79 KIT GLOMET
06-1-10 HARNESS ASSY CTD 09-1-01 FUSER ASSY (220V)
06-1-11 SENSOR ASSY ADC 10-1-01 CHUTE ASSY REGI

Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100 Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100
RefNo. Part Name RefNo. Part Name
10-1-12 CLUTCH REGI 13-1-14 FILM REGI
10-1-20 E.R.M. SENSOR 13-1-17 PWBA ASSY EARTH
10-1-21 ACTUATOR REGI 13-1-18 GEAR ASSY PR L
10-1-23 HOUSING ASSY 13-1-20 CHASSIS MAIN
11-1-01 ROS ASSY 14-1-01 DRIVE ASSY DEVE
11-1-04 HSG ASSY BIAS 14-1-02 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
11-1-05 STUD PLUNGER 15-1-02 PWBA MCU CPU HBN STD
11-1-50 KIT HSG ASSY BIAS 15-1-03 FAN REAR
12-1-06 HRANESS ASSY TNR4SE 15-1-05 CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS
12-1-08 PWB EEPROM 15-1-10 LVPS
12-1-09 HVPS SUB 15-1-11 HARNESS ASSY AC SW
12-2-01 KIT HOLDER ASSY TONER(Y) 15-1-15 PWBA DRV HBN
12-2-02 KIT HOLDER ASSY TONER(M) 15-2-01 HARNESS ASSY LVNC3
12-2-03 KIT HOLDER ASSY TONER(C) 15-2-02 HARNESS ASSY DRV 1
12-2-04 KIT HOLDER ASSY TONER(K) 15-2-03 HARNESS ASSY DRV 2.2
12-2-09 SENSOR TONER LOW 15-2-04 HARNESS ASSY LVRPG
12-3-01 PLATE ASSY DISPENSER 15-2-05 HARNESS ASSY ROS KA2
12-3-03 BOX ASSY CRUM READER 15-2-06 HARNESS ASSY 24V
12-3-08 HARNESS ASSY CRUM 15-2-07 HARNESS ASSY FRONT 1
12-3-13 RACK V 15-2-08 HARNESS ASSY OPF MAIN
12-3-14 GEAR SLIDE 15-2-09 HARNESS ASSY OPSEA
12-3-15 RACK H 15-2-10 HARNESS ASSY EEPROM
13-1-02 BRACKET LEVER 15-2-12 HARNESS ASSY TMPNCS
13-1-04 LEVER DRUM NONFIG REPACK KIT TRAY BOTTOM
13-1-05 SPRING LEVER 30N NONFIG REPACK KIT JOINT
13-1-08 ACTUATOR I/L NONFIG REPACK KIT SHEET TOP
13-1-10 GEAR IDL PRESS
13-1-11 GEAR ASSY PR R

Table 7-13. Parts List for AL-C4100

RefNo. Part Name
NONFIG REPACK KIT PAD
NONFIG REPACK KIT BAG
NONFIG "INDIVIDUAL CARTON BOX,220V"

7.5 Exploded Diagram

The following pages shows the exploded diagram for the AcuLaser
C4100.
( Total : 23 pages )
AcuLaser C4100 Exploded Diagram 7-522

10
C538-CASE-001 The parts to which no reference number 50
is assigned will not be available as
after-sale service parts.
11
1
2
3
9
12
(P137)
23
28
19
52
HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_001Fa
FOR EPSON AcuLaserC4100(1.1) Rev.01 C538
C538-CASE-002 The parts to which no reference number
5
10
6
12
19
FOR EPSON AcuLaserC4100(1.2) Rev.01 C538 HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_002Fa

C538-ELEC-001 The parts to which no reference number
10
12
203
202 200 51
13
50

C538-MECH-001 The parts to which no reference number
HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_003Fb

PL3.2

7
7
21
21
21 HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_005Fb

1
PL4. 3
3
6
PL4. 2
PL4. 2
4
4 4

(J231)
4
3 8
(P2361)
(J471)
1
2
5 6
5
(J210)
11
9
5
5
(P810)
10

3
1 3
4
(P472)
21
(P473)
(J474)
18
17
(J475)
25
(J471)
(J472)
(J473)
(P474)
28
(P475)
(J47)

1(All this page)

2
(J19)
The parts to which no reference number
C538-MECH-008 is assigned will not be available as
(J5030) after-sale service parts.
1 (All except a)
2
(J5020)
5
(J232) (J162)
9
(J141)
(J1361) (J145)
(J136)
11
(J233)
10
(J138)
(J2362) 14
13 (J142)
30 (J52)
a a
51
51
18
50
50 (J235)
20
21

(J134) 1 (all this page,PL8.1)
2 b
(J2211)
3
5
PL8.1.a
4
(J135) (P134)
(J133)
50
(J221) 50
(J139)
51
51
(J1322) 13
(P132) (J1321) (P133)
43 12
4
(J132)
40
(J131)
(P135)
4 (J137)
(J50)
23
37
27
HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_011Fc

1 (All this page)
PL7.1.b
5
79
a
(P131)

PL7. 1. 1

1 (All except 23)
(J32)
(J321)
(J18)
12
20 21 (J181)
23

50
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

PL12. 2
(P5011)
PL12. 3
(P144)
(J342) (J704)
(J703)
(J702)
(J514)
(P145)
8 (J701) (J513)
6 (J512)
(J511)
(J51)

(P514) (K)
9
(P704) (K)
(P513) (C)
9
(P703) (C)
(P512) (M)
9
(P702) (M)
(P511) (Y)
9
(P701) (Y)
HIBANAI_BE_CHAP05_017Fa

3
(P341)
(P342)
(J341)
(J3411)
15
14
13
(J710)
(J71)
HIBANA_BE_CHAP05_018Fd

5
4
5 4
4
4 8
5 4 5
4
4 5
4
5 20 5
5
10
18
10
11
17 14

1
(J49)
(J48)
2

(J166)
5 2
5 5
3
5 5
5
10
(J161)
11
15
(P34)
PL15. 1. 10
(P35) (P140)
(P13) (P311)
(P15) (P14) PL15. 1. 15
(P32)
(P24) (P31)
(P163)
(P22) (P166)
(P51)
(P11)
(P23) (P165)
(P60)
(P12)
(P18) (P42) (P167)
(P21)
(P19)
(P30) (P49) (P61)
(P164)
PL15. 1. 2 (P47)
(P48)
(P162)
(P41)
(P139)
(P50) (P1361) (J5011)
(P52) (P138)
(J61)
1 7
(J41)
(J165) (P210)
(J13)
2
8
(J11) (J42) (P221)
(J21)
3 9
(J164) (P71) (J144)
(J12)
(J22) (J141)
4 10
(J311) (P151) (J140)
(J167)
5
(J15)
(J23) (P2361)
(J60)
(P2362)
6
12
(J163)
(P3411)
(J24)
(J34)

7.6 Circuit Schematic

The following pages shows the circuit schematic of the C538MAIN
board for the AcuLaser C4100.
( Total : 7 pages )
AcuLaser C4100 Circuit Schematic 7-546

8
CHAPTER
APPENDIX
8.1 Parts List and Explodede Diagram for

Main Unit of The AcuLaser C4000
8.1.1 Attention on handling the parts list

Followings are the points to note when using the part list and exploded
diagrams.
The numbers in each illustration correspond to the parts list number

for that illustration.
The capital letters shown in the illustrations stand for the following:
S: screw
E: E ring
KL: KL clip
C: C ring
N: nut
The arrowheads in the illustrations indicate assemblies made up of
lower parts with their numbers.
Appendix Parts List and Explodede Diagram for Main Unit of The AcuLaser C4000 8-555
8.1.2 Parts List Tables Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit)
No. Part Name
The following tables show the part list of the AcuLaser C4000.
03-1-06 ROLL ASSY
Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit) 03-2-01 GUIDE END
No. Part Name 03-2-07 SPRING N/F
01-1-01 CONTROL PANEL 03-2-21 ACTUATOR SIZE
01-1-02 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD 04-1-01 COVER FDR FRONT
01-1-03 COVER FRONT HEAD 04-1-03 COVER CASSETTE REAR
01-1-09 FAN FUSER 04-1-04 BLOCK
01-1-10 CVR TOP STOPPER 04-1-06 CHUTE ASSY TURN
01-1-11 COVER TOP 04-2-01 HOUSING FDR L
01-1-12 COVER ASSY TOP MAIN 04-2-02 HOUSING FDR R
01-1-19 LATCH TOP R 04-2-03 HARNESS ASSY TMPA
01-1-23 LATCH TOP L 04-2-04 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR
01-1-28 COVER REAR 04-2-05 FOOT
01-1-50 KIT COVER ASSY TOP 04-2-06 STOPPER CST
01-1-52 KIT COVER ASSY TOP PHD 04-2-08 SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1
01-2-01 COVER SIDE L 04-2-09 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
01-2-02 COVER SIDE R 04-2-10 LEVER LOW PAPER
01-2-04 SPRING LINK 04-2-11 INDICATOR
01-2-05 LINK 04-3-01 PICK UP ASSY
01-2-06 COVER ASSY FRONT 04-3-03 ROLL ASSY FEED
01-2-10 COVER ASSY FRONT IN 04-3-04 EXIT SENSOR
01-2-12 TRAY ASSY MSI 04-3-05 ACTUATOR NO PAPER
01-2-19 TRAY ASSY LOW 04-3-06 ACTUATOR LINK
02-1-08 STRAP 04-3-17 SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1
03-1-05 CHUTE RETADE 04-3-18 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1
Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit) Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit)
No. Part Name No. Part Name
04-3-21 ROLL ASSY TURN 07-1-05 ACTUATOR FULL STACK
04-3-25 ROLL ASSY 07-1-12 ROLL DUP
04-3-28 HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 07-1-13 ACTUATOR DUP
05-1-01 HOUSING ASSY RETARD 07-1-23 HARNESS ASSY DUP
05-1-02 ROLL TURN 07-1-27 ROLL ASSY FEED
05-1-05 ROLL ASSY RETARD 07-1-37 ACTUATOR MSI
05-1-09 CLTCH TURN MSI 07-1-40 SOLENOID FEED MSI
06-1-01 CHUTE ASSY IN 07-1-43 WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH
06-1-02 WIRE ASSY BTR 2 07-1-50 KIT ROLL PINCH EXIT
06-1-05 WIRE ASSY DTSK 07-1-51 KIT ROLL PINCH

06-1-09 HARNESS ASSY FSR 2 08-1-01 CHUTE ASSY EXIT
06-1-10 HARNESS ASSY CTD 08-1-04 ROLL EXIT
06-1-11 SENSOR ASSY ADC 08-1-05 ROLL MID

06-1-13 WASTE TONER SENSOR 08-1-08 MOTOR ASSY DUP
06-1-14 HARNESS ASSY TFLSNS 09-1-01 FUSER ASSY
06-1-18 DRIVE ASSY FUSER 10-1-01 CHUTE ASSY REGI
06-1-20 WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH 10-1-12 CLUTCH REGI
06-1-21 LATCH R 10-1-20 E.R.M. SENSOR
06-1-30 LATCH L 10-1-21 ACTUATOR REGI
06-1-50 KIT ROLL PINCH TURN 10-1-23 HOUSING ASSY
06-1-51 KIT ROLL PINCH DUP 10-1-30 KIT SENSOR OHP
07-1-01 CHUTE ASSY OUT 11-1-01 ROS ASSY
07-1-02 HARNESS ASSY FRONT 2 11-1-04 HSG ASSY BIAS
07-1-03 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE BS 11-1-05 STUD PLUNGER

07-1-04 E.R.M. SENSOR 11-1-50 KIT HSG ASSY BIAS
Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit) Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit)
No. Part Name No. Part Name
12-1-06 HARNESS ASSY TNR 14-1-02 DRIVE ASSY DEVE
12-1-08 PWB EEPROM 15-1-02 PWBA ASSY MCU&LVPS
12-1-09 HVPS SUB 15-1-03 FAN REAR
12-2-01 HOLDER TONER ASSY (Y) 15-1-05 CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS
12-2-02 HOLDER TONER ASSY (M) 15-1-09 POWER CORD
12-2-03 HOLDER TONER ASSY (C) 15-1-10 LVPS
12-2-04 HOLDER TONER ASSY (K) 15-1-11 HARNESS ASSY AC SW
12-2-09 SENSOR TONER LOW 15-1-15 PWBA DRV
12-2-10 SWITCH TCRU ASSY 15-2-01 HARNESS ASSY LVNC
12-3-01 PLATE ASSY DISPENSER 15-2-02 HARNESS ASSY DRV 1

12-3-08 HARNESS ASSY CRUM 15-2-03 HARNESS ASSY DRV 2
12-3-13 RACK V 15-2-04 HARNESS ASSY LVRPG
12-3-14 GEAR SLIDE 15-2-05 HARNESS ASSY ROS

12-3-15 RACK H 15-2-06 HARNESS ASSY 24V
13-1-02 BRACKET LEVER 15-2-07 HARNESS ASSY FRONT 1
13-1-04 LEVER DRUM 15-2-08 HARNESS ASSY OPF MAIN
13-1-05 SPRING LEVER 30N 15-2-09 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE A
13-1-08 ACTUATOR I/L 15-2-10 HARNESS ASSY EEPROM
13-1-10 GEAR IDL PRESS 15-2-12 HARNESS ASSY TMPB
13-1-11 GEAR ASSY PR R 16-1-05 "BOARD ASSY., MAIN"
13-1-14 FILM REGI 16-1-10 PANEL REAR ESS
13-1-17 PWBA ASSY EARTH 16-1-12 GUIDE L ESS
13-1-18 GEAR ASSY PR L 16-1-13 GUIDE R ESS
13-1-20 CHASSIS MAIN

14-1-01 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Table 8-1. Parts list of the AcuLaser C4000 (Main Unit)

No. Part Name
16-1-200 RAM DIMM
16-1-202 GUIDE RAIL
16-1-203 "GROUNDING SPRING,TYPE-B"
8.1.3 Exploded Diagrams

The following pages show exploded diagrams of the AcuLaser C4000.
C470-CASE-001 01-1-50 01-1-10

after-sale service parts. 01-1-11
01-1-02
01-1-01
01-1-03
01-1-09
01-1-12
(J137)
01-1-23
01-1-28
01-1-52
01-1-19
HANABI_BE_CHAP05_001Fb
FOR EPSON AcuLaserC4000 (1.1) Rev.01 C470

C470-CASE-002 The parts to which no reference numb
01-2-01
01-2-02
01-2-04
01-2-05
01-2-10
01-2-04
01-2-05
01-2-06
01-2-12
01-2-19
FOR EPSON AcuLaser C4000 (1.2) Rev.01 C470

C470-MECH-001 The parts to which no reference numbe
02-1-08

C470-MECH-002 after-sale service parts.
03-1-05
03-1-06
PL3. 2
HANABI_BE_CHAP05_004Fa

C470-MECH-003 The parts to which no reference number 03-2-01
03-2-07
03-2-07
03-2-21
03-2-21
03-2-21

04-1-01
PL4. 3
04-1-03
04-1-06
PL4. 2
PL4. 2
04-1-04
04-1-04 04-1-04

04-2-04
04-2-03 (J237)
04-2-08
(P2361)
(J471)
04-2-01
04-2-02
04-2-05
04-2-06
04-2-05
(J210)
04-2-11
04-2-09
04-2-05
04-2-05
(P810)
04-2-10

04-3-03
04-3-01
04-3-03
04-3-05 04-3-06
04-3-04
(P472)
04-3-21
(P473)
(J474)
04-3-18
04-3-04 04-3-17
04-3-25 (J475)
(J471)
(J472)
(J473)
(P474) 04-3-28
(P475)
(J47)

05-1-01
05-1-02
05-1-05
(J19)
05-1-09

06-1-01 after-sale service parts.
(J5030)
06-1-02
(J5020)
06-1-05
(J232) (J162)
06-1-09
(J141)
(J1361) (J136)
06-1-11 (J233)
(J138) 06-1-10
06-1-14
(J145)
06-1-13 (J142)
06-1-30 (J52)
06-1-18
06-1-51 06-1-51
(J235)
(J234)
06-1-50
06-1-50
06-1-20
06-1-21

07-1-01 after-sale service parts.
(J134)
07-1-02
(J220)
07-1-03
07-1-05
07-1-04
(P134)
(J133)
(J135) 07-1-50
(J221) 07-1-50
(J139)
07-1-51
07-1-51
07-1-13
(P132) (P133)
07-1-43 07-1-12
07-1-04
(J132)
07-1-40
(J131)
07-1-45
(P135)
07-1-04
(J137)
(J50)
07-1-37 07-1-23
07-1-27
HANABI_BE_CHAP05_011Fe

08-1-01
08-1-04
08-1-05
08-1-08
(P131)

C470-MECH-011
09-1-01
PL7. 1. 1

10-1-01
10-1-12
10-1-20
10-1-21
10-1-23

C470-MECH-013
11-1-01
11-1-50
11-1-05
11-1-04
11-1-05
11-1-05
11-1-05
11-1-05 11-1-05
11-1-05
11-1-05

C470-MECH-014
12-1-09
(P5011) PL12. 3
PL12. 2
(P144)
(P145)
12-1-08
(J434)
(J433)
(J442)
(J432)
(J431) (J443)
(J444)
(J441) (J514)
(J513)
12-1-06 (J512)
(J511)
(J51)

12-2-04
12-2-10
(P514) (K)
(P434) (K)
12-2-09
(P444) (K)
12-2-10
(P433) (C)
12-2-09
(P443) (C) (P513) (C)
12-2-10
12-2-03
(P432) (M)
12-2-09 (P512) (M)
(P442) (M)
12-2-10
12-2-02
(P431) (Y)
12-2-09 (P511) (Y)
(P441) (Y)
12-2-01

12-3-01
12-3-15
12-3-14
12-3-13
(J710)
12-3-08
(J71)

13-1-02
13-1-02
13-1-05
13-1-04
13-1-05 13-1-04
13-1-04
13-1-04 13-1-08
13-1-05 13-1-04 13-1-05
13-1-04
13-1-04 13-1-05
13-1-19 13-1-05 13-1-04 13-1-05

13-1-20
13-1-05
13-1-10
13-1-18
13-1-10
13-1-11
13-1-17 13-1-14

C470-MECH-018
(J49) 14-1-01
(J48)
14-1-02

C470-MECH-019

(J166)
15-1-05 15-1-02
15-1-05 15-1-05
15-1-16 15-1-03
15-1-05
15-1-05
15-1-05
15-1-10
15-1-09
(J161)
15-1-11
15-1-05
15-1-05
15-1-15
HANABI_BE_CHAP05_021Fc

C470-MECH-020
(P13) (P140) PL15-1-10

(P15)
(P26) (P311)
(P32) (P14) PL15-1-15
(P24) (P31)
(P163)
(P22) (P51) (P166)
(P11) (P165)
(P60)
(P18) (P23)
(P19) (P12) (P42) (P167)
(P30)
(P21) (P49) (P41)
(P164)
PL15-1-02
(P48) (P61)
(P162)
(P47) (P139)
(P50) (P1361)
(P52) (P138) (J5011)
(J61)
15-2-01 15-2-07
(J41)
(J165) (J13) (P210)
15-2-02
15-2-08
(J11) (J42) (P221)
(J21)
15-2-03
15-2-09
(J164) (P71) (J144)
(J12)
(J22) (J141)
15-2-04 15-2-10
(J311) (J151) (J140)
(J2361)
15-2-05
(J15) 15-2-12
(J60)
(J24)
15-2-06
(J163)

C470-ELEC-001 after-sale service parts.
16-1-10
16-1-12
16-1-203
16-1-202 16-1-200 16-1-201
16-1-13
16-1-05

8.2 Wiring Diagrams

This section describes the connector locations. P and J stand for Plug and
Jack, respectively.
8.2.1 P/J Locations

See the following figures for the P/J locations.
Figure 8-1. P/J Location 1
Appendix Wiring Diagrams 8-584

Figure 8-2. P/J Location 2 Figure 8-3. P/J Location 3

Figure 8-4. P/J Location 4 Figure 8-5. P/J Location 5

Figure 8-6. P/J Location 6

8.2.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Tables P/J Coordinates Description
See the following table for the plug and jack (P/J) location. Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) to
27 I-33
PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS
30 H-43 Flash-write
P/J Coordinates Description
1 H-32 Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) memory 31 J-43 Test-print
Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) parallel Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL10.1.17
10 l-32 32 H-43
interface Harness Assy OHP
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.15 Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) upper
11 J-43 32 J-33
PWB Drive surface
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.15 Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) hard
12 I-43 33 I-32
PWB Drive disk
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.7 Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) network
13 H-43 34 J-32
Harness Assy Front 1 card
Connector for PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS to PL16.1.5 Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL15.2.2 Harness Assy
14 J-43 41 I-18
PWB Controller (PWB ESS) DRV 1
14 J-32 Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) font card Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL15.2.3 Harness Assy
42 J-18
DRV 2
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL11.1.1 ROS
15 H-43 45 K-32 Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) Ethernet
Assy
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL10.1.1 Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL4.3.28 Harness Assy
18 H-44 47 J-18
Chute Assy Regi (Clutch Regi, Sensor Regi) Feeder
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL5.1.1 Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL14.1.2 Drive Assy
19 H-44 48 I-18
Housing Assy Retard (Clutch Turn MSI) Main
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.8 Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL14.1.1 Drive Assy
21 I-43 49 I-17
Harness Assy OPF Main Deve
22 J-43 50 J-18
Harness Assy Opepane A Dup
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.11 Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) upper
23 I-43 50 I-32
Harness Assy LVRMT surface
24 H-43 51 J-16
Harness Assy TMPB TNR
26 H-43 -- Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL6.1.18 Drive Assy

52 I-18
Fuser

P/J Coordinates Description P/J Coordinates Description

Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL15.2.6 Harness Assy Relay Connector for PL15.2.10 Harness Assy EEPROM to
60 I-17 141 B-32
24V PL6.1.14 Harness Assy TFLSNS
Connects PL15.1.15 PWB Drive and PL15.2.1 Harness Assy Connects PL6.1.13 Sensor Toner Full and PL15.2.10
61 J-18 142 D-23
LVNC Harness Assy EEPROM
Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) upper Connects PL12.1.8 PWB EEPROM and PL15.2.10 Harness
64 I-32 144 E-35
surface Assy EEPROM
Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) Connects PL11.1.1 ROS Assy and PL15.2.5 Harness Assy
66 I-32 151 F-22
EEPROM SOS
Relay Connector for PL15.2.10 Harness Assy EEPROM to Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.1.11 Harness Assy AC
71 B-32 161 H-29
PL12.3.8 Harness Assy CRUM SW
Connector for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) upper 162 H-29 Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL6.1.9 Harness Assy FSR2
80 J-32
surface
163 H-27 Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.2.6 Harness Assy 24V
120 H-32 Jumper pin for PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS)
Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.2.4 Harness Assy
164 H-28
Connects PL8.1.8 Motor Assy DUP and PL7.1.23 Harness LVRPG
131 B-7
Assy Dup
Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.2.1 Harness Assy
165 H-28
Connects PL7.1.40 Solenoid Feed MSI and PL7.1.2 Harness LVNC
132 B-9
Assy Front 2
166 H-27 Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.1.3 Fan Rear
Connects PL7.1.4 Sensor Paper (DUP JAM) and PL7.1.2
133 D-8 Connects PL15.1.10 LVPS and PL15.2.11 Harness Assy
Harness Assy Front 2 167 H-28
LVRMT
Connects PL7.1.4 Sensor Paper (Full Stack) and PL7.1.2
134 D-6 Connection for PL10.1.20 Sensor Regi and PL10.1.12 Clutch
Harness Assy Front 2 181 E-38
Regi harness (to PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS)
Connects PL7.1.4 Sensor Paper (MSI No Paper) and PL7.1.2
135 C-9 Connects PL15.2.8 Harness Assy OPF Main and PL4.2.9
Harness Assy Front 2 210 H-23
Harness Assy OPFREC
Connects PL6.1.11 Sensor Assy ADC and PL6.1.10 Harness
136 C-23 Connects Console Panel Hanabi and PL7.1.3 Harness Assy
Assy CTD 220 E-7
OPEPANE BS
Connects PL1.1.9 Fan Fuser and PL7.1.23 Harness Assy
137 F-8 Relay Connector for PL7.1.3 Harness Assy OPEPANE BS to
Dup 221 B-33
PL15.2.9 Harness Assy OPEPANE A
Connects PL15.2.7 Harness Assy Front 1 and PL9.1.1 Fuser
138 B-32 Connects PL4.2.4 Sensor HUM Temp and PL4.2.3 Harness
Assy 231 C-49
Assy TMPA
139 B-33 Relay Connector for PL15.2.7 Harness Assy Front 1
Connects PL9.1.1 Fuser Assy and PL6.1.9 Harness Assy
232 F-23
Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.10 FSR2
140 H-43
Harness Assy EEPROM

P/J Coordinates Description P/J Coordinates Description

Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.2.4 Connects PL12.2.6 Holder Assy (M) (TNR Motor) and
311 I-42 512 I-6
Harness Assy LVRPG PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR
Connects PL10.1.17 Harness Assy OHP and PL10.1.16 Connects PL12.2.7 Holder Assy (C) (TNR Motor) and
321 E-37 513 J-6
Sensor OHP PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR
Connects PL12.2.10 Switch TCRU Assy (Y) and PL12.1.6 Connects PL12.2.8 Holder Assy (K) (TNR Motor) and
431 E-6 514 J-6
Harness Assy TNR PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR
Connects PL12.2.10 Switch TCRU Assy (M) and PL12.1.6 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
432 E-6 601 J-72
Harness Assy TNR HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(DEVE Y)
Connects PL12.2.10 Switch TCRU Assy (C) and PL12.1.6 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
433 E-5 602 I-72
Harness Assy TNR HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(DEVE M)
Connects PL12.2.10 Switch TCRU Assy (K) and PL12.1.6 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
434 F-5 603 I-72
Harness Assy TNR HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(DEVE C)
Connects PL12.2.9 Sensor Toner Low (Y) and PL12.1.6 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
441 G-7 604 I-72
Harness Assy TNR HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(DEVE K)
Connects PL12.2.9 Sensor Toner Low (M) and PL12.1.6 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
442 G-6 701 H-72
Harness Assy TNR HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(IDT1)
Connects PL12.2.9 Sensor Toner Low (C) and PL12.1.6 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
443 H-6 702 H-73
Harness Assy TNR HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(IDT2)
Connects PL12.2.9 Sensor Toner Low (K) and PL12.1.6 Connects PL12.3.1 Plate Assy Dispenser and PL12.3.8
444 H-6 710 H-72
Harness Assy TNR Harness Assy CRUM
Connects PL4.2.8 Switch SizeTray 1 and PL4.3.28 Harness Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
471 J-49 801 I-72
Assy Feeder HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(IDT1 CLEANER)
Connects PL4.3.4 Sensor No/Low Paper (N/P) and PL4.3.28 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
472 E-49 802 H-73
Harness Assy Feeder HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(IDT2 CLEANER)
Connects PL4.3.4 Sensor No/Low Paper (L/P) and PL4.3.28 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
473 H-57 804 I-72
Harness Assy Feeder HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(RTC)
Connects PL4.3.17 Solenoid Feed Tray 1 and PL4.3.28 Connects PL15.1.2 PWBA MCU & HVPS and PL15.1.8
474 G-49 805 I-72
Harness Assy Feeder HOUSING ASSY CONTACT(RFB)
Connects PL4.3.18 Clutch Assy Turn Tray 1 and PL4.3.28 Connects Option Feeder and PL4.2.9 Harness Assy
475 H-49 810 J-57
Harness Assy Feeder OPFREC
Connects PL12.2.5 Holder Assy (Y) (TNR Motor) and 960 I-33 PL16.1.5 PWB Controller (PWB ESS) EEPROM connector
511 I-7
PL12.1.6 Harness Assy TNR


Relay Connector for PL15.2.7 Harness Assy Front 1 to
1361 B-32
PL6.1.10 Harness Assy CTD
Relay Connector for PL15.2.12 Harness Assy TMPB to
2361 E-36
PL4.2.3 Harness Assy TMPA
Connects PL12.1.9 HVPS Sub and PL15.2.7 Harness Assy

5011 F-35
Front 1
5020 E-35 Connects PL12.1.9 HVPS Sub and PL6.1.2 Wire Assy BTR2
5030 E-35 Connects PL12.1.9 HVPS Sub and PL6.1.5 Wire Assy DTSK

8.2.3 High-pressure electrode Location Tables high-

pressure Coordinates Description
See the following table for the High-pressure electrode location. electrode
Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8
DEVE Y B-73
high- HOUSING ASSY CONTACT
DTS F-77 Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.7 STUD BTR
electrode
Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.4 SHAFT BTR DTS I-81 Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.7 STUD BTR
BTR E-77
IN Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.31 PLATE
EARTH G-78
Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.4 SHAFT BTR EARTH BTR
BTR I-81
IN Connects PL9.1.2 BTR ASSY and PL6.1.31 PLATE
EARTH H-82
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD EARTH BTR
DEVE C B-65
PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD
RTC B-66
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER
DEVE C D-69
RTC D-70
Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 PLUNGER
DEVE C B-73
HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8
RTC A-73
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD HOUSING ASSY CONTACT
DEVE K B-65
IDT 1 D-65
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD PLUNGER
DEVE K D-70
IDT 1 C-70
Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 PLUNGER
DEVE K C-73
HOUSING ASSY CONTACT Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8
IDT 1 C-73
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD HOUSING ASSY CONTACT
DEVE M B-64
PLUNGER IDT 1 Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD
D-66
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD CLEANER PLUNGER
DEVE M D-69
PLUNGER IDT 1 Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD
C-70
Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8 CLEANER PLUNGER
DEVE M B-73
HOUSING ASSY CONTACT IDT 1 Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8
C-73
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD CLEANER HOUSING ASSY CONTACT
DEVE Y B-63
PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.4
IDT 2 E-64
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 PLATE BIAS IDT2 of HSG ASSY BIAS
DEVE Y D-68
STUD PLUNGER Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.4 PLATE
IDT 2 B-69
BIAS IDT2 of HSG ASSY BIAS

high-
electrode
Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8
IDT 2 D-73
HOUSING ASSY CONTACT
IDT 2 Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD

E-65
CLEANER PLUNGER
IDT 2 Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL11.1.5 STUD

C-70
CLEANER PLUNGER
IDT 2 Connects PL11.1.4 HSG ASSY BIAS and PL15.1.8

D-73
CLEANER HOUSING ASSY CONTACT
Connection for PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PLATE OF
RFB C-66 CONTACT RF of PL15.1.8 HOUSING
ASSY CONTACT
Connection for PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PLATE OF

RFB D-71 CONTACT RF of PL15.1.8 HOUSING
ASSY CONTACT
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL10.1.18 STUD
RFB H-65
PLUNGER D/EARTH
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL10.1.18 STUD

RFB G-68
PLUNGER D/EARTH
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL10.1.23
GND K-66
HOUSING ASSY ELEC
Connects PL11.1.3 PHD ASSY and PL10.1.23

GND K-67
HOUSING ASSY ELEC

8.3 Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information
8.3.1 Overall Wiring Connection Diagram

The symbols used in the overall wiring connection diagrams on the following
pages are as follows:
Symbols Description
Indicates connection of parts by HARNESS, wire, etc.
A box with no part name inside indicates a path by a connector (P/J). A

XX number inside the box indicates connector number.
Indicates a connector (P/J) written across several locations. The number

XX inside the box indicates connector number.
PWB DRIVE Boxes with part names inside indicate those parts. The part name shown
PL X, Y, Z here indicates item Z of plate (PL) XY in Section 8.1.2 "Parts List Tables".
Indicates a section in Section 8.3.2 "Wiring and Signal Descriptions

1 between Components". The number inside indicates the section number.
Appendix Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information 8-594

Figure 8-7. Overall Wiring Connection Diagram

8.3.2 Wiring and Signal Descriptions between 4. DEVELOPER COMPONENTS 1

Components Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH TCRU ASSY(Y)
(PL12.2.10).
8.3.2.1 Configuration Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH TCRU ASSY(M)
(PL12.2.10).
Wiring connection diagrams are divided into 11 sections and provide details
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH TCRU ASSY(C)
concerning connections between parts.
(PL12.2.10).
1. POWER SUPPLY COMPONENTS Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH TCRU ASSY(K)
(PL12.2.10).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and LVPS (PL15.1.10). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR TONER LOW (Y)
Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15). (PL12.2.9).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and PWBA MCU & HVPS Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR TONER LOW (M)
(PL15.1.2). (PL12.2.9).
Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and FAN REAR (PL15.1.3). Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR TONER LOW (C)
Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11). (PL12.2.9).
2. CASSETTE COMPONENTS Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR TONER LOW (K)
(PL12.2.9).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE
(PL4.2.8). (PL15.1.15).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (N/
P) (PL4.3.4). 5. DEVELOPER COMPONENTS 2
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and HOLDER ASSY (Y) (Toner
(L/P) (PL4.3.4). Motor:Y) (PL12.2.5).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and HOLDER ASSY (M) (Toner
(PL4.3.17). Motor:M) (PL12.2.6).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and HOLDER ASSY (C) (Toner
(PL4.3.18). Motor:C) (PL12.2.7).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and HOLDER ASSY (K) (Toner
(PL15.1.15). Motor:K) (PL12.2.8).
3. DRIVE COMPONENTS Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE
(PL15.1.15).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and DRIVE ASSY FUSER
(PL6.1.18).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8).
Connects PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) and FAN FUSER (PL1.1.9).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE
(PL15.1.15).

6. FUSER COMPONENTS 10. PAPER FEEDER COMPONENTS

Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR PAPER
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1). (Dup Jam) (PL7.1.4).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB DRIVE Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR PAPER
(PL15.1.15). (Full Stack) (PL7.1.4).
Connects LVPS (PL15.1.10) and HARNESS ASSY AC SW (PL15.1.11). Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR PAPER
(MSI No Paper) (PL7.1.4).
7. ROS COMPONENTS Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SOLENOID FEED MSI
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1). (PL7.1.40).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB EEPROM Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR REGI
(PL12.1.8). (PL10.1.20).
Connection of PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2), PLATE ASSY Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and CLUTCH REGI
DISPENSER (PL12.3.1) and PHD ASSY (CRUM) (PL11.1.3) (PL10.1.12).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and CLUTCH TURN MSI
8. XEROGRAPHICS COMPONENTS 1 (PL5.1.9).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR TNR FULL Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR OHP
(PL6.1.13). (PL10.1.16).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR HUM TEMP 11. CONTROLLER COMPONENTS
(PL4.2.4).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and SENSOR ASSY ADC Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWB CONTROLLER
(PL6.1.11). (PWB ESS) (PL16.1.5).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and CONTROL PANEL
9. XEROGRAPHICS COMPONENTS 2 (PL1.1.1).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and HVPS SUB (PL12.1.9).

8.3.3 Notation on the Diagrams for the Wiring and Symbol Description
Signal Descriptions between Components Shows a signal's logic value (Low: L or High:
H) when a function's motion has been
The symbols used in the wiring connection diagrams for parts on the following REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC activated. The voltage shown is the signal
pages are as follows. Explanations of commonly used symbols are omitted. strength at High condition.
The arrow shows signal direction.
Symbol Description Shows a signal's logic value (Low: L or High:
H) when function's condition has been
EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC detected. The voltage shown is the signal
Shows a plug (female connector). strength at High condition.
Shows a jack (male connector). Shows wiring connections.
P/JXX Shows Pin yy and Jack yy for Pxx/Jxx Shows DC voltage when the Interlock Switch
I/L +24VDC
connector. of the PWBA MCU & HVPS is ON.
YY
PWB DRIVE Shows a part.

The "PLx.y.z" number refers to Section 8.1.2 +5VDC
PL X.Y.Z Shows DC voltage.
"Parts List Tables", Plate (PL) number 'x.y', +3.3VDC
item number 'z'.
Heater Shows a part's internal component, with the SG Indicates signal ground.
name of that component.
Control Shows the PWB's internal CONTROLLER, AG Indicates analog ground.

with its outline.
Shows harness/wire connections between

DEVE_A RTN Indicates return.
components, with the signal name/content.

Connection Diagram 1 POWER SUPPLY COMPONENTS

LVPS (PL15.1.10) excess voltage protection circuit

All output is shut off when an overvoltage condition occurs for 24VDC/
5VDC/3.3VDC supply voltage. The operation point at this time is 32VDC or
less for 24VDC, 7VDC or less for 5VDC, and 6VDC or less for 3.3VDC.
Reset the printer by turning the power OFF for a small period of time and
then turning it back ON.
FAN Output Circuit
Output voltage of the FAN REAR ON (H) signal changes according to the
FAN LOW signal/FAN STOP signal.
FAN LOW FAN STOP FAN REAR ON (H)

High High 24V
Low High 15V
High Low 0V
Low Low 0V
Output Shut Down by I/L Switch

The "I/L +24VDC" circuit will be interrupted if the I/L Switch installed on the
P/J No. Signal line Description PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15) is switched to OFF. This condition will shut off the
P42-13 P12-18 FAN LOW Drive Control Signal for FAN REAR +24VDC power to the PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and the +24VDC
(PL15.1.3) power to components connected to the PWB DRIVE (PL15.1.15).
P42-12 P12-19 FAN STOP
Fail detection signal for FAN REAR

FAN REAR
P166-2 *1 (PL15.1.3).
FAIL(H)+3.3VDC
(High: Abnormal, Low: Normal)
ON/OFF Control Signal for FAN REAR
P166-1 *1 FAN REAR ON(H)
(PL15.1.3)
NOTE: *1 Direct attachment to FAN REAR (PL.15.1.3)
LVPS (PL15.1.10) excess current protection circuit

All output is shut off when 24VDC/5VDC/3.3VDC supply voltage is shorted.
After the short is eliminated, reset the printer by turning the power OFF for
a small period of time and then turning it back ON.

Connection Diagram 2 CASSETTE COMPONENTS

Winding resistance for Solenoid and Clutch
P/L No. Parts Name Winding resistance

PL 4.3.17 SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1 96 10% (20 C)
PL 4.3.18 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1 175 10% (20 C)
P/J No. Signal line Description

TRAY1 SIZE0 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for upper switch
P47-1 P471-4
ON(L)+3.3VDC of SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1 (PL4.2.8).
TRAY1 SIZE1 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for middle switch
P47-2 P471-3
TRAY1 SIZE2 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for lower switch

P47-4 P471-1
Paper detection signal for fuser issued
TRAY1 NO PAPER
P47-7 P472-1 by SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (N/P)
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
(PL4.3.4).
Cassette paper quantity sensing signal

TRAY1 LOW PAPER
P47-10 P473-1 sent by SENSOR NO/LOW PAPER (L/
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
P) (PL4.3.4).
TRAY1 FEED SOL ON/OFF Control Signal for SOLENOID
P47-12 P474-1
ON(L)+24VDC FEED TRAY 1 (PL4.3.17)
TRAY1 TURN CL ON/OFF Control Signal for CLUTCH

P47-14 P475-1
ON(L)+24VDC ASSY TURN TRAY 1 (PL4.3.18)

Connection Diagram - 3 DRIVE COMPONENTS


P12-1 P42-30 FAN FSR STOP
Drive Control Signal for FAN FUSER.
P12-30 P42-1 FAN FSR LOW
P50-7 P137-1 FAN FSR ON(H)+24VDC ON/OFF Control Signal for FAN FUSER.
FAN FSR Fail detection signal for FAN FUSER.

P50-8 P137-2
FAIL(H)+3.3VDC (High: Abnormal, Low: Normal)
Description of DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1).

Motor type: Hybrid type stepping motor
Step angle: 1.8 0.09
Winding resistance: 2.8 10% / Phase (25C)
Excitation sequence : See the following table. (*: excitation)
Signal line Description Step (2-phase excitation)

Phase
DEVE B, DEVE TDB, 1 2 3 4
DEVE A, DEVE TDA, Drive Control Signal for DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1).
DEVE_A * *
DA_DEVEMOT
DEVE_A, DEVE_B, DEVE_B * *
Excitation signal for DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1).
DEVE_XA, DEVE_XB DEVE_XA * *
MAIN B, MAIN TDB, MAIN
DEVE_XB * *
A, MAIN TDA, Drive Control Signal for DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2).
DA_MAINMOT
MAIN_A, MAIN_B,
Excitation signal for DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2).
MAIN_XA, MAIN_XB
FSR B, FSR TDB, FSR A, Drive Control Signal for DRIVE ASSY FUSER
FSR TDA, DA_FSRMOT (PL6.1.18).
FSR_A, FSR_B, FSR_XA,
Excitation signal for DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18).
FSR_XB
DUP B, DUP TDB, DUP A,
Drive Control Signal for MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8).
DUP TDA, DA_DUPMOT
DUP_A, DUP_B, DUP_XA,
Excitation signal for MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8).
DUP_XB

Description of DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL14.1.2). Description of MOTOR ASSY DUP (PL8.1.8).
Motor type: Hybrid type stepping motor Motor type: Hybrid type stepping motor
Step angle: 1.8 0.09 Step angle: 1.8 0.09
Winding resistance: 2.1 10% / Phase (25C) Winding resistance: 5.5 10% / Phase (25C)
Excitation sequence : See the following table. (*: excitation) Excitation sequence : See the following table. (*: excitation)
Step (2-phase excitation) Step (2-phase excitation)

Phase Phase
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MAIN_A * * DUP_A * * *
MAIN_B * * DUP_B * * *
MAIN_XA * * DUP_XA * * *
MAIN_XB * * DUP_XB * * *
Description of DRIVE ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.18).

Winding resistance: 6.2 10% / Phase (25C)
Step (2-phase excitation)

Phase
1 2 3 4
FSR_A * *
FSR_B * *
FSR_XA * *
FSR_XB * *

Connection Diagram - 4 DEVELOPER1 COMPONENTS


Toner quantity sensing signal sent by SENSOR
P51-34 P443-2 NOTNR_C
TONER LOW (C) (PL12.2.9)
P51-36 P444-2 NOTNR_K
TONER LOW (K) (PL12.2.9)
NOTNR_CHK_ SENSOR TONER LOW (Y) (PL12.2.9) Selected

P12-23 P42-8
Y Signal at time of Toner Quantity Check.
NOTNR_CHK_ SENSOR TONER LOW (M) (PL12.2.9) Selected
P12-23 P42-9
M Signal at time of Toner Quantity Check.
NOTNR_CHK_ SENSOR TONER LOW (C) (PL12.2.9) Selected

P12-21 P42-10
C Signal at time of Toner Quantity Check.
NOTNR_CHK_ SENSOR TONER LOW (K) (PL12.2.9) Selected
P12-24 P42-7
K Signal at time of Toner Quantity Check.
P12-3 P42-28 NOTNR Detect signal for residual quantity toner.
Toner Quantity Check Circuit

Toner Quantity Check cannot be done for all four colors at the same time,
so they are done one at a time in order. It is by the NOTNR_CHK_* signal
ON/OFF detect signal for SWITCH TCRU ASSY that a certain color is selected for detection of toner quantity, and it is by
SW TCRU_Y
P51-11 P431-2 (Y) (PL12.2.10). the selected color's NOTNR_* signal than toner quantity is detected. The
ON(L)+3.3VDC
Switch ON indicates Toner Bottle is present. result of the NOTNR signal is returned to the PWBA MCU & HVPS
ON/OFF detect signal for SWITCH TCRU ASSY (PL15.1.2).
SW TCRU_M
P51-13 P432-2 (M) (PL12.2.10).
ON(L)+3.3VDC
Switch ON indicates Toner Bottle is present.
ON/OFF detect signal for SWITCH TCRU ASSY

SW TCRU_C
P51-29 P433-2 (C) (PL12.2.10).
ON(L)+3.3VDC
ON/OFF detect signal for SWITCH TCRU ASSY
SW TCRU_K
P51-31 P434-2 (K) (PL12.2.10).
ON(L)+3.3VDC

P51-16 P441-2 NOTNR_Y
TONER LOW (Y) (PL12.2.9)
P51-18 P442-2 NOTNR_M
TONER LOW (M) (PL12.2.9)

Connection Diagram 5 DEVELOPER2 COMPONENTS

Description of TONER MOTOR ASSY.

Motor type: PM type stepping motor
Step angle: 7.5 0.5
Winding resistance: 80 10% / Phase (20C)
Excitation sequence : See the following the table. (*: excitation)

Phase
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A * * * *
XA * * * *
B * * * *
XB * * * *
Signal line Description

TMOT_Y_A, TMOT_Y_B,
Excitation Signal of Toner Motor (Y) inside HOLDER
TMOT_Y_XA,
ASSY (Y) (PL12.2.5)
TMOT_Y_XB
TMOT_M_A, TMOT_M_B,
Excitation Signal of Toner Motor (M) inside HOLDER
TMOT_M_XA,
ASSY (M) (PL12.2.6)
TMOT_M_XB
TMOT_C_A, TMOT_C_B,
Excitation Signal of Toner Motor (C) inside HOLDER
TMOT_C_XA,
ASSY (C) (PL12.2.7)
TMOT_C_XB
TMOT_K_A, TMOT_K_B,
Excitation Signal of Toner Motor (K) inside HOLDER
TMOT_K_XA,
ASSY (K) (PL12.2.8)
TMOT_K_XB

Connection Diagram - 6 FUSER COMPONENTS


EXIT PAPER Fuser's Paper Sensing Signal by Exit
P13-19 P138-3
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC Sensor inside FUSER ASSY (PL9.1.1).
Heat Roll surface temperature data
P13-20 P138-4 FUSER_STS measured by Temp Sensor, for judging
Fuser Control Temperature. (Analog data)
Control Signal for Heater Lamp ON/Lamp

P12-20 P42-11 HEATER ON(L)
OFF.
Power source AC input Neutral Side (heater
P162-2 P232-3 AC N
supply voltage).
Power source AC input Line Side (heater

P162-1 P232-1 AC L
supply voltage).
Heater's rated output : 600W 30W (100V)

Thermostat's contact open temperature : 160C 5C

Connection Diagram 7 ROS COMPONENTS


P15-20 P151-1 XPDATA_A_Y
Pixel data signal for ROS ASSY
P15-19 P151-2 XPDATA_B_M (PL11.1.1) internal Quad Beam Laser
P15-18 P151-3 XPDATA_C_C Diode emission. (4 color separation
Laser Diode)
P15-17 P151-4 XPDATA_C_K
P15-16 P151-5 MO_A_Y
P15-15 P151-6 MO_B_M LD light quantity Adjustment Control

P15-14 P151-7 MO_C_C Signal, for each color.
P15-13 P151-8 MO_D_K
P15-12 P151-9 VL1_A_Y
P15-11 P151-10 VL1_B_M LD light quantity Adjustment Voltage, for

P15-10 P151-11 VL1_C_C each color.
P15-9 P151-12 VL1_D_K
LD Power Supply Voltage, for each

P15-6 P151-15 LD +5VDC
color.
Scanning start reference signal based

SOS
P15-5 P151-16 on input of light to SOS SENSOR inside
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
laser beam PWBA SOS.
SCANNER MOTOR ON/OFF Control Signal for Polygon

P15-2 P151-16
ON(L) +5VDC Motor inside ROS ASSY (PL11.1.1).
Write/Read Data to PWB EEPROM
P15-2 P151-19 EEPROM DATA
(PL12.1.8).
Clock Signal to PWB EEPROM

P140-7 P144-4 EEPROM CLOCK
(PL12.1.8).
Write/Read Data to CRUM of PHD
P140-2 P71-2 CRUM DATA
ASSY (PL11.1.3).
Clock Signal to CRUM of PHD ASSY

P140-3 P71-3 CRUM CLOCK
(PL11.1.3).

Connection Diagram - 8 XEROGRAPHICS COMPONENTS1


Waste Toner Bottle full sensing signal
TONER FULL
P140-12 P141-2 sent by SENSOR TNR FULL
SENSED(H) +3.3VDC
(PL6.1.13).
Measurement Data sent by ADC
P13-12 P1361-5 ADC VOUT Sensor inside SENSOR ASSY ADC
(PL6.1.11).(Analog data)
Monitor Output Signal sent by ADC

P13-15 P1361-2 ADC MONITOR Sensor inside SENSOR ASSY ADC
(PL6.1.11).
LED Control Signal for LED inside
P13-16 P1361-1 GLED SENSOR ASSY ADC (PL6.1.11).
(Analog data)
Printer's Environmental Temperature

P24-3 P2361-2 ENV HUMI Data measured by SENSOR HUM
TEMP (PL4.2.4). (Analog data)
Printer's Environmental Humidity Data
P24-1 P2361-4 ENV TEMP measured by SENSOR HUM TEMP
(PL4.2.4). (Analog data)

Connection Diagram - 9 XEROGRAPHICS COMPONENTS2


Output to IDT2 Cleaner from HVPS
P802 *1 ICT2 CLEANER
inside PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2).
Output for Primary Transfer to IDT1 from
P701 *1 IDT1 HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS
(PL15.1.2).
Output to IDT1 Cleaner from HVPS

P801 *1 IDT1 CLEANER
Output from HVPS in PWBA MCU &
P805 *1 RFB
HVPS (PL15.1.2) to Refresher.
Output for Charging to RTC from HVPS

P804 *1 RTC
Output to Developer Y (Magnet Roll) from
P601 *1 DEVE Y HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS
(PL15.1.2).
Output to Developer M (Magnet Roll)

P602 *1 DEVE M from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS
P/J No. Signal line Description (PL15.1.2).
Current Control Signal for BTR (+) Output to Developer C (Magnet Roll)
P13-26 P5011-7 HV_REF_BTR_P
output. (Analog data) P603 *1 DEVE C from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS
(PL15.1.2).
Voltage Control Signal for BTR (-) output.
P13-27 P5011-6 HV_REF_BTR_M
(Analog data) Output to Developer K (Magnet Roll) from
P604 *1 DEVE K HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS
Voltage Control Signal for DTS output.
P13-28 P5011-5 HV_REF_DTS (PL15.1.2).
(Analog data)
Output for Discharging to Detack Saw
ON/OFF Control Signal for BTR (+)
P13-29 P5011-4 BTR_P ON(L)+24VDC P5030 *1 DTS inside BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) from HVPS
output.
SUB (PL12.1.9).
ON/OFF Control Signal for BTR (-)
P13-30 P5011-3 BTR_M ON(L)-24VDC Output for 3rd Stage Transfer to BTR
output.
P5020 *1 BTR inside BTR ASSY (PL9.1.2) from HVPS
P13-31 P5011-2 DTS ON(L)+24VDC ON/OFF Control Signal for DTS output. SUB (PL12.1.9).
Voltage monitor signal for BTR output.

P13-32 P5011-1 HV_MONI_BTR_V
(Analogue price)
NOTE *1: It contacts with HSG ASSY BIAS (PL11.1.4), STUD PLUNGER
(PL11.1.5) and STUD PLUNGER D/EARTH (PL10.1.18).
Output for Secondary Transfer to IDT2
P702 *1 IDT2 from HVPS inside PWBA MCU & HVPS
(PL15.1.2).

Connection Diagram -10 PAPER FEEDER COMPONENTS


DUP JAM SENSED(L) Paper Sensing Signal for Duplex sent by
P13-3 P139-9
+3.3VDC SENSOR PAPER (Dup Jam) (PL7.1.4).
Full Stack Sensing Signal for Paper Exit
FULL STACK
P13-6 P139-6 Discharge sent by SENSOR PAPER (Full
SENSED(L) +3.3VDC
Stack) (PL7.1.4).
Paper Sensing Signal for Hand Insertion

MSI NO PAPER
P13-9 P139-3 sent by SENSOR PAPER (MSI No Paper)
SENSED(H)+3.3VDC
(PL7.1.4).
MSI FEED SOL ON(L) ON/OFF Control Signal for SOLENOID
P13-11 P139-1
+24VDC FEED MSI (PL7.1.40).
REGI PAPER Paper Sensing Signal for Regi sent by

P18-3 P181-1
SENSED(L) +3.3VDC SENSOR REGI (PL10.1.20).
REGI CLUTCH ON(L) ON/OFF Control Signal of Regi Clutch
P18-5 *1
+24VDC inside CHUTE ASSY REGI (PL10.1.1)
MSI TURN CLUTCH ON/OFF Control Signal for CLUTCH TURN

P19-2 *1
ON(L) +24VDC MSI (PL5.1.9)
Paper Sensing Signal for OHP sent by

OHP PAPER SENSOR OHP (PL10.1.16). (High: plain
P32-2 P321-2
SENSED(L) +3.3VDC paper. Low: OHP transparency or no
paper.)
NOTE *1: Direct attachment to the parts.
Winding resistance for Solenoid and Clutch.
P/L No. Parts Name Winding resistance

PL 7.1.40 SOLENOID FEED MSI 90 10% (20 C)
PL 10.1.12 CLUTCH REGI 172 10% (20 C)
PL 5.1.9 CLUTCH TURN MSI 172 10% (20 C)

Connection Diagram - 11 CONTROLLER COMPONENTS

P/L No. Signal line Description

TEST PRINT Printer's internal Test Print can be made by
P31-1 *1
ON(L) +3.3VDC setting to LOW level (connection to SG).
NOTE *1: Direct attachment to circuit board.

8.4 Parts List and Exploded Diagram for

Large Capacity Paper Unit of The
AcuLaser C4000
8.4.1 Attention on handling the part list

Followings are the points to note when using the part list and exploded
diagrams.
The numbers in each illustration correspond to the parts list number

for that illustration.
The capital letters shown in the illustrations stand for the following:
S: screw
E: E ring
KL: KL clip
C: C ring
N: nut
The arrowheads in the illustrations indicate assemblies made up of
lower parts with their numbers.
Appendix Parts List and Exploded Diagram for Large Capacity Paper Unit of The AcuLaser C4000 8-622
8.4.2 Parts List Tables Table 8-2. Parts list of the large capacity paper unit
No. Part Name
The following tables show the part list of the Large capacity paper unit.
01-4-4 HARNESS ASSY FDR 3T
Table 8-2. Parts list of the large capacity paper unit 01-4-5 DRIVE ASSY FEEDER
No. Part Name 01-4-6 GEAR IDLER
01-1-1 COVER L 01-4-7 EXIT SENSOR
01-1-4 COVER R 01-4-9 LEVER LOW PAPER
01-1-5 COVER FRONT 01-4-11 HARNESS ASSY NPRSJ
01-1-6 DOUBLE CASTER-F
01-1-7 DOUBLE CASTER-R
01-1-8 INDICATOR
01-2-1 GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE L

01-2-2 GUIDE ASSY CASSETTE R
01-2-7 SWITCH SIZE TRAY 1
01-2-8 CHUTE ASSY TURN
01-3-1 PICK UP ASSY
01-3-3 ROLL ASSY FEED
01-3-4 EXIT SENSOR
01-3-5 ACTUATOR NO PAPER
01-3-6 ACTUATOR LINK
01-3-17 SOLENOID FEED TRAY 1
01-3-18 CLUTCH ASSY TURN TRAY 1
01-3-20 ROLL ASSY TURN
01-3-24 ROLL ASSY
01-4-1 PWBA FEEDER
01-4-2 HARNESS ASSY PFLG

01-4-3 HARNESS ASSY FDR 2T
8.4.3 Exploded Diagrams

The following pages show exploded diagrams of the Large capacity paper unit.
C813-OPTI-024 The parts to which no reference number
01-1-01
01-1-07
01-1-06
01-1-07
01-1-06
01-1-05
01-1-08
01-1-05
01-1-05
01-1-08
01-1-04
HANABI_FDR_CHAP05_001Fa
Large Capacity Paper Unit (1.1) Rev.01

C813-OPTI-025 The parts to which no reference number
PL17. 3
A
B
PL17. 3
C
D
01-2-01
01-2-02
01-2-08 A
(P821)
B
01-2-07
01-2-08 C
(P831)
D
HANABI_FDR_CHAP05_002Fa

C813-OPTI-026
01-3-03
01-3-03
01-3-01
01-3-05 01-3-06
01-3-04
01-3-20
01-3-18
01-3-17
01-3-24
HANABI_FDR_CHAP05_003Fb

C813-OPTI-027 is assigned will not be available as
(J810)
01-4-01 01-4-02
(P81)
(J81)
(P83)
(P82)
(P84)
01-4-03
(J82)
(J821) 01-4-04
(J8220)
(P8220) (J83)
01-4-11 (J831)
(P824) (J8220)
(P8220)
(J822) (P825) 01-4-11
(J823) (P834)
(J832)
(J833) (P835)
01-4-05
01-4-06 (J84)
(P823)
01-4-07
(P833)
01-4-07 01-4-09
01-4-09
HANABI_FDR_CHAP05_004Fb

8.5 Wiring Diagrams

This section describes the connector locations. P and J stand for Plug and
Jack, respectively.
8.5.1 P/J Locations

See the following figures for the P/J locations.
Figure 8-8. P/J Location

8.5.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Tables

See the following table for the plug and jack (P/J) location.

81 H-7 Connects PWBA Feeder and Harness Assy OPF PLG
82 H-7 Connects PWBA Feeder and Harness Assy FDR2T
83 H-7 Connects PWBA Feeder and Harness Assy FDR3T
84 H-8 Connects PWBA Feeder and Drive Assy Feeder
810 H-6 Connects Harness Assy OPF PLG and PWBA Feeder
Connects Switch Assy Size (Tray 2) and Harness Assy

821 I-7
FDR2T
Connects Sensor No Paper (Tray 2) and Harness Assy

822 E-7
NPRSJ
Connects Sensor Low Paper (Tray 2) and Harness Assy
823 E-9
FDR2T
824 G-8 Connects Solenoid Feed (Tray 2) and Harness Assy FDR2T
Connects Clutch Assy Turn (Tray 2) and Harness Assy

825 F-9
FDR2T
Connects Switch Assembly Size (Tray 3) and FDR3T

831 H-9
Harness Assembly
Connects Sensor No Paper (Tray 3) and Harness Assy
832 E-8
NPRSJ
Connects Sensor Low Paper (Tray 3) and FDR3T Harness

833 E-10
Assembly
834 G-10 Connects Solenoid Feed (Tray 3) and PWBA Feeder
835 F-10 Connects Clutch Assy Turn (Tray 3) and PWBA Feeder
Relay Connector for Harness Assy FDR2T to Harness Assy

8220 G-8
NPRSJ
Relay Connector for Harness Assy FDR3T to Harness Assy

8220 G-9
NPRSJ

8.6 Wiring Diagrams and Signal Information
8.6.1 Overall Wiring Connection Diagram

The symbols used in the overall wiring connection diagrams on the following
pages are as follows:
Symbols Description
Indicates connection of parts by HARNESS, wire, etc.
A box with no part name inside indicates a path by a connector (P/J). A

XX number inside the box indicates connector number.
Indicates a connector (P/J) written across several locations. The number

XX inside the box indicates connector number.
MCU PWB Boxes with part names inside indicate those parts. The part name shown
PL X, Y, Z here indicates item Z of plate (PL) XY in Section 8.4.2 "Parts List Tables".
Indicates a section in Section 8.6.2 "Wiring and Signal Descriptions

1 between Components". The number inside indicates the section number.

Figure 8-9. Overall Wiring Connection Diagram

8.6.2 Wiring and Signal Descriptions between 3. CASSETTE3 COMPONENTS

Components Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 3)
(PL17.2.7).
8.6.2.1 Configuration Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray
3) (PL17.3.4).
Wiring connection diagrams are divided into 3 sections and provide details
Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray
concerning connections between parts.
3) (PL17.4.7).
1. DRIVE COMPONENTS Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SOLENOID FEED (Tray 3)
(PL17.3.17).
Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and PWBA MCU & HVPS Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and CLUTCH ASSY TURN (Tray
(PL15.1.2). 3) (PL17.3.18).
Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and DRIVE ASSY FEEDER Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWBA FEEDER
(PL17.4.5). (PL17.4.1).
2. CASSETTE2 COMPONENTS
Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2)
(PL17.2.7).
Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray
2) (PL17.3.4).
Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray
2) (PL17.4.7).
Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2)
(PL17.3.17).
Connects PWBA FEEDER (PL17.4.1) and CLUTCH ASSY TURN (Tray
2) (PL17.3.18).
Connects PWBA MCU & HVPS (PL15.1.2) and PWBA FEEDER
(PL17.4.1).

8.6.3 Notation on the Diagrams for the Wiring and Symbol Description
Signal Descriptions between Components Shows a signal's logic value (Low: L or High:
H) when a function's motion has been
The symbols used in the wiring connection diagrams for parts on the following REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC activated. The voltage shown is the signal
pages are as follows. Explanations of commonly used symbols are omitted. strength at High condition.
Symbol Description Shows a signal's logic value (Low: L or High:
H) when function's condition has been
EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC detected. The voltage shown is the signal
Shows a plug (female connector). strength at High condition.
Shows a jack (male connector). Shows wiring connections.
P/JXX Shows Pin yy and Jack yy for Pxx/Jxx Shows DC voltage when the Interlock Switch
I/L +24VDC
connector. of the PWBA MCU & HVPS is ON.
YY
PWB DRIVE Shows a part.

The "PL x.y.z" number refers to Section 8.4.2 +5VDC
PL X.Y.Z Shows DC voltage.
"Parts List Tables", Plate (PL) number 'x.y', +3.3VDC
item number 'z'.
Heater Shows a part's internal component, with the SG Indicates signal ground.
name of that component.
Control Shows the PWB's internal CONTROLLER, AG Indicates analog ground.

with its outline.
Shows harness/wire connections between

DEVE_A RTN Indicates return.
components, with the signal name/content.

Connection Diagram 1 DRIVE COMPONENTS

Signal line Description

FDR A, FDR B, FDR XA, Drive Control Signal for DRIVE ASSY FEEDER
FDR XB, DA_FDRMOT (PL17.4.5).
FDR_A, FDR_B,
Excitation signal for DRIVE ASSY FEEDER (PL17.4.5).
FDR_XA, FDR_XB

Installation Sensing Signal for OPTION
P21-24 P210-A3 NO OPF(L)+3.3VDC FEEDER.
(High: Installed. Low: Not Installed.)
Description of DRIVE ASSY DEVE (PL14.1.1).

Winding resistance: TBD 10% / Phase (25C)

Phase
1 2 3 4
DEVE_A * *
DEVE_B * *
DEVE_XA * *
DEVE_XB * *

Connection Diagram 2 CASSETTE2 COMPONENTS

P/L No. Signal line Description

TRAY2 SIZE0
ON/OFF detect signal for upper switch of
P82-1 P821-4 SWITCH
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7).
ON(L)+3.3VDC
TRAY2 SIZE1
ON/OFF detect signal for middle switch of
P82-2 P821-3 SWITCH
ON(L)+3.3VDC
TRAY2 SIZE2
ON/OFF detect signal for lower switch of
P82-4 P821-1 SWITCH
ON(L)+3.3VDC
TRAY2 NO PAPER Paper detection signal for fuser issued by

P8220-3 P822-1
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2) (PL17.3.4)

TRAY2 LOW PAPER
P82-10 P823-1 sent by SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2)
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
(PL17.4.7)
P82-12 P824-1
ON(L)+24VDC FEED (TRAY 2) (PL17.3.17)

P82-14 P825-1
ON(L)+24VDC ASSY TURN (TRAY 2) (PL17.3.18)

Connection Diagram - 3 CASSETTE3 COMPONENTS


TRAY3 SIZE0 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for upper switch of
P83-1 P831-4
ON(L)+3.3VDC SWITCH ASSY SIZE (PL17.2.7).
TRAY3 SIZE1 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for middle switch of

P83-2 P831-3
TRAY3 SIZE2 SWITCH ON/OFF detect signal for lower switch of

P83-4 P831-1
TRAY3 NO PAPER Paper detection signal for fuser issued by

P8220-4 P832-1
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 3) (PL17.3.4)

TRAY3 LOW PAPER
P83-10 P833-1 sent by SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 3)
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
(PL17.4.7)
P83-12 P834-1
ON(L)+24VDC FEED (TRAY 3) (PL17.3.17)

P83-14 P835-1
ON(L)+24VDC ASSY TURN (TRAY 3) (PL17.3.18)

8.7 Component Layout
Figure 8-10. C470MAIN Component Layout - Component Side
Appendix Component Layout 8-641

Figure 8-11. C470MAIN Component Layout - Soldered Side
Appendix Component Layout 8-642

8.8 Circuit Diagrams

The following pages show the circuit diagrams of the C470MAIN Circuit Board.
Appendix Circuit Diagrams 8-643

L - AcuLaser C4100-C4000 - SM - 1003 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

L - AcuLaser C4100-C4000 - SM - 1003 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Laser Page Printer

EPSON AcuLaser C4000

Copyright 2003 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

[A] CR Charge Roll FG Frame Ground

Figure 0-1. Power Supply

NOTE: The laser beam in this printer is invisible.

Figure 0-3. Warning and Caution Labels

1.1 Features CONTROLLER FEATURES

Product Descriptions Features 1-20

Figure 1-1. Exterior View of the EPSON AcuLaser C4000

Product Descriptions Features 1-21

1.2 Specifications 1.2.1.2 Printer Basic Specification

This section describes specifications for EPSON AcuLaser C4000. METHOD

PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE

Table 1-1. Printing mode by paper type

Product Descriptions Specifications 1-22

Table 1-1. Printing mode by paper type PAPER FEED REFERENCE

Special Label (low temp) <Label-L mode> Label

Table 1-2. First Printing Time

Table 1-3. Continuous printing speed

NOTE 1: Speeds shown are for plain paper L and H modes.

Product Descriptions Specifications 1-23

PAPER FEED Table 1-5. Optional Paper Source Combination

500 sheets *2*3 Standard Paper

*1: The values in ( ) is capable containing height

Product Descriptions Specifications 1-24

APPLICABLE PAPER SIZES, PAPER TYPES, AND PAPER ORIENTATION

GLG 215.90 x 330.00 (8.50 x 13.00) SEF

Product Descriptions Specifications 1-25

Special Applications : See Table 1-7

Com-10 104.78 x 241.30 (4 1/8 x 9 1/2) SEF*3

Product Descriptions Specifications 1-26

OUTPUT PAPER CAPACITY

Product Descriptions Specifications 1-27

CONSUMABLE COMPONENTS PRODUCT LIFETIME

* Refer to Consumable Components on Page 38. NOISE

POWER SUPPLY Saving Electricity Mode Back Ground Noise

Maximum at continuous printing 850W 850W

Average at continuous printing 450Wh 450Wh

Product Descriptions Specifications 1-28

1.3 Various Sensors

Table 1-11. Various Sensors

Product Descriptions Various Sensors 1-29

NOTE: Dispense Time is a controller count value. Units are seconds.

Product Descriptions Various Sensors 1-30

1.4 Paper Specifications Paper with punch holes or perforations.

Product Descriptions Paper Specifications 1-31

1.4.3 Paper Source Classification 1.4.4 Printing Area

A: Paper feed reliability and image quality assured. 4 mm

Figure 1-2. Guaranteed Print Area

Product Descriptions Paper Specifications 1-32

1.5 Reliability and Durability Multiple-Sheet Feed Rate

Table 1-14. Multiple-Sheet Feed Rate

PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY

Standard Paper 1/1,300 1/1,800 1/5,000 1/3,000 a b

Figure 1-3. Print Position Accuracy

Product Descriptions Reliability and Durability 1-33

SKEW 1.5.2 Durability

HEIGHT OF CURL OF PRINTED PAGES

15mm or less (at the standard paper)

Product Descriptions Reliability and Durability 1-34

500 sheets 23 Standard Paper

CONFIDENTIAL JOB MENU 1 PARALLEL MENU 1

NETWORK MENU 1 AUX MENU 1 *2